Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce
products may have either labels similar to the graphics
shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graph-
ics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics
appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated
on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction sec-
tion.
products that are both user safe and environmentally
friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the pro-
duction methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In
keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we
want you to be aware of the following:
Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-
rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in
place. The average life span of this type of battery is approx-
imately five years. When replacement becomes necessary,
contact a qualified service representative to perform the
replacement.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incin-
erate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from chil-
dren. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by
applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required
by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have
the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for
you.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged
beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid-
ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and fed-
eral regulations that relate to the disposal of products that
contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.
The exclamation point within the equi-
lateral triangle is intended to alert the
user to the presence of important operat-
ing and maintenance (servicing) instruc-
tions in the literature accompanying the
product.
NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl-
edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the
unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manu-
facturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsi-
bility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your
dealer before requesting service.
The lightning flash with arrowhead sym-
bol, within the equilateral triangle, is
intended to alert the user to the presence
of uninsulated “dangerous voltage”
within the product’s enclosure that may
be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a
risk of electrical shock.
NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates
the location of the name plate. The model number, serial
number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate.
You should record the model number, serial number, and the
date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this
manual as a permanent record of your purchase.
IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products
are tested and approved by an independent safety testing
laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is prop-
erly installed and used in its normal and customary manner,
all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify
this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically
authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety
standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the
expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been
modified. Implied warranties may also be affected.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The
information contained in this manual is believed to be cor-
rect at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the
right to change or modify any of the specifications without
notice or obligation to update existing units.
Model
Serial No.
Purchase Date
92-469- ➀ (rear)
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK,
AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST.
WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product,
basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions
include, but are not limited to, the following:
8.
This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp loca-
tions and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. Exam-
ples of wet /damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub,
sink, or wet basement.
1.
Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Spe-
9.
This product should be used only with the components sup-
cial Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions found
in this manual BEFORE making any connections, including con-
nection to the main supply.
plied or; a cart ,rack, or stand that is recommended by the manufac-
turer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all safety
markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product.
2.
Do not attempt to service this product beyond that
described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing
should be referred to qualified service personnel.
10.
The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected from
the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for
extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when
there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical storm activ-
ity.
3.
Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are
manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where
they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt exists about
the supply voltage in your area, please contact your dealer for sup-
ply voltage verification and (if applicable) instructions. The
required supply voltage is printed on the name plate. For name
plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the Special Mes-
sage Section of this manual.
11.
Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are
not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist.
12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a qual-
ified service person when:
a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or
b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been
spilled into the enclosure through openings; or
c. The product has been exposed to rain; or
d. The product does not operate, exhibits a marked change
in performance; or
4.
DANGER-Grounding Instructions: This product must be
grounded and therefore has been equipped with a three pin attach-
ment plug. If this product should malfunction, the ground pin pro-
vides a path of low resistance for electrical current, reducing the
risk of electrical shock. If your wall socket will not accommodate
this type plug, contact an electrician to have the outlet replaced in
accordance with local electrical codes. Do NOT modify the plug or
change the plug to a different type!
e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the
product has been damaged.
13.
This product, either alone or in combination with an ampli-
fier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing
sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT
operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level
that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing
in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.
5.
WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects
on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone could walk
on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of
any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you
must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25' cord
(or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the
larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords,
consult a local electrician.
IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period
before damage occurs.
14.
Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or acces-
sory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the prod-
uct or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to
be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are
stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured
BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for
seating only. No other uses are recommended.
6.
Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically
designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations
that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for
enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that
unobstructed ventilation is required.
7.
Temperature considerations: Electronic products should be
installed in locations that do not seriously contribute to their oper-
ating temperature. Placement of this product close to heat sources
such as; radiators, heat registers etc., should be avoided.
PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
92-469-3
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep these precautions in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock,
short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
• This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not attempt to dis-
assemble or modify the internal components in any way.
• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required
voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet
conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill
into any openings.
• Always connect the three-pin attachment plug to a properly grounded
power source. (For more information about the main power supply, see
page 14.)
• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sud-
den loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or
smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power
switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instru-
ment inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• Before cleaning the instrument, always remove the electric plug from the
outlet. Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may
have accumulated on it.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the
instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radia-
tors, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place
heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on,
trip over, or roll anything over it.
• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.
• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thin-
ners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.
Also, do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since
this might discolor the panel or keyboard.
• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always
hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.
• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and
do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-con-
nector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause over-
heating in the outlet.
• Do not place objects in front of the instrument's air vent, since this may
prevent adequate ventilation of the internal components, and possibly
result in the instrument overheating.
• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be
used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.
• Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncom-
fortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you
experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.
• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off
the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all
components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the
volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the
volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening
level.
➀SAVING USER DATA
• Always save data to a floppy disk frequently, in order to help prevent the
loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error.
• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme
cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the
day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the inter-
nal components.
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use
or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
• Do not use the instrument near other electrical products such as televi-
sions, radios, or speakers, since this might cause interference which can
affect proper operation of the other products.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might acci-
dentally fall over.
(2)-6
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks
➀ Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off during
recording, reading and playing back. Doing so can damage
the disk and possibly the disk drive.
Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with
care. Follow the important precautions below.
➀ Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive before
turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the drive for
extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can
cause data read and write errors.
➀ Compatible Disk Type
3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used.
➀ Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks
➀ To insert a floppy disk into the disk drive:
➀ Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head
• Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and
the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk slot. Care-
fully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing it all the way in
until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out.
➀ Clean the read/write head regularly.This instrument employs
a precision magnetic read/write head which, after an
extended period of use, will pick up a layer of magnetic parti-
cles from the disks used that will eventually cause read and
write errors.
➀ To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order Yamaha
recommends that you use a commercially-available dry-type
head cleaning disk to clean the head about once a month.
Ask your Yamaha dealer about the availability of proper head-
cleaning disks.
➀ Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive.
Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or floppy
disks.
➀ About the Floppy Disks
• When the 9000Pro is turned on, the LED below the floppy disk
slot will be lit indicating that the Disk Drive is ready to use.
➀ To handle floppy disks with care:
• Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply pressure
to the disk in any way. Always keep floppy disks in their protec-
tive cases when they are not in use.
• Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high or low
temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liquids.
• Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed surface
of the floppy disk inside.
➀ To eject a floppy disk:
• Before ejecting the disk, be sure to confirm that the FDD is
stopped (check if the DISK IN USE lamp is off). Press the eject
button slowly as far as it will go; the disk will automatically pop
out. When the disk is fully ejected, carefully remove it by hand.
• Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as those pro-
duced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since magnetic
fields can partially or completely erase data on the disk, render-
ing it unreadable.
• Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing.
• Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a floppy
disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper loca-
tion.
➀ To protect your data (write-protect tab):
• To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the disk’s
write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open).
This lamp is always on
when the power is on,
regardless of the disk oper-
ation.
DISK IN USE
Write protect tab ON
(locked or write pro-
tected)
Write protect tab OFF
(unlocked or write
enabled)
This lamp lights during
disk read/write opera-
tions, such as when a
disk has been inserted,
during recording, play-
back, formatting, etc.
➀ Data backup
• For maximum data securityYamaha recommends that you keep
two copies of important data on separate floppy disks. This
gives you a backup if one disk is lost or damaged.
• If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it is not pressed in
as far as it will go, the disk may not eject properly. The eject but-
ton may become stuck in a half-pressed position with the disk
extending from the drive slot by only a few millimeters. If this
happens, do not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk,
since using force in this situation can damage the disk drive
mechanism or the floppy disk. To remove a partially ejected
disk, try pressing the eject button once again, or push the disk
back into the slot and then repeat the eject procedure.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Congratulations!
You are the proud owner of an extraordinary electronic keyboard. The Yamaha 9000Pro combines
advanced tone generation technology with state-of-the-art digital electronics and features to give you
stunning sound quality with maximum musical versatility. The advanced Auto Accompaniment, Vocal Har-
mony, and Sampler features, in particular, are brilliant examples of how Yamaha technology can signifi-
cantly expand your musical horizons. A large-size graphic display and easy-to-use interface also greatly
enhance the operability of this advanced instrument. In addition, the 9000Pro lets you add optional Plug-
in Boards, giving you access to an exciting and wide array of various synthesizer voices — plus the ability
to edit those voices and create your own original sounds.
In order to make the most of your 9000Pro’s features and vast performance potential, we urge you to read
the manual thoroughly while trying out the various features described. Keep the manual in a safe place for
later reference.
Packing List
Your 9000Pro includes the following items:
• 9000Pro x 1
• AC Power Cord x 1 ............................................................................................................................................. page 14
• Music Stand x 1 .................................................................................................................................................. page 14
• Floppy Disk (Disk Styles and MIDI Driver) x 1 ................................................................................................ page 25
• Floppy Disks (Factory Data Backup Disk No.1/2) x 2 ..................................................................................... page 54
These include the following factory-set data: One Touch Setting, Registration Memory,
Music Database, Multi Pad, Flash Style and Setup.
• Floppy Disk (Plug-in Custom Voice Disk) x 1 .................................................................................................. page 42
This includes the voice files for Plug-in Boards
• Owner’s Manual
Unauthorized copying of copyrighted software for purposes other than the purchaser’s personal use is prohib-
ited.
This product (9000Pro) is manufactured under license of U.S.Patents No.5231671, No.5301259, No.5428708,
and No.5567901 of IVL Technologies Ltd.
Trademarks:
• Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business MachinesCorporation.
• Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft ® Corporation.
• All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
Panel logos
The logos printed on the 9000Pro panel indicate the standards/formats it supports and special features it includes.
GM System Level 1
XF
GM System Level 1 is an addition to the MIDI standard
which guarantees that any data conforming to the standard
will play accurately on any GM-compatible tone generator
or synthesizer from any manufacturer.
TheYamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI
File) standard with greater functionality and open-ended
expandability for the future. The 9000Pro is capable of dis-
playing lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is
played.
XG
Vocal Harmony
XG is a new Yamaha MIDI specification which significantly
expands and improves on the GM System Level 1 stan-
dard with greater voice handling capacity, expressive con-
trol, and effect capability while retaining full compatibility
with GM. By using the 9000Pro’s XG voices, it is possible
to record XG-compatible song files.
Vocal Harmony employs state-of-the-art digital signal pro-
cessing technology to automatically add appropriate vocal
harmony to a lead vocal line sung by the user. Vocal Har-
mony can even change the character and gender of the
lead voice as well as the added voices to produce a wide
range of vocal harmony effects.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to use the manual
Starting Up........................................................................................................................page 14
Before going on to any other part of the manual, we strongly suggest you read this section first. It shows you
how to get started playing and using your new 9000Pro.
Top Panel & Connections................................................................................................page 10
Rear Panel & Connections ..............................................................................................page 12
Use this section to find out about all of the buttons and controls of the 9000Pro.
Contents .............................................................................................................................page 8
All topics, features, functions, and operations are listed here in the order they appear in the manual, for easy
reference.
Quick Guide............................................................................................. page 16
Unless you enjoy reading manuals, you’re probably eager to start playing your new 9000Pro right now.
If so, read this section.
Basic Operations .............................................................................................................page 44
This section introduces you to the basic operating conventions of the 9000Pro, such as editing values and
changing settings, and shows you how to use the convenient Direct Access functions.
Function Tree....................................................................................................................page 50
This lists all functions of the 9000Pro according to their hierarchical structure, letting you easily see the rela-
tionship of the various functions and quickly locate desired information.
Reference..........................................................................................................................page 56
Once you’re familiar with everything above, lightly go over this comprehensive guide to all functions.You won’t
need (or want) to read everything at once, but it is there for you to refer to when you need information about a
certain feature or function.
Installing Optional Hardware ........................................................................................page 180
This section provides detailed instructions for installing each of the 9000Pro's supported options (SIMM, Hard
disk unit, and Plug-in Boards).
Appendix.........................................................................................................................page 192
This contains various important lists such as the Voice List, Preset Style List, Effect List, MIDI Data Format,
and MIDI Implementation Chart.
Troubleshooting.............................................................................................................page 188
If the 9000Pro does not function as expected or you have some problem with the sound or operation, consult
this section before calling your Yamaha dealer or service center. Most common problems and their solutions
are covered here in a very simple and easy-to-understand way.
Index................................................................................................................................page 190
This section alphabetically lists virtually all topics, features, functions, and operations with their respective
page numbers, letting you quickly and easily find the information you need.
DOC
Plug for XG
The DOC voice allocation format provides data playback
compatibility with a wide range of Yamaha instruments and
MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series.
This system offers powerful expansion and upgrade capa-
bilities for XG-Plug-in-compatible tone generators.
The XG Plug-in System enables you to equip the 9000Pro
with the latest and most sophisticated technology, ensuring
that you keep pace with the rapid and multi-faceted
advances in modern music production.
Style File Format
The Style File Format — SFF — is Yamaha’s original style
file format which uses a unique conversion system to pro-
vide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a
wide range of chord types. The 9000Pro uses the SFF
internally, reads optional SFF style disks, and creates SFF
styles using the Style Creator function.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Other Functions: Viewing the Lyrics and
Playing Voices .............................................. 16
Playing Different Voices with the Left and
Adjusting the Octave setting ..............................18
Auto Accompaniment.................................. 20
Music Database............................................ 26
Registering the Panel Settings...........................29
Disk Song Playback..................................... 30
Vocal Harmony with Song Playback ..................33
The Multi Pads.............................................. 34
Playing the Multi Pads........................................34
Voice Effects................................................. 35
Applying the Voice Effects..................................35
Quick Recording.................................................36
Recording a Sample ..........................................40
Playing a Plug-in Voice.......................................42
Changing the Vocal Harmony/Microphone
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Voice Editing ....................................................102
Native System Parameter Editing ....................105
Board Custom Voice Backup............................108
Track Setting for Recording
Track Setting for Recording
Style Creator .............................................. 126
Style Assembly — Creating a Style .................129
Revoice (Easy Edit)..........................................130
Style Editing (Full Edit).....................................134
Custom Style Recording via an External
Keyboard Drum Assignments.......................... 200
Multi Pad Creator ....................................... 141
Multi Pad Recording.........................................142
Step Recording ................................................143
Mixing Console .......................................... 144
Part Settings ....................................................144
Master Equalizer Settings ................................147
Line Out Settings .............................................148
Copying Files & Copying Floppy Disks ............154
Converting files ................................................155
Checking a Disk ...............................................157
Controller Assignment......................................159
Utility Settings ..................................................166
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Top Panel & Connections
PHONES jack... page 13
Music stand
The 9000Pro is supplied
with a music stand that
can be attached to the
instrument by inserting it
into the holes as shown.
INPUT
VOLUME
control
!
t
y
u
i
o
!
w
r
e
Keyboard... page 162
Floppy Disk Drive... page 25, 30, 150
The keyboard of the 9000Pro is
equipped with a touch response feature
(initial touch and after touch) that lets
you dynamically and expressively con-
trol the level of the voices with your
playing strength — just as on an acous-
tic instrument.
The 9000Pro also features a built-in disk drive that lets you save all your
important original data to floppy disk for future recall.
The 9000Pro is compatible with a wide variety of disk formats, allowing
you to playback song data on commercially available XG, GM , DOC, and
Disklavier Piano Soft disks.
q POWER ON/OFF switch.................................... 14
w MASTER VOLUME control.............................. 14
e PITCH BEND wheel.......................................... 59
r MODULATION wheel....................................... 59
t SONG buttons .............................................. 30, 78
y STYLE buttons................................................... 20
!
100, 110, 126, 141
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Top Panel & Connections
Air vent
Do not place objects on the
instrument’s air vent, since this
may prevent adequate ventilation
of the internal components, and
possibly result in the instrument
overheating.
q
!
@
!
!
!
!
@
@
!
@
@
!
!
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) and Related Buttons/Controls
... page 44
Large multi-function LCD display panel with display-based buttons, plus
comprehensive display prompts and messages, makes operation easy
and intuitive.
Related Buttons/Controls :
• LCD(A-J) buttons
• LCD(1-8) buttons
The illustrations and LCD screens
as shown in this owner’s manual
are for instructional purposes only,
and may be different from your
instrument.
• DIRECT ACCESS button
• MAIN MIXER button
• PART ON/OFF button
• EXIT button
• PAGE CONTROL buttons
• LCD CONTRAST control
! Data dial.............................................................. 44
! DEMO button ..................................................... 56
! VOICE EFFECT buttons.............................. 35, 60
! MUSIC DATABASE button......................... 26, 76
! ONE TOUCH SETTING button ................. 24, 73
! REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons................ 28
@ VOCAL HARMONY buttons....................... 32, 80
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Panel & Connections
CAUTION
• Make sure that the POWER switch is in the OFF (extended) position before making any connections. If
you make connections while the POWER switch is on, you risk damaging external equipment such as
the amp or speakers.
An optional lamp can be connected to the 9000Pro.
This is especially convenient when using the
9000Pro in situations of low available light.
See page 15 for details.
The TRIM control allows the input sensitivity of the
AUX IN L/L+R and R (LOOP RETURN) jacks to be
adjusted for optimum level matching with the con-
nected equipment.
Refer to page 14.
OUT
INPUT
Effector
The LOOP SEND jacks deliver the output of the 9000Pro for
connection to external signal processing devices, such as dis-
tortion or filter effects.The output from the signal processor can
be returned to the AUX IN/LOOP RETURN jacks — letting you
apply the desired effect(s) to the overall sound of the 9000Pro
and return the processed sound back to the 9000Pro.
Stereo System
The LINE OUT jacks are used to send the 9000Pro
output to a keyboard amplifier, stereo sound sys-
tem, mixing console, or tape recorder. If you are
connecting the 9000Pro to a mono sound system,
use only the L/L+R jack. When only this jack is con-
nected (using a standard phone plug), the left and
right channels are combined and output through
this jack — allowing you have a mono mix of the
9000Pro's stereo sound.
Refer to page 148.
You can connect a computer keyboard to the 9000Pro for
inputting song and file names or Voice/Style/Song/Regis-
tration Memory numbers. This function is also very con-
venient in Step recording.
Please note that Macintosh computer keyboards cannot
be used with the 9000Pro.
• Since the 9000Pro has no built-in speakers, you need
to monitor its sound output via external audio equip-
ment. Alternatively, you could use a pair of head-
phones.
Refer to pages 46, 167.
• A computer keyboard can only be used if it has been con-
nected to the 9000Pro before turning the power on. If you
have connected a computer keyboard after turning the
power on, simply turn the power off and back on again.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Panel & Connections
PHONES jack
MIC/LINE IN jack
A standard pair of
stereo headphones
can be plugged in
here for private
practice or late-night
playing. Use the
[MASTERVOLUME]
control to adjust the
volume of the head-
phone sound.
The 9000Pro includes a
microphone/line input jack
which is compatible with
virtually any standard
microphone or line-level
source, accepting either
1/4” phone plugs or XLR
connectors. The micro-
phone or line input can be
used with the 9000Pro’s
vocal harmony function.
An optional lamp
can be con-
• The MIC/LINE jacks can be used with either 1/4” phone plugs
or XLR connectors; however, they are special differential
input connectors. For phone plugs, the tip and ring of the
plug correspond to “+” and “-,” respectively.
Because of this arrangement, connecting a stereo signal
(such as from a CD player) with a stereo phone jack to the
9000Pro results in the left and right signals cancelling each
other out. To properly connect a CD player or other stereo
source, make sure to use a mono input, either left or right, or
a mix of the stereo signal (pages 32, 80).
nected to the
9000Pro. This is
especially conve-
nient when using
the 9000Pro in
situations of low
available light.
See page 15 for
details.
This SCSI-2 50-pin connector (D-sub,
half-pitch) can be used to connect to an
external SCSI data storage device —
allowing you to conveniently save and
store large quantities of data.
An optional Yamaha
FC7 Foot Controller
connected to this jack
can be used to con-
trol volume and a
Computer
(with music software)
Refer to page 172.
Refer to page 150.
• Depending on the SCSI device, you may
need a special connecting cable or adap-
tor to connect the device properly to the
9000Pro. Make sure to confirm the con-
nection configuration of both the
range of other impor-
tant functions.
Refer to page 159.
9000Pro and the SCSI device before
purchasing the device.
• The SCSI ID number of the 9000Pro is
fixed at 7. Make sure to set the ID num-
ber of the external SCSI device to a num-
ber other than this (i.e., 0 - 6).
[VIDEO IN]
Television
MFC10
One or two optional
Yamaha FC5 foot-
switches connected to
these jacks can be used
to control sustain and a
range of other important
functions.
You can connect the 9000Pro to a television or
video monitor to display the lyrics and chords in
your song data on a larger screen.
Refer to page 165.
The sophisticated MIDI func-
tions give you powerful tools to
expand your music performance
and creation possibilities.
Refer to page 168.
• The 9000Pro’s default setting for the external televi-
sion/video monitor signal is “PAL.” Depending on your
particular locale, the standard may be different and the
setting should be changed accordingly. (For example,
NTSC is generally used in North America.) Check the
standard used by your television or video monitor, and
if it is not PAL, change the setting in the VIDEO OUT
display to “NTSC” (page 165).
Refer to page 160.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting Up
Use the following procedure to start up the 9000Pro.
WARNING
• Make sure your 9000Pro is rated
for the AC voltage supplied in
the area in which it is to be used
(as listed on the rear panel).
Connecting the unit to the
wrong AC supply can cause
serious damage to the internal
circuitry and may even pose a
shock hazard!
• Use only the AC power cord
supplied with the 9000Pro. If the
supplied cord is lost or dam-
aged and needs to be replaced,
contact yourYamaha dealer.The
use of an inappropriate replace-
ment can pose a fire and shock
hazard!
• The type of AC power cord pro-
vided with the 9000Pro may be
country in which it is purchased
(a third prong may be provided
for grounding purposes).
Improper connection of the
grounding conductor can create
the risk of electrical shock. Do
NOT modify the plug provided
with the 9000Pro. If the plug will
not fit the outlet, have a proper
outlet installed by a qualified
electrician. Do not use a plug
adapter which defeats the
1
2
Make sure that the POWER switch is in the OFF position.
Securely plug the “female” end of the
AC power cord supplied with the
9000Pro into the rear-panel AC cord
3 socket.
Plug the power cord into a convenient
AC outlet.
To disconnect the AC power cord, set the POWER switch to OFF, then
unplug the AC power cord from the AC outlet, and disconnect it from the
9000Pro AC INLET.
4
5
Make all necessary connections (pages 12 and 13), making
sure first that all level controls on those devices are set to
the minimum. (Refer to the owner’s manuals of the devices
you are using for more information on connections.)
Since the 9000Pro has no built-in speakers, you need to monitor its sound
output via external audio equipment. Alternatively, you could use a pair of
headphones.
Turn the power ON. If you’ve connected any external
devices to the 9000Pro, turn on the power of those devices
in the following order:
grounding conductor.
z MIDI controller
x 9000Pro
c Audio equipment
Press the [POWER] switch. After a
while, the main diaplay below appears.
When turning off the power, make sure that all level controls on those devices
above are set to the minimum and simply reverse the above order.
6
Turn up the volume of the external audio equipment, as nec-
7 essary.
After the main display appears, play and adjust the volume.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting Up
Lamp
The 9000Pro features two Lamp terminals (at either end of the rear panel) for connect-
ing an optional lamp. This is especially convenient when using the 9000Pro in situa-
tions of low available light. To turn on the lamp, use the switch/dimmer control at the
left end of the rear panel (as viewed from the keyboard side).
WARNING
To avoid possible damage to
the instrument, follow these
precautions:
• Only use lamps that conform
to the specifications listed at
left.
• Do not attempt to insert any-
thing other than a proper
lamp to the Lamp terminals.
• Do not short-circuit the ter-
minals.
• Do not apply electrical volt-
age (power) to the Lamp ter-
minals.
Either or both terminals can be
used, letting you connect up to
two lamps.
Use this to turn the lamp on
and off and control the
brightness.
WARNING
• Make sure the gooseneck of
the lamp is 12 inches or
shorter. Goosenecks of
longer lengths may be unsta-
ble.
0 - 10V DC
Pin 1, 2: No connection
Pin 3, 4: 0-10V DC
• The connected lamp
becomes very hot after
being on for a while. Make
sure you let the lamp cool
before trying to touch it.
Only use lamps conforming to the following specifications:
• Lamp: 12V 5W
• Connector: 4-pin XLR
1
2 Make sure that the POWER switch is off.
Connect a lamp to one of the terminals on the rear panel.
Firmly push the lamp connector into the socket until it
locks.
3
4 Turn the power on by pressing the [POWER] switch.
Use the [DIMMER] control to turn the lamp on.
• The light bulb will burn out over
a long period of use.When this
happens, replace the bulb with
a new one.You can extend the
life of the bulb by turning the
[DIMMER] control down toward
[MIN] when using the lamp.
To disconnect the lamp:
First, make sure the lamp is off (the [DIMMER] is set to OFF ),
then unplug the lamp while holding down the PUSH latch on
the rear panel.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
on page 57
Playing Voices
Voice related buttons
Playing a Voice
1
Press the [R1] LCD button to turn the RIGHT1 part on.
• The voice selected here is
called voice RIGHT 1.
See page 57 for more informa-
tion on voice RIGHT1.
F
G
H
I
PART SELECT
LEFT HOLD
LEFT
RIGHT1
RIGHT2
UPPER
RIGHT3
J
LOWER
PART ON/OFF
2
3
Select a voice group.
For this example, STRINGS
is selected.
Select a voice.
A
B
C
D
E
For this example,
Live! Orch is
selected.
Press the corresponding buttons to
select the various pages.
4
Play the voice.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing Voices
Playing Two or Three Voices Simultaneously
1
Press the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT2] button to turn the RIGHT2
part ON.
Automatically turned on
PART SELECT
LEFT HOLD
LEFT
RIGHT1
RIGHT2
UPPER
RIGHT3
LOWER
PART ON/OFF
2
3
4
Select a voice group.
For example, select “CHOIR & PAD.”
Select a voice.
For example, select “Hah Choir.”
Play the voices.
The voice selected for R1 (page 16) and the voice selected here are sounded
simultaneously in a layer.
Voice RIGHT 3 can be set in the same way described above, by using the
[RIGHT3] button instead.
Try out some of these other voices...
Category
Piano
Voice Name
Comment
Category
Brass
Voice Name
Comment
Live! Grand
Stereo-sampled grand piano,
with realistic sound over entire
keyboard range.
Live! Horn
Stereo sampled powerful horn
section. Sforzando style is also
available.
E.Piano
Organ
Galaxy EP
Stage Ep
Rich and dynamic DX-type
Electric Piano.
Saxophone Sweet Tenor
Smooth tenor sax with natural
vibrato.
3 different dynamics sampled
for realistic and expressive tim-
bre changes.
Sweet Sprno
Soprano sax with natural vibra-
to. Very expressive. Play long
notes.
Cool! Jazz
Rotor Organ
Musette
Organ sample with authentic
chorus vibrato.
Sweet Clari
Jazzy clarinet with natural vi-
brato.
Organ sample with real rotary
speaker.
Flute
Sweet Flute
Flute with natural vibrato. Very
expressive. Play strongly to get
realistic overblown sample.
Accordion
Guitar
Realistic, French type accordi-
on.
Sweet Pan
Live!Gospel
Live! Vocal
Authentic pan flute with natural
vibrato
Live! Nylon
Stereo sampled nylon guitar.
Dedicated flageolet sample for
high velocities.
Choir&Pad
Stereo choir with individual,
smooth vibrato
Cool! J.Gtr
Carlos Gtr
Dynamic, fingered jazz guitar.
Very dynamic. The vocal
"words" change depending on
your playing strength. Play
bass vocals with your left hand.
Soulful guitar sound with natu-
ral distortion.
Strings
Live! Strs
Rich, stereo sampled strings
orchestra.
DreamHeaven
Beautiful synth pad
Synthesizer Matrix
Expressive synth lead. Play
long notes.
Live! Arco
Rich, stereo sampled strings
orchestra with fast attack.
Percussion Live!StdKit
Stereo sampled drums with ve-
locity switching of up to 4 lay-
ers. Also check out Live! Funk
Kit.
Trumpet
Sweet Trump
Sweet Tromb
SweetMuteTp
SweetFlugel
Expressive trumpet with natu-
ral vibrato.
Realistic trombone with natural
vibrato.
Live!Brush
Stereo sampled drums played
by brush. Check out toms and
cymbals.
Jazzy muted trumpet with natu-
ral vibrato.
Soft, breathy flugelhorn with
natural vibrato.
Live!Cuban /
Live!PopLtn
Stereo sampled percussion
with various playing styles.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing Voices
Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands
1
Press the PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button to turn the LEFT part
ON.
Automatically turned on
PART SELECT
LEFT HOLD
LEFT
RIGHT1
RIGHT2
UPPER
RIGHT3
LOWER
ART ON/OFF
2
3
4
Select a voice group.
For example, select “STRINGS.”
Select a voice.
For example, select “Symphon. Str.”
Play the voices.
The notes you play with your left hand sound one voice, while the notes you
play with your right sound a different voice (or voices).
• The point on the keyboard that
separates voice LEFT and
voice RIGHT1~3 is called the
“split point.”
Split Point
Refer to page 159 for instruc-
tions on setting the split point.
Voice R1, R2, R3
(Upper)
Voice L
(Lower)
Voices RIGHT 1~3 are meant to be played with the right hand. Voice LEFT is
played with the left hand.
Adjusting the Octave setting
The [UPPER OCTAVE] button allows the RIGHT1, RIGHT2, and RIGHT3 parts to
be simultaneously transposed up or down by one octave.
• More detailed octave-related
settings for each part can be
made by using the Mixing Con-
sole function (page 145).
UPPER OCTAVE
RESET
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing Voices
Reference
on page 62
Organ Flutes
The 9000Pro uses advanced digital modeling technology to recreate the legendary
sound of vintage organs. Just as on a traditional organ, you can create your own sound
by increasing and decreasing the levels of the flute footages.
1
Press the [ORGAN FLUTES] button.
2
Use the LCD [1] - [8] buttons to adjust the footage settings.
The footage settings determine the basic sound of the organ flutes.
The term “footage” is a reference to the sound generation of traditional pipe
organs, in which the sound is produced by pipes of different lengths (in feet).
Use button [1] to adjust the 16’
or 8’ footage.You can select
the desired footage (16’ or 8’)
with the [E] LCD button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
Store the Organ Flutes settings. (Refer to page 62.)
The Organ Flutes settings above are stored to Flash ROM.
For details about Flash ROM, refer to “Memory Structure” on page 54.
Try out the preset Organ Flutes voices
The 9000Pro provides 10 pre-programmed Organ Flutes voices.
F
G
H
Press the [H] LCD button to
call up the Organ Flutes pre-
set voices display, then
I
J
select an Organ Flutes voice.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
on page 70
Auto Accompaniment
Style related buttons
Auto Accompaniment
related buttons
Using Auto Accompaniment
1
Select a style group.
• The 9000Pro styles are divided
into two groups : Preset styles
and Flash styles.
For details about Flash styles,
see page 55.
For this example, BALLROOM
is selected.
2
3
Select a style.
F
G
H
I
For this example,
Jive is selected.
J
Turn Auto Accompaniment on.
The specified left-hand section of the keyboard becomes the “Auto Accompa-
niment” section, and chords played in this section are automatically detected
and used as a basis for fully automatic accompaniment with the selected style.
Split Point
• The point on the keyboard that
separates the auto accompani-
ment section and the right-
hand section of the keyboard is
called the “split point.” Refer to
page 159 for instructions on
setting the split point.
Auto Accompaniment
section
4
Turn Sync Start on.
The beat lamp also flashes in time with the tempo. This condition is called syn-
chronized start standby.
SYNC STOP SYNC START
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Accompaniment
5
As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto
accompaniment starts.
For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below).
Split Point
Auto Accompaniment
section
6
7
Try playing other chords with your left hand.
For information on how to enter chords, see “Chord Fingerings” on page 70.
Press the [START/STOP] button again to stop the accompa-
niment.
Try out some of the other styles...
Category
8 BEAT
Style Name Comment
Category
Style Name Comment
Heart Beat
Spicy Beat
8Beat Adria
Standard 8-beat pop. Enjoy the
SWING&
JAZZ
Big Band 3
Traditional big band style especially
suited for ballads and slow blues.
sound of the strumming guitars.
Modern 8-beat that uses the Hit and
Live! Standard drum kits.
Swingfox
Check out the different major and mi-
nor patterns for Intro III. This style is
good for a wide wide range of songs.
This gorgeous style evokes the north
Mediterranean, but can be used well
for a variety of songs.
BBandBallad This style is perfect for recreating the
sound and atmosphere of the great big
bands and orchestras of the swing era.
AcousticBld
An unplugged style with a half-time
3/4 feel. Check out the great guitar
sounds.
Piano Swing A swinging Pianist style. Turn the
CHD1 (chord) part on and off for dif-
ferent arrangements.
16 BEAT
DANCE
Slow & Easy This style evokes the sophisticated,
relaxed atmosphere of a modern jazz
club.
R&B
SoulShuffle
Check out the dynamic sounds of the
Live! Standard drum kit, especially in
the Break fill pattern.
Smooth Jazz Enjoy the Latin feel of this modern fu-
sion style.
GospelBros
Boogie 1
Check out the different gospel
grooves in the Main A - D patterns.
House Musik Analog synths, techno drums, rave
beat — today’s modern dance music
at your fingertips.
Start this out without the drums and
bass, then bring them in for a full-tilt
boogie band.
DiscoChoco Try starting this classic 70’s disco
style with Intro III.
RockShuffle This heavy rock shuffle features the
distortion effect on the guitar.
Flip Hop
This contemporary hip hop rhythm
features sine wave acid lines and
high-pitched snare. Rap along with
this!
COUNTRY Country 2/4
This driving country-pop style can be
used for a variety of other music
styles as well.
LATIN
Samba City
This contemporary Samba-pop style
features dynamic toms from the new
Live! drum kit. Check out Ending III.
BALLROOM Engl.Waltz
A fully orchestrated, luscious waltz style,
perfect for elegant ballroom dancing.
➀ Metronome and Bass Chord Hold
These are two special styles designed for practice purposes; they do not have any of the
normal rhythm or accompaniment patterns of the other styles. To call them up, select
Page 2 of the Ballroom category by pressing the [P2] button.
➀ Metronome
This style plays back only a metronome click, without any other rhythm parts. Use this as you
would a normal metronome, practicing in time with the click. You can adjust the tempo with
the data dial. Playing chords in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard produces
corresponding bass notes and chords, just as in Bass Chord Hold below. There are five dif-
ferent metronome settings, each with a different time signature.
➀ Bass Chord Hold
Even with the auto accompaniment turned on, this style does not play any rhythm parts, but
simply holds the bass note and chord that correspond to the chord you play in the Auto
Accompaniment section of the keyboard. this is convenient for practicing chords without hav-
ing to play along with a rhythm. There are five different bass note/chord settings, each with
different voices.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Accompaniment
Style related buttons
Auto Accompaniment
section buttons
Accompaniment Sections
There are various types of Auto Accompaniment sections that allow you to vary the arrangement of
the accompaniment to match the song you are playing. They are: Intro, Main, Fill-in & Break and
Ending. By switching among them as you play, you can easily produce the dynamic elements of a
professional-sounding arrangement in your performance.
INTRO
This is used for the beginning of the song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment
shifts to the main section.
MAIN
This is used for playing the main part of the song. It plays an accompaniment pattern of several
VARIATION
measures, and repeats indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed.
FILL IN & BREAK This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment, to make
your performance sound even more professional.
ENDING
This is used for the ending of the song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment
stops automatically.
1-4
Use the same operations as in “Using Auto Accompani-
ment.”
5
Press any of the [INTRO] buttons.
TAP
INTRO
TAP TEMPO
6
As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto
accompaniment starts.
For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below).
Split Point
Auto Accompaniment
section
When the playback of the intro is finished, it automatically leads into main sec-
tion.
7
8
Press any of the accompaniment section buttons as desired.
(See the Accompaniment Structure Diagram on the next
page.)
FILL IN & BREAK
Press any of the [ENDING] buttons.
This switches to the ending section. When the ending is finished, the auto
accompaniment automatically stops.
ENDING/rit.
FADEIN/OUT
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Accompaniment
➀ Accompaniment Structure Diagram
INTRO
INTRO I
INTRO II
INTRO III
MAIN VARIATION
via FILL IN A
via FILL IN B
via FILL IN C
via FILL IN D
via FILL IN B
via FILL IN C
via FILL IN D
via FILL IN A
MAIN
VARIATION
A
MAIN
VARIATION
B
MAIN
VARIATION
C
MAIN
VARIATION
D
via FILL IN D
via FILL IN A
via FILL IN B
via FILL IN C
via BREAK
via BREAK
via BREAK
via BREAK
Press the one of the [ENDING]
buttons.
ENDING
You can have the ending gradually
slow down (ritardando) by pressing
the same [ENDING] button again
while the ending is playing back.
ENDING I
ENDING II
ENDING III
• You can use one of the intro sections even in the middle of the song by pressing one of the [INTRO] buttons during the song.
• If one of the [FILL IN & BREAK] buttons is pressed after the final half beat (eighth note) of the measure, the fill-in or break will begin
from the next measure.
• You can begin the accompaniment by using any of the other sections, as well as the intro sections.
• If you press one of the [INTRO] buttons while the ending is playing, the intro section will begin playing after the ending is finished.
• If you press one of the [FILL IN & BREAK] buttons while the ending is playing, the fill-in or break will immediately start playing, con-
tinuing with the main section.
Other Controls
FADE IN/OUT The [FADE IN/OUT] button can be used to produce smooth fade-ins
and fade-outs when starting and stopping the accompaniment.
FADEIN/OUT
TAP TEMPO
The auto accompaniment can be started at any tempo you desire by
“tapping” out the tempo with the [TAP/TEMPO] button. For details, see
page 72.
TAP
TAP TEMPO
SYNCRO STOP When the Synchro Stop function is engaged, accompaniment playback
will stop completely when all keys in the auto-accompaniment section of
the keyboard are released. Accompaniment playback will start again as
soon as a chord or note is played. For details, see page 73.
SYNC STOP
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Accompaniment
MAIN MIXER and
PART ON/OFF buttons
ONE TOUCH SETTING
buttons
DISK DIRECT button
One Touch Setting
One Touch Setting is a powerful and convenient feature that automatically calls up the most appro-
priate panel settings (voice number, etc.) for the currently selected style, with the touch of a single
button.
1
2
Select a style.
For example, select “SWING & JAZZ” category and try out “BBand Ballad” (on P2).
Press one of the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] buttons.
1
3
2
4
PROGRAMMABLE
ONE TOUCH SETTING
Auto Accompaniment and Sync Start will automatically be turned on.
In addition, various panel settings (such as voices, effects, etc.) that match the
selected style can be instantly recalled with just a single button press (see page
214)
.
3
4
5
As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto
accompaniment starts.
Split Point
Play melodies with your right hand and play various chords
with your left hand.
Auto Accompaniment
section
1
2
PROGRAMMABLE
ONE TOUCH SETTING
Try out other One Touch Setting setups.
You can also create your own One Touch Setting setups.
For details, refer to page 73.
3
4
Track Muting & Volume Control
1
2
Turn Auto Accompaniment on and start the accompaniment
(page 20).
• The **PART** mark below the
[PART ON/OFF] button indi-
cates that pressing the button
repeatedly switches among
various different displays.
However, in the example expla-
nation shown here, only the
accompaniment parts are dis-
played; no other displays can
be called up, no matter how
many times the button is
Turn individual tracks ON or OFF (muted) as required.
1) Press the [PART ON/OFF] button.
2) Press the LCD button corresponding to the part you wish to turn on or off.
PART
ON/OFF
pressed. Other displays can
be called up when Song Player
(page 30) is set to on, or when
the Digital Recording mode is
active.
PART
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Accompaniment
3
4
Adjust the volume to set the optimum level balance between
the accompaniment and your right hand performance.
1) Press the [MAIN MIXER] button.
2) Press the LCD button corresponding to the part of which the volume you
wish to adjust.
M A I N
MIXER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Stop the accompaniment (page 21).
Disk Direct Function
The 9000Pro can play back style files contained on the included floppy disk.
1
2
Insert the “Disk Styles” disk supplied with the 9000Pro into
the disk drive.
It may take a short while for the data on the disk to be read, before you can go
on to the next steps.
Press the [DISK DIRECT] button.
3
4
Select a style.
For example, select “16Balad3.”
• It may be necessary to wait for
a while in step #3 until the
9000Pro can play the accom-
paniment, since it takes some
time to read the style data from
the floppy disk.
Play the auto accompaniment (page 22).
➀ About the Style Data
This diagram illustrates the relationship among the style data stored to different types
of memory. Refer to “Memory Structure” on page 54.
Accompaniment playback
Disk Direct
See above.
Preset Style
Flash Style
Disk Style
Save
Load
Style Manager
See page 74.
Store
Style Creator
See page 126.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
on page 76
Music Database
MUSIC DATABASE
button
If you want to play in a certain genre of music but don’t know which style and voice settings would be
appropriate, the convenient Music Database can help you out. Simply select the desired genre from the
Music Database and the 9000Pro automatically makes all appropriate panel settings to let you play in that
music style!
For a list of Music Database setup parameters, refer to page 214.
Using the Music Database
1
Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.
2
Select a Music Database.
Press this to actually call up the
Music Database
Select the desired Music Data-
base.
Use button [4] or [5] to move the
cursor to the desired location and
press the [OK] LCD button to
actually call up the Music Data-
base.
You can use the Data
dial to select the desired
Music Database.
Select the desired
Category.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Move the cursor to the desired
location by using button [6] or [7]
to call up the Music Database.
(You need not press the [OK] LCD
button.)
For example, try out Category “Great Pop Songs” and Music Database “Called
to say.”
3
Play along with the accompaniment playback.
Split Point
Auto Accompaniment
section
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Music Database
Searching the Music Database
1
Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.
2
3
4
Press the LCD [F] button to call up the Search display.
Select a category and set the tempo range.
Press the LCD [I] button to execute the Search operation.
2
F
F
G
H
I
G
H
I
J
J
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press this button to call
up the Keyword dis-
play, from which you
can enter a keyword
and search the Music
Database.
3
5
Select a Music Database (see step #2 on page 26) and play
along with the accompaniment playback.
Split Point
Auto Accompaniment
section
You can also create your own Music Database setups.
For details, refer to page 76.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
on page 163
Registration Memory
REGISTRATION
MEMORY buttons
The Registration Memory gives you a convenient way to select the style, voice, and effect settings that will
suit a particular type of music.You can instantly change panel settings with the touch of a single button.
The Registration Memory provides up to 512 complete control-panel setups (64 banks, 8 setups each)
that can be recalled instantly during your performance.
For a list of Registration Memory setup parameters, refer to page 214.
Using the Preset Registration Memory
1
Select a Registration Bank (01 through 03).
The currently selected Registration Bank is indicated at the top right of the dis-
play.
REGISTRATION MEMORY
FREEZE
REGIST BANK 1
~
64
BAN
1
2
3
1
2
3
2
Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons: [1]
through [8].
Registration Name entered via the Registration Name
function display described on page 163.
If any change is made to a setting memorized by the
Registration Memory feature, a pencil icon appears,
indicating that one or more settings have been edited.
Indicates the Regis-
tration Bank/Number.
Current selected
Registration Bank
REGISTRATION MEMORY
FREEZE
REGIST BANK 1
~
64
BANK VIEW
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
➀ The Freeze function
REGISTRATION MEMORY
FREEZE
REGIST BANK 1
~
64
If you press the [FREEZE] button so that its lamp lights, selecting a different registra-
tion setup will not change the settings specified in the Registration Freeze Group Set-
ting function display (page 163).
BAN
1
1
2
2
3
3
➀ Bank View
REGISTRATION MEMORY
FREEZE
REGIST BANK 1
~
64
If you press the REGIST BANK [+]/[-] buttons simultaneously, you can view the Reg-
istration Bank list on the LCD display.
BAN
1
2
3
1
2
3
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Registration Memory
Registering the Panel Settings
You can also create your own Registration Memory setups.
1
2
Set up the panel controls as required.
Select a Registration Bank (04 through 64).
Avoid selecting one of the Registration Banks 01 through 03 (even though they
can be selected), since you may inadvertently delete some important data.
(See the note below.)
REGISTRATION MEMORY
FREEZE
REGIST BANK 1
~
64
BAN
1
2
3
1
2
3
3
4
Press the [MEMORY] button.
The LCD display will prompt you to select the desired Registration number.
Press the [MEMORY] button again to exit from this display.
MEMORY
REGISTRATION
ONE TOUCH SETTING
Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons: [1]
through [8].
REGISTRATION MEMORY
FREEZE
REGIST BANK 1
~
64
BANK VIEW
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
In this example, the panel settings are memorized to button number 3.
Since all Registration Memory data is stored to Flash ROM, any data in the Registration Memory location you selected
in step #2 above will be erased and replaced by your new settings. This includes the factory programmed preset Reg-
istration Memory settings (banks 01 - 03). If you've deleted the factory-set data, you can use the Restore function
Registration Memory banks
64 banks in Flash ROM
All banks can be edited.
04~64
These banks do not
contain preset setups.
BANK 01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
01~03
These banks contain preset
setups (factory settings).
For details about Flash ROM, refer to “Memory Structure” on page 54.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
on page 78
Disk Song Playback
• Make sure to read the section
“Using the Floppy Disk Drive
(FDD) and Floppy Disks” on
page 5.
Song related buttons
Floppy disk drive
[START/STOP] button
The following disks are compatible for playback on the 9000Pro. Refer to page 6 for more details on the
logos.
Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices defined in the GM standard.
• GM song files not having the
extension “.MID” in the name
cannot be handled by the
9000Pro.
Disks bearing this logo contain song data using the XG format, an extension of the
GM standard that provides a wider variety of voices and more comprehensive sonic
control.
Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices defined in Yamaha’s DOC format.
Playback of Song Disks
1
Insert the disk that contains song data into the disk drive.
2
3
Turn the SONG PLAYER on.
SONG
PLAYER
Press the SONG FILE DIRECTORY [I] button.
4
Select a song file.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disk Song Playback
5
6
Start playback.
• With song data software (Stan-
dard MIDI format 0) that
includes lyrics, you can view
the lyrics in the display during
playback. See page 79 for
details.
For appropriate song data, the
9000Pro can display the lyrics
in one of five different lan-
guages: English, German,
French, Spanish and Italian.
START/STOP
Turn individual tracks ON or OFF (muted) as required.
1) Press the [PART ON/OFF] button.
2) Press the LCD button corresponding to the part you wish to turn on or off.
PART
ON/OFF
PART
PART
ON/
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PART
• The SOLO mode lets you select a specific part for playback, muting (turn-
ing off) all other parts.
• If you wish to practice the melody part of the XG song on the 9000Pro key-
board, set TR1 to MUTE.
7
8
Adjust the volume as required.
1) Press the [MAIN MIXER] button.
2) Press the LCD button corresponding to the part of which the volume you
wish to adjust.
M A I N
MIXER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Stop playback.
• The [FADE IN/OUT] button
(page 72) can be used to pro-
duce smooth fade-ins and
fade-outs when starting and
stopping the song, as well as
the accompaniment.
START/STOP
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
on page 80
Vocal Harmony
CAUTION
Pickup of extraneous sounds from
the microphone can cause distorted
Vocal Harmony sound.
• Separate the microphone from the
speakers as much as possible.
MIC/LINE IN buttons
VOCAL HARMONY buttons
This extraordinarily powerful feature uses advanced voice-processing technology to automatically pro-
duce vocal harmony based on a single lead vocal. In addition to straightforward harmony, the 9000Pro
also lets you change the apparent gender of the harmony and/or lead vocal sound. For example, if you
are a male singer, you can have the 9000Pro automatically generate a two-part female backup. A com-
prehensive set of parameters gives you exceptionally precise and flexible control over the vocal harmony
sound.
Setting Up
1
2
1
2 Set the INPUT VOLUME control to “MIN.”
Set the MIC/LINE panel switch to “MIC 1” or “MIC 2.”
This is a gain control for the microphone input signal. The “MIC 1” set-
ting boosts the signal, while the “MIC 2” setting reduces it.
3
4
Connect a microphone to the MIC/LINE IN jack of the
9000Pro.
The MIC/LINE jack accepts either 1/4” phone plugs or XLR connectors.
3
4
Adjust the INPUT VOLUME control while singing into
the microphone.
• Refer to the important notes and caution
message on page 80.
Use the SIGNAL and OVER indicators to determine the appropriate setting.
With the INPUT VOLUME control at the minimum, sing or talk into
the microphone at the highest expected volume.
Gradually bring the control up toward “MAX” so that the SIGNAL indi-
cator is lit and the OVER indicator flashes occasionally.
• Turn the INPUT VOLUME control all the
way down when disconnecting a micro-
phone.
Then reduce the INPUT VOLUME just enough to keep the OVER indi-
cator from flashing. This should be the optimum level setting. To hear
the microphone input, make sure to set the “MIC” fader in the MAIN
VOLUME display to an appropriate level.
• Since the MIC/LINE IN jack is highly
sensitive, it may pick up and produce
noise when nothing is connected. To
avoid this, always set the INPUT VOL-
UME to minimum when nothing is con-
nected to the MIC/LINE IN jack.
Vocal Harmony with Accompaniment Playback
1
2
Turn AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT on and start the accompani-
ment (page 20).
Press theVOCAL HARMONY [V.H.(9)] button to turn theVocal
Harmony effect on.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vocal Harmony
3
4
Press the VOCAL HARMONY [SELECT] button.
Select a Vocal Harmony type.
A
B
C
D
For this example,
“JazzSisters” is
E
selected.
5
Play the keyboard while singing into the microphone.
The Vocal Harmony effect can be controlled by the chords you play in the Auto
Accompaniment section (the keys to the left of the split point).
Split Point
Auto Accompaniment
section
Vocal Harmony with Song Playback
The 9000Pro can properly play back disk songs that contain Vocal Harmony data.
1-4
Use the same operation as in “Playback of Song Disks”
on page 30.
5
6
Turn theVocal Harmony effect on and select aVocal Harmony
type (see above).
Press the [MIC SETUP] button and set the Vocal Harmony
track.
Press the [E] or [J] button to select the bottom row of controls, then set the
VOCODER track to the appropriate setting. For details on the appropriate
track number (or MIDI channel) used for the Vocal Harmony effect, refer to
the documentation included with the disk software.
START/STOP
7
8
9
Start the song.
Sing into the microphone during song playback.
Stop the song.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
on page 77
The Multi Pads
Multi Pads
The 9000Pro Multi Pads can be used to play a number of short pre-recorded rhythmic and melodic
sequences that can be used to add impact and variety to your keyboard performances.
Playing the Multi Pads
1
Use the M.PAD BANK [-]/[+] buttons to select a Multi Pad
Bank.
• Simply tap any of the Multi
Pads at any time to play back
the corresponding phrase at
the currently set tempo.
STOP
M.PAD BANK 1~60
Multi Pad Bank number
• You can even play two, three,
or four Multi Pads at the same
time.
BANK VIEW
1
3
2
• Pressing the pad during its
playback will stop playing and
begin playing from the top
again.
4
2
Press any of the Multi Pads.
STOP
M.PAD BANK 1~60
• There are two types of Multi
Pad data. Some types will play
back once and stop when they
reach to the end. Others will
play back repeatedly until you
press the [STOP] button.
The corresponding phrase (in this case, for Pad 4) starts
playing back in its entirety as soon as the pad is pressed.
The Multi Pad function provides two different ways to
stop in the middle of the phrase :
BANK VIEW
1
3
2
4
• To stop all pads, press and release the [STOP] button.
• To stop specific pads, simultaneously hold down the
[STOP] button and press the pad or pads you wish to
stop.
Bank #
Bank 01~58 Phrases
Bank 59
Bank 60
Contents
MIDI messages
Scale tuning settings
(page 158)
Chord Match
1
2
Turn AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT on (page 20).
Play a chord with your left hand and press any of the Multi
Pads.
• The Chord Match on/off status
depends on the selected Multi
Pad Bank.
STOP
M.PAD BANK 1~60
Split Point
BANK VIEW
1
3
2
4
Auto Accompaniment
section
In this example, the phrase for Pad 1 will be transposed into F major before
playing back.
Try playing other chords and pressing the pads. Keep in mind that you can also
change chords while a pad is playing back.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
on page 60
Voice Effects
VOICE EFFECT
buttons
The 9000Pro features a sophisticated multi-processor effect system which can add extraordinary depth
and expression to your sound.
Applying the Voice Effects
Voice Effect
Comments
TOUCH SUSTAIN
TOUCH
This button turns the touch response of the keyboard on or off. When
OFF, the same volume is produced no matter how strongly or softly you
play the keyboard.
DSP(4~7)
SLOW/ FAST
SUSTAIN
When this Sustain feature is ON, all notes played on the keyboard other
than the Left part have a longer sustain.
HARMONY/ECHO POLY
/
MONO
DSP(4~7)
SLOW/FAST
This button turns independent effects on or off for the RIGHT 1 (DSP4),
RIGHT 2 (DSP5), RIGHT 3 (DSP6) and LEFT (DSP7) parts.
The [SLOW/FAST] button can be used to switch between variations of
the DSP effect. For example, this lets you change the rotating speed
(slow/fast) of the rotary speaker effect.
These buttons turn the
corresponding effects on
or off for the part currently
selected via the PART
SELECT buttons.
HARMONY/ECHO
POLY/MONO
See below.
This determines whether the Part’s Voice is played monophonically (only
one note at a time) or polyphonically (up to 126 notes at a time).
Try out the Harmony/Echo effect.
This effect adds a variety of harmony notes to your playing in the right-hand section, as
well as adding tremolo or other effects.
1
2
Turn Harmony/Echo on.
Turn Auto Accompaniment on (page 20) and turn RIGHT 1
on.
3
Play a chord with your left hand and play some notes in the
right-hand range of the keyboard.
Split Point
Auto Accompaniment
section
The 9000Pro has various Harmony/Echo types.
The Harmony/Echo type may change according to the selected RIGHT 1 voice.
Try out some of the voices below.
Try out Harmony/Echo with some of the voices below...
Category
PIANO
Voice
Harmony/Echo Type
Category
GUITAR
BRASS
Voice
Harmony/Echo Type
Grand Piano Standard Trio
PedalSteel
MoonLight
Country Duet
Full Chord
Trill
ACCORDION
STRINGS
Tutti Accrd
Live! Strs
Country Trio
Block
PERCUSSION Vibraphone
ChamberStrs 4-way Open
Lead Guitar Rock Duet w/touch Sen
GUITAR
Mandolin
Harp
Tremolo
Strum
GUITAR
STRINGS
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
on page 110
Song Creator
DIGITAL RECORDING
button
The powerful and easy-to-use Song Creator feature lets you record your own keyboard performances to
disk. With multiple tracks for recording, comprehensive editing features, plus the use of the auto accom-
paniment and the Multi Pads, you can record complex, fully orchestrated pieces of music in any music
style or arrangement — from solo piano and church organ to rock band, big band, Latin ensemble, and
even a full symphony orchestra — quickly, easily and all by yourself!
Quick Recording
1
Press the [DIGITAL RECORDING] button to engage the
Record mode.
2
3
4
Select “SONG CREATOR.”
Select “NEW SONG.”
Select “QUICK RECORD.”
A
B
C
D
E
A
B
C
D
E
A
B
C
D
E
2
3
4
5
Set the track modes.
• When MANUAL is set to “REC,” your keyboard performance and Multi
Pad playback can be recorded to the corresponding tracks as listed below.
• When ACMP is set to “REC,” Auto Accompaniment is automatically set to
on and accompaniment playback can be recorded to the corresponding
tracks as listed below.
The voices, Multi Pad notes, and accompaniment parts are
recorded to the various tracks as listed below.
MANUAL
VOICE
ACCOMPANIMENT
PART
TRACK
TRACK
9
RIGHT 1 voice
RIGHT 2 voice
RIGHT 3 voice
LEFT voice
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RHYTHM 1 (sub)
RHYTHM 2 (main)
BASS
10
11
CHORD 1
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MULTI PAD 1
MULTI PAD 2
MULTI PAD 3
MULTI PAD 4
CHORD 2
13
PAD
14
PHRASE 1
PHRASE 2
15
16
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Creator
6
7
Press the [NEXT] button.
Set up for recording.
• Select the required voice(s), select a style, if required. Set up all parameters
as desired for recording.
• Turn the metronome on or off as required.
• If ACMP is set to "REC" in step
#5, you can start recording
your keyboard performance
first and then start recording
the Auto Accompaniment or
rhythm.
To do this,
1) Press the [RUBATO] LCD
button.
2) Play a key on the right side
of the split point to start
recording your keyboard
performance.
F
G
H
I
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
J
Turn the metronome
on or off as required.
3) Play a chord on the left side
of the split point to start
recording the Auto Accom-
paniment with your key-
board performance.
8
9
Start recording.
Recording starts as soon as you play a key on the keyboard.
• Using Registration Memory
(page 28), One Touch Setting
(page 24), and Music Data-
base (page 26) can make your
recording sessions much more
efficient, since various settings
(such as voices, etc.) can be
recalled by a single button
press.
Stop recording.
When you finish playing, press the [START/STOP] button.
If you have set ACMP track to REC in step #5 above, you can stop recording
by pressing the [ENDING] button. If you press the [ENDING] button, record-
ing will stop automatically after the ending section has finished.
CAUTION
10 Press the [START/STOP] button to hear your newly
recorded performance.
• While the file is being saved,
never eject the floppy disk or
turn the power off.
11
Save the recorded data to the disk.
Insert a blank recordable disk into the disk drive, and follow the instructions in
the illustrations below.
CAUTION
• Please note that the
recorded data will be lost if
exiting from the Record
mode without saving the
data to disk.
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
Input a file name.
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
The LCD display will prompt you
to save the recorded data.
At the prompt, select “YES” to
save the recorded data.
12
Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Record mode.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Creator
DIGITALRECORDING
button
Multi Track Recording
1
Press the [DIGITAL RECORDING] button to engage the
Record mode.
2
3
4
Select “SONG CREATOR.”
Select “NEW SONG.”
Select “MULTI TRACK RECORD.”
2
A
B
C
D
E
A
B
C
D
E
A
B
C
D
E
3
4
5
Set the track modes.
• When set to “REC,” your keyboard performance and Multi Pad playback
can be recorded to the corresponding tracks.
• When one of the TR11~16 is set to “REC,” Auto Accompaniment is auto-
matically set to on and accompaniment playback can be recorded to the cor-
responding tracks as listed in the caption below.
Select the part for the
corresponding track.
The available parts for all
tracks are:
• RIGHT1
• RIGHT2
• RIGHT3
• LEFT
• MULTI PAD1~4
• RHYTHM1
• RHYTHM2
• BASS
Use this button to alter-
nately switch between
the Part selecting and
the Record selecting.
A
B
C
D
E
Use this button to alter-
nately switch between
the TR1~8 and the
TR9~16 settings.
• CHORD1
• CHORD2
• PAD
Set the desired track to “REC.”
• PHRASE1
• PHRASE2
• VHRM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• MIDI
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Creator
6
7
Press the [NEXT] button.
• Pressing the [REHEARSAL]
LCD button before recording
lets you practice the part to be
recorded. This is particularly
convenient for mastering parts
for punch-in recording —
before you actually record
them.
Set up for recording.
• Select the required voice(s), select a style, if required. Set up all parameters
as desired for recording.
• Turn the metronome on or off as required.
F
G
PAGE CONTROL
Turn the metronome
on or off as required.
H
I
BACK
NEXT
J
8
9
Start recording.
You can start recording with one of the following ways:
• If one of the TR11~16 is set to
"REC" in step #5, you can start
recording your keyboard per-
formance first and then start
recording the Auto Accompani-
ment or rhythm.
To do this,
1) Press the [RUBATO] LCD
button.
2) Play a key on the right side
of the split point to start
recording your keyboard
performance.
3) Play a chord on the left side
of the split point to start
recording the Auto Accom-
paniment with your key-
board performance.
• Press the [START/STOP] button to start the rhythm parts of the accompa-
niment and recording at the same time.
• Press the [SYNC START] button to enable synchronized standby, then play
a key on the left side of the split point to start the accompaniment and
recording at the same time.
• Press the [SYNC START] button to enable synchronized standby.
1) Play a key on the right side of the split point to start recording.
2) Play a key on the left side of the split point to start the accompaniment.
• Using Registration Memory
(page 28), One Touch Setting
(page 24), and Music Data-
base (page 26) can make your
recording sessions much more
efficient, since various settings
(such as voices, etc.) can be
recalled by a single button
press.
Stop recording.
When you finish playing, press the [START/STOP] button.
If you have set the accompaniment tracks to REC in step #5 above, you can
stop recording by pressing the [ENDING] button. If you press the [ENDING]
button, recording will stop automatically after the ending section has finished.
10
Press the [START/STOP] button to hear your newly
recorded performance.
Repeat step #5 - #9 as needed.
11
Save the recorded data to the disk.
Insert a blank recordable disk into the disk drive, and follow the instructions in
the illustration below.
CAUTION
• While the file is being saved,
never eject the floppy disk or
turn the power off.
CAUTION
PAGE CONTROL
• Please note that the
recorded data will be lost if
exiting from the Record
mode without saving the
data to disk.
BACK
NEXT
Press this button to
execute the save oper-
ation.
12
Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Record mode.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
on page 84
Sampling
DIGITALRECORDING
button
This function lets you record your own sounds via a microphone.
Once it is recorded, the resulting “sample” can be played at various pitches from a keyboard.
Recording a Sample
1-4
Use the same operation as in “Setting up” (page 32).
5
Press the [SOUND CREATOR] button.
• The notes and cautions con-
tained on page 80 also apply to
Sampling.
6
7
Select “SAMPLING.”
Select “RECORDING.”
A
B
C
D
E
A
B
C
D
E
8
9
Press the [NEXT] button.
• Since this is the first sample
you are recording, it is auto-
matically assigned and fixed to
the lowest available key. As a
result, the START KEY cannot
be set.
Set the key range to which the new sample will be assigned.
10
Press the [NEXT] button twice to call up the sample
recording display.
Press the [NEXT]
button twice.
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sampling
11
Press the LCD [START] button and speak into the micro-
phone to start the sampling.
Sampling starts when the input level reaches the Auto Trigger level (page 84).
Indicates the amount
of remaining sampling
memory/time.
12
Press the LCD [STOP] button to stop the sampling.
Sampling will stop automatically when the available wave memory is full, so
be sure to press LCD [STOP] button as soon as the sound you want to sample
is recorded, otherwise you’ll end up sampling unwanted silence (which can be
edited out later).
13
Store voice parameters for the recorded sample as a Cus-
tom voice.
1) Follow the instructions in the chart below.
A
B
C
D
PAGE CONTROL
PAGE CONTROL
E
BACK
NEXT
BACK
NEXT
Select a Custom voice
number (destination).
Input a voice name.
Select “STORE.”
2) Press the [NEXT] button to store the voice parameters for the recorded
sample as Custom voice.
14
Press the [EXIT] button several times to exit from the Sam-
pling mode.
15 Select the Custom voice number above and play the voice
from the keyboard.
16
Save the recorded sample (wave data) to disk.
1) Press the [DISK/SCSI] button to call up the Save display.
2) Select “SAVE TO DISK.”
3) Call up the Custom Voice display and select the number stored in step #13.
4) Save the selected Custom Voice with the sample (wave data) to disk.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optional Plug-in Board
Reference
on page 64
Plug-in Voice related
buttons
Up to two boards can be
installed to the bottom
panel.
Installing an optional Plug-in Board to the 9000Pro lets you greatly expand the sonic palette of the instru-
ment. Once you've installed an optional Plug-in Board to the 9000Pro, you have instant access to a whole
new set of amazing, dynamic voices, in addition to the built-in voices of the 9000Pro.
Playing a Plug-in Voice
1
Install the Optional Plug-in Board to the 9000Pro.
In this example, a PLG150-VL Virtual Acoustic Plug-in Board has
been installed to SLOT 1. The PLG150-VL lets you expand the sonic
palette of your 9000Pro by adding 256 dynamic VL voices (including
137 VL-XG voices), created with the unique Virtual Acoustic Synthe-
sis system.
PLG150-VL
2
After you've installed the Plug-in Boards, turn the power ON.
When turning the power ON for the first time after installing the board, a mes-
sage appears indicating that the board settings are being initialized, followed
after a while by the main display.
Note that it takes a short amount of time before the main display appears, espe-
cially if two boards have been installed. If an error message appears, check that
the board or boards have been properly installed to the 9000Pro.
3
4
After the main display appears, insert the "Plug-in Custom
Voice" disk supplied with the 9000Pro and load the file
"150VL CsVce.xvc" to the 9000Pro via the Plug-in Manager
function. See page 66 for details.
Press the [R1] LCD button to turn the RIGHT1 part on.
F
G
H
PART SELECT
I
LEFT HOLD
LEFT
RIGHT1
RIGHT2
UPPER
RIGHT3
J
LOWER
PART ON/OFF
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optional Plug-in Board
5
6
Press the [SLOT 1] button and select a voice group.
• A single Plug-in Board can only
sound one part (one Plug-in
voice) at a time. This means
that the playing methods
described on page 17 (turning
parts R1 - R3 on simulta-
neously) and page 18 (turning
parts R and L on simulta-
neously) cannot be used, even
if you select the same slot’s
Plug-in Board voices for the R1
- R3 and L parts.
For this example, [II] is
selected.
Select a voice.
• Please note that even though a
Multi-Part Plug-in Board (e.g.,
PLG100-XG) can be used with
the 9000Pro, the voice list of
the slot corresponding to the
Multi-Part board cannot be dis-
played in the LCD.
A
B
C
D
E
See page 65 for details about
the Multi-Part Plug-in Board.
Press the corresponding buttons to
select the various pages.
7
Play the keyboard.
Up to a maximum of two Plug-in Boards can be installed to the 9000Pro (using
both SLOT 1 and SLOT 2), giving you access to an extraordinarily wide range
of sounds.
➀ Plug-in Voices and Board Voices
Load
Use these buttons to call up the Plug-in
Use this button to call up the
Voices.
Board Voices. This allows you
to select any of the original
voices on the Plug-in Board.
Plug-in Manager
The Plug-in Voices area has 220
available spaces for voices. Voices can
be loaded from the included disk (using
the Plug-in Manager) or can be created
via the Plug-in Custom Voice creator
function (page 100).
Save
See page 66
for details.
See pages 64 and 100
for details.
The included floppy disk features specially programmed data (such as effect
settings, etc.) for using the Plug-in Board Voices with the 9000Pro.
• Before loading the disk data, the Board Voices (without any special
processing or programming) are divided into groups of ten and are
selectable from the PLUG-IN VOICE buttons [I] - [XI].
• Once the data on the disk is loaded, you have a new set of voices,
programmed specifically for optimum use with the 9000Pro. For a list of
the available Plug-in Voices created with the data on the included floppy
disk, see page 204.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display-based Controls
As you’ve seen in “Quick Guide” above, the 9000Pro features an exceptionally large and easy-to-
understand display. It provides comprehensive at-a-glance information on all current settings, and
gives you convenient, intuitive control over the 9000Pro’s functions.
LCD
CONTRAST
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
LCD buttons
LCD buttons
J
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
M A I N
MIXER
TEMPO
D A T A
ENTRY
PART
ON/OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Data dial
PART
B E A T
LCD buttons
➀ LCD buttons
The LCD (A~J) buttons are used to select the corresponding menu. In the example display
shown above, for example, the LCD [F] button can be used to turn the R1 voice on.
The LCD (1~8) buttons are divided into eight sets of up/down buttons, and are used to make
selections or adjust settings (up or down correspondingly) for functions shown directly above
them. In the example display shown above, for example, the LCD [6] buttons can be used to
adjust the volume of the R2 voice.
➀ Data dial
This is usually used to change the tempo of accompaniment/song playback (when the
TEMPO lamp is lit). However, when certain functions (for example, Music Database selection,
Naming and Mixing Console adjusting) are shown on the LCD display, this dial is used to
change the corresponding data values (when the DATA ENTRY lamp is lit).
Depending on the selected display, the lamps switch between each other automatically. (This
cannot be changed manually.)
Rotating the data dial to the right (clockwise) increases the value, while rotating it to the left
(counter-clockwise) decreases it.
➀ PAGE CONTROL buttons
If you’ve selected several different functions’ displays in succession, you can “retrace your
steps” and revisit each display by using the [BACK] and [NEXT] buttons.
Pressing [NEXT] button go to the next available page and pressing the [BACK] button return
to the previous available page.
➀ The [LCD CONTRAST] Control
The 9000Pro display panel is a liquid-crystal type which features an [LCD CONTRAST] con-
trol. Use the [LCD CONTRAST] control to set the display for optimum legibility.
➀ [EXIT] button
No matter where you are in the 9000Pro display hierarchy, the [EXIT] button will return you to
the next highest level, or to the normal play mode display.
Since the 9000Pro has so many different displays, you may occasionally find yourself con-
fused as to which operation’s display is currently shown. If this happens, you can return to
“home base” by pressing the [EXIT] button several times. This returns the 9000Pro to the
default display — the same display that appears when the power is turned on.
➀ [MAIN MIXER] button and [PART ON/OFF] button
Refer to pages 24, 25 and 31.
44
Basic Operation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display-based Controls
➀ BEAT indicators
These indicators flash at the current tempo and indicate the current
beat during accompaniment and song playback.
4/4 time
3/4 time
1st beat
2nd beat
3rd beat
4th beat
➀ [DIRECT ACCESS] button
See page 48.
Display Messages
The large 9000Pro display panel facilitates operation by making it possible to display
comprehensive message and prompts that will guide you through certain operations.
These messages can be displayed in one of five different languages. When such mes-
sages appear, simply follow the instructions as shown by pressing the corresponding
LCD button.
F
G
For this example, press the [YES]
LCD button to execute the Store
operation.
H
I
J
➀ Selecting the desired language of the display message
You can select the desired language of the display messages from the following:
• English
• German
• French
• Spanish
• Italian
Follow the instructions in the chart below.
F
PAGE CONTROL
MENU
FUNCTION
DISK
/
G
H
I
SCSI
MIDI
BACK
NEXT
J
Press the [FUNCTION]
button.
Select
“UTILITY.”
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select the desired language.
Note that the example LCD screens shown in this manual are in English.
Basic Operation
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display-based Controls
Name Entry
A number of 9000Pro functions allow you to enter a name for, for example, a file you
will be saving to disk, a custom voice or style, etc. The name entry procedure is essen-
tially the same in all cases (only the maximum number of characters which can be
entered will vary). An example display which includes NAME entry parameters is
shown below:
When this icon appears in the
display, you can directly call up
the Name Entry page by press-
ing the corresponding button.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
• You can also enter the name
directly from a computer key-
board (PC-compatible only).
See below for details.
➀ Selecting a character
Use these buttons to
move up or down in the
character list. To move
laterally through the
character list, use the
data dial.
J
Press one of these after
Clears all characters.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
you’ve finished entering the
name to actually assign the
name to the data.
Deletes the character at
the cursor position.
Aborts character entry.
Enters the character selected by the LCD [D] and [E] buttons.
Moves the cursor position in
the NAME box.
Computer Keyboard Functions
You can connect a computer keyboard (PC-compatible only) to the 9000Pro for the fol-
lowing functions.
• Name Entry (see above)
• Selecting voices, styles, songs and Registration Memory settings (see below)
• Step Recording (see below)
For details on using a computer keyboard with the 9000Pro, see page 167.
Please note that Macintosh computer keyboards and USB computer keyboards cannot
be used with the 9000Pro.
46
Basic Operation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display-based Controls
➀ Selecting voices, styles, songs and Registration Memory settings
First, from the main display, press any key on the computer keyboard. Then select the
desired category (voice, style, song, Registration Memory) by repeatedly pressing any
key on the computer keyboard, with the exception of the DELETE key and the number
keys. (The selected category is indicated in the display.) Then enter the desired number
from the computer keyboard, according to the rules below.
• Voice ............................For the internal Preset Voices:
2 digits for the voice category, followed by 2 digits for the specific
voice (or 3 digits for XG voices), then the ENTER key.
For Plug-in Voices:
2 digits (21 - 32 for Slot 1, 41 - 52 for Slot 2) for the voice cate-
gory, followed by 2 digits (or 4 digits for Board voices), then the
ENTER key.
• Style.............................2 digits for the style category, followed by 2 digits for the specific
style, then the ENTER key.
• Song ...........................2 digit for the song file directory, followed by 3 digits for the spe-
cific song, then the ENTER key.
• Registration Memory....2 digits for the bank number, followed by 1 digit for the specific
Registration Memory, then the ENTER key.
➀ Step Recording
Using a computer keyboard is a very convenient way to edit events in the Event List in
familiar with operating a computer, you’ll find many of the editing conventions that
you’re used to (such as moving the cursor and copying/pasting) apply to editing the
9000Pro data as well.
For a list of the parameters you can control/operate from a computer keyboard, see
below.
Computer Keyboard Functions in Step Recording
Keys
Function
Number keys (0 ~9 ) For typing in the desired timing (measure, beat, clock) or event data (value).
ENTER
↑
↓
←
Enters the event data (value) and moves to the next timing position.
Enters the event data (value) and moves the cursor up.
Enters the event data (value) and moves the cursor down.
Moves the cursor left
→
Moves the cursor right
BS
Deletes a character
ESC
Cancels the value entry
Insert
Delete
SPACE
Ctrl+X
Ctrl+C
Ctrl+V
Ctrl+Z
ALT+A
ALT+B
ALT+C
ALT+D
ALT+E
ALT+F
ALT+G
ALT+H
ALT+I
ALT+J
Inserts the new event
Deletes the event of the current location
Same as the [START/STOP] button on the panel.
Deletes all the selected events and copies them to the clipboard.
Copies all the selected events to the clipboard.
Pastes all the event data that is currently contained in the clipboard.
Cancels the value entry
Same as the LCD [A] button
Same as the LCD [B] button
Same as the LCD [C] button
Same as the LCD [D] button
Same as the LCD [E] button
Same as the LCD [F] button
Same as the LCD [G] button
Same as the LCD [H] button
Same as the LCD [I] button
Same as the LCD [J] button
Basic Operation
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display-based Controls
Direct Access
By using the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, you can instantly call up the desired display.
When you press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, an LCD message prompts you to
press the appropriate button. Press the button corresponding to the settings you want to
display.
For this example, the display for setting the Split Point (page 159) is called up.
See next page for the Direct Access Chart.
48
Basic Operation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display-based Controls
➀ Direct Access Chart
Number Function of the accessed LCD display
Operation:
+ button listed below
See pages
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Mixing Console
Volume/EQ settings (Main)
Volume/EQ settings (Accompaniment)
Volume/EQ settings (Song tracks 1 - 8)
Volume/EQ settings (Song tracks 9 - 16)
Filter settings (Main)
Filter settings (Accompaniment)
Filter settings (Song tracks 1 - 8)
Filter settings (Song tracks 9 - 16)
Effect Depth settings (Main)
Effect Depth settings (Main)
Effect Depth settings (Accompaniment)
Effect Depth settings (Song tracks 1 - 8)
Effect Depth settings (Song tracks 9 - 16)
Effect Type settings
Effect Type settings (Microphone Sound)
Effect Parameter settings
Tune Settings (Portamento Time)
Tune Settings (Pitch Bend Range)
Tune Settings (Octave)
Tune Settings (Tuning)
Tune Settings (Tuning)
Tune Settings (Tuning)
Tune Settings (Tuning)
Tune Settings (Transpose)
Master EQ settings
Master EQ settings
Master EQ settings
Voice selection
Voice selection
Voice selection
Line Out settings
Master Tuning
Scale Tuning
Split Point/Fingering mode settings
Split Point/Fingering mode settings
Foot Controller Volume settings
Footswitch 1 function assignment
Footswitch 2 function assignment
Modulation wheel settings
Initial Touch setting
After Touch setting
Transpose Assign
Registration settings
Registration settings
Registration Memory FreezeGroupSetting
Voice Set settings (R1)
Voice Set settings (R2)
Voice Set settings (R3)
Voice Set settings (L)
Harmony/Echo settings
Video monitor settings
Talk Setting
MAIN VARIATION [A]
MAIN VARIATION [B]
MAIN VARIATION [C]
MAIN VARIATION [D]
FILL IN & BREAK [
FILL IN & BREAK [
FILL IN & BREAK [
FILL IN & BREAK [
VOCAL HARMONY [MIC SETUP]
ENDING [I]
ENDING [II]
ENDING [III]
FADE IN/OUT
VOICE EFFECT [DSP(4-7)]
VOCAL HARMONY [DSP(8)]
VOICE EFFECT [SLOW/FAST]
VOICE EFFECT [POLY/MONO]
PITCH BEND wheel
UPPER OCTAVE [+], [-]
PART ON/OFF [R1]
PART ON/OFF [R2]
PART ON/OFF [R3]
PART ON/OFF [L]
TRANSPOSE [+]
[MIXING CONSOLE]
[MAIN MIXER]
INTRO [I]
[PART ON/OFF]
VOICE [PIANO] - [PERCUSSION]
INTRO [II]
INTRO [III]
[SOUND CREATOR]
MULTI PAD [STOP]
[AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT]
[LEFT HOLD]
FOOT VOLUME
FOOTSWITCH 1
FOOTSWITCH 2
MODULATION wheel
VOICE EFFECT [TOUCH]
VOICE EFFECT [SUSTAIN]
TRANSPOSE [-]
REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] - [8]
REGIST BANK [+], [-]
[FREEZE]
PART SELECT [R1]
PART SELECT [R2]
PART SELECT [R3]
PART SELECT [LEFT]
[HARMONY/ECHO]
[DEMO]
144
144
144
144
144
144
144
144
144
144
144
144
144
145
145
145
144
144
144
144
144
144
144
144
147
147
147
144
144
144
148
158
158
159
159
159
160
160
161
162
162
162
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
164
165
165
166
166
166
166
166
167
167
74
]
]
]
]
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
Function
VOCAL HARMONY [TALK]
[FUNCTION]
VOICE [XG] - [CUSTOM VOICE]
[DIGITAL RECORDING]
[MEMORY]
AutoLoad settings
Display MIDI Bank & Program Change #
Metronome Volume for Recording setting
Parameter Lock settings
Tap Count setting
Auto Exit Time setting
Language settings
Menu selection
Loading Style into Flash ROM
Directory selection
Directory selection
Directory selection
Directory selection
Repeat settings
Chord Match settings
Loading Data from a Disk to Flash ROM
Clock setting
Parameter settings
Parameter settings
Searching the Music Database
TAP TEMPO
PAGE CONTROL [BACK]
PAGE CONTROL [NEXT]
PRESET STYLE [8 BEAT] - [BALLROOM]
FLASH STYLE [I] - [VIII]
[DISK DIRECT]
SONG DIRECTORY [I] - [V]
[SONG SETUP]
[SONG PLAYER]
Style Manager
74
151
78
78
78
77
77
152
175
81
81
27
-
-
-
-
Style Selection
Song Selection
Multi Pad
MULTI PAD [1], [2], [3], [4]
MULTI PAD BANK [+], [-]
[DISK/SCSI]
DISK/SCSI
MIDI
VocalHarmony
[MIDI]
VOCAL HARMONY [V.H.(9)]
VOCAL HARMONY [SELECT]
[MUSIC DATABASE]
Data dial
ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] - [4]
[EXIT]
Music Database
Restoring the default tempo setting of the selected style
Restoring the default tempo setting of the selected style
Returning to the default display (that appears when the power is turned on)
Exiting from the Direct Access mode
[DIRECT ACCESS]
Basic Operation
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Numbers at the left end correspond to ones in
“Top panel & connections” on page 10.
Function Tree
Button/Controller
LCD title
Function
See
pages
1 POWER ON/OFF
2 MASTER VOLUME
3 PITCH BEND
–
–
–
–
Turning the POWER on or off
14
14
59
59
Adjusting the overall volume
Bending notes played on the keyboard up or down
Applying a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard
4 MODULATION
5 SONG
[SONG PLAYER]
[I] ... [V]
Turning Song Player on or off
30
30, 78
79
Selecting a song
[SONG SETUP]
Setting the way in which the 9000Pro reads the song data
6 STYLE & STYLE MANAGER
[AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT]
[8BEAT] ... [BALLROOM]
Turning Auto Accompaniment on or off
Selecting a preset style
20
20
STYLE MANAGER
LOAD STYLE INTO FLASH ROM
SAVE STYLE IN FLASH ROM
COPY STYLE IN FLASH ROM
DELETE STYLE IN FLASH ROM
SWAP STYLE IN FLASH ROM
RENAME STYLE IN FLASH ROM
DEFRAGMENT FLASH ROM
Loading style data from disk to the internal Flash ROM
Saving style data in the internal Flash ROM to disk
Copying style data in the internal Flash ROM
Deleting style data in the internal Flash ROM
Swapping style data in the internal Flash ROM
Renaming a style file in the internal Flash ROM
Defragmenting the internal Flash ROM
74
75
75
75
75
75
75
55
25
[I] ... [VIII]
Selecting a style in the internal Flash ROM
Selecting and playng a style in a disk
[DISK DIRECT]
7 ACCOMPANIMENT CONTROL
[INTRO]
–
–
–
–
Playing the Intro sections of the accompaniment
Tapping out the tempo of the accompaniment
Playing the Ending sections of the accompaniment
22
23, 72
22
[TAP TEMPO]
[ENDING]
[FADE IN/OUT]
Producing smooth fade-ins and fade-outs when starting and stopping 23, 72
the accompaniment/song
[MAIN VARIATION]
[FILL IN & BREAK]
[SYNC STOP]
–
–
–
–
–
Playing the Main sections of the accompaniment
Playing the Fill in or Break sections
Turning Sync Stop on or off
22
22
23, 73
20
[SYNC START]
[START/STOP]
Turning Sync Start on or off
Starting/stopping the accompaniment
21
8 MENU
[DISK/SCSI]
LOAD FROM DISK
GROUP
Loading specific type of data from a disk
Loading an individual data from a disk
152
152
INDIVIDUAL
SAVE TO DISK
Saving data to a disk
153
COPY FILE/FD
COPY FILE
COPY FD
Copying the specified file on a disk onto another disk.
Copying the entire data on a floppy disk onto another disk.
154
154
BACKUP/RESTORE
RESTORE
Restoring the data in Flash ROM
Backing up the data in Flash ROM
154
154
BACKUP
CONVERTER
PSR-8000
Converting PSR-8000 format files to 9000Pro format files
155
155
SMF SONG
Converting the sequence/track name of the Meta Event in the SMF to the file
name
EDIT FILE
RENAME
DELETE
Naming a file in a disk
Deleting a file in a disk
155
155
EDIT DIRECTORY
RENAME DIRECTORY
DELETE DIRECTORY
CREATE DIRECTORY
Naming a directory in a disk
Deleting a directory in a disk
Creating a directory in a disk
156
156
156
FORMAT
Formatting a disk
Checking a disk
156
157
CHECK DISK
50
Basic Operation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function Tree
Button/Controller
LCD title
Function
See
pages
8 MENU
[FUNCTION]
MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE
MASTER TUNE
Setting the overall pitch of the 9000Pro
Tuning each individual note of the octave
158
158
SCALE TUNE
SPLIT POINT/FINGERING
SPLIT POINT
Setting the point on the keyboard that separates the left-hand and
right-hand section
159
159
FINGERING
Selecting the way in which chords are played with your left hand
CONTROLLER
FOOT CONTROLLER
PANEL CONTROLLER
Selecting the foot controller (page 13) function
159
161
Selecting the panel controller (e.g. Pitch Bend Wheel ) function
REGISTRATION/FREEZE/VOICE SET
REGISTRATION
Naming each Registration setup/bank
163
163
FREEZE
Specifying which settings are affected by the Freeze function (page
28)
VOICE SET
Determining whether the preset settings will or will not be recalled
when a new voice is selected
163
HARMONY/ECHO
VIDEO OUT
Harmony/Echo settings
164
165
Setting the display characteristics that are output to a television or
video monitor connected to the [VIDEO OUT] jack
TALK SETTING
Setting various parameters which affect the microphone sound
when the [TALK] button is on
165
UTILITY
CONFIGURATION
TIME
Setting various parameters
166
167
45
Setting parameters related to time
Selecting the language of the display messages
Selecting a MIDI template
LANGUAGE
[MIDI]
174
MFC10
EASY SETUP
FULL SETUP
Selecting a template of the MFC10 settings
178
179
Creating and storing a template of the MFC10 settings
SETUP
SYSTEM
TRANSMIT
RECEIVE
ROOT
MIDI system-related parameter settings
MIDI transmit channel settings
MIDI receive channel settings
MIDI chord root settings
175
175
176
177
177
177
CHORD DETECT
STORE
MIDI chord detect settings
Storing MIDI settings as a template
9 TRANSPOSE
Transposing up or down the pitch
61
10 DIGITAL STUDIO
[SOUND CREATOR]
SAMPLING
Sampling sounds via a microphone or line source
Recording a new sample
40, 84
40, 86
84
RECORDING
• TRIGGER LEVEL
• PRE EFFECT
Setting the Trigger level for starting sampling
Setting up a maximum of three DSP effects to be applied to the
source sound
87
• STORE
FILE IMPORT
• STORE
Storing the sampled data as Custom voice
Importing Wave files from disk
41
87
41
88
87
Storing the sampled data as Custom voice
Editing a recorded/imported sample
Clearing Wave data
EDIT
WAVE CLEAR
CUSTOM VOICE
EASY EDIT
• EDIT
Editing various parameters related to tone generation (e.g., Filter, EG)
Naming/Storing/Clearing Custom voice data
93
92
• STORE/CLEAR
FULL EDIT
• VOICE
Editing various parameters (e.g., Initial Touch Curve, Scale Curve)
Editing various parameters related to Waveform
Editing various parameters related to EG (Envelope Generator)
Editing various parameters related to Filter
94
95
96
97
98
99
92
• E1:WAVEFORM
• E2:EG
• E3:FILTER
• E4:LFO
Editing various parameters related to LFO
• VOICE SET
• STORE/CLEAR
Editing various parameters related to Voice Set
Naming/Storing/Clearing Custom voice data
Basic Operation
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function Tree
Button/Controller
LCD title
Function
See
pages
10 DIGITAL STUDIO
[SOUND CREATOR]
PLUG-IN VOICE
VOICE EDIT
• BOARD VOICE
Selecting a Board Voice on which the Plug-in Custom Voice editing is based
Editing various parameters related to tone generation (e.g., Filter, EG)
102
103
103
• E1: EG/VIB
• E2: CTRL
Editing various parameters related to tone generation (e.g., Initial
Touch Sensitivity, etc)
• E3: NATIVE PRM.
• VOICE SET
• STORE
Editing various parameters which are native to the installed Plug-in Board.
Editing various part parameters related to Voice Set
Storing Plug-in Custom voice data
104
104
101
105
NATIVE SYSTEM PARAMETER EDIT Editing various system parameters which are native to the installed
Plug-in Board.
VOICE EDIT ON COMPUTER
Editing various parameters on
a
computer connected to the
106
108
9000Pro. Voice editing is done with special Plug-in software from
the XGworks (or XGworks lite) program.
BOARD CUSTOM VOICE BACKUP
Backing up the edited Board Custom Voice data from the installed
Board to Flash ROM.
[DIGITAL RECORDING]
SONG CREATOR
QUICK RECORD
• CHORD STEP
Recording a song quickly without having to make detailed settings
36
Recording accompaniment data with the Step Recording method
(similar to writing out the chords in a chord chart)
122
MULTI TRACK RECORD
• TRACK
Recording sixteen song tracks independently
Setting the Record method
38
38
• RECORD
Starting/stopping recording
39
• EDIT
Editing a recorded song (e.g., Quantize, Note Shift)
Editing Setup data (e.g., Mixing Console parameters)
Saving the recorded song to a disk/Deleting a song in a disk
114
115
39
• SETUP
• SAVE/DELETE
• STEP REC
Recording a song with the Step Recording method (similar to writing
out the notes in music notation)
116
STYLE CREATOR
EASY EDIT
Re-creating a style
129
129
130
131
132
132
• STYLE ASSEMBLY
• REVOICE
Re-creating a specific track of an already-created style.
Changing various parameters
• GROOVE & DYNAMICS
FULL EDIT
Altering the timing for each section, velocity of notes for each track
Creating a style by recording notes
• BASIC
Selecting the section and track to be recorded, setting the tempo
and the beat, and so on
• SET UP
Editing Setup data (voice, etc.)
134
134
128
135
140
• EDIT
Editing various parameters (Quantize, etc.)
• STORE/CLEAR
• PARA.EDIT
• STEP REC
Storing the created style data to Flash ROM or clearing the created style data
Editing various parameters related to the Style File Format
Recording a style with the Step Recording method (similar to writing
out the notes in music notation)
NEW STYLE ASSEMBLY
Creating a new style
129
MULTI PAD CREATOR
RECORDING
• STEP REC
CLEAR
Multi Pad Recording
142
143
142
142
142
142
145
145
145
146
145
Multi Pad Step Recording
Clearing the recorded Multi Pad data
COPY
Copying the recorded Multi Pad data
REPEAT
Turning Repeat on or off
CHORD MATCH
VOL/EQ
Turning Chord Match on or off
[MIXING CONSOLE]
Adjusting the Volume, Pan and EQ high/low for each part
Adjusting the Harmonic content and Brightness for each part
Adjusting the Effect (Reverb, Chorus and DSP) depth for each part
Setting the Effect type/parameter for each block
FILT
EFF DEPTH
EFF TYPE
TUNE
Adjusting the pitch related parameters (e.g., Pitch Bend range, Por-
tamento time) for each part
M.EQ
Adjusting the overall tone of the 9000Pro, in five frequency bands
Changing the voice for each part
147
145
148
VOICE
LINE OUT
Changing the Line out setting to send the output of each part to the
LINE OUT jacks.
11 MULTI PAD
[M.PAD BANK 1~60]
[BANK VIEW]
Selecting a Multi Pad Bank
Turning Repeat on or off
34, 77
77
REPEAT
CHORD MATCH
Turning Chord Match on or off
Stopping the Multi Pad playback
Playing the Multi Pads
77
[STOP]
34
[1] ... [4]
34
12 Data dial
Changing the tempo of accompaniment/song playback
44, 72
52
Basic Operation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function Tree
Button/Controller
LCD title
Function
See
pages
13 DEMO
[DEMO]
9000Pro DEMO
Demo song selection/playback
56
14 VOICE EFFECT
[TOUCH]
–
–
–
–
Turning Touch response on or off
Turning Sustain on or off
35, 60
35, 60
35, 60
[SUSTAIN]
[DSP(4~7)]
Turning DSP effects on or off
[SLOW/FAST]
Setting the DSP effect variations of the selected voice part to the 35, 60
SLOW or FAST
[HARMONY/ECHO]
[POLY/MONO]
–
–
Turning Harmony/Echo on or off
35, 60
35, 60
Setting the selected voice part to Poly or Mono
15 MUSIC DATABASE
[MUSIC DATABASE]
MUSIC DATABASE
Selecting/searching/creating a Music Database
26, 76
24, 73
16 ONE TOUCH SETTING
[1], [2], [3], [4]
–
Recalling various panel settings that match the selected style
17 REGISTRATION MEMORY
[1] ... [8]
–
–
–
Recalling various panel settings
Turning the Freeze function on or off
Selecting a Registration Bank
28
28
28
[FREEZE]
[REGIST BANK 1~64]
18 MEMORY
[MEMORY]
–
Memorizing various panel settings to Registration Memory/One 28, 73
Touch Setting
19 VOICE
[PIANO] ... [SYNTHESIZER]
[PERCUSSION]
[XG]
–
–
–
–
–
Selecting the 9000Pro original preset voices
Selecting the 9000Pro original preset percussive voices and Drum Kits
Selecting the preset XG voices
16
58
58
62
92
[ORGAN FLUTES]
[CUSTOM VOICE]
Selecting/Editing the Organ Flutes
Selecting the Custom voices
20 PLUG-IN VOICE
[SLOT 1]
–
–
–
Selecting the Plug-in Board installed to Slot1
Selecting the Plug-in Board installed to Slot2
Selecting the Plug-in Voices
43
43
43
[SLOT 2]
[I] ~ [XI]
PLUG-IN MANAGER
LOAD PLUG-IN CUSTOM VOICE
SAVE PLUG-IN CUSTOM VOICE
Loading Plug-in voice data from disk to the internal Flash ROM
Saving Plug-in voice data in the internal Flash ROM to disk
66
68
DELETE PLUG-IN CUSTOM VOICE Deleting Plug-in voice data in the internal Flash ROM
68
PLUG-IN SETTING
Setting various parameters related to the Plug-in Board
Selecting the Board Preset/Custom Voices
69
[BOARD VOICE]
21 PART SELECT
–
43, 100
[LEFT], [RIGHT 1], [RIGHT 2],
[RIGHT 3]
–
Selecting a part for voice assignments
57
22 PART ON/OFF
[LEFT HOLD]
[LEFT]
–
–
–
–
–
Turning Left Hold function on or off
Turning LEFT part on or off
61
57
57
57
57
[RIGHT 1]
Turning RIGHT 1 part on or off
Turning RIGHT 2 part on or off
Turning RIGHT 3 part on or off
[RIGHT 2]
[RIGHT 3]
23 UPPER OCTAVE
[-], [+]
–
Transposing Upper parts (RIGHT1~3) up or down by one octave
18
24 VOCAL HARMONY
[TALK]
–
Calling up the Talk Settings related to the microphone sound
Turning the DSP(8) effect for the microphone sound on or off
Turning Vocal Harmony on or off
80
80
80
81
82
82
[DSP(8)]
–
–
[V.H.(9)]
[SELECT]
VOCAL HARMONY SELECT
3 BAND EQ
Selecting/producing the Vocal Harmony effect
[MIC SETUP]
Adjusting the gain of each band for the microphone sound
NOISE GATE
Gating the input when the input signal from the microphone falls be-
low a specified level
COMPRESSOR
Holding down the output when the input signal from the microphone
exceeds a specified level
82
VOCAL HARMONY
MIC
Determining how the Vocal Harmony is controlled
Determining how the microphone sound is controlled
82
83
Basic Operation
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Structure
The 9000Pro features three different memory provisions for storing your original data: Flash ROM, RAM,
and Disk.
➀ Flash ROM
The 9000Pro includes special Flash ROM memory. Unlike conventional ROM, Flash ROM can be overwritten — allowing you
to store your own original data. The contents of Flash ROM are maintained even when the power is turned off.
➀RAM
This is the conventional “internal” user memory of the 9000Pro. For sampling purposes, memory can be expanded to a max-
imum of 65 MB, by installing SIMM modules. Any edited data in RAM memory is lost when the power is turned off. Always
store any important data in RAM to Flash ROM or save the data to disk.
➀Disk
The 9000Pro also allows you to store your data to floppy disk, an optional hard disk drive, or an external (optional) SCSI
device (such as a hard disk drive, or removable storage).
• Floppy disk
• Hard disk
(optional installed)
• SCSI device
RAM
Flash ROM
Disk
System Backup – See next page.
(optional connected)
Back up
Restore
One Touch Setting
Registration Memory
Music Database
One Touch Setting
Save/Back up
Panel settings
(page 214)
Registration Memory
Music Database
Load/Restore
Back up
Restore
Save/Back up
Load/Restore
Save/Back up
Load/Restore
Multi Pad Creator
Multi Pad
Flash Style
Multi Pad
Flash Style
Setup
(page 141)
Style Creator
(page 126)
Save/Back up
Load/Restore
Save
Setup (MIDI settings, etc.)
Setup
Store
(page 214)
Organ Flutes
(page 62)
Organ Flutes
Effect data
Organ Flutes
Effect data
Load
Save
Mixing Console
(page 144)
Load
Save
Plug-in Custom Voice
Plug-in Custom Voice
Custom Voice
Plug-in Custom Voice
Custom Voice
(page 100)
Load
Save
Custom Voice
(page 92)
Load
Sampling
(page 84)
Can be expanded by installing
optional SIMM memory
modules (page 185).
Save
Load
Wave
Song
Song Creator
(page 110)
Save
Storing your original data to Flash ROM erases the corresponding factory data programmed to the Flash ROM (at the corre-
sponding number locations). The following data types are affected:
• One Touch Setting
• Registration Memory
• Music Database
• Multi Pad
• Flash Style
• Setup
If you've deleted the factory-set data, you can use the Restore function (page 154) to load a copy of it from the included disks
(page 6).
54
Basic Operation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Structure
➀ About System Backup
Important information about the 9000Pro’s current settings, such as the selected
style number, the Split Point setting, the fingering mode, and MIDI-related set-
tings, can be retained in the Flash ROM. To do this, press the quarter note icon
Keep in mind the following points when
using the memory devices.
• Song files can be played back without
loading the data to Flash ROM or inter-
nal memory (RAM).
• Style files can be played back from
disk to Flash ROM. They can also be
played directly from disk by using the
Disk Direct function (page 25).
button (
) from the main display and follow the on-screen instructions.
For a complete list of System Backup parameters, refer to page 214.
To return the System Backup parameters to the original factory settings, simulta-
neously hold down the [DEMO] button and turn on the power.
• For saving/loading any data other than
style data between disk and Flash ROM,
use the Disk/SCSI function (page 150).
Saving/loading style data is done with
the Style Manager functions (page 74).
• One Touch Setting data can be saved/
loaded with the Flash style; however, it
cannot be saved/loaded separately by
itself.
[System Backup]
LCD button
• Music Database data can be loaded
with the Disk Style data. Actually, the
One Touch Setting data programmed
with the Disk Style data is loaded as the
Music Database. The Music Database
data cannot be saved/loaded separately
by itself.
➀ About the Style Data
This diagram illustrates the relationship among the style data stored to different types
of memory. In addition to normal memory provisions, the 9000Pro features special
Flash ROM memory. Unlike conventional ROM, Flash ROM can be overwritten —
allowing you to store your own original data. A number of pre-programmed styles
have been loaded to the Flash ROM; these are referred to below as “Flash styles.”
• Storing your original style data
to Flash ROM erases the fac-
tory programmed Flash style
data (at the corresponding
number locations). If you've
deleted the factory-set data,
you can use the Restore func-
tion (page 154) to load a copy
of it from the included disks
(page 6).
Accompaniment playback
See page 20.
Disk Direct
See page 25.
Preset Style
Flash Style
Disk Style
Save
Load
Style Manager
See page 74.
Store
• Flash Style data can be
loaded/saved with or without its
One Touch Setting setups.
Style Creator
See page 126.
Preset styles are stored to conventional ROM. These are permanent and cannot be
overwritten. However, you can use these as a basis for creating your own original
backup and organize your original style data.
Playing the disk styles can be done in two ways: 1) loading the style data to Flash ROM
and playing it back as a Flash style, or 2) playing it back directly from disk, with the
Disk Direct function (page 25).
➀ About the Plug-in Voice Data
See page 64.
Basic Operation
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Demonstration
The 9000Pro has been programmed with a variety of demonstration songs that showcase the
sophisticated capabilities of the instrument. The songs can be played individually or all together, in
their normal sequence or random order.
DEMO
Select a song cate-
gory.
Select a song category.
Use this button to start/stop
playback.
Turn Repeat on or
off.
When set to ON,
the selected song
or sequence of
songs will be
Select a song.
repeated until the
STOP LCD button
is pressed.
Select a play mode.
ALL
All demo songs are played back in sequence.
All demo songs are played back in random order.
Only the selected song is played.
RANDOM
SINGLE
Press either the [DEMO] button or the [EXIT] button to exit from the demo
mode and return to the normal play mode display when you’ve finished playing
the demo songs.
56
Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voices
The 9000Pro has a huge selection of various musical instrument voices which you can play. Try out the
different voices referring to the voice list at the end of this manual (page 192).
For basic information on selecting voices, refer to page 16 in the “Quick Guide.”
Quick Guide
on page 16
Parts: Right1, Right2, Right3 and Left
The 9000Pro allows you to individually select and play up to four parts at the same
time in a number of ways. A range of voices can be assigned to each part.
➀ Keyboard Functions
As explained above, the keyboard of the 9000Pro can sound three different voices.
Here’s a short summary of the various ways of playing voices.
•
•
Playing a Single Voice
LEFT
RIGHT1
RIGHT2
UPPER
RIGHT3
LOWER
PART ON/OFF
Voice R1
Playing Two Voices in a
layer
LEFT
RIGHT1
RIGHT2
UPPER
RIGHT3
LOWER
PART ON/OFF
Voice R1 + R2
•
•
PlayingThree Voices in a
layer
LEFT
RIGHT1
RIGHT2
UPPER
RIGHT3
LOWER
PART ON
/
OFF
Voice R1 + R2+ R3
Split Point
Playing Separate Voices
with the Right and Left
Hands
LEFT
RIGHT1
RIGHT2
UPPER
RIGHT3
LOWER
PART ON
/
OFF
Voice R1, R2, R3
(Upper)
Voice L
(Lower)
Split Point
•
Playing a Chord with the
Left hand – See page 20.
Voice R1, R2, R3
(Upper)
Auto Accompaniment
section (Lower)
Each key has a note name; for example, the lowest
(farthest left) key on the keyboard corresponds to
E0 and the highest (farthest right) key to G6.
C#1 Eb1 F#1 Ab1 Bb1
C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1
E0-B0
C1-B1
C2-B2
C3-B3
C4-B4
C5-B5
C6-G6
➀ Part Selection
The desired voice can be selected for the current selected part described above.
To select the desired part, press the corresponding [PART SELECT] button.
If you want to turn only a specified part on, press the corresponding LCD button
from the main display.
PART SELECT
F
G
H
PART SELECT
I
LEFT HOLD
LEFT
RIGHT1
RIGHT2
UPPER
RIGHT3
J
LOWER
PART ON/OFF
Reference
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voices
Voices
The 9000Pro actually includes several voice categories: the 9000Pro original preset
voices, percussion kits, the XG voices, the Organ Flutes voices, and Custom voices.
In addition, you can expand the amount of voices by installing the Plug-in Boards to
the 9000Pro.
Using the optional
Plug-in Board(s).
➀ Preset Voices
The Preset Voices are specially recorded and programmed voices exclusive to the 9000Pro.
• Keyboard Percussion.....When one of the Drum Kit or SFX Kit voices in the [PERCUS-
SION] group is selected, you can play 28 different drums and
percussion instruments or SFX (sound effects) sounds on the
keyboard. The drum and percussion instruments played by the
various keys are marked by symbols below the keys. Some of
the instruments in the different drum kit voices sound different
even though they have the same name, while others are
essentially the same.
• The Transpose, Tune, Sustain,
Left Hold, and Modulation
functions do not affect the
Drum Kit or SFX Kit voices.
Kit assignments.
• XG Voices ......................Yamaha’s XG format is a major new enhancement to the GM
(General MIDI) System Level 1 format. It provides a larger
number of voices as well as greater expressive control and a
wide range of effects. XG also ensures continued compatibility
with future instruments and soft-ware.
Simultaneously hold down the desired VOICE button and press
the [XG] button to call up the XG voice display of the corre-
sponding category.
• Organ Flutes Voices.......See page 62.
• Custom Voices ...............See page 92.
➀ Plug-in Voices
This group of special voices is available when an optional Plug-in Board is installed.
See page 64 for details.
58
Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voices
➀ Maximum Polyphony
The 9000Pro features maximum polyphony of 126 notes. Since Auto Accompaniment
uses a number of the available notes, the full 126 notes will not be available on the key-
board when Auto Accompaniment is used. The same applies to the Voice R2, Voice R3,
Voice L, Multi Pad, and Song functions. When the maximum polyphony is exceeded,
notes are played using last-note priority.
If a Plug-in Board has been installed, the polyphony of the installed board accordingly
increases the available polyphony for the entire 9000Pro.
9000 Pro
Plug-in Board
Plug-in Board
(e.g., PLG150-PF)
64-note maximum
polyphony
(e.g., PLG100-XG)
32-note maximum
polyphony
126-note maximum
polyphony
PITCH BEND Wheel & MODULATION Wheel
Use the 9000Pro PITCH BEND wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away from
you) or down (roll the wheel toward you) while playing the keyboard. The PITCH
BEND wheel is self-centering and will automatically return to normal pitch when
released.
• The maximum pitch bend
range can be changed (page
145).
The Modulation function applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard.
Moving the MODULATION wheel all the way towards yourself minimizes the depth
of the effect, while rotating it away from yourself increases it.
With many of the Plug-in Voices, you can control various other parameters (e.g., filter,
etc.) by moving the MODULATION WHEEL (page 103).
• In order to avoid accidentally
applying modulation set the
depth to its minimum setting.
Reference
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voices
Quick Guide
on page 35
Voice Effects
The [VOICE EFFECT] buttons turn the corresponding effects on (indicator lit) or off
(indicator out).
TOUCH
SUSTAIN
DSP(4~7)
SLOW/ FAST
HARMONY/ECHO POLY
/
MONO
➀ Touch
The keyboard of the 9000Pro is equipped with a touch response feature that lets you dynam-
ically and expressively control the level of the voices with your playing strength — just as on
an acoustic instrument.
Two types of keyboard touch affect this function: Initial Touch and After Touch.
• Initial Touch .....With this function, the 9000Pro senses how strongly or softly you play
the keys, and uses that playing strength to affect the sound in various
ways, depending on the selected voice. This allows you to play with
greater expressiveness and add effects with your playing technique.
• After Touch......With this function, the 9000Pro senses how much pressure you apply to
the keys while playing, and uses that pressure to affect the sound in var-
ious ways, depending on the selected voice. This allows you to play with
greater expressiveness and add effects with your playing technique.
➀ Sustain
When this Sustain feature is ON, all notes played on the keyboard other than the Left part
have a longer sustain.
The Sustain level can be adjusted via the Custom Voice Creator function (page 99).
➀ DSP (4~7) and Slow/Fast
With the digital effects built into the 9000Pro you can add ambiance and depth to your music
in a variety of ways—such as adding reverb that makes you sound like you are playing in a
concert hall.
• For details about how to select
a DSP effect type or set related
parameters, refer to page 146.
• For details about how the effect
blocks are connected, refer to
the “Effect Signal Flow Chart”
on page 147.
• The DSP (4~7) buttons turn independent effects on or off for the Right 1 (DSP4), Right
2 (DSP5), Right 3 (DSP6) and Left (DSP7) parts.
• The [SLOW/FAST] button can switch between variations of the DSP effect. For exam-
ple, this lets you change the rotating speed (slow/fast) of the rotary speaker effect.
➀ Harmony/Echo
See pages 35 and 164.
➀ Poly/Mono
This determines whether the part’s voice is played monophonically (only one note at a time)
or polyphonically (up to 126 notes at a time).
When this is set to “MONO,” the Portamento effect can be used (depending on the selected
voice) by playing legato. The degree of the Portamento effect applied differs depending on
the voice. The Portamento Time can be adjusted from the Mixing Console (page 145).
60
Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voices
Other Keyboard-related Functions
➀ Left Hold
LEFT HOLD
This function causes the Left part voice to be held even when the keys are released. Non-
decaying voices such as strings are held continuously, while decay-type voices such as piano
decay more slowly (as if the sustain pedal has been pressed).
This function is especially effective when used with the auto accompaniment. For example, if
you play and release a chord in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard (with the
Left part on and the Left voice set to Strings), the strings part sustains, adding a natural rich-
ness to the overall accompaniment sound.
➀ Transpose
RESET
With this function, you can transpose the pitch of the 9000Pro up or down over a range of ±2
octaves in semitone steps. Three transposing methods (Keyboard, Song, and Master) are
available; select the desired method in the Function display (page 162), then use the
[TRANSPOSE] buttons to change the value.
• Keyboard
The [TRANSPOSE] buttons affect the pitch of the keyboard sound, the accompaniment
pitch, and the pitch of the Multi Pads for which Chord Match has been set to on. Note that
the transposition is applied from the next note (or accompaniment chord) played, after
one of the [TRANSPOSE] buttons has been pressed.
• Song
The [TRANSPOSE] buttons affect only the song playback.
• Master
The [TRANSPOSE] buttons affect the overall pitch of the 9000Pro.
Normal pitch (transpose value of “0”) can be recalled at any time by pressing both the [<] and
[>] buttons simultaneously.
The transposition can be adjusted from the Mixing Console display (page 145).
➀ Octave Change
Refer to the Quick Guide on page 18.
UPPER OCTAVE
RESET
Reference
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick Guide
on page 19
Organ Flutes
In addition to the many organ voices in the [ORGAN] voice category, the 9000Pro has an ORGAN
FLUTES voice which can be assigned to the currenty selected part and edited by pressing the VOICE
[ORGAN FLUTES] button.
Basic Procedure
Press the [ORGAN
FLUTES] button.
Adjust the parameters.
Select this to call up the Preset
Organ Flutes display.
Select this to call
up the display of
the Volume/
Attack settings.
Select this to call up the display
of various settings.
Adjust the Footage.
Use button [1] to adjust the 16’
or 8’ footage.You can select the
desired footage (16’ or 8’) with
the [E] LCD button.
• The Organ Flutes settings are
applied to the currently
selected part. Custom settings
can be stored as a User Organ
Flutes voice, but the current
part cannot itself be stored.
For example, you can edit the
Organ Flutes settings from the
R1 part and store them, then
reselect those settings from
the R3 part.
You can select the
number to call up
your original settings.
• The echo, tremolo, and trill
effects set via the Harmony/
Echo function (page 164) may
not affect the Organ Flutes
sound as expected.
Call up the Store display.
Select the number to be stored and store your settings.
➀ Parameters
Organ Type
This parameter specifies the type of organ tone generation to be simulated: Sine or Vin-
tage.
Rotary SP Speed
The Rotary SP Speed LCD button alternately switches between the slow and fast ro-
tary speaker speeds when a rotary speaker effect is selected for the Organ Flutes (see
“DSP Type” below), and the VOICE EFFECT [DSP(4-7)] button is turned on (the Rotary
SP Speed LCD button has the same effect as the VOICE EFFECT [DSP SLOW/FAST]
button).
Vibrato On/Off
This LCD button alternately turns the vibrato effect for the Organ Flutes voice ON or
OFF.
62
Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Organ Flutes
Vibrato Depth
Footage
Can be set to any of three levels via the Vibrato Depth LCD button. The button sequen-
tially selects a depth of “1”, “2”, or “3”.
The footage settings determine the basic sound of the organ flutes.
The term “footage” is a reference to the sound generation of traditional pipe organs, in
which the sound is produced by pipes of different lengths (in feet). The longer the pipe,
the lower the pitch of the sound. Hence, the 16’ setting determines the lowest pitched
component of the voice, while the 1’ setting determines the highest pitched component.
The higher the value of the setting, the greater the volume of the corresponding foot-
age. Mixing various volumes of the footages lets you create your own distinctive organ
sounds.
Volume
Mode
Adjusts the overall volume of the Organ Flutes. The longer the graphic bar, the greater
the volume.
The MODE control selects between two modes: FIRST and EACH. In the FIRST
mode, attack is applied only to the first notes played and held simultaneously; while the
first notes are held, any subsequently played notes have no attack applied. In the
EACH mode, attack is applied equally to all notes.
Attack
The ATTACK controls adjust the attack sound of the ORGAN FLUTE voice. The 4’, 2
2/3 ‘ and 2’ controls increase or reduce the amount of attack sound at the corresponding
footages. The longer the graphic bar the greater the attack sound.
Length
The LENGTH control affects the attack portion of the sound producing a longer or
shorter decay immediately after the initial attack. The longer the graphic bar the longer
the decay.
Response
The Response control affects both the attack and sustain portion of the sound, increas-
ing or decreasing the response time of the initial swell and release, based on the
FOOTAGE controls. The higher the value the slower the swell and release.
Reverb Depth
Chorus Depth
DSP on/off
For details about the digital effects, see page 145.
DSP Depth
Vibrato Speed
Determines the speed of the vibrato effect controlled by the Vibrato On/Off and Vibrato
Depth above.
DSP Type
Determines the DSP effect type to be applied to the Organ Flutes voice. Normally this
will be one of the six available Rotary Speaker effects. If any other type of effect is se-
lected the Rotary SP Speed LCD button in the main ORGAN VOICE editing display will
not control rotary speaker speed. Instead, it will have the same effect as the VOICE
EFFECT [SLOW/FAST] button.
Slow/Fast
Slow/Fast Determines whether the DSP variation (Slow/Fast) will be set to Slow or Fast when the
Organ Flutes voice is selected (when the Voice Set function is ON — page 163).
Value
Sets the DSP variation (Slow/Fast) parameter value (e.g., “LFO Freq” for a Rotary
Speaker effect) when the DSP variation (Fast) is turned on.
EQ Low
EQ High
The EQ parameters determine the Frequency and Gain of the Low and High EQ bands.
Reference
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick Guide
on page 42
Plug-in Voices
By installing an optional Plug-in Board to the 9000Pro, you can gain instant access to a whole new assort-
ment of amazing voices.
Instructions on selecting and playing the Plug-in Voices are given in the Quick Guide on page 42. In the
following section, you'll learn more about how the Plug-in Voices are used and managed, and how they fit
into the 9000Pro's system.
Guidelines
➀ Memory Structure of the Plug-in Voices
You learned about the Plug-in Voices and Board Voices in the Quick Guide on page 43. In the illustration below, we'll go into
greater detail about how they are used. This shows various aspects of the Plug-in Manager function, which is used to manage
(save/load) Plug-in Voice data on disk.
The relationship between the devices (Disk, Flash ROM, and Plug-in Board) may seem a little complex; however, the basic prin-
ciples are easy to grasp. One important thing you should remember is that you can work with and manage the voice data from
the 9000Pro itself or from a connected computer. From the 9000Pro, you can edit and manage the voice data in Flash ROM cre-
ated via the Plug-in Custom Voice Creator (page 100). From a computer, you can create and edit voice data directly on the
Board. Also keep in mind that any data in RAM memory is not saved until you specifically save it to disk.
Functions in the
Plug-in Manager
Plug-in Custom Voice Creator
(page 100)
Store
9000Pro
*
Plug-in Board
Flash ROM
**
*
Board Preset Voice
(ROM)
**
Plug-in Custom Voice
Board Custom Voice
**
***
Board Custom Voice
(RAM)
****
***
Native System
Parameter
(RAM)
Native System
Parameter
Bulk Send
Plug-in Custom
Voice Load
(page 66)
PC connected to the
9000Pro, running
XGworks (or XGworks
lite) and the appropriate
Plug-in software for
voice editing.
System Parameter
Load (page 66)
Plug-in Custom Voice Creator
(page 100)
Save (page 68)
Calling up the Board voices directly from the Plug-in Board.
Board Custom
Voice Load (page 66)
*
**
Selecting a Plug-in Voice calls up the corresponding
parameters (such as effect settings, etc.) from 9000Pro
Flash ROM and the corresponding Board Voice from the
Plug-in Board.
Disk
Auto Loaded when turning the power ON. Auto Load can be
set via Plug-in setting (page 69)
***
All of the parameter settings for one board
can be saved to a single file, which can
then be loaded to the 9000Pro.
Board Custom Voice Backup
in the Plug-in Custom Voice Creator function (page 108)
****
64
Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Plug-in Voices
➀ Board Custom Voices
As mentioned above, the Board voices are the internal voices of the Plug-in Board, and provide the basic material for the
Plug-in voices as played from the 9000Pro. Among the Board voices are a special set of voices — Board Custom voices —
which can be edited from a computer connected to the 9000Pro. Each Plug-in Board comes with its own special editing soft-
ware (to be used as a plug-in with XGworks), and the Board Custom voices are edited with this software. However, if you
want to keep any edits that you make to the voices, you must save the data to the 9000Pro with the Board Custom Voice
Backup function, since any data in the RAM memory on the board is lost as soon as the power is turned off.
➀ Board Preset Voices
These Board Voices are pre-programmed to the Plug-in Board and cannot be edited from a computer connected to the
9000Pro.
➀ Plug-in Custom Voices
Before the Board voices can be selected and played from the 9000Pro, they are “converted” to Plug-in voices. By using the
Custom Voice Creator function, you can edit the various parameters of the Plug-in voices and create your own original voices.
➀ About the Plug-in Boards
Plug-in Boards give you an enormous amount of additional sonic flexibility and power. When installed, they work seamlessly
and transparently within the system of the 9000Pro — meaning that you can use their sounds and functions just as if they were
built right into the 9000Pro at the factory!
The boards that are available for and can be installed to the 9000Pro are described below. These boards are not simply a source
of more voices, they are full-featured tone generators in their own right, and they let you not only upgrade the 9000Pro system
by adding more polyphony for example, but they also let enhance and edit the sounds with a variety of parameters. Three types
of boards are available: Single Part, Multi Part, and Effect. The Single Part and Multi Part boards can be used with the 9000Pro.
Please note, however, that Effect Plug-in Boards (e.g., PLG-100VH) cannot be used with the 9000Pro.
➀ Single Part Plug-in Boards
Single Part Plug-in Boards let you add a completely different synthesizer or tone generator and play its voices by using a sin-
gle part of the 9000Pro. Keep in mind that the Single Part boards can only be used for one part (R1 - R3, L, Song Creator) at
a time (see pages 42 and 125).
• Analog Physical Modeling Plug-in Board (PLG150-AN)
Using Analog Physical Modeling (AN) synthesis, the very latest digital technology is
used to accurately reproduce the sound of analog synthesizers.
• Additional Plug-in Boards will
be available in the future.
• Piano Plug-in Board (PLG150-PF)
A massive 16MB of waveform memory is dedicated to the reproduction of piano
sounds. This board offers 136 stereo sounds, including a number of acoustic and
• The Board Custom Voices
electric pianos, and up to 64-note polyphony.
(RAM) described on page 64
are not available in some Plug-
in Boards (e.g., PLG150-PF,
PLG100-VL, PLG100-DX) .
• Advanced DX/TX Plug-in Board (PLG100-DX, PLG150-DX)
The sounds of the DX7 are available on this Plug-in Board. Unlike PCM-based tone
generators, this board uses the powerful FM Synthesis system — the same as found
on DX-series synthesizers — for extraordinarily versatile and dynamic sound shap-
ing potential. Sounds are compatible with those of the DX7, and the board can even
receive DX7 data via MIDI bulk dump.
• Included with each Plug-in
Board is a floppy disk featuring
special demo songs. You can
play these demo songs on the
9000Pro (XG Plug-in System
format only) using the Song
Player function. Refer to the
Owner’s Manual of your partic-
ular Plug-in Board for details
on the demo songs.
• Virtual Acoustic Plug-in Board (PLG100-VL, PLG150-VL)
With Virtual Acoustic (VA) synthesis, the sounds of real instruments are modeled
(simulated) in real time, giving a degree of realism that cannot be achieved using
conventional PCM-based synthesis techniques. When playing these sounds using
an optional MIDI Wind Controller (WX5), you can even capture some of the physical
feel of woodwind instruments.
➀ Multi-Part Plug-in Board
Multi-Part Plug-in Boards let you expand the voice polyphony of the 9000Pro by giving you a full 16 independent instrumental
parts. This type of board allows you to use the maximum polyphony of the 9000Pro for your keyboard performance. For
example, this is especially useful when playing the Organ Flutes voices, which require many notes of polyphony. (See HINT
on page 69.)
Please note that the voices of the Multi Part boards cannot be played from the 9000Pro's keyboard.
• XG Plug-in Board (PLG100-XG)
This Plug-in Board is a 16-part XG sound generator.You can play back XG/GM song
files using the rich variety of sounds and effects on this board.
Reference
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Plug-in Voices
Plug-in Manager
This function lets you manage the Plug-in Voice related parameters as disk files.
The following three types of parameters (described in the illustration on page 64) are
available:
Plug-in Custom Voices
These can be edited via the Plug-in Custom Voice Creator func-
tion (page 102).
Native System Parameters
These can be edited via the Native System Parameter Edit func-
stalled board.
Board Custom Voices
These can be edited via your computer. See pages 100 and 106
for details.
Basic Procedure
1Select a Plug-in Voice
category.
3Select the desired function.
2Select this to call up the
Plug-in Manager display.
4Execute the selected function.
The operations for each function corresponding to step #4 are covered in the following
explanations.
Quick Guide
Step#3 on page 42
➀ Load Plug-in Custom Voice......................................................................................
The explanations here apply to step #4 above.
➀ All
The three types of parameters explained in the chart above can all be loaded together. Use
the instructions here for loading in step #3 of the Quick Guide on page 42.
Select this to
display the
property of the
selected file.
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
PAGE CONTROL
If an optional SCSI device is connected
or the optional internal hard disk is
installed, select the appropriate device.
See page 150 for details.
Select the file to be loaded.
See page 151 for details on directory/file
selection.
BACK
NEXT
66
Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Plug-in Voices
Select the destination memory.
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
Follow the on-screen instructions.
➀ Individual
This method lets you individually load the three types of parameters explained in the chart on
page 66.
Select this to
display the
property of the
selected file.
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
PAGE CONTROL
If an optional SCSI device is connected
or the optional internal hard disk is
installed, select the appropriate device.
See page 150 for details.
Select the file to be loaded.
See page 151 for details on
directory/file selection.
BACK
NEXT
See below about this function.
Choose one of the
three methods for
selecting files.
See page 151 for
instructions on
selecting files.
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
Disk
Flash ROM
Follow the on-screen instructions.
You can select the desired Plug-in
Voice and load it to the desired loca-
tion in Flash ROM.
See "CAUTION" on page 151.
Reference
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Plug-in Voices
➀ Save
This allows you to copy Plug-in Voice data from Flash ROM to disk.
The explanations here apply to step #4 on page 66.
• The Plug-in Voice related data
in Flash ROM (page 64) is
maintained even if the Plug-in
Board has been removed.
Make sure to execute the save
operation if you have important
data in Flash ROM that you
wish to keep.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
Select the appropriate Slot number cor-
responding to the board which applies to
the voice parameters you wish to save to
disk.
Select QUICK or COMPLETE.
See below about these two types of sav-
ing methods.
Quick Save
Saves all the Plug-in Custom Voice, Native System
parameters, and the Board Custom Voice data in Flash
ROM to a disk.
Complete
Save
Used for backing up the Board Custom Voice data from
the Plug-in board to Flash ROM and saves all the Plug-
in Custom Voice, Native System parameters, and the
Board Custom Voice data in Flash ROM to a disk.
➀ Delete
This allows you to delete Plug-in Voice data in Flash ROM.
The explanations here apply to step #4 on page 66.
CAUTION
• You can clear all the Plug-in Voice parameters in
Flash ROM by using this button. After executing this
operation, the voice of the selected slot cannot be
used.Turn the power OFF and then turn the power
ON to use this board with default settings
Choose one of the three
methods for selecting files.
See page 151 for instruc-
tions on selecting files.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
Select the voice to be deleted.
68
Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Plug-in Voices
➀ Plug-in Setting
This lets you set other useful settings for the Plug-in Board.
The explanations here apply to step #4 on page 66.
You can store the settings in this display to Flash
ROM by using this button.
This function is for Multi Part Plug-in Boards (e.g.,
PLG150-XG), and lets you select the tone genera-
tor for XG disk song playback.
When "SLOT 1" or "SLOT 2" is selected, the
installed Plug-in Board is used as the tone gener-
ator for the XG disk song playback.
When "INTERNAL" is selected, the 9000Pro inter-
nal tone generator is used.
See the HINT below for information on how to use
this function effectively.
Set Auto Load to ON or
OFF.
See the illustration on
page 64.
This parameter is available when the
same (or same type) of Plug-in
Boards (e.g., the PLG100-DX and
the PLG150-DX) are installed in the
two slots. When the appropriate
boards are installed and this is set to
on, the two boards effectively func-
tion as one, and are assigned to a
single part (R1, R2, R3, or L), effec-
tively doubling the total polyphony.
When this is set to ON, you can
select the Plug-in voice only via the
[SLOT1] button. Please note that the
[SLOT2] button cannot be used.
• If you have installed a
PLG150 Board to SLOT 1
and a PLG100 Board to
SLOT 2 (or, in other words,
installed a higher level board
of the same type to SLOT 1),
and have set POLY EXPAN-
SION to ON, you may expe-
rience certain problems
when playing the voices.
See page 109.
Using the SONG TG (Tone Generator) Function
• For example, when set to SLOT 1:
If you are playing back XG song data
with the 9000Pro, you can use an XG
Plug-in Board installed to Slot 1 as a
dedicated tone generator — freeing up
the polyphony of the internal tone gen-
erator to be used exclusively for your
keyboard performance. This is espe-
cially convenient when playing an
Organ Flutes voice, which requires
many notes of polyphony.
Slot 1
Slot 2
• For example, when set to INTERNAL:
XG song playback
16 parts
Port 0
Port 1
16 parts
16 parts
Slot 1
Slot 2
Port 2
In this setup, you can play back up to 48 different parts from
sequencing software on a computer, using the three tone genera-
tors of the 9000Pro: the internal tone generator, and two installed
XG Plug-in Boards. To play back the song with the settings above,
make the appropriate Thru Port settings (page 173) to 1-8 or OFF,
so that the 9000Pro will properly recognize the MIDI Port data.
Reference
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick Guide
on page 20
Auto Accompaniment
The auto accompaniment feature puts a full backing band at your fingertips.To use it, all you have to do is
play the chords with your left hand as you perform and the selected accompaniment style matching your
music will automatically play along, instantly following the chords you play. With auto accompaniment,
even a solo performer can enjoy playing with the backing of an entire band or orchestra.
This section explains some important functions of the auto accompaniment that are not covered in the
“Quick Guide.” For basic information on playing the auto accompaniment, refer to page 20 in the “Quick
Guide.”
Quick Guide
Step#5 on page 21
Chord Fingerings
The way in which chords are played or indicated with your left hand (on the left side of the keyboard from
the Split Point) is referred to as “fingering.” There are 7 types of fingerings as described below.
➀ Single Finger
Single Finger accompaniment makes it simple to produce beautifully orchestrated accompaniment using major,
seventh, minor and minor-seventh chords by pressing a minimum number of keys on the Auto Accompaniment
section of the keyboard. The abbreviated chord fingerings described below are used:
C
C
7
• For a major chord, press the
root key only.
• For a seventh chord, simultaneously press
the root key and a white key to its left.
Cm
Cm
7
• For a minor chord, simulta-
neously press the root key and
a black key to its left.
• For a minor-seventh chord, simultaneously
press the root key and both a white and
black key to its left.
➀ Multi Finger
The Multi Finger mode automatically detects Single Finger or Fingered chord fingerings, so you can use either type
of fingering without having to switch fingering modes.
➀ Fingered
This mode lets you finger your own chords on the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard, while the 9000Pro
supplies appropriately orchestrated rhythm, bass, and chord accompaniment in the selected style.
The Fingered mode recognizes the various chord types listed on the next page.
➀ Fingered Pro
This mode is basically the same as Fingered, with the exception that more than three notes must be played to indi-
cate the chords. Playing the root note and its octave produces accompaniment based only on the root.
➀ On Bass
This mode accepts the same fingerings as the Fingered mode, but the lowest note played in the Auto Accompani-
ment section of the keyboard is used as the bass note, allowing you to play “on bass” chords (in the Fingered mode
the root of the chord is always used as the bass note).
➀ On Bass Pro
This mode is basically the same as On Bass, with the exception that more than three notes must be played to indi-
cate the chords. Playing the root note and its octave produces accompaniment based only on the root.
➀ Full Keyboard
When this advanced auto-accompaniment mode is engaged the 9000Pro will automatically create appropriate
accompaniment while you play just about anything, anywhere on the keyboard using both hands.You don’t have to
worry about specifying the accompaniment chords. Although the Full Keyboard mode is designed to work with
many songs, some arrangements may not be suitable for use with this feature. Try playing a few simple songs in
the Full Keyboard mode to get a feel for its capabilities.
The 9000Pro recognizes chords you play in the Auto Accompaniment section of keyboard and produces
appropriate chords, even if auto accompaniment is off (as long as the Left part is set to on). Chords are
recognized according to the Fingered mode, even if the mode is actually set to another mode.
This setting is especially effective when used with the Vocal Harmony or the Harmony/Echo.
70
Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Accompaniment
Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode
➀ Example for “C” chords
(9)
(9)
(9)
(#11)
(b5)
b5
C
C
C
CM
Cm
CM
Cm
CM
Cm
C
CM
7
C
6
7
7
6
7
6
(9)
(9)
(11)
Cm
7
Csus
CmM
Caug
CmM
CM aug
Cm
Cm
4
7
7
7
7
(9)
b5
b5
CmM
(b9)
(b13)
Cm
Cdim
Cdim
C
7
C
C
C
7
7
7
7
7
7
(#9)
(9)
(#11)
(13)
b5
C
C
C
C
C
C aug
C sus
4
7
7
7
7
1+2+5
7
7
7
Chord Name [Abbreviation]
Major [M]
Normal Voicing
1 - 3 - 5
Display for root “C”
C
• Notes in parentheses can be
omitted.
Add ninth [(9)]
1 - 2 - 3 - 5
C(9)
Sixth [6]
1 - (3) - 5 - 6
1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6
1 - 3 - (5) - 7
1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7
C6
• If you play any three adjacent
keys (including black keys), the
chord sound will be canceled
and only the rhythm instru-
ments will continue playing
(Chord Cancel function).
Sixth ninth [6(9)]
Major seventh [M7]
Major seventh ninth [M7(9)]
C6(9)
CM7
CM7(9)
CM7#11
Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)]
1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or
1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7
• Playing a single key or two
same root keys in the adjacent
octaves produces accompani-
ment based only on the root.
Flatted fifth [(b5)]
1 - 3 - b5
C(b5)
Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5]
Suspended fourth [sus4]
Augmented [aug]
1 - 3 - b5 - 7
1 - 4 - 5
CM7b5
Csus4
Caug
1 - 3 - #5
1 - (3) - #5 - 7
1 - b3 - 5
• A perfect fifth (1 + 5) produces
accompaniment based only on
the root and fifth which can be
used with both major and
minor chords.
Major seventh augmented [M7aug]
Minor [m]
CM7aug
Cm
Minor add ninth [m(9)]
1 - 2 - b3 - 5
1 - b3 - 5 - 6
1 - b3 - (5) - b7
1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7
1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7)
1 - b3 - (5) - 7
1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7
1 - b3 - b5 - b7
1 - b3 - b5 - 7
1 - b3 - b5
Cm(9)
Cm6
Minor sixth [m6]
• The chord fingerings listed are
all in “root” position, but other
inversions can be used — with
the following exceptions:
Minor seventh [m7]
Cm7
Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)]
Minor seventh eleventh [m7(11)]
Minor major seventh [mM7]
Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)]
Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5]
Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5]
Diminished [dim]
Cm7(9)
Cm7_11
CmM7
CmM7_9
Cm7b5
CmM7b5
Cdim
m7, m7b5, 6, m6, sus4, aug,
dim7, 7b5, 6(9), m7_11,
1+2+5.
• Inversion of the 7sus4 chord is
not recognized if the 5th is
omitted.
Diminished seventh [dim7]
Seventh [7]
1 - b3 - b5 - 6
Cdim7
C7
• The auto accompaniment will
sometimes not change when
related chords are played in
sequence (e.g. some minor
chords followed by the minor
seventh).
1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or
1 - (3) - 5 - b7
Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)]
Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)]
Seventh ninth [7(9)]
1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7
1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7
1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7
C7(b9)
C7b13
C7(9)
• Two-note fingerings will pro-
duce a chord based on the pre-
viously played chord.
Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)]
1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or
C7#11
1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7
Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)]
Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)]
Seventh flatted fifth [7b5]
Seventh augmented [7aug]
Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4]
One plus two plus five [1+2+5]
1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7
1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7
1 - 3 - b5 - b7
1 - 3 - #5 - b7
1 - 4 - 5 - b7
C7(13)
C7(#9)
C7b5
C7aug
C7sus4
C1+2+5
1 - 2 - 5
Reference
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Accompaniment
Fade-ins and Fade-outs
The [FADE IN/OUT] button can be used to produce smooth fade-ins and fade-outs
when starting and stopping the accompaniment.
To produce a fade-in/out :
FADEIN/OUT
1
2
Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button so that its indicator lights.
Start the accompaniment
The sound will gradually fade in. The [FADE IN/OUT] indicator will flash
during the fade-in, and then go out when full volume has been reached.
3
Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button so that its indicator lights.
The indicator will flash during the fade out, then the accompaniment will stop
when the fade-out is complete.
Tempo Control
Each style of the 9000Pro has been programmed with a default or standard tempo;
however, this can be changed to any value between 32 and 280 beats per minute by
either before the accompaniment is started or while it is playing.
TEMPO
D A T A
ENTRY
When you select a different style while the accompaniment is not playing, the “default”
tempo for that style is also selected. If the accompaniment is playing, the same tempo
is maintained even if you select a different style.
Rotating the data dial to the
right (clockwise) increases
the value, while rotating it
to the left (counterclock-
wise) decreases it.
➀ Tap Tempo
This useful function lets you press the [TAP TEMPO] button to tap out the tempo and
automatically start the accompaniment at that tapped speed. Simply tap (press/release)
the button (four times for a 4/4 time signature), and the accompaniment starts automat-
ically at the tempo you tapped. The tempo can also be changed during playback by tap-
ping the button twice at the desired tempo.
➀ When a 4-beat style is selected
Tap 4 times
TAP
TAP
TAP
TAP
TAP TEM
TAP TEM
TAP TEM
TAP TEM
*When a 3-beat style is
selected, tap 3 times.
72
Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Accompaniment
Synchro Stop
When the Synchro Stop function is engaged, accompaniment playback will stop com-
pletely when all keys in the auto-accompaniment section of the keyboard are released.
Accompaniment playback will start again as soon as a chord is played. The BEAT indi-
cators will flash while the accompaniment is stopped.
For basic information on playing the auto accompaniment, refer to page 20 in the
“Quick Guide.”
• Synchro Stop cannot be set to
on when the fingering mode is
set to Full Keyboard or the auto
accompaniment on the panel is
set to off.
1
2
Turn AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT on.
Turn SYNC STOP on.
SYNC START is automatically set to on when SYNC STOP is turned on.
SYNC STOP START
3
As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto
accompaniment starts.
Split Point
Auto Accompaniment
section
4
5
6
The auto accompaniment stops when you release
your left hand from the keys.
Playing a chord with your left hand automatically
restarts the auto accompaniment.
Stop the auto accompaniment.
One Touch Setting
For basic information on using the One Touch Setting feature, refer to page 24 in the “Quick
Guide.”
This section covers how to create your own One Touch Setting setups (4 setups per style).
For a list of One Touch Setting setup parameters, refer to page 214.
1
2
3
Select a style.
Set up the panel controls as required.
Press the [MEMORY] button and press one of the [ONE
TOUCH SETTING] buttons: [1] through [4].
MEMORY
1
3
2
4
REGISTRATION
PROGRAMMABLE
ONE TOUCH SETTING
ONE TOUCH SETTING
Reference
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Accompaniment
Style Manager
The 9000Pro styles are divided into two groups : Preset styles and Flash styles.
Flash styles pre-recorded to Flash styles I through VIII can be replaced by the desired data
with the Style Manager function.
Disk Styles
Save
Flash Styles
in
Flash ROM
Load
Style Manager
Since all Flash style data is stored to Flash ROM, any data in the selected Flash style location will be erased and replaced by
your new settings. This includes the factory programmed Flash style data (Flash styles I through VIII). If you've deleted the
factory-set data, you can use the Restore function (page 154) to load a copy of it from the included disks (page 6).
For details about Flash ROM, refer to "Memory Structure" on page 54.
Basic Procedure
1Select a style
3Select the desired function.
4Execute the selected function.
category.
2Select this to call up the
Style Manager display.
The operations for each function corresponding to step #4 are covered in the following expla-
nations.
➀ Load Style into Flash ROM
This allows you to load style data from disk to Flash ROM.
Select this to display the property of
Choose one of the three methods
for selecting files (see page 151).
Select this to listen to the selected
style file.
When set to “with OTS”, you can
load the selected style file with its
One Touch Setting setups.
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
You can select the desired location
in Flash ROM as the destination.
See "CAUTION" on page 151.
If an optional SCSI
See page 151 for details
on directory/file selection.
device is connected or
the optional internal hard
disk is installed, select
the appropriate device.
See page 150 for details.
74
Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Accompaniment
➀ Save Style from Flash ROM
This allows you to save style data from Flash ROM to disk.
When set to “with OTS,” you
can save the selected style
file with its One Touch Set-
ting setups.
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
See page 151.
If an optional SCSI device is connected or
the optional internal hard disk is installed,
select the appropriate device.
See page 151 for details on
directory/file selection.
See page 150 for details.
➀ Copy Style in Flash ROM
This allows you to copy style data to a different category/number in Flash ROM.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
➀ Delete Style in Flash ROM
This allows you to delete style data in Flash ROM.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
➀ Swap Style in Flash ROM
This allows you to exchange the data between files in different categories/numbers.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
➀ Rename Style in Flash ROM
This allows you to rename the style file name.
Follow the on-screen instructions. Name entry is described on page 46.
➀ Defragment Flash ROM
If you’ve used the Style Manager for a while, and/or have loaded and manipulated a
number of styles, the Flash ROM may have become “fragmented” (meaning that nor-
mally contiguous files have been broken up into several fragments). Defragmenting the
Flash ROM increases the contiguous empty space on the disk, allowing you to more
effectively use the remaining memory capacity. To defragment the Flash ROM, follow
the on-screen instructions.
• The 9000Pro can load files containing Registration Memory data created on the PSR-8000, without having to convert them.
However, please note that the five Flash styles listed in the left column below should not be deleted or replaced with differ-
ent styles, since they are used to substitute for the corresponding PSR-8000 styles listed in the right column.
9000Pro Flash Style
Number
PSR-8000
Category
Name
Category
16 beat
Disco
Name
Analog Pop
II
III
IV
X
4
1
1
5
6
Analog Ballad
6/8 Trance
Bebop
Lovely Shuffle
Musette
Synth Boogie
Bebop
Pop Shuffle 1, 2
Musette
Swing & Jazz
R&B
XIII
March & Waltz
Reference
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick Guide
on page 26
Music Database
For basic information on using the Music Database feature, refer to page 26 in the “Quick Guide.”
This section covers how to create your own Music Database setups.
For a list of Music Database setup parameters, refer to page 214.
Creating the Music Database
Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.
Create the Music Database by following the on-screen instructions.
Since all Music Database data is stored to Flash ROM, any data in the selected Music Database location will be erased
and replaced by your new settings. This includes all of the factory programmed preset setups. If you've deleted the fac-
tory-set data, you can use the Restore function (page 154) to load a copy of it from the included disks (page 6).
Music Database
setups in Flash ROM
All preset setups can be edited.
For details about Flash ROM, refer to “Memory Structure” on page 54.
76
Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick Guide
on page 34
The Multi Pads
This section explains two important functions of the Multi Pads that are not covered in the “Quick Guide.”
For basic information on using the Multi Pads, refer to page 34 in the “Quick Guide.”
Turning Chord Match and Repeat On/Off
STOP
M.PAD BANK 1~60
Press the [+]/[-] buttons
simultaneously.
BANK VIEW
1
3
2
4
Select “REPEAT” or
“CHORD MATCH.”
Select this to store
the settings. (Refer
to the “CAUTION”
note below.)
Select a Bank.
Turn Repeat of each pad On or Off.
Use the same operation to turn
Chord Match On/Off.
➀ Repeat
Unless the Repeat function is on for the selected pad, playback will end automatically
as soon as the end of the phrase is reached. A phrase can be stopped while it is playing
by pressing the MULTI PAD [STOP] button.
➀ Chord Match
If a Multi Pad is played while Auto Accompaniment is playing and the Chord Match
function for that pad is ON, the phrase will be automatically re-harmonized to match
the accompaniment chords.
• Bank #59 (factory preset) of
the Multi Pads can be used to
send various MIDI messages.
This convenient feature lets
you control the following MIDI
functions of an external device
priate Multi Pad.
Since all Multi Pad data is stored to Flash ROM, all of the factory programmed Multi Pad banks will be replaced by your
new settings. If you've deleted the factory-set data, you can use the Restore function (page 154) to load a copy of it from
the included disks (page 6).
Pad 1 All Note Off
Pad 2 Reset All Controllers
Pad 3 Start(FA)
Pad 4 Stop(FC)
Multi Pad banks
60 banks in Flash ROM
• These MIDI messages are out-
put via the MIDI OUT B termi-
nal and are unaffected by the
MIDI Transmit settings (page
175).
All banks can be replaced by the
new created pad data.
BANK 01
1
2
3
4
For details about Flash ROM, refer to “Memory Structure” on page 54.
• Bank #60 (factory preset) of
the Multi Pads can be used to
call up various settings of the
Scale Tuning feature (page
158). This lets you change the
tuning of the individual notes
by simply pressing the appro-
priate Multi Pad.
CAUTION
The Repeat and Chord Match settings for the Multi Pads are stored together in a group of 58 banks. For this rea-
son, you should be careful when making edits and storing your edits, since all 58 banks will be overwritten with
the new data.
Reference
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick Guide
on page 30
Disk Song Playback
The 9000Pro Song mode allows song data to be played back from a floppy disk, an optional hard disk or
an optional SCSI device.
This section explains some important functions of song playback that are not covered in the “Quick
Guide.” For basic information on playing songs, refer to page 30 in the “Quick Guide.”
Selecting a Song
The 9000Pro allows you to play back songs from disk, as described in the operation
steps below. Keep in mind that steps #2 and #3 are identical to the other disk file selec-
tion operations for the instrument.
1Insert the floppy disk (containing the
files shown below) into the floppy disk
drive, and press the [SONG I] button.
2This selects the “pop up” page shown below.
• 01arabe2.mid
• 02sheher.mid
• 03puck.mid
• 04edud15.mid
• 05sylphe.mid
• 06praul6.mid
If an optional hard disk
• 07saraba.mid
• 08dancin.mid
• 09vals12.mid
• 10paspie.mid
has been installed or an
optional SCSI device has
been connected, the
appropriate device must
be selected here.
These steps are identi-
cal to all other 9000Pro
disk file selection opera-
tions (for example, see
page 151).
•
Classic01
Classic01a
Classic01b
01lente.mid
3
02g_walk.mid
You can return to the next
highest level by pressing
the [IN] LCD button while
the cursor is located at
•
•
Classic02
Classic02a
Classic02b
.
• In the file selection display, a
maximum 250 file or directory
names can be displayed. If the
number of files or directories
exceeds 250, the 251st and
beyond (according to alphabet-
ical order) are not shown.
Classic03
Classic03a
Classic03b
PAGE CONTROL
4
BACK
NEXT
5Select the desired song.
78
Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disk Song Playback
Other Functions: Viewing the Lyrics and Fast Forward/Reverse
Select this to call up the
Lyrics display.
Select this during play-
back to move rapidly for-
ward through the song.
This button lets you
pause playback and then
start again from the same
point in the song.
Select this during play-
back to move rapidly back-
ward through the song.
Song Setup
This function determines certain playback settings for song data other than note on/off
(for example, lyrics).
When the Ultra Quick Start function here
is set to ON, the 9000Pro reads all initial
non-note data of the song at the highest
possible speed, then automatically slows
down to the appropriate tempo at the first
note of the song. This allows you to start
actual song playback as quickly as possi-
ble, with a minimum pause for reading of
data.
Press this button to
save the microphone
and Vocal Harmony
settings to the
selected song.
See below for details.
• When set to SEARCH ON, the 9000Pro
reads the lyric data when the song is
selected, allowing the lyrics to be dis-
played immediately after you press the
[START/STOP] button.
• When set to SEARCH OFF, the 9000Pro
reads the lyric data after playback is
started. This may result in a slight delay
before the lyrics are displayed.
• When set to NEVER DISPLAY, the lyrics
will not be shown in the LCD display dur-
ing playback.
➀ About Vocal Harmony/Microphone Settings for a Song
The Vocal Harmony and Microphone settings can be stored as Song Setup data. When
using the Vocal Harmony function with a song, this convenient feature lets you store all
relevant Vocal Harmony and Microphone settings with the song, so that they are auto-
matically called up the next time you select the song. The actual settings that can be
stored are listed below.
• You can use the metronome
function during playback. See
page 166 for details.
• Vocal Harmony type and parameter settings............................................................ Page 81
• Vocal Harmony Vocoder track settings (keyboard and song) ................................... Page 82
• Effect type and parameter settings (for the microphone sound)............................ Page 146
• Volume, Pan, Reverb depth, Chorus depth and
DSP (8) depth (for the microphone sound)............................................................. Page 145
Reference
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick Guide
on page 32
Vocal Harmony
This unique feature incorporates advanced voice-processing technology to automatically produce vocal
harmony based on a single lead vocal. An extensive selection of preset Vocal Harmony “types” are pro-
vided, each functioning in one of three main “modes” which determine how the harmony notes are
applied. In addition to straightforward harmony, the 9000Pro Vocal Harmony feature can change the pitch
and timbre of the harmony and/or lead vocal sound to effectively change the apparent gender of the
voice. So, for example, if you are a male singer you can have a two-part female vocal backup (the Vocal
Harmony feature can add up to two harmony notes to the main lead voice). A full range of parameters is
provided to allow detailed editing to produce precisely the type of vocal harmony sound you need.
Setting Up
Quick Guide
on page 32
➀➀Setting up the microphone ................................................................................................
Please note the following points :
• A standard dynamic microphone with an impedance of about 250 ohms is recommended. (The 9000Pro does not sup-
port phantom-powered condenser microphones.)
• The Yamaha MZ106s microphone is recommended for use with the 9000Pro.
• The level of the microphone sound may vary considerably according to the type of microphone used.
• Placing a microphone which is connected to the 9000Pro too close to those of an external sound system connected to
the 9000Pro can cause feedback. Adjust the microphone position and the INPUT VOLUME level or MASTER VOLUME
control level if necessary, so that feedback does not occur.
➀ Using the “LINE” setting
CAUTION
Normally, since you will be using a microphone, you may never need to use the
“LINE” setting. However, this may come in handy if you want to use a pre-recorded
• Never use the “MIC” setting
with a line level signal (CD
player, cassette deck, etc.).
source (on CD or cassette tape) with the vocal harmony feature. (For best results, the
source should be a single vocal only; any other singers and instruments in the mix
Doing this could damage the
9000Pro and its input func-
tions.
could produce unexpected or undesired results.)
1
Set the INPUT
VOLUME control to
“MIN.”
2
Set the MIC/LINE panel
switch to “LINE.”
3
Connect the source to the
MIC/LINE IN jack.
• Since the MIC/LINE IN
jack is highly sensitive,
it may pick up and pro-
duce noise when noth-
ing is connected. To
avoid this, always set
the INPUTVOLUME to
minimum when noth-
ing is connected to the
MIC/LINE IN jack.
4
Adjust the INPUT VOLUME control.
Play the source at the highest expected volume, and
adjust the INPUT VOLUME control to get the optimum
input level (as in the “Setting Up” instructions above).
Applying the Vocal Harmony Effect
This turns Talk settings on or off.
The Talk settings are effective when using the microphone for
speech or “rapping” (as opposed to singing).
Refer to page 165.
• If you experience distorted or out-of-tune
sound from the Vocal Harmony feature,
your vocal microphone may be picking up
extraneous sounds (other than your voice)
— the Auto Accompaniment sound from
the 9000Pro, for example. In particular,
bass sounds can cause mistracking of the
this problem is to ensure that as little
extraneous sound as possible is picked up
by your vocal microphone:
The 9000Pro has a DSP effect (DSP 8) especially for the micro-
phone sound, and this button turns the DSP 8 effect on/off. The
DSP 8 type can be set from the Mixing Console display (page 146).
This turns the Vocal Harmony effect on or off.
• Sing as closely to the microphone as pos-
sible.
• Use a uni-directional microphone.
• Turn down the MASTER VOLUME, ACMP
volume or SONG volume control.
80
Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vocal Harmony
Selecting/Producing the Vocal Harmony effect
Basic Procedure
4Store your
settings.
2Select a Vocal
3
Edit the desired Vocal Harmony
parameters.
1
Press the VOCAL HAR-
MONY [SELECT] button.
Harmony type.
➀ Vocal Harmony Parameters
Chordal Type/Vocoder Type
Harmony Gender Type
Determines how the harmony notes are applied.
Can be set to “Off” or “Auto”. When “Auto”, the gender of the harmony sound is changed automati-
cally.
Lead Gender Type
Determines whether and how the gender of the lead vocal sound (i.e., the direct microphone
sound) will be changed. When “Off” no gender change occurs. When ”Unison”, “Male” or “Female”
is selected the corresponding gender change is applied to the lead vocal. (In this case the number
of harmony notes which can be produced in addition to the lead vocal is reduced to one.)
Lead Gender Depth
Adjusts the degree of lead vocal gender change produced when one of the Lead Gender Types
(above) is selected.
Lead Pitch Correction
Auto Upper Gender Threshold
Auto Lower Gender Threshold
Upper Gender Depth
Lower Gender Depth
Vibrato Depth
When “Correct” is selected the pitch of the lead vocal is shifted in precise semitone steps. This
parameter is only effective when one of the Lead Gender Types is selected.
Gender change will occur when the harmony pitch reaches or exceeds the specified number of
semitones above the lead vocal pitch.
Gender change will occur when the harmony pitch reaches or exceeds the specified number of
semitones below the lead vocal pitch.
Adjusts the degree of gender change applied to harmony notes higher than the Auto Upper Gender
Threshold.
Adjusts the degree of gender change applied to harmony notes lower than the Auto Lower Gender
Threshold.
Sets the depth of vibrato applied to the harmony sound. Also affects the lead vocal sound if a Lead
Gender Type is selected.
Vibrato Rate
Sets the speed of the vibrato effect.
Vibrato Delay
Specifies the length of the delay before the vibrato effect begins when a note is produced.
Sets the volume of the first harmony note.
Harmony1 Volume
Harmony2 Volume
Harmony3 Volume
Harmony1 Pan
Sets the volume of the second harmony note.
Sets the volume of the third harmony note.
Specifies the stereo (pan) position of the first harmony note. When “Random” is selected the ste-
reo position of the sound will change randomly whenever the keyboard is played.
Harmony2 Pan
Harmony3 Pan
Specifies the stereo (pan) position of the second harmony note. When “Random” is selected the
stereo position of the sound will change randomly whenever the keyboard is played.
Specifies the stereo (pan) position of the third harmony note. When “Random” is selected the ste-
reo position of the sound will change randomly whenever the keyboard is played.
Harmony1 Detune
Harmony2 Detune
Harmony3 Detune
Pitch to Note
Detunes the first harmony note by the specified number of cents.
Detunes the second harmony note by the specified number of cents.
Detunes the third harmony note by the specified number of cents.
When “ON” the lead vocal sound “plays” the 9000Pro tone generator system. (However, dynamic
changes in the vocal sound do not affect the volume of the tone generator.)
Pitch to Note Part
Determines which of the 9000Pro parts will be controlled by the lead vocal when the Pitch to Note
parameter is “ON”.
Reference
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vocal Harmony
Changing the Vocal Harmony/Microphone Settings
Basic Procedure
Select the desired
parameter.
Select the desired
parameter.
1Press the VOCAL HARMONY
2Edit the Vocal Harmony/micro-
[MIC SETUP] button.
phone parameters.
➀ 3-Band Equalizer
Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to match the special character
of the room. The sound is divided into several frequency bands, allowing you to correct the sound by raising or
lowering the level for each band.
The 9000Pro features a high grade three-band digital equalizer function for the microphone sound.
• Hz.........................Adjusts the center frequency of the corresponding band.
• dB ........................Boosts (“+” values) or cuts (“-” values) the corresponding band by up to 12 dB.
➀ Noise Gate
This effect mutes the input signal when the input from the microphone falls below a specified level. This effec-
tively cuts off extraneous noise, allowing the desired signal (vocal, etc.) to pass.
• SW .......................“SW” is the abbreviation of Switch. This turns Noise Gate on or off.
• TH ........................“TH” is the abbreviation of Threshold. This adjusts the input level at which the gate
begins to open.
➀ Compressor
This effect holds down the output when the input signal from the microphone exceeds a specified level. This is
useful when recording a signal with widely varying dynamics. It effectively “compresses” the signal, making soft
parts louder and loud parts softer.
• SW .......................“SW” is the abbreviation of Switch. This turns Compressor on or off.
• TH ........................“TH” is the abbreviation of Threshold.This adjusts the input level at which compression
begins to be applied.
• RAT ......................“RAT” is the abbreviation of Ratio. This adjusts the compression ratio.
• OUT .....................Adjusts the output level from the speaker.
➀ Vocal Harmony
The following parameters determines how the harmony is controlled.
•
VOCODER Track...The Vocal Harmony effect is controlled by the notes. This parameter lets you deter-
mine which notes (from the keyboard and/or song data) will control the harmony.
Data dial icon
When set to “MUTE,” the track selected below is muted (turned off) during keyboard
performance or song playback.
Keyboard
• OFF
Keyboard control over harmony is turned off.
• UPPER
• LOWER
Notes played to the right of the split point control the harmony.
Notes played to the left of the split point control the harmony.
Song (from disk or external MIDI sequencer)
• OFF
Song data control over harmony is turned off.
• TR1-TR16 When playing back a song from disk or external MIDI sequencer, the
note data recorded to the assigned song track controls the harmony.
82
Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vocal Harmony
• Balance................This lets you set the balance between the lead and Vocal Harmony. Raising this value
increases the volume of the Vocal Harmony and decreases that of the lead vocal. If it is
set to the maximum value of 127, you will hear only the Vocal Harmony from the exter-
nal speakers; if it is set to 0, only the lead vocal will be heard.
• Mode....................All of the Vocal Harmony types fall into one of three modes which pro-
duce harmony in different ways. The harmony effect is dependent on
the selected Vocal Harmony Mode and Track, and this parameter
determines how the harmony is applied to your voice. The three
modes are described below.
• VOCODER The harmony notes are determined by the notes you
play on the keyboard (VOICE R1, R2, R3, L) and/or
song data which includes Vocal Harmony tracks.
• CHORDAL During accompaniment playback, chords played in the
auto accompaniment section of the keyboard control
the harmony. During song playback, chords contained
in song data control the harmony. (Not available if the
song does not contain any chord data.)
• AUTO
The harmony notes are produced in either Vocoder or
Chordal mode according to the current performance
method.
• Chord...................The following parameters specify the song data which will be used for
chord detection.
• OFF
• XF
Chords are not detected.
Chords of XF format are detected.
• TR1-TR16 Chords are detected from note data in the specified
song track.
➀ Microphone
The following parameters determine how the microphone sound is controlled.
• Mute.....................When set to OFF, the microphone sound is turned off.
• Volume .................Adjusts the volume of the microphone sound.
Reference
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick Guide
on page 40
Sampling
This function lets you record your own sounds via a microphone or line source to be played from the key-
board.
During use, sampled sounds are kept in the internal wave RAM memory. The 9000Pro comes with a 1-
megabyte wave memory which can be expanded up to a maximum of 65 megabytes by installing optional
disk.Wave files in standard WAV or AIFF format produced using other equipment can also be used by the
9000Pro.
Setting up
Use the same operation as in “Vocal Harmony” on pages 32 and 80.
pling.
Guidelines for Sampling
➀ What is sampling ?
Technically, sampling is making a digital recording of a sound. The sound could be
your voice or an acoustic instrument (taken from a microphone), or a recorded sound
(from a CD or cassette player). Once it is recorded, the resulting “sample” can be
played at various pitches from a keyboard.
Sampling
Disk
WAV
AIFF
SCSI device connected
to the 9000Pro
Import
Save
Internal Memory (RAM)
Can be expanded by
installing optional SIMM
memory modules (page 185).
Wave data
Save the Custom Voice
with the sample (wave
data) via the Disk Save
function (page 153).
Wave Edit
Waveform Edit
See next page.
Store as a Custom Voice
to Flash ROM (page 92)
• The 9000Pro records at a sam-
ple rate of 44.1 kHz.
• Although the wave memory of
the 9000Pro can be expanded
to 65 megabytes (page 185),
the maximum size of a single
sample recording is 32 mega-
bytes.
Play
➀ Auto Trigger Level
Actually, the 9000Pro does not start sampling immediately when the [START] LCD
the 9000Pro waits for a signal of a suitable level (set by the trigger level). When it hears
such a signal, it starts sampling.
The Trigger Level can be set in step #10 on page 40.
The higher the trigger level, the louder the signal must be to start (trigger) sampling.
84
Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sampling
To better understand how trigger level works, let’s look at
a specific example — sampling of the phrase “a one and a
two.”
In this phrase, “one” and “two” are louder than the other
words.
Sampling start point
Volume
(level)
Trigger level
a
one
and
a
two
Since the first “a” is lower than the trigger level, the
9000Pro doesn’t actually start sampling until the word
“one.” If you want the phrase to be sampled from the first
word, the trigger level should be set lower.
With this new trigger level setting, the entire phrase will be
sampled. Be careful, however, not to set the trigger level
too low, or else sampling may start from some accidental
or extraneous sound (such as breathing noises, touching
the microphone, etc.).
Time
Sampling start point
Volume
(level)
New trigger
level
a
one
and
a
two
Time
➀ Waves & Waveforms
The terms “wave” and “waveform” have distinct meanings in 9000Pro sampling termi-
nology, as follows:
➀ Wave
A “wave” is the raw audio data created whenever you sample a new sound or import a WAV
or AIFF format wave file. The 9000Pro WAVE EDIT mode includes functions which allow you
to edit this basic data: e.g. resampling to change the sampling frequency, trimming and loop-
ing, normalization for maximum level and minimum noise, etc.
➀ Waveform
All 9000Pro waves are contained in a “waveform”, which is basically a set of parameters
which define the keyboard range over which the wave or waves it contains will play. A wave-
form can contain one or more waves, and waves can be shared by more than one waveform.
Waves in a waveform can be assigned to different ranges of the keyboard, but they cannot be
layered (i.e. they will not sound simultaneously when a single key is played). The 9000Pro
WAVEFORM EDIT mode lets you add or delete waves from a waveform, and assign the
waves to different keyboard ranges.
Sampling
Sound
WAV
AIFF
WAVEFORM
WAVE2
WAVE EDIT
WAVE
WAVE1
WAVE3
WAVE
WAVE
Reference
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sampling
Basic Procedure
2
Select “SAMPLING.”
3
Select the desired menu.
1
Press the [SOUND
CREATOR] button.
4
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Refer to “Quick Guide” on page 40 for details.
The operations for each function corresponding to step #4 are covered in the following
explanations.
Quick Guide
on page 40
Recording a Sample
The following display will be shown in step #9 on page 40.
You can set the START/END
KEY by pressing the desired
key while holding either of the
LCD buttons.
Set this parameter to ON if
you want the sample to play
back at the same pitch over
the entire key range of the
9000Pro.
Set the key range to
which the new sample
will be assigned.
When FIXED PITCH above is set to OFF, the new recorded sample will be assigned to
C3. Notice that the pitch and speed of the sample “follows” the keyboard: Playing keys
lower than the original results in a lower pitch and slower speed; playing higher keys
results in higher pitch and faster speed.
C3
Pitch/speed of
sample goes down.
Pitch/speed of
sample goes up.
START KEY
Original key
END KEY
86
Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sampling
➀ Pre Effect
You can set up a maximum of three DSP effects to be applied to the source sound as it
is sampled. The DSP blocks are connected in series as shown below. The following dis-
play will be shown in step #10 on page 40.
Press this button to
switch between the cur-
rently selected wave and
the currently selected
panel voice.
Select the desired
DSP block.
Select this to call up the
storing display.
Select the desired
type of the selected
DSP block.
Change the balance between the
direct (dry) and effect (wet) sound.
Select the parameter and adjust the
value of the selected parameter.
Note that the contents of the parameter
may be different depending on the
selected DSP type.
Importing Wave Files from Disk
To import previously saved waveform files via the PSR-8000 or standard WAV or AIFF
format files from disk, insert the appropriate disk into the 9000Pro floppy disk drive,
then press the [FILE IMPORT] LCD button in step #3 in "Basic Procedure" on page
86.
Select this and press the
[NEXT] button to call up the
display that imports the
WAV or AIFF format file.
Select this and press the
[NEXT] button to call up the
display that imports the
wave data sampled via the
PSR-8000.
Clearing Wave Data
The explanations here apply to step #4 of the Basic Procedure on page 86.
Press this button to switch
between the currently
selected wave and the cur-
rently selected panel voice.
Select this to execute the
Clear operation.
Reference
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sampling
Editing Wave data
The illustration below applies to step #4 of the Basic Procedure on page 86.
1
Select a Custom Voice which con-
tains the wave(s) you wish to edit.
3
Select the desired Waveform/Wave
and edit the desired parameters.
This function exports the
current wave as a WAV file
which can be loaded and
used by other instruments or
computers which can handle
the WAV format.
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
4
Store your settings as a
Custom Voice to Flash
ROM.
2
Select the desired menu.
➀ Wave Edit
➀ Resampling
The 9000Pro originally records waves at 44.1 kHz. WAV and AIFF files are also imported as
44.1 kHz waves. The RESAMPLING function lets you reduce the sampling frequency of
waves, thus reducing the amount of memory they occupy. Please note, however, that reduc-
ing the sampling frequency also reduces the sound quality.
• Resampling can cause the
loop points (see Loop Point,
below) to shift, resulting in
unwanted noise. If this hap-
pens use the Loop Point func-
tion to readjust the loop points.
Press this to hear how
the resampled wave will
sound before actually
resampling the wave.
Press this to actually
resample the
selected wave.
Select the desired resampling frequency.
Only resampling frequencies which are
lower than the original sampling fre-
quency will be available.
88
Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sampling
➀ Loop Point
This display determines how your sampled waves play back.
Your sampled waves can be played back in three different ways as follows:
WAVE
START
START
START
END
END
Example
WAVE
WAVE
A
B
C
D
E
Start point Loop Start
point
Loop End
point
LOOP
START
LOOP
END
B, C, D, C, D, C, D ....
Press this to actually edit
the selected wave.
The LEVEL indicators the right of each address
show the signal level at the current address —
the longer the bar, the higher the signal level.
This makes it easier to locate zero-level points
for noise-free trimming and looping.
See above.
When the ONE SHOT or REVERSE is
selected, select either the Start or End
address of the wave.
When the LOOP is selected, select the Start,
Loop Start or Loop End address of the wave.
Press this to automatically
remove all data prior to the
specified Start point and
after the End or Loop End
point of your sample.
When this is turned ON, the LOOP ADDRESS
LCD buttons will automatically only select
points in the wave corresponding to, or adja-
cent to, zero level points.
See the illustration below.
Sample
Sample
Extract
A
B
C
D
E
B
C
D
Loop Start
point
Loop End
point
Loop Start
point
Loop End
point
Start point
Start point
Reference
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sampling
➀ Normalize
This function increases the overall level of the selected wave to ensure that it uses the full
range of digital values. Press the EXECUTE LCD button to normalize the selected wave. No
change will occur if the selected wave already uses the full range of digital values.
➀ Volume/Tune
When this is turned OFF, the pitch of wave
playback will be correspond to keyboard
pitch. When ON, the playback pitch will
remain the same (corresponding to the
pitch of the C3 key) regardless of which key
is pressed.
Set the volume of
the selected wave.
This can be used to tune the selected wave:
COARSE tunes in semitone increments over
a –63 … +63 range, and FINE tunes in 1-cent
increments over a –50 … +50 range.
Press this to actually set the
wave tempo and return to
the parameter display.
Press this to cancel the operation
and return to the parameter display.
Specify the tempo at which
the wave should play.
• When a LOOP is selected the
entire loop is tuned, but the
portion of the loop between the
Loop Start and Loop End
points is adjusted to fit the
specified number of measures.
Specify the number of measures the
wave should play over.
Specify the number of
beats per measure.
This display can be used to “tune” the wave to fit a specified playback tempo. In other words,
the wave is stretched (tuned down) or compressed (tuned up) so that it plays back over the
specified number of measures at the specified time signature and tempo. This capability is
particularly useful when the sample is a phrase rather than a simple sound. The wave will
only play back at the specified tempo, however, when played at its original pitch (usually the
pitch played by the C3 key).
To ensure smooth looping, adjust the Loop Start/Stop point before using this function.
90
Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sampling
➀ Waveform Edit
➀ Add Wave
This function can be used to add a wave from a different waveform to the currently selected
waveform. When a waveform contains two or more waves, the individual waves must be
assigned to different areas of the keyboard (the waves cannot be “layered”).
• The same wave cannot be
added for use in multiple key-
board ranges.
The Start Note at right in the
display can also be speci-
fied by pressing the appro-
priate key on the keyboard
while holding this button.
Press this to actually add
the selected wave.
Specify the note from which the
added wave will begin playing. For
example, if you select C3 as the
Start Note, the original wave will
play up to B2, and the added wave-
form will play from C3 up.
Select the source wave to be added.
➀ Wave Start Note/Volume/Delete Wave
Deletes the selected wave from the
waveform. When a wave is deleted, the
range of the next lowest wave will
expand to include the range originally
covered by the deleted wave. If the
deleted wave is the lowest in the wave-
form (i.e. its START NOTE is C-2) the
range of the next highest wave will
expand downward to include the range
of the deleted wave.
The Start Note can also be
changed by pressing the
appropriate key on the key-
board while holding this button.
The last wave in the waveform cannot
be deleted.
Select a wave to be edited.
Adjusts the volume of the
selected wave in relation to other
waves in the waveform.
Move the start note of the selected wave (see
“Add Wave”, above).
The Start Note of the lowest wave in the wave-
form (i.e. the wave starting at C-2) cannot be
changed. When the Start Note of a wave is
changed, the range of the next lowest wave in the
waveform will expand or contract accordingly.
Reference
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick Guide
on page 40
Custom Voice Creating
The 9000Pro has a Custom Voice Creator feature that allows you to create your own voices. Once you’ve
created a voice, you can store it to a Custom voice location for future recall.
Basic Procedure
• The following voices cannot be
edited via the Custom Voice
Creator.
1
Press the [SOUND
CREATOR] button.
2
Select “CUSTOM VOICE.”
Organ Flutes
Live! StdKit
Live! FunkKt
Arabic Kit
SFX Kit1
SFX Kit2
Plug-in Voice
• Drum or Percussion voices
cannot be edited via Easy Edit.
• Keep in mind that adjustments
made to the parameters may
not make much change in the
actual sound, depending on
the original settings of the
voice.
4
Press this button.
3
Select a Preset voice.
The Custom Voice Creating
mode makes it possible to cre-
ate new voices by editing
some parameters of the preset
voices.
After selecting a voice, press
the [EXIT] button to return
back to this display.
5
Edit the voice parameters.
Select the desired
menu by pressing the
[NEXT]/[BACK] button.
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
6
7
Store the edited voice to Flash ROM by following the on-screen instructions.
Press the [CUSTOM VOICE] button to select the edited voice and play the keyboard.
The operations for each function corresponding to step #5 are covered in the following
explanations.
92
Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Custom Voice Creating
Easy Editing
➀ Parameters
FILTER
EG
Determines the timbre of the voice. See below for details.
The EG (Envelope Generator) parameters affect the volume envelope of
the voice.
See below for details.
VIBRATO
VOLUME
Sets up the vibrato effect. See below for details.
Determines the volume of the voice.
➀ FILTER (FREQ. and RESONANCE)
These settings determine the overall timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a certain fre-
quency range. In addition to making the sound either brighter or more mellow, Filter can be
used to produce electronic, synthesizer-like effects.
• FREQ. ............Determines the cutoff frequency or effective frequency range of the filter.
(See diagram below.)
Higher values result in a brighter sound.
Volume
Volume
Cutoff frequency
Cutoff frequency
Frequency (pitch)
Frequency (pitch)
These frequencies are “passed”
by the filter.
• RESONANCE .Determines the emphasis given to the cutoff frequency, set in Cutoff
above. (See diagram below.) Higher values result in a more pronounced
effect.
Volume
Resonance
Frequency (pitch)
➀ EG
The EG (Envelope Generator) settings determine how the level of the sound changes in time.
This lets you reproduce many sound characteristics of natural acoustic instruments — such
as the quick attack and decay of percussion sounds, or the long release of a sustained piano
tone.
• ATTACK...........Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum level after
the key is played. The higher the value, the quicker the attack.
• DECAY............Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain level (a
slightly lower level than maximum).The higher the value, the quicker
the decay.
Level
DECAY
ATTACK
RELEASE
Time
• RELEASE .......Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after the key is
released. The higher the value, the shorter the release.
KEY ON
KEY OFF
➀ VIBRATO
• DEPTH............Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect (see diagram).
Higher settings result in a more pronounced Vibrato.
SPEED
• SPEED............Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect (see diagram).
• DELAY ............Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing
of a key and the start of the Vibrato effect (see diagram). Higher
settings increase the delay of the Vibrato onset.
DEPTH
DELAY
Time
Reference
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Custom Voice Creating
Full Editing
➀ Element selection
Each 9000Pro voice can have up to eight separate “elements.” These elements are the basic sonic building blocks of
the sound — with each element having its own waveform, envelope generator settings, and other parameters.
When editing in the E1:WAVEFORM,
E2:EG, E3:FILTER, or E4:LFO pages you
can select the element to be edited, set
the maximum number of elements to be
used by the voice, and mute individual
elements via the ELEMENT page
accessed by this button.
You can select the desired
element by pressing these
buttons.
Sets the element to be
edited when you return
to the editing pages.
Sets the maximum
number of elements to
be used by the voice.
These parameters individually turn the corre-
sponding elements ON or OFF. The circular
indicators next to the element numbers in the
upper section of the display indicate the mute
status for each element.
➀ Parameters
➀ VOICE
Select the desired menu.
Sets the amount of Filter, Amplitude
and LFO modulation types (PMOD,
FMOD, AMOD) applied via the
MODULATION wheel and via key-
board After Touch response.
Can be used during edit-
ing to compare the sound
of the original voice with
the edited voice.
See page 98 for details about LFO.
Sets the overall volume of
the current edited voice.
Selects the desired scale (pitch) curve
to be used by the current edited voice
for the 9000Pro keyboard.
The CURVE LCD button provides a
choice of four keyboard initial touch sen-
sitivity curves, and the SENS LCD but-
tons adjust initial touch sensitivity.
94
Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Custom Voice Creating
➀ E1:WAVEFORM
See page 85 for details about Waveform.
Use the CATEGORY, VOICE, and WAVE-
FORM LCD buttons to select the waveform
for the custom voice. (This is the “raw”
sound on which the voice is based.) Wave-
forms created by the SAMPLING feature
(page 84) are also available for selection in
the “SAMPLING” CATEGORY.
NOTE LIMIT specifies the
note range over which the
voice will sound, and
VELOCITY LIMIT sets the
maximum velocity range for
the voice.
• When a Drum Kit is selected, the WAVE-
FORM parameter is replaced by the
INSTRUMENT parameter, and individual
instruments can be selected rather than
waveforms.
These parameters adjust
the pitch of the voice.
COARSE tunes in semitone
steps and FINE tunes in 1-
cent steps (a cent is 1/100th
of a semitone).
Sets the position of the voice in the stereo field.
Sets the amount of delay before the sound is heard
— in other words, the time between when the key is
pressed and when the envelope begins. The higher
the value the longer the delay.
Sets the waveform volume.
• Example for NOTE LIMIT
LOW
HIGH
• When the voice OCTAVE is set
to a value other than “0”, the
range specified by the NOTE
LIMIT parameters is shifted by
the corresponding amount and
some notes may not sound. If
this happens check the R1
OCTAVE setting in the MIXING
CONSOLE TUNE display.
No sound is
produced.
No sound is
produced.
• NOTE LIMIT and VELOCITY
LIMIT are not available for the
Drum Kits.
• Example for VELOCITY LIMIT
127
No sound is produced.
HIGH
LOW
No sound is produced.
0
Reference
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Custom Voice Creating
➀ E2: EG
An acronym for Envelope Generator, a block that modifies the level of the tone genera-
tor from the moment that a note is played until the sound decays to silence. The Ampli-
tude EG controls the volume level, the Pitch EG controls the pitch, and the Filter EG
controls the filter cutoff frequency.
Indicates the EG settings as a
diagram.
Resets the currently selected
EG parameters to their most
basic settings.
Amplitude (volume), pitch or filter cutoff frequency
LEVEL
ATTACK
RATE
DECAY1 RATE
DECAY2 RATE
DECAY3 RATE
RELEASE RATE
SUSTAIN RATE
INITIAL
LEVEL
TIME
KEY ON
KEY OFF
* Higher rate values produce faster variation.
• AMP. RATE and AMP. LEVEL (Amplitude EG settings)
The AMP. RATE parameters are time-related; they determine how long it takes for the sound
volume to change from level to level (as set in AMP. LEVEL).
The AMP. LEVEL parameters are volume-related; they determine how loud or soft the volume
changes are over time (as set in AMP. RATE).
AMP.RATE
AMP.LEVEL
ATTACK
Sets the rate of variation from key-on to the maximum attack level.
DECAY1
DECAY2
DECAY3
Set the rate of variation between the maximum attack level and the levels set by the
AMP LEVEL DECAY1 and DECAY2 parameters and the final level, respectively.
RELEASE
SUSTAIN
INITIAL
Sets the rate of variation from the level at key-release to level 0 when SUSTAIN is off.
Sets the rate of variation from the level at key-release to level 0 when SUSTAIN is on.
Sets the initial level of the envelope.
DECAY1
DECAY2
Set the levels following the elapsed time of DECAY 1 and DECAY 2, respectively.
• PITCH RATE and PITCH LEVEL (Pitch EG settings)
The PITCH RATE parameters are time-related; they determine how long it takes for the
sound’s pitch to change from level to level (as set in PITCH LEVEL).
The PITCH LEVEL parameters are pitch-related; they determine how much the sound devi-
ates from normal pitch over time (as set in PITCH RATE).
PITCH RATE
DECAY1
DECAY2
DECAY3
Set the rate of variation between the initial pitch envelope level and the levels set by
the PITCH LEVEL DECAY1, DECAY2, and DECAY3 parameters, respectively.
RELEASE
Sets the rate of variation from the level at key-release to the level set by the PITCH
LEVEL RELEASE parameter.
PITCH LEVEL
INITIAL
Sets the initial pitch of the envelope.
DECAY1
DECAY2
DECAY3
Set the amounts of pitch change following the elapsed time of DECAY 1 and DECAY
2, respectively.
RELEASE
Sets the final pitch of the envelope; the pitch goes to this point (at the RELEASE rate)
after the key is released.
96
Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Custom Voice Creating
• FILTER RATE and FILTER LEVEL (Filter EG settings)
The FILTER RATE parameters are time-related; they determine how long it takes for the
sound’s timbre to change from level to level (as set in FILTER LEVEL).
The FILTER LEVEL parameters are filter-related; they determine how much the sound
changes in timbre over time (as set in FILTER RATE). A setting of “0” is the default value.
FILTER RATE
INITIAL
Sets the length of time the initial filter envelope level will be maintained. Higher values
correspond to shorter time.
DECAY1
DECAY2
DECAY3
Set the rate of variation between the initial filter envelope level and the levels set by the
FILTER LEVEL DECAY1, DECAY2, and DECAY3 parameters, respectively.
RELEASE
SUSTAIN
INITIAL
Sets the rate of variation from the offset at key-release to the offset set by the FILTER
LEVEL RELEASE parameter when SUSTAIN is off.
Sets the rate of variation from the offset at key-release to the offset set by the FILTER
LEVEL SUSTAIN parameter when SUSTAIN is on.
FILTER LEVEL
Sets the initial timbre of the envelope.
DECAY1
DECAY2
DECAY3
Set the amounts of timbre change following the elapsed time of DECAY 1, DECAY 2,
and DECAY 3, respectively.
SUSTAIN
When SUSTAIN is on, this sets the final timbre of the envelope; the filter setting chang-
es to this point (at the RELEASE rate) after the key is released.
➀ E3: FILTER
The 9000Pro features two independent filters. (For basic information about the filters,
see page 93.)
Sets the amount of peak resonance applied to FILTER 1.
Higher values produce more resonant emphasis.
The TYPE parameters specifies the touch-sensitivity curve to
be applied to the dynamic filters, and the SENS parameters
sets the sensitivity of the filters to touch control. Higher values
produce higher sensitivity.
Resets the currently selected EG parameters to
their most basic settings.
Sets the cutoff frequency of Filter2.
Selects the type of Filter2.
Sets the cutoff frequency of Filter1.
Selects the type of Filter1.
Filter types
LPF (Low Pass Filter)
HPF (High Pass Filter)
Level
Level
These frequencies are
“passed” by the filter.
Cutoff range
Range passed
Frequency
Frequency
Cutoff frequency
Cutoff frequency
BPF (Band Pass Filter)
BEF (Band Elimination Filter)
Level
Level
Range passed
Cutoff range
Range passed
Cutoff range
Range passed
Cutoff range
Frequency
Frequency
Center frequency
Center frequency
Reference
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Custom Voice Creating
➀ E4: LFO
An acronym for Low Frequency Oscillator, a block that produces a low frequency sig-
nal. The LFO can be used to modulate pitch, filter cutoff frequency, or amplitude to
create a wide range of modulation effects.
Vibrato effect based on LFO modulation, with
a variable delay between the time a key is
played and the beginning of the vibrato effect.
See the diagram below.
Selects the LFO wave. Various kinds of modulated sounds
can be created depending on the selected wave.
See the diagram below.
Sets the speed of LFO variation.
Abbreviation for "Amplitude Modulation." This determines
how greatly the LFO will affect the output level. Larger val-
ues widen the range of the volume change.
Abbreviation for "Filter Modulation." This determines how greatly
the LFO will affect the filter cutoff frequency. Larger values widen
the range of change in the cutoff frequency.
Abbreviation for "Pitch Modulation." This determines how greatly the LFO will affect
the pitch. Larger values widen the range of the change in pitch.
• TYPE (LFO wave type)
Saw
Triangle
• DELAY TIME
Short Delay
Long Delay
Key on
Key on
• DELAY RATE
Rate
Time
Key on
Delay
98
Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Plug-in Custom Voices
Just as with the preset voices, you can use the voices of the Plug-in Board as basic material for crafting
your own original Plug-in voices. Once you’ve created a voice, you can store it to a Plug-in Custom voice
location for future recall.
Guidelines
➀ Memory Structure of the Plug-in Voices
The illustration below is basically same as the one on page 64.
voice data on the Flash ROM/board. The illustration below, however, shows the relationship betweeen each menu of
the Plug-in Custom Voice Creator function (explained in this chapter) and the voice data on the Flash ROM/board.
Disk
Save
Functions in the Plug-in
Custom Voice Creator
Plug-in Manager
(page 66)
9000Pro
Load
*
Plug-in Board
Flash ROM
**
*
Board Preset Voice
(ROM)
**
Plug-in Custom Voice
Board Custom Voice
**
***
Board Custom Voice
(RAM)
****
*****
Native System
Parameter
(RAM)
Native System Parameter
*****
Bulk Send
Store
Store
PC connected to the
9000Pro, running
Voice Edit
(page 102)
Native System
Parameter Edit
(page 105)
XGworks (or XGworks
lite) and the appropriate
Plug-in software for
voice editing.
Calling up the Board voices directly from the Plug-in Board.
Voice Edit on Computer
*
**
Selecting a Plug-in Voice calls up the corresponding parameters (such as effect
settings, etc.) from 9000Pro Flash ROM and the corresponding Board Voice from the
Plug-in Board.
(page 106)
Auto Loaded when turning the power ON. Auto Load can be set via Plug-in setting
(page 69)
***
Board Custom Voice Backup (page 108)
****
*****
Automatically loaded from Flash ROM to the Board RAM when turning the power ON.
After editing the Board Custom Voice and Native System Parameter, you should
execute the Bulk Send operation (see above) and the store operation (page 101.
100 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Plug-in Custom Voices
Basic Procedure
1
2
Press the [SOUND
CREATOR] button.
Select "PLUG-IN
VOICE."
Steps #3 - #5 (described in detail on page 106) are optional.
Use these operations if you wish to edit the Board Custom
Voices and the Native System Parameters on which the Plug-
in Custom Voices are based.
6
Select a menu for editing the
voice parameters via the panel
operations.
3
Select a menu for edit-
ing the Board Custom
Voices on a computer, if
necessary.
• See page 172 for details
about connecting a com-
puter. Please note that the
MIDI A terminal (or the TO
HOST terminal) should be
used when editing the
Board Custom Voices on a
computer.
• When editing the Board
Custom Voices using a
computer, XGworks or
XGworks lite and its Plug-
in Editor Software are
needed.
• When editing the Board
Custom Voices, place
check marks next to all the
event types of MIDI Thru
Filter in XGworks or
4
Edit the voice parame-
ters on a computer.
After completing edit-
ing, use the Bulk Send
operation to transfer the
edited data from the
computer to the board.
Select an original voice.
The Custom Voice Creating mode
makes it possible to create new
voices by editing some parameters
of the Plug-in Custom Voices. After
selecting a voice, press the [EXIT]
button to return back to this display.
XGworks lite. (Refer to the
owner’s manual of
XGworks or XGworks lite
for details.)
5
Execute the Board Cus-
tom Voice Backup oper-
ation.
7
8
Edit the voice parameters via the panel operations.
Store the edited voice to Flash ROM.
Editing operations (corresponding to step #4 or #7) are covered in the following expla-
nations.
Reference 101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Plug-in Custom Voices
Voice Editing
➀ Board Voice selection
The explanations here apply to step #7 on page 101.
• Keep in mind that some of your
editing may have little to no
effect on the actual sound,
depending on the particular
board and the particular
Select the desired
menu and edit the voice
parameters.
Select this to
store the
edited voice
parameters
to Flash
ROM (step
#8 on page
101).
parameter being edited.
Can be used to com-
pare the sound of the
originally selected voice
with the changed voice.
Select the Board Voice.
Before entering the Plug-in Custom Voice Creator function, you have already called up
a specific voice for editing. Selecting a Board voice here lets you determine the basic
sound source, letting you select a variation sound for the voice.
102 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Plug-in Custom Voices
➀ Parameters
The explanations here apply to step #7 on page 101.
➀ E1: EG/VIB
The explanations of each parameter are same as Easy Editing in the Custom Voice Creating
section on page 93.
Select this to go to the
Store display (step #8
on page 101).
Select the desired
menu.
➀ E2: CTRL (Control)
Select this to go to the Store dis-
play (step #8 on page 101).
Select the desired
menu.
These determine how the various
controllers (MODULATION Wheel,
keyboard After Touch, Assignable
Controller) affect the sound. You
can set the amount of Filter and
Amplitude change, as well as the
depth of LFO modulation of pitch
(PMOD), filter (FMOD) and volume
(AMOD). For more information on
LFO, see page 98.
Sets the depth and the offset of the
Initial Touch Sensitivity.
This determines which Control Change number will be used
for Assignable Controller 1. This function is available only for
Plug-in Boards that support the Assignable Controller (AC1).
In this example, the PLG150-AN is installed to the
9000Pro and the MODULATION Wheel is used to
change the sound of the Plug-in voice. Make the follow-
ing settings on the 9000Pro:
1) Set the AC1 CTRL No. to Mod.
2) Select the desired AC1 Control Parameter (e.g.,
P:34) in the Native Part Parameter display.
3) Adjust the AC1 Control Depth in the Native Part
Parameter display.
When you play the keyboard and move the MODULA-
TION Wheel, the sound of the Plug-in voice changes
according to the AC1 Control parameter you selected in
step #2.
Reference 103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Plug-in Custom Voices
➀ E3: NATIVE PRM. (Native Part Parameter)
The word “native” here describes the parameters that are exclusive to each of the Plug-in
Boards. Because of this, the editing screens displayed on the 9000Pro will differ depending
on the particular Plug-in Board being used. For example, when editing Plug-in voices of the
PLG150-DX, parameter names such as “Carrier” and “Modulator” which are unique to the FM
Synthesis system are displayed, as shown below on the left. Likewise, when editing Plug-in
voices of the PLG150-VL, the 9000Pro displays parameters unique to the VL tone generation
system such as “Brth Mode” (Breath Mode) and “Emb CC No.” (Embouchure Control Change
Number), as shown below on the right.
• When editing a DX plug-in voice:
• When editing a VL plug-in voice:
Select the desired parameter.
Specify the value.
For details about Native Part Parameters, refer to the Owner’s Manual of your Plug-in Board.
➀ VOICE SET
See page 163 for details about the Voice Set function.
You can specify the Voice Set data to the Plug-in Custom Voice.
104 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Plug-in Custom Voices
Native System Parameter Editing
The word “native” here describes the parameters that are exclusive to each of the Plug-
in Boards. Because of this, the editing screens displayed on the 9000Pro will differ
depending on the particular Plug-in Board being used. For example, when editing
Plug-in voices of the PLG150-VL, parameter names such as “WX Lip” and “Brth
Curv” (Breath Curve) which are unique to the VL tone generation system are dis-
played, as shown below on the right.
The illustration below applies to step #7 of the Basic Procedure on page 101.
You can store the settings in this display
to Flash ROM by using this button.
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
Select the desired Board.
This lets you change the volume out-
put from the Plug-in Board and adjust
the relative balance among the
9000Pro preset voices and the Plug-
in voices.
Please note the following points.
• The volume balance of the song
using the Plug-in voices is changed
by adjusting this value.
When the same (or same type)
of Plug-in Boards (e.g., the
PLG100-DX and the PLG150-
DX) have been installed in the
two slots, only SLOT 1 is avail-
able.
• When the same (or same type) of
Plug-in Boards have been installed
in the two slots, only the value set
for SLOT 1 is available.
Reference 105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Plug-in Custom Voices
Voice Editing on a Computer
You can edit Board Custom Voices and Native System Parameters from your computer,
using special plug-in software for the XGworks (or XGworks lite) program.
1
2
Connect your personal computer to the 9000Pro.
See page 172 for details about connecting a computer. Please note that the
MIDI A terminal (or the TO HOST terminal) should be used when editing the
Board Custom Voices on a computer.
Install the software to the computer.
The following software is required.
➀ XGworks or XGworks lite
Please see the readme.txt file that can be found in the XGworks lite folder.
➀ CBX driver for Windows or USB driver
Please see the readme.txt file that can be found in the CBX driver folder or in the
USB driver folder.
➀ Plug-in Editor Software for XGworks (lite)
For installation instructions, refer to the Owner’s Manual of your particular Plug-in
Board.
Plug-in Editor Software
PLG100-VL, PLG150-VL
PLG100-DX, PLG150-DX
PLG150-AN
VL Visual Editor
DX Easy Editor, DX Simulator
AN Easy Editor, AN Expert Editor
PF Easy Editor
PLG150-PF
Place check marks next to all the event types of MIDI Thru Filter in XGworks
or XGworks lite, when editing the Board Custom Voices.
3
If necessary, save any important voice data (Board Custom
Voice and Native System Parameter data in Flash ROM) by
using the Plug-in Manager function (page 68).
106 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Plug-in Custom Voices
4
Load the appropriate files to both the 9000Pro and your com-
puter.
➀ When editing voices on an installed Plug-in Board for the first time:
Make sure to load the appropriate files (on the floppy disk included with the
9000Pro) to the 9000Pro as follows. For the PLG150-AN board only, you'll need to
also load the appropriate file (below) to your computer.
File name to be loaded
to the 9000Pro
to the PC
PLG150-AN
PLG150-PF
PLG150-DX
PLG150-VL
150AN CsVce.xvc
150PF CsVce.xvc
150DX CsVce.xvc
150VL CsVce.xvc
150AN CsVce.ANS
—
—
—
➀ When editing voices on an installed Plug-in Board in subsequent editing
sessions:
Before starting to make additional edits to a previously edited voice, also make sure
to load the same edited data (the data that you saved in steps #7 and #8) to both the
Flash ROM (on the 9000Pro) and the computer.
5
Use the same operation as in Steps #1 - #5 of the "Basic Pro-
points.
• In step #4 of "Basic Procedure,” the following display appears on the
9000Pro's LCD.
• As described in step #4 of "Basic Procedure,” use the Bulk Send operation
(XGworks or XGworks lite) to transfer the edited data from the computer
to the board.
• As described in step #5 of "Basic Procedure,” execute the Board Custom
Voice Backup operation.
6
7
8
Execute the Store operation in the Native System Parameter
display (page 105).
Save the edited voice to a disk via the Plug-in Manager func-
tion (page 68).
Save the edited voice to the PC.
Reference 107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Plug-in Custom Voices
Board Custom Voice Backup
Any editing you do to the Board Custom Voices (via computer connected to the
9000Pro) is lost when you turn off the power of the 9000Pro. If you want to keep your
original voice data, you can use the Board Custom Voice Backup function to back up
the edited Board Custom Voices to Flash ROM.
The illustration below applies to step #5 of the Basic Procedure on page 101.
• Some Plug-in Boards (e.g., the
PLG100-DX and the PLG100-
VL) do not support this func-
tion, even though the Board
Custom Voices are available.
Press this to execute the Backup
operation.
Select the desired board.
Troubleshooting when using the Plug-in Boards
General information on how to use the Plug-in Voices is given on pages 42, 43, 64 - 69, and 100 - 108.
This section explains some important details concerning the Plug-in Boards that are not covered in
these pages.
➀ Using the VL Plug-in voices with Harmony function (page 164)
If you are using one of the VL Plug-in Boards (or a monophonic Plug-in voice), the Harmony
effect cannot be used as normal. It is because this type of voice cannot be played polyphoni-
cally.
For example, when the Plug-in voice using the PLG150-VL board is selected as the Right 1
voice and Harmony Assign is set to R1, the following problem happens.
Main note (you play)
Harmony note(s)
This note does not sound.
Only this note (or one of these notes)
sounds with the Right 1 voice.
An alternate solution for this is to assign a different voice to the Harmony part, as shown in the
example settings below.
• Right 1................... Plug-in voice using the PLG150-VL board (e.g., Tenor Sax)
• Right 2................... 9000Pro preset voice (e.g., Miller Night)
• Part R1 and R2...... ON
• ASSIGN................. R2
This workaround lets you play the monophonic Plug-in voice for the melody, and use a different,
yet complementary sound for the Harmony part.
Main note (you play)
Harmony note(s)
The Right 1 voice sounds.
The Right 2 voice sounds.
108 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Plug-in Custom Voices
➀ Using the Plug-in voices in Song Creator
See page 125.
➀ Differences between the PLG150 and PLG100 series
(Single Part Plug-in Boards)
If you intend to use Single Part Plug-in Boards, Yamaha recommends that you use the PLG150
series boards exclusively. For this reason, the included floppy disk features voice data for
PLG150 series Plug-in Boards. However, you can use the PLG100 series if you keep in mind
the following points and anomalies.
➀ Poly Expansion (page 69)
If you have installed a PLG150 Board to SLOT 1 and a PLG100 Board to SLOT 2 (or, in other
words, installed a higher level board of the same type to SLOT 1), and have set POLY EXPAN-
SION to ON, you may experience certain problems when playing the voices.
When you have installed a PLG150-DX to SLOT 1 and a PLG100-DX to SLOT 2:
No problem should result when using the installed voices in both boards; however, if you try
to play voices that do not exist on the PLG100-DX (SLOT2), the sound may drop out period-
ically. Make sure to use only those voices that are common to the two boards.
When you have installed a PLG150-VL to SLOT 1 and a PLG100-VL to SLOT 2:
If the Breath Mode of the PLG150-VL Native Part parameters (a parameter that does not
exist on the PLG100-VL) is set to a value other than "System,” the volume and timbre of the
played voice changes every other note. Make sure to set the Breath Mode to "System" in
this case.
➀ Data compatibility
The Board Custom Voices are not available in PLG100 series boards. As a result, data related
problems will occur when loading the voice data from disk to Flash ROM with the Plug-in Man-
ager function.
When you install the PLG100 series voice data with a PLG150 Board installed:
The Plug-in Voice using the Board Custom Voice may not sound appropriately, if the Board
Custom Voice has been edited and Board Custom Backup has been executed.
This is because the PLG100 series voice data does not contain the Board Custom Voice
data.
When you install the PLG150 series voice data with a PLG100 Board installed:
• The Board Custom Voice data loaded from disk is not used. Therefore, voices using this
data may sound different than expected or than originally programmed.
• If a PLG100-DX board is installed and you select a voice based on a voice that does not
exist on the PLG100-DX board, no sound results.
• The Breath Mode setting of the PLG150-VL Native Part parameters is ignored, and the
Breath Mode setting of the PLG100-VL Native System parameters is available.
➀ Setting the Unison Switch of the PLG150-AN board to on
Plug-in Voices of the PLG150-AN for which Unison Switch (of the Native System parameters)
has been set to on, cannot be played polyphonically — even if the 9000Pro’s POLY/MONO but-
ton is set to POLY. Note that many of the Plug-in Custom Voices in the included disk are delib-
erately set to Unison On, to effectively recreate popular monophonic synthesizer sounds.
Reference 109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick Guide
on page 40
Song Creator
With the powerful and easy-to-use song creating features, you can record your own keyboard perfor-
mances to a floppy disk as a User song, and create your own complete, fully orchestrated compositions.
Each User song lets you record up to sixteen independent tracks. These include not only the voices for
the keyboard performance (R1, R2, R3, L), but also the auto accompaniment parts and Vocal Harmony
effect.
Guidelines for Song Creating
➀ Song Tracks
The tracks which can be recorded to the songs are organized as shown in the chart below.
Track Default Part
Parts that can be set
1
2
Right1
Right1
3
Right1
4
Right1
5
Right1
6
Right1
7
Right1
8
Right1
VOICE R1, R2, R3, L, Accompaniment Style track, Multi Pad 1~4, Vocal Harmony, MIDI
9
Accompaniment Style RHYTHM1 (Sub)
Accompaniment Style RHYTHM2 (Main)
Accompaniment Style BASS
Accompaniment Style CHORD1
Accompaniment Style CHORD2
Accompaniment Style PAD
Accompaniment Style PHRASE1
Accompaniment Style PHRASE2
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
➀ Multi Track Recording/Quick Recording
• Multi Track Recording
In Multi Track Recording, you determine the track assignments (as shown above) before record-
ing. Several tracks can be recorded simultaneously. In addition to being able to record to empty
tracks, you can also re-record tracks that already contain recorded data.
• Quick Recording
In Quick Recording, you can quickly record without having to worry about the track assignments
above. Quick Recording automatically makes track assignments according to the simple rules
below.
When “MANUAL” tracks are set to REC, your keyboard performances (VOICE R1, R2, R3, L) and
Multi Pads playback are recorded to tracks 1~8 as listed below.
When “ACMP” tracks are set to REC, the auto accompaniment parts are recorded to tracks 9 ~
16 as listed below.
Track
Part
Track
9
Part
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Right1
Accompaniment Style RHYTHM1
Accompaniment Style RHYTHM2
Accompaniment Style BASS
Accompaniment Style CHORD1
Accompaniment Style CHORD2
Accompaniment Style PAD
Right2
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Right3
Left
Multi Pad 1
Multi Pad 2
Multi Pad 3
Multi Pad 4
Accompaniment Style PHRASE1
Accompaniment Style PHRASE2
➀ Realtime Recording/Step Recording
• Realtime Recording
This method records performance data in real time, overwriting any data already present in the
destination track. The new data replaces the previous data.
Basic information on recording a new song, refer to the "Quick Guide" on pages 36 and 38.
• Step Recording
This method lets you compose your performance by “writing” it down one event at a time. This is
a non-realtime, step recording method - similar to writing music notation onto paper.
The Song Creator offers two different step recording types: Chord Step (available for Quick
Recording) and Step Recording (available for Multi Track Recording).
110 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Creator
Basic Procedure
1
Press the [DIGITAL RECORDING] button.
2
Select “SONG
CREATOR.”
3
4
Select the desired
menu.
Select the Record
method.
• If an optional hard disk has
been installed or an optional
SCSI device has been con-
nected, you can also save the
recorded song data to these in
step #7.
When selecting "MULTI
TRACK RECORD."
When selecting "QUICK
RECORD."
5
Set up for the recording. — See page 112
➀ Quick Recording
This screen appears only when select-
ing “CURRENT SONG” in step #3.
➀ Multi Track Recording
Select the desired
menu by pressing the
[NEXT] or [BACK]
button.
Select this to call up
the Step Recording
display.
Select the part for the
corresponding track.
PAGE CONTROL
Select this to call up the
Chord Step display.
BACK
NEXT
Set the desired track
to “REC.”
6
7
Record your performance or edit the selected song.
Save the song to disk.
Reference 111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Creator
Track Setting for Recording (Multi Track Recording)
The explanations here apply to step #5 on page 111.
Select the desired menu.
See page 125.
See “Part Selecting/
Record Selecting” on
No data
page 113.
Muted track
Play track
Select the part for the
corresponding track.
Record track
See “Delete” on page 113.
Set the desired track to “REC.”
Select “REC MODE” which appears when
selecting “CURRENT SONG” in step #3.
Select this to return to the
TRACK main display.
Set the related parameter.
For details, see below
Available when “PUNCH IN TRIG-
GER” is set to “AUTO SET.”
➀ Record Mode
• Replace...........Follow the normal recording procedure described in the previous sec-
tion. The only difference is that recording will begin from the measure
specified at the MEASURE SET, and all data from that point to the end
of the song will be replaced by the newly-recorded material.
• Punch In recording has
another exceptionally conve-
nient advantage — it automati-
cally records any panel
settings you’ve made, allowing
you to have various settings
(such as voice, volume, pan,
etc.) change instantly and
automatically right before the
Punch In point!
• Punch In..........This function allows you to selectively re-record a portion of a song track
(the measures between the specified punch-in and punch-out points).
In the eight-measure example below, measures 3 through 5 are re-recorded.
Recording start
(Punch In)
Recording stop
(Punch Out)
1
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
7
8
8
2
3
5
6
7
Previously
Newly played data
Previously
played data
played data
➀ Measure Set
• When the RECORD MODE is set to “REPLACE,” this parameter specifies the mea-
sure you want to start recording from.
• When the RECORD MODE is set to “PUNCH IN,” this parameter specifies the first
playback measure. Be sure to give yourself a few measures “lead-in” prior to the
actual punch-in point.
112 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Creator
➀ Punch In Trigger
• First Key On ...... When FIRST KEY ON is selected, recording will begin when the first
key is played on the keyboard.
• Footswitch 1/2... When FOOT SW 1 or FOOT SW 2 is selected, recording will begin
when a footswitch connected to the corresponding rear-panel FOOT
SWITCH jack is pressed.
• Auto Set ............ When AUTO SET is selected, the punch-in and punch-out measures
are specified by the IN and OUT buttons (i.e., recording begins auto-
matically at the IN measure and ends at the OUT measure).
➀ Part Selecting/Record Selecting
The default part for each track is displayed above the REC setting. The parts can be
changed as required by pressing the [PART SEL.] LCD button (the part names for
each track will be highlighted), selecting the desired parts via the corresponding but-
tons. When the parts have been changed, press the [REC SEL.] LCD button (the PART
SEL. LCD button will have changed to the [REC SEL.] LCD button) again to return to
the normal track setup display.
➀ Delete
When the [DEL.] LCD button is pressed DELETE will appear for tracks which contain
data. Select DELETE via the corresponding LCD buttons while holding the [DEL.]
button to delete all data in the corresponding tracks. The data is actually deleted when
the [DEL.] LCD button is released.
➀ Song Save/Delete
• Save................This function saves the edited song to the disk.
• Delete .............This function deletes the specified song file from the disk.
Track Setting for Recording (Quick Recording)
The explanations here apply to step #5 on page 111.
Muted track
No data
Play track
See page 125.
Record track
Set the desired track to “REC.”
Change the measure at which recording starts.
➀ Delete
When the [DEL.] LCD button is pressed DELETE will appear for tracks which contain
data. Select “DELETE” via the corresponding LCD buttons while holding the [DEL.]
button to delete all data in the corresponding tracks. The data is actually deleted when
the [DEL.] LCD button is released.
Reference 113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Creator
Song Edit Functions (Multi Track Recording)
The explanations here apply to step #6 on page 111.
➀ Quantize
Quantize lets you “clean up” or “tighten” the timing of a previously recorded track.
For example, the following musical passage has been written with exact quarter-note and eighth-
note values.
Even though you think you may have recorded the passage accurately, your actual performance
may be slightly ahead of or behind the beat (or both!). Quantize allows you to align all the notes
in a track so that the timing is absolutely accurate to the specified note value.
Press this to quantize the data.
This determines how “strongly” the notes
will be quantized. If a value less than
“100%” is selected, notes will be moved
toward the specified quantization beats
only by the specified amount.
Select the Quantize size (resolution).
See below for details.
Select the track to be quantized.
➀ About Quantize size
Set the Quantize size to correspond to the smallest notes in the track you are working with. For example,
if the data was recorded with both quarter notes and eighth notes, use 1/8 for the quantize value. If the
quantize function is applied in this case with the value set to 1/4, the eighth notes would be moved on
top of the quarter notes.
One measure of 8th notes before quantization
• The three Quantize settings
marked with asterisks (*) are
exceptionally convenient, since
they allow you to quantize two
different note values at the
same time, without compromis-
ing the quantization of either
one.
After quantization
For example, if you have both
straight 1/8 notes ( ) and 1/8
3
The quantize sizes are :
note triplets (
) recorded to
the same track, and you quan-
tize to straight 1/8 notes ( ),
all notes in the track are quan-
tized to straight 1/8 notes —
which completely eliminates
any triplet feel in the rhythm!
However, if you use the 1/8
note + 1/8 note triplet setting
1/32 note
1/4 note
1/16 note
1/8 note
1/16 note +
1/8 note triplet
*
1/4 note triplet
1/8 note triplet
1/16 note triplet
(
), both the straight and trip-
1/16 note +
1/16 note triplet
let notes will be quantized cor-
rectly.
1/8 note +
1/8 note triplet
*
*
114 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Creator
➀ Track Mixing
This function allows data from two tracks can be mixed and the results placed in a dif-
• All data other than the mixed
note data is derived from the
SOURCE1 track.
ferent track , or data to be copied from one track to another.
Press this to execute the Track
Mix operation.
• The Part Assign parameters of
the Plug-in Voice are not cop-
ied to the destination part even
if the Track Mix operation is
executed. Therefore, set the
Part Assign parameter (in the
System Exclusive - XG param-
eters) to the corresponding
Part number in the Event List
display (page 120) after exe-
cuting the Track Mix operation.
For details about the Part
Assign parameters, refer to the
Owner's Manual of your Plug-
in Board.
After execution the this button
changes to an UNDO button
which can be used to undo the
copy/mix operation if the
results are not satisfactory (the
“UNDO” button will only remain
active until the next operation is
performed).
Select the track into which the
results will be placed.
Specify the tracks to be mixed.
To simply copy from the SOURCE1 track to the DESTINA-
TION track select COPY via the SOURCE2 LCD buttons.
➀ Note Shift
This allows tracks which contain data to be individually transposed up or down by a
maximum of two octaves in semitone increments.
The TR1~8/TR9~16
LCD button can be
used to switch
between tracks 1
through 8 and tracks
9 through 16.
Press this to execute the Note
Shift operation.
After execution this button
changes to an UNDO button
which can be used to undo the
Note Shift operation if the results
are not satisfactory (the “UNDO”
button will only remain active
until the next operation is per-
formed).
Set the desired amount of transposition for
each track (note-shift controls will only
appear for tracks which contain data).
Adjust any track while
holding this button to
set the note shift for all
tracks simultaneously.
Song Setup (Multi Track Recording)
This function lets you assign the DSP effect block (4~7) to any of the current song’s
tracks. Other parameters can be modified up as required via the MIXING CONSOLE
display (page 144).
• Only one of the Setup parame-
ters can be recorded to each
track, and any parameter
The tempo of the song
can be set as required via
the Data dial, and all other
available parameters can
be modified as required
via the MIXING CON-
SOLE displays.
changes made in the middle of
the song will be cancelled.
However, in the case of Volume
and Tempo data, any Volume
and Tempo changes in the mid-
dle of the song are applied as
an offset to the initial Setup
Data setting.
Press this to record
the settings to the
current song.
Assign the DSP effect
block (4~7) to any of the
current song’s tracks.
Reference 115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Creator
Step Recording (Multi Track Recording)
The Step Recording feature makes it possible to record notes with absolutely precise
timing.
The explanations here apply to step #5 on page 111.
➀ Entering the Note Event
This section explains how to step-record notes, using three specific examples.
• Example 1
1
Call up the Step Recording display by pressing the [STEP REC] button.
Make sure this is selected.
2
Play the keys C, D, E, F, G, A, B and C in order.
3
Press the [START/STOP] button to hear your newly recorded notes.
START/STOP
116 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Creator
• Example 2
1
w
e Press this while holding F.
q Select this resolution.
w
e
r
2
3
4
q Select this resolution.
Press this button, repeatedly if
q
necessary, to enable the dot-
ted note selectors at the bot-
tom of the display. (Pressing
the button alternately switches
the note selectors among
three basic note values: nor-
mal, dotted and triplet.)
e
w Select this resolution.
q
e
Press this button, repeatedly if necessary, to re-enable the
normal note selectors.
w Select this resolution.
5
Press the [
] button to move the cursor to
the beginning of the song and press the
[START/STOP] button to hear your newly
recorded notes.
START/STO
Reference 117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Creator
• Example 3
1
2
w
Press and hold C3.
qSelect this resolution.
e Press this again while holding C3.
q
Press and hold C3 and E3.
wPress this while holding C3 and E3.
3
4
q
Press and hold C3, E3 and G3.
wPress this while holding C3, E3 and G3.
q
Press and hold C3, E3, G3 and C4.
wPress this while holding C3, E3, G3 and C4.
ePress this while holding C3, E3, G3 and C4, and release the four keys.
5
Press the [
] button to move the cursor to
the beginning of the song and press the
[START/STOP] button to hear your newly
recorded notes.
START/STOP
118 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Creator
The functions of each menu item in the display are explained below.
When this is set to on (highlighted), you can
play only the currently displayed track.
Select the track to be recorded.
This specifies the velocity for the next note to be
entered. See "Velocity settings" below.
This sets the note length (time that the note is actu-
ally sounded), as a percentage of the step time. See
"Gate time settings" below.
Pressing the button alternately switches the note
selectors (at the bottom of the display) among three
basic note values: normal, dotted and triplet..
Press this to actually delete the event
at the current cursor position.
The "size" of the current recording
step time for the next note to be
entered. This determines to what posi-
tion the pointer will advance after a
note has been entered.
This shows the current position at which you
enter the note.
Clock: 384 clocks per 1/4-note.
Beat: 1 - 4 (for 4/4 time)
Measure number
Moves the cursor up/down.
Instantly returns to the first beginning of the current
recorded song (i.e. the first beat of the first measure).
➀ About Measure/Beat/Clock
Measue
Beat
1
2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Clock
000- 000- 000- 000-
383 383 383 383
000- 000- 000- 000-
383 383 383 383
➀ Velocity settings
The following parameters are available.
• Kbd. Vel...........When this is selected, the strength at which you play the keyboard deter-
mines the recorded velocity values.
• fff.....................The velocity of the entered note is set to 127.
• ff......................The velocity of the entered note is set to 111.
• f.......................The velocity of the entered note is set to 95.
• mf....................The velocity of the entered note is set to 79.
• mp...................The velocity of the entered note is set to 63.
• p......................The velocity of the entered note is set to 47.
• pp....................The velocity of the entered note is set to 33.
• ppp..................The velocity of the entered note is set to 15.
➀ Gate time settings
The following parameters are available.
• Normal ............
• Tenuto .............
• Staccato..........
• Staccatissimo..
80%
100%
40%
20%
• Manual ............. When this is selected, you can specify the Gate time as a percentage
manually.
Reference 119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Creator
➀ Entering other events (Event List)
In addition to Note on/off, the following events can be recorded in the Event List display.
➀ Conductor Track:
• Tempo
• Time Signature
• End Mark
• System Exclusive (XG parameters)
• System Exclusive (others) *
• Meta Event *
* These are displayed only and cannot be edited.
➀ Tracks 1 through 16:
• Note on/off ........................ Messages which are generated when the keyboard is
played. Each message includes a specific note number
which corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a veloc-
ity value based on how hard the key is played.
• Control Change................. Controller settings such as volume, pan (edited via the Mix-
ing Console), etc.
• Program Change............... Voice selecting
• Pitch Bend ........................ Bends the pitch of notes up or down.
• Channel Aftertouch........... Applies aftertouch to all notes.
• Polyphonic Aftertouch....... Applies aftertouch to a single note.
When this is set to on (highlighted), you can play only the current recorded track.
Select the track to be edited.
• To actually enter an edited
value, move the cursor away
from the value or press the
[START/STOP] button to start
playback.
Press this to add a new event to the
Event List.
Press this to actually delete the
event at the current cursor position.
If the value at the cursor has been
changed, pressing this restores the
original value.
Adjust the event value finely.
Adjust the event value coarsely.
Moves the cursor leftward/rightward. Keep in mind
that moving the cursor away from the just-edited
value automatically enters that value.
This shows the current position at which you
edit the event.
Clock: 384 clocks per 1/4-note.
Beat: 1 - 4 (for 4/4 time)
Measure number
Moves the cursor upward/downward. Keep in mind that moving the
cursor away from the just-edited value automatically enters that value.
Instantly returns to the first beginning of the current
recorded song (i.e. the first beat of the first measure).
Determines the method of event selec-
tion: single or multiple.
Press this to cut all the selected events
and copy them to the clipboard.
Press this to copy all the selected
events to the clipboard.
Press this to paste all the event data
that is currently contained in the clip-
board.
120 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Creator
➀ About Multiple Event Selection
This convenient feature lets you select several events together, making it possible to
change the values of many different events at once, or easily and quickly copy many
events to another location.
• Changing the values of multiple events
In the example explanation below, we’ll increase the velocity of the selected note data by 20.
q Using the [ ] button, move the cursor to the first event at the top of Event List, and
select the velocity value.
w Press the [SEL] button to enable multiple event selection.
e Use the [ ] button to determine the range to be selected. Each successive event
that you scroll through in this way is selected.
r Use the data dial to change the value. All values for the selected events are changed
simultaneously.
t To actually enter the changes, press the [SEL] button again to return to single event
selection.
• Copying and pasting multiple events
In the example explanation below, we’ll copy the events of the second measure in song data and
paste them to the third measure.
q Use the [ ] or [ ] buttons to move the cursor to the beginning of the second measure.
w Press the [SEL] button to enable multiple event selection.
e Use the [ ] button to determine the range to be selected. For this example, scroll to the last
event in the measure so that all events in measure 2 are selected.
r Press the [COPY] button.
t Press the [SEL] button to change to single event selection.
y Set the destination (the top of measure 3, in this case) by using the [MEAS], [BEAT] and [CLK]
buttons.
u Press the [PASTE] button.
The diagram below illustrates how the 9000Pro handles the copy/paste operation.
Clipboard
Event data
Event data at the new location
Copy
Copy
Reference 121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Creator
The clipboard is a temporary “holding place” for the copied data (as done in Steps #3 and #4
above). Once the data is in the clipboard, and as long as no other data has been copied
there, the data can be pasted to other locations — as many times as desired. Keep in mind
that copying data automatically erases whatever data was originally in the clipboard. (The
data at the original location in the song remains intact.)
➀ Event Filter
This function lets you select the event types that appear on the editing displays. To
select an event for display, place a checkmark in the box next to the event name. To fil-
ter out an event type (so that it does not appear on the list), remove the checkmark so
that the box is empty. See below for details.
Enters checkmarks
into all boxes.
Selects only note data;
checkmarks for all
other boxes are
removed.
Reverses the check-
mark settings for all
boxes. In other words,
this enters checkmarks
to all boxes that were
previously un-checked,
and vice versa.
Removes all check-
Select the desired event.
marks at once.
Enters/removes the check-
mark in the selected box.
Chord Step (Quick Recording)
The Chord Step recording feature makes it possible to record Auto Accompaniment
have to be entered in real time, it is easy to create even complex chord changes and
accompaniment before recording the melody.
The explanations here apply to step #6 on page 111.
➀ Entering the Chord/Section (Chord Step)
For example, the following chord progression can be entered by the procedure
described below.
MAIN D
FILL IN C
MAIN C
CM7
Dm7
Em7
Dm7 G7
C
1
Press the [MAIN D] button to specify the sec-
tion and enter the chords as shown at right.
001:1:000
Play “CM7.”
ACCOMPANIMENT
CONTROL
A
B
C
D
001:3:000
MAIN VARIATION
Play “Dm7.”
002:1:000
Select this resolution and play
chords as shown at right.
Play “Em7.”
122 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Creator
MAIN D
CM7
Dm7
Em7
2
Press the [FILL] button to specify the section
"FILL IN C" and enter the chords as shown at
right.
002:3:000
Play “Dm7.”
FILL IN & BREAK
002:4:000
Play “G7.”
Select this resolution and play
chords as shown at right.
MAIN D
CM7
FILL IN C
Dm7 G7
Dm7
Em7
3
The [MAIN C] section is automatically
selected.
ACCOMPANIMENT
CONTROL
A
B
C
D
003:1:000
MAIN VARIATION
Play “C.”
MAIN D
CM7
FILL IN C
Dm7 G7
MAIN C
Dm7
Em7
C
4
Press the [
] button to move the cursor to
the beginning of the song and press the
[START/STOP] button to hear the Auto
Accompaniment performance of your newly
recorded data.
START/STOP
Reference 123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Creator
“END MARK” is shown in the display, indicating the end of the song data. The End
Mark position for Chord Step is automatically determined according to the section that
is input at the end of the song.
• Intro.................The End Mark is automatically recorded to a point following the Intro
data (however many measures it is from the position of the last input to
the end of the Intro data).
• Main ................The End Mark is automatically recorded two measures following the
position of the last input.
• Fill ...................The End Mark is automatically recorded one measure following the posi-
tion of the last input.
• Ending.............The End Mark is automatically recorded to a point following the Ending
data (however many measures it is from the position of the last input to
the end of the Ending data).
The End Mark can be freely set to any position desired, if the automatically assigned
position doesn’t suit you.
The functions of each menu item in the display are explained below.
Instantly returns to the
beginning of the current
recorded song (i.e. the first
beat of the first measure).
Press this to actually delete the event
at the current cursor position.
Moves the cursor
upward/downward.
The "size" of the current recording step. This
determines to what position the pointer will
advance after a chord has been entered.
This shows the current position at
which you enter the chord.
Clock:384 clocks per 1/4-note
(selectable 000 or 192)
Beat: 1 - 4 (for 4/4 time)
Measure number
➀ Entering other events (Event List)
In addition to the Chord/Section, the following events can be recorded in the Event List
display. All menu items in the display are the same as in Step Recording (page 120).
• Tempo
• Accompaniment Volume
• Accompaniment Part Volume
• Accompaniment Part on/off
• Style number
• Section
• Chord
124 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Creator
➀ Event Filter
This function lets you select the event types that appear on the editing displays. To
select an event for display, place a checkmark in the box next to the event name. To fil-
ter out an event type (so that it does not appear on the list), remove the checkmark so
that the box is empty.
• Style Number, Section Name,
Chord Name, and Tempo are
on (checked) by default.
Selects only chord data;
checkmarks for all other
boxes are removed.
Using the Plug-in voices in Song Creator
Keep in mind that a single Plug-in Board can only sound one part (one Plug-in voice) at a time. For this
reason, you may run into the following problems when using certain Song Creator functions with the
Plug-in voices:
For example, when recording the R1 voice (when that is assigned to a Plug-in voice), the R1 part
button automatically turns off when the [STOP] button is pressed. This happens in order that the
you can hear the recorded song properly with the Plug-in Voice (step #10 on pages 37 and 39).
When you stop recording, the connection
with the Plug-in Board automatically
switches to the Song Creator.
Song Creator
Keyboard
Song Creator
Keyboard
Plug-in Board
Plug-in Board
The connection with the Plug-in Board can
be switched to the keyboard part by press-
ing the PART ON/OFF button.
The connection with the Plug-in Board can
be switched to the Song part by pressing
the [Plug-in] LCD button.
LEFT HOLD
LEFT
RIGHT1
RIGHT2
RIGHT3
LOWER
UPPER
PART ON/O
➀ When you use the Song Player to play back a song recorded with the Plug-in voices:
If any one of the parts of the Plug-in voice (R1, R2, R3, or L) is set to ON, the part in the song cor-
responding to the Plug-in voice will automatically be muted. Therefore, if you want to properly play
back a song using Plug-in voices, make sure that the corresponding parts (R1, R2, R3, or L) are
set to OFF before selecting the song.
• The explanations above apply only to the Song Creator and Song Player functions. They do not apply to the Style
Creator and Multi Pad Creator, since the Plug-in voices cannot be used with those functions.
Reference 125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Style Creator
The 9000Pro lets you create original styles which can be used for auto accompaniment in the same way
as the preset styles.
Guidelines for Style Creating
When creating a song (page 110), you record your keyboard performance to the
9000Pro as MIDI data. Creating of styles, however, is done in a different way.
The Style Creator provides two basic ways: assembling and recording.
➀ Assembling styles ....... Page 129
The Style Creator provides two basic ways to assemble styles:
Preset Style
8Beat 1
Create your own 8-beat style
Rhythm 1
Rhythm 1
Rhythm 2
Bass
➀ Easy Edit
Rhythm 2
Bass
This method lets you assemble styles based on the preset/flash style that is
most similar to the style you wish to create.
Store as
Custom Style
to Flash ROM
Chord 1
Chord 2
Pad
Chord 1
Chord 2
Pad
Phrase 1
Phrase 2
Phrase 1
Phrase 2
➀ New Style Assembly
The 9000Pro allows you to create “composite” styles by combining various
patterns from the internal Preset and Flash styles.
For example, in creating your own 8-beat style, you could take the rhythm
pattern from the “8 Beat 1” style, use the bass pattern from the “8 Beat 2”
style, and take the chord pattern from the “Pop Rock” style — combining
the various elements to create one style.
8Beat 1
Rhythm 1
Pop Rock
Rhythm 1
Rhythm 2
Bass
Rhythm 2
Bass
Chord 1
Chord 2
Pad
Chord 1
Rhythm 1
Chord 2
Rhythm 2
Pad
Bass
Phrase 1
Phrase 2
Phrase 1
Phrase 2
Chord 1
Chord 2
Pad
8Beat 2
Rhythm 1
Rhythm 2
Bass
Phrase 1
Phrase 2
Chord 1
Chord 2
Pad
Store as Custom Style
to Flash ROM
Phrase 1
Phrase 2
➀ Recording styles (Full Edit ....... page 132)
When recording a song, you record your keyboard performance to the 9000Pro as
MIDI data. Recording styles, however, is done in a different way. Here are
some of the aspects in which style recording differs from song recording:
➀ Using Preset Styles
As shown in the chart at right, when you select the preset/flash style that is
the closest to the type of style you wish to create, the preset style data will
be copied to a special memory location for recording.
You create (record) your new, original style by adding or deleting data from
the memory location. All parts (with the exception of the rhythm track) of
preset styles must be cleared before recording (page 133).
Replacing
Preset Style
8Beat 1
Rhythm 1
Rhythm 2
Bass
Rhythm 1
Rhythm 2
Bass
Chord 1
Chord 2
Pad
Chord 1
Chord 2
Pad
➀ Loop Recording
Replacing
Phrase 1
Phrase 2
Auto accompaniment repeats the accompaniment patterns of several mea-
sures in a “loop,” and style recording is also done using loops. For example,
if you start recording with a two-measure main section, the two measures
are repeatedly recorded. Notes that you record will play back from the next
repetition (loop), letting you record while hearing previously recorded mate-
rial.
Phrase 1
Phrase 2
Replacing
➀ Overdub Recording
This method records new material to a track already containing recorded data, without deleting the
original data. In style recording, the recorded data is not deleted, except when using functions such
as Clear and Drum Cancel (page 132).
For example, if you start recording with a two-measure main section, the two measures are repeated
many times. Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition, letting you overdub new
material to the loop while hearing previously recorded material.
126 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Style Creator
The following functions are also available:
• Revoice........................Determines the basic volume, tempo, and Part on/off settings for your original style.
• Groove & Dynamics.....This gives you a comprehensive variety of tools for changing the rhythmic “feel” of
your original style. Specifically, it allows you to alter the timing for each section and
velocity of notes for each track.
• Setup ...........................This can be used to change the voices assigned to any of the current selected sec-
tion/part.
• Edit...............................The six editing features that contain "Quantize" allow you to edit already recorded
style data.
• Parameter Edit.............Determines various parameters of the Style File Format.
See below for details about Style File Format.
➀ Style File Format
The Style File Format (SFF) combines all ofYamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single uni-
fied format. By using the Parameter Edit function, you can take advantage of the power of the SFF for-
mat and freely create your own styles.
The chart below indicates the process by which the accompaniment is played back. (This does not apply
to the rhythm track.)
The source pattern in the chart is the original style data. As explained on page 132, in style recording this
source pattern is recorded.
As shown in the chart below, the actual output of the accompaniment is determined by various parameter
settings and chord changes (playing chords in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard) entered
to this source pattern.
Source Pattern
Z
X
Source chord root setting
Source chord type setting
Recorded in Style Recording.
Refer to page 135.
Created by playing chords in the auto accompani-
ment section of the keyboard.
Refer to page 70.
Chord change
NTR (Note Transposition Rule)
Note Transposition rule setting
C
Edited in Parameter Edit.
NTT (Note Transposition Table)
These parameters determine how the pitch of the
source pattern is converted when you play chords
in the auto accompaniment section of the key-
board.
V
Note Transposition table setting
Refer to page 136.
Other Settings
B
N
M
Highest Key setting
Note range (Low Limit, High Limit) settings
Retrigger Rule (RTR) setting
Output
Accompaniment
Since newly created style data is stored to Flash ROM, any pre-programmed data in the selected style location will be erased and
replaced by your new settings. This includes the factory programmed Flash style data (Flash styles I through VIII). If you've deleted
the factory-set data, you can use the Restore function (page 154) to load a copy of it from the included disks (page 6).
Preset Style
Flash Style
Store
Style Creator
Can be replaced by
the newly created data.
For details about Flash ROM, refer to “Memory Structure” on page 54.
Reference 127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Style Creator
Basic Procedure
1
Press the [DIGITAL
RECORDING] button.
2
3
Select “STYLE CREATOR.”
Select these to create a
style by using the preset
style data as a starting point.
3
Select this to create a new
style from scratch.
Select a preset/flash style.
The Easy Edit mode makes it
possible to create new styles
by editing the Preset/Flash
styles.
Select this to call up the
Step Recording display.
4
Select the desired menu.
5
Create/Edit a style by following the on-screen instructions.
6Store as a Flash style to Flash ROM. (See “NOTE” on page 55.)
7Exit from the Digital Recording mode.
128 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Style Creator
Style Assembly — Creating a Style
This operation lets you create the patterns (rhythm, bass and chords) that will make up
your original style.
The explanations here apply to step #5 of the Basic Procedure on page 128.
➀ Set up for creating a style.
• The length in measures for all
sections (excepting Fill In and
Break) can be set from this dis-
play. The Fill In and Break sec-
tions are limited to one
measure.
Set the Pattern Length of the
selected section.
• You can return to this display
by pressing the [BACK] button
and redo the settings .
PAGE CONTROL
Select a section to
be created.
BACK
NEXT
➀ Assign the pattern for each track.
Indicates the
selected track.
Select a play type.
• Keep in mind that any track
data for which the Play Type is
set to “MUTE” is not stored to
Flash ROM.
SOLO
PLAY
MUTE
Mutes (turns off) all other tracks.
Turns the selected track on.
Mutes (turns off) the selected track.
Select a style, section and
part to be assembled.
[NEXT]
[BACK]
RHYTHM 2
BASS
Phrase2
[NEXT]
[BACK]
[NEXT]
[BACK]
[NEXT]
[BACK]
➀ Store as a Flash style to
Flash ROM by following
the on-screen instruc-
tions.
Reference 129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Style Creator
Revoice (Easy Edit)
The Revoice parameters let you determine the basic volume, tempo, and Part on/off
settings for your original style.
The explanations here apply to step #5 of the Basic Procedure on page 128.
➀ Select the Style and the Section to be revoiced.
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
➀ Edit the Revoice parameters.
The 9000Pro Revoice function lets you change the following parameters for each track.
• Total Volume, Tempo
• Voice number
• Part Volume
• Part on/off
• Keep in mind that any track
data which is set to off is not
stored to Flash ROM.
[BACK]
[NEXT]
[NEXT]
[BACK]
[NEXT]
[BACK]
[NEXT]
[BACK]
➀ Store as a Flash style to
Flash ROM by following the
on-screen instructions.
130 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Style Creator
Groove & Dynamics (Easy Edit)
The Groove and Dynamics parameters give you a comprehensive variety of tools for
changing the rhythmic “feel” of your original style.
The explanations here apply to step #5 of the Basic Procedure on page 128.
➀ Select the Style and the Section.
Groove parameters
Beat
Specifies the beats to which groove timing is to be applied (i.e., if
“8” is selected, groove timing is applied to 8th notes in the selected
section; or if “12” is selected groove timing is applied to 8th-note
triplets).
PAGE CONTROL
Beat Converter
Actually changes the timing of the beats specified by the Beat to
the specified value. The available Beat Converter settings change
according to the selected Beat. With a Beat setting of “8” and a
Beat Converter setting of “12”, for example, all 8th notes in the
section are shifted to 8th-note triplet timing. The “16A” and “16B”
Beat Converter settings which appear when Beat is set to “12” are
variations of the “16” setting.
BACK
NEXT
➀ Edit the Groove parameters.
Swing
Produces a “swing” feel by shifting the timing of “back beats,” as
specified by the Beat parameter. For example, if the specified
Beat value is 8th notes, then the swing parameter will delay the
2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th beats of each measure to create a swing
feel. The “A” through “E” settings produce different degrees of
swing feel, with “A” being the most subtle and “E” being the stron-
gest.
Fine
Selects a range of “groove templates” to be applied to the current
section. “PUSH” settings cause certain beats to be played early,
while “HEAVY” settings delay the timing of certain beats. The
number — “2”, “3”, “4”, or “5” — determines which beats are to be
affected. All beats up to the specified beat, but not including the
first beat, will be played early or delayed: e.g., the 2nd and 3rd
beats if “3” is selected. In all cases “A” types produce minimum ef-
fect, “B” types produce medium effect, and “C” types produce the
maximum effect.
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
➀ Edit the Dynamics parameters.
Dynamics parameters
Accent Type
Selects the type of accent template to be applied to the select-
ed section/part.
Strength
Determines how “strongly” the selected Accent Type will be
applied. Higher values produce a stronger effect.
Expand/
Compression
Expands or compresses the range of velocity values in the se-
lected section, based on a “central” velocity value of “64.” Val-
ues higher than 100% expand the dynamic range, and values
lower than 100% compress the dynamic range.
Boost/Cut
Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section/part.
Values above 100% boost the overall velocity and values be-
low 100% reduce the overall velocity.
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
➀ Store as a Flash style to Flash
ROM by following
the on-screen instructions.
Reference 131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Style Creator
Style Recording (Full Edit)
This section explains how to record all parts by playing the keyboard.
The explanations here apply to step #5 of the Basic Procedure on page 128.
➀ Basic Setting for Recording
Select the
desired menu.
• Section...................Select the section you want to program.
• Pattern Length .......Select the desired number of measures (1-32) for the selected section (except for FILL IN
sections, which are fixed at 1 measure).
• Beat .......................Select a different time signature: 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, or 5/4. Please note that the time signature
can only be changed if all sections of the current style have been cleared. If any data
remains in any section, the alert message will appear. A new time signature can be
selected after clearing all sections of the current selected style.
• Tempo ....................Set the default tempo for the new style.
• Part Copy...............Instead of starting with all the sections and/or parts from the selected original style, you
can copy specific parts from other sections/parts of the same style, or from other styles as
required.
Also, in some cases it may not be possible to copy from other parts. In such a case the
EXECUTE LCD button will appear in gray and will not be available.
➀ Style Recording – Rhythm Tracks
You can also delete certain percussion
sounds while recording.
While holding this button, press the key on
• Only DRUM KIT/SFX KIT and
DRUM KIT custom voices can
the keyboard corresponding to the instru-
be selected for the RHY2 part.
ment you want to cancel.
• All voices except the ORGAN
FLUTE voice can be selected
for the RHY1 part.
When this button is pressed, DELETE will
• You can also start recording by
appear for parts which contain data.
pressing [SYNC START] button
Set the desired part to "DELETE" while
and playing a key on the key-
holding this button to delete all data in the
board.
corresponding parts. The data is actually
deleted when this button is released.
1
2
Set one of Rhythm parts to "REC."
3
Press the [START/
STOP] button again to
stop recording.
Press the [START/STOP] button to start recording.
The selected section of the current style will begin playing (only the metro-
nome will sound if the rhythm parts have been cleared). The style will loop
(play) continuously to allow convenient recording and overdubbing.
Since the rhythm pattern plays back repeatedly, you can record by overdub-
bing — listening to the pattern and playing the desired keys. Look at the icons
printed under the keys indicating the percussion sounds that are assigned to
each key.
START/STO
132 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Style Creator
➀ Style Recording – Bass/Chord Tracks/Pad/Phrase
Recording of the bass, phrase, pad and chord tracks is unlike recording of the rhythm
(drum) parts in that you have to clear the track data of the original style before record-
ing.
1
2
When this button is pressed, DELETE will
appear for parts which contain data.
Set the desired part to "DELETE" while
holding this button to delete all data in the
corresponding parts. The data is actually
deleted when this button is released.
3
4
Set the desired parts to "REC."
Start recording.
You can start recording with one of the following ways:
• Press the [START/STOP] button.
• Press the [SYNC START] button to enable synchronized
standby (page 20), then play a key on the keyboard.
The recording repeats indefinitely (until stopped) in a loop.
Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition,
letting you record while hearing previously recorded material.
• The ORGAN FLUTES voices
and DRUM KIT voices cannot
be selected for these parts.
5
Stop recording.
Observe the following rules when recording the MAIN and FILL sections:
• Use only the CM7 scale tones when recording the BASS and PHRASE tracks (i.e. C,
D, E, G, A, and B).
• Use only the chord tones when recording the CHORD and PAD tracks (i.e. C, E, G, and
B).
C = chord tone
C, S = scale tones
C S C
C S C
Any appropriate chord or chord progression can be used for the INTRO and ENDING sec-
tions.
The basic chord for the accompaniment is called the source chord.The default source chord
is set as CM7, but you can change it to whatever chord is easy for you to play. For details,
Reference 133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Style Creator
Style Editing (Full Edit)
This section explains various parameters, other than the basic ones.
The explanations here apply to step #5 of the Basic Procedure on page 128.
➀ Setup
Select the desired menu.
➀ Voice
This function can be used to change the voices assigned to any of the current style’s parts.
While the SETUP display is selected, all other available parameters can be modified as
required via the MIXING CONSOLE displays.
➀ Setup Copy
Instead of starting with all the sections and/or parts from the selected original style, you can
copy specific parts from other sections/parts of the same style, or from other styles as
required.
➀ Edit
Select the desired menu.
• Quantize ........................... Refer to page 114.
• Velocity Change ................ Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the specified part by the specified per-
centage.
• Measure Copy................... This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of measures
to another location within the same part.
Use the TOP and LAST LCD buttons to specify the first and last measures in
the region to be copied. Use the DEST LCD button to specify the top of the
measure to which the data is to be copied.
If the copy destination falls outside the number of measures actually in the
part, the corresponding source measures will not be copied.
• Measure Clear .................. This function clears all data from the specified range of measures within the
specified part. Use the TOP and LAST LCD buttons to specify the first and last
measures in the range to be cleared.
• Remove Control Event...... This function can be used to remove all occurrences of a specified type of con-
trol event from a specified part. Use the EVENT LCD buttons to select the type
of event to be removed.
• Remove Duplicate Notes .. Removes all duplicate notes from a specified part.
134 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Style Creator
➀ Parameter Edit
Select a part to be edited.
See below.
Select the desired menu.
➀ Source Root/Source Chord
These settings determine the original key of the source pattern (i.e. the key used when
recording the pattern). The default, CM7 (the source root is “C” and the source chord type is
“M7”), is automatically selected whenever the preset data is deleted prior to recording a new
• When NTR is set to ROOT
FIXED and NTT (also above) is
set to BYPASS, the SOURCE
ROOT and SOURCE CHORD
parameter names change to
PLAY ROOT and PLAY
CHORD. In this case it is possi-
ble to change chords and hear
how the results sound for all
parts.
style, regardless of the source root and chord included in the preset data.
When you change the chord of the source pattern from the default CM7 to others, the chord
notes and scale notes will change depending on the currently selected chord type. See page
[ex.] Source Chord Root of “C”
(#11)
7
CM [Maj]
CM [Maj6]
CM [Maj7]
CM
C
[M7#11]
CM add9 [(9)]
6
7
C
C
C
S
C
C
C
C
C
S
S
C
S
C
C
C
C
C
S
S
C
S
C
C
S
C
S
C
S
C
C
C C
C
C
S
C
(9)
(9)
C
[M7(9)]
C
[6(9)]
Caug [aug]
Cm [min]
Cm [min6]
7
6
6
C
S
C
S
C
C
C C
C
C
C C
C
S
C
C
S
S
C
C
S
7
S
b5
(9)
(11)
C
Cm [min7]
Cm
[m7b5]
Cm(9) [m(9)]
Cm
[m7(9)]
Cm
[m7_11]
7
7
7
C
C
S
C
C
C
S
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
S
S
C
C
S
C
C
C
S
C
C
S
C C
(9)
CmM [mM7]
CmM
[mM7_9]
Cdim [dim]
Cdim
[dim7]
C
[7th]
7
7
7
7
C
C
C
C
S
C
C
S
C
S
S
C
C
C
S
C
C
C
S
C
S
S
C
S
S
C
C
C
C
b5
(9)
(#11)
(13)
S
C sus [7sus4]
C
[7b5]
C
[7(9)]
C
[7#11]
C
[7(13)]
4
7
7
7
7
7
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C C
C
S
C
C
C C
C
C
C
C
S
C
C
C
C
C
(b9)
(#9)
[7(#9)]
(b13)
C
[7(b9)]
C
[7b13]
C
CM aug [M7aug]
C aug [7aug]
7
7
7
7
7
C
S
C
C
S
C
S
C
C
C
C
C
C
S
C
C
C
C
C
S
C
S
S
C
C
S
C
C
[1+8]
C
[1+5]
Csus [sus4]
C
[1+2+5]
1+2+5
1+8
1+5
4
C
C
C
S
C
C
C S
C
S
Reference 135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Style Creator
➀ NTR (Note Transposition Rule)
Two settings are available:
• ROOT TRANS................... When the root note is transposed, the pitch relationship between notes is
maintained. For example, the notes C3, E3, and G3 in the key of C will
become F3, A3, and C4 when transposed to F. Use this setting for parts
that contain melodic lines.
• ROOT FIXED .................... The note is kept as close as possible to the previous note range. For exam-
ple, the notes C3, E3, and G3 in the key of C will become C3, F3, and A3
when transposed to F. Use this setting for chordal parts.
➀ NTT(Note Transposition Table)
This sets the note transposition table to be used for source pattern transposition. Six table
types are available:
• BYPASS............................ No transposition.
• MELODY........................... Suitable for melody line transposition. Use for melody parts such as
PHRASE 1 and PHRASE 2.
• CHORD............................. Suitable for chord transposition. Use for the CHORD 1 and CHORD 2 parts
when they contain piano or guitar-like chordal parts.
• BASS ................................ Suitable for bass line transposition. This table is basically similar to the
MELODY table, but recognizes “on-bass” chords allowed in the FINGERED
2 fingering mode. Use primarily for bass lines.
• MELODIC MINOR............. This table lowers the third scale degree by a semitone when changing from
a major to a minor chord, or raises the minor third scale degree a semitone
when changing from a minor to a major chord. Other notes are not
changed.
• HARMONIC MINOR ......... This table lowers the third and sixth scale degrees by a semitone when
changing from a major to a minor chord, or raises the minor third and flatted
sixth scale degrees a semitone when changing from a minor to a major
chord. Other notes are not changed.
➀ Highest Key
This sets the highest key (upper limit of the octaves) of the note transposing for the Source
Chord Root setting. The notes designated higher than the highest key will actually be played
back in the octave just below the highest key.
This setting is effective only when the NTR parameter (above) is set to ROOT TRANS.
Example) When highest key is “F”.
Root change
Notes played
CM
C#M
C#3-F3-G#3
FM
F#M
F#2-A#2-C#3
C3-E3-G3
F3-A3-C4
136 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Style Creator
➀ Note Limit
This sets the note range (low and high limits) for the voices recorded on user style tracks. By
setting the note range, you can prevent unrealistic notes (such as high notes from a bass or
low notes from a piccolo) from being produced and have them shifted to an octave within the
note range.
Example:When low limit is “C3” and high limit is “D4.”
Root change
Notes played
CM
C#M
F3-G#3-C#4
FM
E3-G3-C4
F3-A3-C4
High Limit
Low Limit
➀ RTR
This sets how notes held through chord changes will be handled. Six settings are available:
• Stop .................................. The note is stopped, and resumes sounding from the next note data.
• Pitch Shift.......................... The pitch of the note will bend without attack to match the type of the new
chord.
• Pitch Shift To Root............. The pitch of the note will bend without attack to match the root of the new
chord.
• Retrigger........................... The note is retriggered with attack at a new pitch matching the new chord
type.
• Retrigger To Root.............. The note is retriggered with attack at a new pitch matching the new chord
root.
Reference 137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Style Creator
Custom Style Recording via an External Sequence Recorder
You can create custom styles for the 9000Pro using an external sequencer (or personal
computer with sequencing software), instead of using the 9000Pro’s STYLE CRE-
ATOR function.
➀ Connections
• Make sure that the sequencer “ECHO” function is ON,
and the 9000Pro LOCAL ON/OFF (page 175) is turned
OFF.
• Connect the 9000Pro MIDI OUT to the sequencer MIDI
IN, and the sequencer MIDI OUT to the 9000Pro MIDI IN.
➀ Creating the Data
Marker
Timing Meta-
Event
• Record all sections and parts using a CM7 (C major sev-
enth) chord.
Contents
Comments
• Record the parts on the MIDI channels listed below, using
the 9000Pro’s internal tone generator. Optimum compati-
bility with other instruments which are both XG and SFF
(Style File Format) compatible can be achieved by using
only the XG voices.
1|1|000
1|1|000
SFF1
Style Name
(Sequence/Track
Name Meta-Event)
1|1|000
1|1|000
1|2|000
:
Slnt
GM on Sys/Ex
Initial Setup Events
1|4|479
Part
MIDI Ch.
2|1|000
:
3|4|479
Main A
Corresponds to
Rhythm1
Rhythm2
Bass
9
2 bars Main Pattern MAIN A
(up to 255 bars)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4|1|000
:
4|4|479
Fill In AA
Intro A
Corresponds to
1 bar Fill In Pattern FILL IN A
Chord1
Chord2
Pad
5|1|000
:
6|4|479
Corresponds to
2 bars Intro Pattern INTRO I
(up to 255 bars)
Phrase1
Phrase2
7|1|000
:
8|4|479
Ending A
Main B
Corresponds to
2 bars Intro Pattern ENDING I
(up to 255 bars)
9|1|000
:
10|4|479
Corresponds to
• Record the sections in the order listed below, with a
Marker Meta-event at the top of each section. Enter the
Marker Meta-events exactly as shown (including upper/
lower case characters and spaces).
• Also include an “SFF1” Marker Meta-event, “SInt” Marker
Meta-event and style name Meta-event at 1|1|000 (the top
of the sequence track), and the GM on Sys/Ex message
(F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 01, F7). (“Timing” in the chart is based on
480 clocks per quarter note. “1|1|000” is clock “0” of the
first beat of the first measure).
• The data from 1|1|000 through 1|4|479 is the “Initial
Setup”, and 2|1|000 through the end of Ending B is the
“Source Pattern”.
• The timing of the Fill In AA and subsequent Marker Meta-
events will depend on the length of each section.
2 bars Intro Pattern MAIN B
(up to 255 bars)
11|1|000 Fill In BA
Corresponds to
1 bar Fill In Pattern BREAK
:
11|4|479
12|1|000 Fill In BB
Corresponds to
1 bar Fill In Pattern FILL IN B
:
12|4|479
13|1|000 Intro B
Corresponds to
:
2 bars Intro Pattern INTRO II
(up to 255 bars)
14|4|479
15|1|000 Ending B
Corresponds to
:
2 bars Intro Pattern ENDING II
(up to 255 bars)
16|4|479
17|1|000 Main C
Corresponds to
:
2 bars Main Pattern MAIN C
(up to 255 bars)
18|4|479
19|1|000 Fill In CC
Corresponds to
1 bar Fill In Pattern FILL IN C
:
19|4|479
20|1|000 Intro C
Corresponds to
2 bars Intro Pattern INTRO III
(up to 255 bars)
:
21|4|479
22|1|000 Ending C
Corresponds to
2 bars Intro Pattern ENDING III
(up to 255 bars)
:
23|4|479
24|1|000 Main D
Corresponds to
2 bars Main Pattern MAIN D
(up to 255 bars)
:
25|4|479
26|1|000 Fill In DD
Corresponds to
1 bar Fill In Pattern FILL IN D
:
26|4|479
138 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Style Creator
RPN & NRPN
Event
A template which is handy for creating style data is
included on the supplied floppy disk (TEM-
PLATE.MID).
Initial
Setup
Source
Pattern
RPN (Pitch Bend Sensitivity)
RPN (Fine Tuning)
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
• The Initial Setup area from 1|2|000 through 1|4|479 is
used for voice and effect settings. Do not include note
event data.
• The Main A data begins at 2|1|000. Any number of mea-
sures from 1 to 255 can be used. All measures must
have one of the following time signatures: 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, or
5/4.
• Fill In AA begins from the top of the measure following
the last measure of the Main A pattern. In the chart this is
4|1|00, but this is only an example and the actual timing
will depend on the length of Main A. Please note that all
Fill Ins can be only 1 measure in length (refer to the Sec-
tion/Length chart below).
RPN (Null)
NRPN (Vibrato Rate)
NRPN (Vibrato Delay)
NRPN (EG Decay Time)
NRPN (Drum Filter Cutoff Frequency)
NRPN (Drum Filter Resonance)
NRPN (Drum EG Attack Time)
NRPN (Drum EG Decay Time)
NRPN (Drum Instrument Pitch Coarse)
NRPN (Drum Instrument Pitch Fine)
NRPN (Drum Instrument Level)
NRPN (Drum Instrument Pan)
NRPN (Drum Instrument Reverb Send Level)
NRPN (Drum Instrument Chorus Send Level)
NRPN (Drum Instrument Variation Send Level)
Section
Intro
Length
255 measures max.
255 measures max.
1 measure
Main
Fill In
Ending
255 measures max.
System Exclusive
Event
• The following charts indicate the valid MIDI events for
both the Initial Setup data and the Pattern data. Make
sure to NOT enter any events marked with a dash
(—), nor any events not listed here.
Initial
Setup
Source
Pattern
Sys/Ex GM on
OK
OK
OK
—
—
—
—
—
OK
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Sys/Ex XG on
Sys Ex XG Parameter Change (Effect1)
Sys Ex XG Parameter Change (Multi Part)
DRY LEVEL
Channel Message
Event
Initial
Setup
Source
Pattern
OK
—
Sys Ex XG Parameter Change (Drum Setup)
PITCH COARSE
Note Off
—
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
—
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Note On
—
PITCH FINE
Program Change
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
—
LEVEL
Pitch Bend
PAN
Control#0 (Bank Select MSB)
Control#1 (Modulation)
Control#6 (Data Entry MSB)
Control#7 (Master Volume)
Control#10 (Pan)
REVERB SEND
CHORUS SEND
VARIATION SEND
FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY
FILTER RESONANCE
EG ATTACK
OK
OK
OK
OK
—
Control#11 (Expression)
Control#32 (Bank Select LSB)
Control#38 (Data Entry LSB)
Control#71 (Harmonic Content)
Control#72 (Release Time)
Control#73 (Attack Time)
Control#74 (Brightness)
Control#84 (Portamento Control)
Control#91 (Reverb Send Level)
Control#93 (Chorus Send Level)
Control#94 (Variation Send Level)
Control#98 (NRPN LSB)
Control#99 (NRPN MSB)
Control#100 (RPN LSB)
Control#101 (RPN MSB)
EG DECAY1
EG DECAY2
OK
—
—
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
—
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
—
—
—
Reference 139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Style Creator
Step Recording (Full Edit)
The Step Recording features lets you record notes with absolutely precise timing. The
procedure is essentially the same as that for Song Recording, with the exception of the
points listed below:
• Recording resolution for the Style Creator is 96 ppq (parts per quarter-note); for Song
Recording it is 384 ppq.
• In Song Recording, the End Mark position can be changed freely; in the Style Creator, it
cannot be changed. This is because the length of the style is automatically fixed,
depending on the selected section. For example, if you create a style based on a sec-
tion of four measures length, the End Mark position is automatically set to the end of the
fourth measure, and cannot be changed in the Step Recording display.
• Tracks can be changed in Song Recording; however, they cannot be changed in the
Style Creator.
Select this to call up the
Step Recording display.
140 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multi Pad Creator
The 9000Pro has 58 recordable banks that you can use to store your own Multi Pad phrases. These orig-
inal Multi Pads can be played and used in the same way as the presets. Multi Pad data can also be saved
to and loaded from disk.
Basic Procedure
1
Press the [DIGITAL
RECORDING] button.
2
Select “MULTI PAD CREATOR.”
Use the [NEXT] or
[BACK] button.
Select this to name the Multi Pad Bank.
Select this to store the recorded pad
data to Flash ROM. See the “CAU-
TION” notes below.
3
Select a menu.
Select this to call up the
Step Recording display.
Select this to engage the Record
standby mode (synchronized standby).
Select a Multi Pad
number.
Select a Multi Pad
Bank.
4
5
6
Record/Edit Multi Pad data.
Store the created pad to Flash ROM. (See “NOTE” below)
Exit from the Digital Recording mode.
The operations for each function corresponding to step #4 are covered in the following explanations.
CAUTION
• The recorded data of the
Multi Pads is stored together
in a group of 58 banks in the
Flash ROM. For this reason,
you should be careful when
making edits and storing
your edits, since all 58 banks
will be overwritten with the
new data.
Since newly created Multi Pad data is stored to Flash ROM, any pre-programmed data in the selected Multi Pad loca-
tion will be erased and replaced by your new settings. This includes all of the factory programmed Multi Pad banks.
If you've deleted the factory-set data, you can use the Restore function (page 154) to load a copy of it from the
included disks (page 6).
Multi Pad banks
60 banks in Flash ROM
58 banks can be replaced by the
BANK 01
new created pad data.
1
2
• Multi Pad banks #59 and #60
contain specially programmed
presets for sending MIDI con-
trol messages (page 77) and
changing the Scale Tuning set-
tings (page 158), respectively.
You cannot store your custom
Multi Pad data to these banks.
3
4
For details about Flash ROM, refer to “Memory Structure” on page 54.
Reference 141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multi Pad Creator
Multi Pad Recording
The explanations here apply to step #4 of the Basic Procedure on page 141.
• Other notes besides those of
the C major seventh scale can
be recorded; however, this may
result in the recorded phrase
not matching the chord when
being played back.
➀ Start recording.
Recording begins automatically as soon as you play on the keyboard.
If Chord Match is set to on for the Multi Pad to be recorded, you should record using
the notes of the C major seventh scale (C, D, E, G, A and B).
• The rhythm part of the cur-
rently selected style is used as
a rhythmic guide (in place of a
metronome), playing back dur-
ing recording. However, it is
not recorded to the Multi Pad.
C = chord note
C, S = scale note
Others: non scale note
C
S C
C
S C
➀ Stop recording.
Press the [STOP] LCD button or the panel MULTI PAD [STOP] button to stop record-
ing when you’ve finished playing the phrase.
Clear
Clears all four pads in
the currently selected
bank.
Clears only the cur-
rently selected pad.
Copy
Execute the Copy
operation.
Select the destination pad.
Banks #59 and #60 cannot
be selected.
Select the source
pad.
Turning Chord Match and Repeat On/Off
Use the same operation as on page 77.
142 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multi Pad Creator
Step Recording
The Step Recording features lets you record notes with absolutely precise timing. The
procedure is essentially the same as that for Song Recording, with the exception of the
points listed below:
• Recording resolution for the Multi Pad Creator is 96 ppq (parts per quarter-note); for
Song Recording it is 384 ppq.
• Just as with Song Recording, the End Mark position can be changed freely in the Multi
Pad Creator. This allows you to finely adjust the phrase length for the Pad. This would
be convenient, for example, in synchronizing repeat playback of a Pad (set to Repeat
On) with the keyboard and auto accompaniment playback.
• Since the Multi Pads have only one track, the track cannot be changed.
Reference 143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mixing Console
A full-screen mixing console which provides access to a wide range of controls for each main and accom-
paniment part can be selected by pressing the [MIXING CONSOLE] button.
A simpler mixing console is available via the [MAIN MIXER] and the [PART ON/OFF] buttons described in
“Quick Guide” on pages 24 and 31.
M A I N
MIXER
PART
ON/OFF
PART
Refer to the Quick Guide
on pages 24 and 31.
See below.
Basic Procedure
Pressing the [MIXING CONSOLE] button alter-
nates among the displays as listed below.
All parts (see below)
Accompaniment parts
Song tracks 1~8
1
Press the [MIXING CONSOLE]
button several times until the
desired parts are displayed.
Song tracks 9~16
Volume/EQ (see “Part Settings,” page 145.)
Filter (see “Part Settings,” page 145.)
Effect Depth (see “Part Settings,” page 145.)
Effect Type (see “Effect Type Settings,” page 146.)
Tune (see “Part Settings,” page 145.)
Master EQ (see “Master Equalizer Settings,” page 147.)
Voice (see “Part Settings,” page 145.)
2
Adjust the desired
parameter.
Line Out (see “Line Out Settings,” page 148.)
Select the desired menu.
Select the desired menu.
Select the desired parameter.
Select the desired parameter.
• You can also select the desired
menu by pressing the [NEXT]
or [BACK] button.
• You can change the value of all
parts simultaneously. To do
this, press any of the LCD
[1]~[8] buttons or rotate the
data dial while holding the cor-
responding LCD button
([A]~[J]).
Adjust the parame-
ter for each part.
You can use the data dial to adjust the parameter.
First, select the desired part by pressing the any of the [1]~[8]
buttons and then rotate the data dial to adjust the parameter.
The operations for each parameter corresponding to step #2 are covered in the follow-
ing explanations.
Part Settings
In addition to the keyboard-played voices, the 9000Pro features many different instru-
mental “parts,” including those contained in the auto accompaniment, song playback,
and vocal harmony. See the next page for details.
144 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mixing Console
Volume/EQ
Filter
Effect Depth
Tune
Voice
VOLUME PAN- EQ
EQ BRIGHT- HARMONIC REVERB CHORUS DSP DSP DSP DSP DSP DSP TRANS- TUNING OCTAVE PITCH PORTAMENTO VOICE
POT LOW HIGH
NESS
CONTENT
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
POSE
BEND
TIME
***
***
*
**
–
RANGE
Master
Overall
All Voices
VOICE R1
VOICE R2
VOICE R3
VOICE L
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Keyboard
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Auto
Accompaniment
(Style)
All Tracks
RHYTHM 1
RHYTHM 2
BASS
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
CHORD 1
CHORD 2
PAD
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
PHRASE 1
PHRASE 2
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Multi Pad
Song
Multi
–
–
–
–
Pad 1~4
All Tracks
TRACK 1
TRACK 2
•
O
O
O
•
O
O
O
•
O
O
O
•
O
O
O
•
–
O
O
•
–
O
O
•
O
O
O
•
O
O
O
•
O
O
O
•
–
–
–
•
–
–
–
•
–
–
–
•
–
–
–
•
–
–
–
•
O
–
–
•
–
–
–
•
–
–
–
•
–
–
–
•
–
–
–
•
–
O
O
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
TRACK 16
MIC
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
Microphone
Sound
O : available
*
Same as the [TRANSPOSE] button (pages 61 and 162)
** Same as the [UPPER OCTAVE] button (page 18)
*** Cannot be applied to the part using the Plug-in voice from the PLG150-PF. If you wish
to adjust them from the PLG150-PF, use the Native Part Parameter settings display
(Frequency/Gain) in the Plug-in Custom Voice Creator function.
• Make the desired Right 1 voice,
Effect Type and Depth, and EQ
settings from the Mixing Con-
sole, then call up the Custom
Voice display to store the set-
tings. The Mixing Console
parameters can be stored
together with the Custom Voice
parameters.
➀ Volume/EQ
• Volume ...................This lets you change the volume of each part and adjust the rela-
tive balance among all the parts.
• Panpot....................Positions the sound of the specified voice or track from left to right
in the stereo sound field.
• Equalizer................The EQ High and EQ Low controls function in the same way as the
treble and bass controls on a sound system, boosting or cutting
the high or low frequency ranges by the specified amount.
• Certain voices may produce
excessive noise, depending on
the Harmonic Content and/or
Brightness settings of the Mixing
Console Filter.
➀ Filter
• Brightness..............This increases or decreases the brightness of the sound.
• Harmonic Content..This increases or decreases the harmonic content, giving the
sound more or less “punch.”
➀ Effect Depth
• As indicated in the chart above,
in addition to the Master Trans-
pose setting, there are two other
transpose controls: Keyboard
Transpose and Song Trans-
This parameter sets the effect depth for the corresponding part. See the next page for
details about Effects.
➀ Tune
• Transpose...............Allows the pitch to be transposed up or down in semitone incre-
ments (pages 61 and 162).
• Tuning.....................Sets the pitch for the corresponding part.
• Octave....................Shifts the pitch of the specified part up or down by one or two
octaves. The value of this parameter is added to the value set via
the [UPPER OCTAVE] button (page 18).
• Pitch Bend Range..Sets the range of the PITCH BEND wheel for the corresponding
part. The range is from “0” to “12” with each step corresponding to
one semitone.
• Portamento Time....Sets the portamento time for the corresponding part only when the
the portamento time. The portamento effect (a smooth slide
between notes) is produced when the notes are played legato: i.e.,
a note is held while the next note is played.
pose. These can be used to
match both the song and your
keyboard performance to a cer-
tain key. For example, let’s say
you wish to both play and sing
along with a certain recorded
song. The song data is in F, but
you feel most comfortable sing-
ing in D, and you are accus-
tomed to playing the keyboard
part in C. To match up the keys,
set the Master Transpose to “0,”
the Keyboard Transpose to “2,”
and the Song Transpose to “-3.”
This brings the keyboard part up
and the song data down to your
comfortable singing key.
➀ Voice
This lets you change the voice for each part.
Reference 145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mixing Console
Effect Type Settings
With the digital effects built into the 9000Pro you can add ambiance and depth to your
music in a variety of ways—such as adding reverb that makes you sound like you are
playing in a concert hall for a full, rich sound.
Select this to call up the dis-
play for parameter settings.
Note that the contents of
the Parameter display may
be different according to the
selected Effect Type.
Assigns a specific effect to the currently
selected Effect Block. Note that the con-
tents of the Type List may be different
according to the selected Effect Block.
Use these two LCD buttons to select the
desired parameter group. The lower
parameter group is available when the
[SLOW/FAST] button is turned on.
Select this to store
your settings by fol-
lowing the on-screen
instructions.
Select the
desired block.
➀ Effect Block
The 9000Pro has 9 independent digital signal processing (DSP) blocks for effects, plus
the Vocal Harmony processor. Each DSP block applies to a specific part or portion of
the 9000Pro sound, as listed below. The DSP block numbers appear in several locations
on the 9000Pro panel and in some of the display screen for easy reference: e.g.,
REVERB (1), CHORUS (2), DSP (3), DSP (4), etc.
• You may find that, when chang-
ing a drum sound of an auto
accompaniment style and then
restoring the original drum
sound, the actual sound (espe-
cially the effect processing —
Reverb, Chorus, and DSP 3)
sounds different than the origi-
nal. To restore the original
drum sound and its effect pro-
cessing, select a different style,
then select the original style
once again.
Parts to be applied
Overall
Description
Reverb (1)
Chorus (2)
Creates a reverb effect that makes you sound like you
are playing in places like a concert hall, or live in a club.
Overall
Adds a chorus effect that makes your playing sound as
though multiple parts were being played together at the
same time.
• Some effect types (e.g., Tem-
poDelay, VDstH+TDly, etc.) are
synchronized with the current
tempo. When any of these
effect types is selected, noise
may result when simulta-
neously playing the keyboard
and pressing the [SLOW/
FAST] button or changing the
tempo. To avoid this, first stop
playing the keyboard, then
press [SLOW/FAST] or change
the tempo.
DSP (3)
Auto Accompaniment/ In addition to the Reverb and Chorus types, the 9000Pro
Song
has special DSP effects, that include additional effects
usually used for a specific part, such as distortion and
tremolo.
DSP (4)
DSP (5)
DSP (6)
DSP (7)
DSP (8)
VOICE RIGHT1
VOICE RIGHT2
VOICE RIGHT3
VOICE LEFT
This block (which can be turned on or off by a panel but-
ton) is applied to the RIGHT1 voice.
This block (which can be turned on or off by a panel but-
ton) is applied to the RIGHT2 voice.
This block (which can be turned on or off by a panel but-
ton) is applied to the RIGHT3 voice.
This block (which can be turned on or off by a panel but-
ton) is applied to the LEFT voice.
• Editing some of the effect
parameters may produce a
small amount of noise.
Microphone Sound
This block (which can be turned on or off by a panel but-
ton) is applied to the microphone sound.
Vocal Harmony (9) Vocal Harmony
This block (which can be turned on or off by a panel but-
ton) is used for the Vocal Harmony effect. See page 81.
➀ About the Effect Connections – System and Insertion
All the effect blocks are connected or routed in one of two ways: System or Insertion.
System applies the selected effect to all parts, while Insertion applies the selected effect
to one specific part. Reverb (1) and Chorus (2) are System effects, and DSP (4) - Vocal
Harmony (9) are Insertion effects. The DSP (3) effect, on the other hand, can be config-
ured for either System or Insertion routing. (This is done from the parameters of the
individual effect type; see above.)
146 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mixing Console
Master Equalizer Settings
Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to match the special character of the
room. The sound is divided into several frequency bands, allowing you to correct the sound by raising or lowering
the level for each band. The equalizer allows you to adjust the tone or timbre of the sound to match the performance
space, or to compensate for certain acoustic characteristics in your room. For example, you can cut some of the low
range frequencies when playing in large spaces where the sound is too “boomy,” or boost the high frequencies in
rooms and close spaces where the sound is relatively “dead” and free of echoes.
The 9000Pro possesses a high grade five-band digital equalizer function. With this function, a final effect—tone con-
trol—can be added to the output of your instrument.
An edited PRESET or
USER curve can be
stored to USER 1.
An edited PRESET or USER
curve can be stored to USER 2.
Adjusts the overall gain of all EQ
bands simultaneously.
The PRESET and USER curves can be edited as required
via the corresponding LCD buttons — EQ1 through EQ5.
Each of the 5 bands can be boosted (“+” values) or cut (“–”
values) by up to 12 dB.
Q
Whenever an EQ band is edited the corresponding EQ value is high-
Gain
lighted and the number of the edited band appears above the Q and
FREQ controls.The Q and FREQ controls can then be used to adjust
the Q (bandwidth) and the FREQ (center frequency) of the selected
band. The higher the “Q”, the narrower the bandwidth. The available
FREQ range is different for each band.
FREQ
➀Effect Signal Flow Chart
OUT
(SUB)
DRY LINE
Reverb (1)
Dry
Rev Send
R1
R2
DSP (4)
DSP (5)
DSP (6)
DSP (7)
DSP (8)
DSP (3)
DSP (1)
Cho Send
Dry
Rev Send
Cho Send
Dry
Rev Send
R3
Cho Send
Chorus (2)
DSP (2)
Master EQ
OUT
(MAIN)
Dry
Rev Send
Cho Send
LEFT
MIC
DSP (9)
Dry
3 Band
EQ
Noise
Gate
Vocal
Harmony
Rev Send
Compressor
Cho Send
Dry
Rev Send
Cho Send
STYLE
Connection is set to Insertion
DSP Send
DSP (3)
Connection is set to System
Reference 147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mixing Console
Line Out Settings
This convenient feature allows you to send the output of a selected Part or Parts to the
LINE OUT jacks.
For Drum Parts, you can even select specific drum sounds to be output through these
jacks.
In general, the extensive built-in effects and other Part controls of the 9000Pro provide
all you need for processing and mixing complex multi-Part songs. However, there may
be times when you want to “sweeten” or process a certain Voice or sound with a favor-
ite outboard effect unit, or record a Part to a separate track of a tape recorder. The Line
Out settings are designed just for these kinds of applications.
Select the desired
part.
Sets the output con-
figuration for the
selected part.
Select the desired
drum instrument.
Sets the output configuration for the selected drum
sound.
An individual percussion setting overrides the Part
settings made from the display at left. When
assigned to one of the "SUB" settings, DSP effects
cannot be applied to the percussion sound.
See below for details.
• When set to “MAIN,” the part is output (with effects) through the MAIN LINE OUT jacks.
The sound is also output through the PHONES jack, as well as the MAIN jacks.
• When set to one of the "SUB" settings, the Part is output through the SUB LINE OUT
jacks. In this case, only Insertion effects (DSP4 - 8 and DSP3 when this is set to “Inser-
tion” from the effect parameter display) can be applied; System effects (DSP1, 2 and
DSP3 when this is set to “System” from the effect parameter display) and MASTER EQ
cannot be applied to the SUB LINE OUT jacks.
• When set to one of the “SUB” settings, the sound of the Part will not be output through
the PHONES jack.
• When set to “SUB1&2,” the Part is output in stereo (1: left, 2: right).
• When set to “SUB3&4,” the Part is output in stereo (3: left, 4: right).
• Settings of “SUB1”, “SUB2”, “SUB3”, and “SUB4” output the Part in mono to the corre-
sponding jack.
• When using one of the “SUB”
Line Out settings, make sure
that you’ve connected cables
to the appropriate SUB LINE
OUT jacks on the rear panel. If
cables are only connected to
the MAIN jacks, the sound of
the Part will be output through
the MAIN jacks, even if one of
the “SUB” Line Out settings is
selected.
• Parts output through the SUB LINE OUT jacks cannot be heard through the PHONES
jack.
148 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mixing Console
Example 1 — Live Performance
In this example, you can send the metronome click to
the drummer in your band, and keep everything in
sync.
Right1, 2, 3, Left Auto Accompaniment
Line Out
Settings
Song
Multi Pad 1, 2, 3, 4
(stereo)
Part
Settings
Right1, 2, 3, Left
Mic
MAIN
SUB1
MAIN
MAIN
Multi Pad 1, 2, 3, 4
Auto Accompaiment
(Rhythm1, Rhythm2,
Bass, Chord1, Chord2,
Pad, Phrase1, Phrase2)
Metronome
SUB2
MAIN
(mono) (mono)
Song
(Song Tr1 - 16)
(stereo)
Microphone sound
Metronome
Drum
All instruments
SUB3&4
Settings
All instruments (Drum)
Example 2 — “Surround Sound” System
In this example, send each output to a different
speaker for a rich, surround effect.
Right1, 2, 3, Left Multi Pad 1, 2, 3, 4
Line Out
Settings
Metronome
Song
Microphone sound
Part
Settings
Right1, 2, 3, Left
Mic
MAIN
(stereo)
MAIN
Multi Pad 1, 2, 3, 4
MAIN
Auto Accompaiment
SUB1&2
(Rhythm1, Rhythm2,
Bass, Chord1, Chord2,
Pad, Phrase1, Phrase2)
Metronome
MAIN
MAIN
Song
(stereo)
Auto Accompaniment
(Song Tr1 - 16)
(stereo)
Drum
Settings
All instruments
SUB3&4
All instruments (Drum)
Example 3 — Recording
In this system, connect a multi-track recorder and
record each part separately, just as is done in profes-
sional recording studios.
Right1, 2, 3, Left Auto Accompaniment
Metronome
Song
Multi Pad 1, 2, 3, 4
Microphone sound
Line Out
Settings
(stereo)
Part
Settings
Right1, 2, 3, Left
Mic
MAIN
MAIN
MAIN
MAIN
Multi Pad 1, 2, 3, 4
Auto Accompaiment
(Rhythm1, Rhythm2,
Bass, Chord1, Chord2,
Pad, Phrase1, Phrase2)
Metronome
MAIN
MAIN
(mono) (mono)
Song
(Song Tr1 - 16)
(stereo)
Bass Drum
Snare Drum
Other instruments (Drum)
Drum
Settings
Bass Drum
SUB1
Snare Drum
SUB2
Other instruments
SUB3&4
Reference 149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disk/SCSI Operations
The 9000Pro [DISK/SCSI] button accesses a range of functions that are used for storage and retrieval of
floppy disk data. The 9000Pro can also be fitted with an optional internal hard disk or an optional con-
nected SCSI device for massive on-line storage capacity.
Storage Devices Compatible with the 9000Pro
• Floppy disk
• SCSI device
(optional connected)
• Internal hard disk drive
(optional installed)
Devices in this category include
external hard disk drives,
removable cartridges, etc.
See page 13 for details on SCSI
device connection.
See page 184 for details on
hard disk installation.
• Make sure to read the sec-
tion “Using the Floppy Disk
Drive (FDD) and Floppy
Disks” on page 5.
Select this to display
the property of the
selected file.
If an optional SCSI device is con-
nected or the optional internal hard
disk is installed, the corresponding
device names appear in the LCD of
the disk related function.
Basic Procedure
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MENU
DISK
/
SCSI
FUNCTION
MIDI
3
Execute the desired
function.
J
1
Press the [DISK/SCSI]
button.
2
Select the desired menu.
The operations for each function corresponding to step #3 are covered in the following
explanations.
The Disk mode has the following display pages:
• LOAD FROM DISK
• SAVE TO DISK
• COPY FILE/FD
• BACK UP/RESTORE
• CONVERTER
• EDIT FILE
• EDIT DIRECTORY
• FORMAT
• CHECK DISK
Loading data from a disk to Flash ROM.................................152
Saving data from Flash ROM to a disk...................................153
Copying files & copying floppy disks.......................................154
Backing up/restoring the data in Flash ROM..........................154
Converting PSR-8000 format files to 9000Pro format files.....155
Renaming/deleting disk files...................................................155
Renaming/deleting/creating directories..................................156
Formatting a disk....................................................................156
Checking a disk ......................................................................157
Before going on to the explanations of the above functions, make sure to read through
the instructions on Basic Operation and Selecting Directories/Files below. The follow-
ing explanations apply to the Plug-in Manager function (page 66), Style Manager func-
well as the Disk/SCSI functions described in this chapter.
150 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disk/SCSI Operations
Basic Operation — Directory/File Selection
• In the file selection display, a
maximum 250 file or directory
names can be displayed. If the
number of files or directories
exceeds 250, the 251st and
beyond (according to alphabet-
ical order) are not shown.
➀ Selecting files
The 9000Pro provides three ways to select files: SINGLE, MULTI, and ALL.
• When set to SINGLE, you can select only one file.
• When set to ALL, you can select all files.
• When set to MULTI, you can select files listed consecutively.
For more information about MULTI, see the example (Style Manager) below.
1
Select “SINGLE.”
(Before using
“MULTI,” you’ll have to
specify the first file
using “SINGLE.”)
3
Select
“MULTI.”
2
Select a file. (For “MULTI,” this will be the first
file in the group of files to be selected.)”
4
Select the last file in the group. (All files between this
and the file selected in step #2 will be selected.)
To cancel “Multi” file selection, select “SINGLE” by pressing the [C] button twice.
The following explanation applies to the Load operation of the Plug-in Manager and the Style Manager function.
CAUTION
• When loading multiple files from disk to Flash ROM, only the selected files will be loaded to the destination location in the Flash ROM
(see pages 78 and 87).
Keep in mind that the files are loaded to consecutive locations starting from the specified destination. Make sure that the consecutive
locations contain no important data, otherwise you may inadvertently overwrite files you wish to keep.
If you select this location as the
destination in Flash ROM with
selecting three files in disk, for
example, the three locations in
Flash ROM are replaced starting
from this location.
➀ Selecting Directories/Files
Directories are like file “folders” that are used to organize the file data. The instruc-
tions here show you how to navigate through directories and select the desired directo-
ries/files.
You can go to the next
lowest level by press-
ing the [IN] LCD button
while the cursor is
located at the folder
icon
.
You can return to
the next highest
level by pressing
the [IN] LCD button
while the cursor is
located at
.
Reference 151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disk/SCSI Operations
Loading Data from a Disk to Flash ROM
This operation lets you load the specified file from a floppy disk, an optional hard disk,
or an optional SCSI device to Flash ROM.
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 150.
➀➀Select a source file in the disk.
CAUTION
• When data is loaded from a
floppy disk to the 9000Pro,
the data already in the mem-
ory of the instrument will be
replaced by the data on the
disk. Save important data to
a disk file before doing the
Load operation.
Select this to display
the property of the
selected file.
If an optional hard
disk has been
installed or an
optional SCSI
device has been
connected, the
appropriate device
must be selected
here.
For details on directory file
selection, see page 151.
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
➀➀Select a Load method.
• Loading style data can be exe-
cuted via the Style Manager
function (page 74).
PAGE CONTROL
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
BACK
NEXT
➀➀Select the destination.
SETUP
All setup data —
see list on page
214.
EFFECT
DATA
All User effect data
— page 146.
REGIS-
All Registration
TRATION Memory data —
page 214.
MULTI
PAD
All Multi Pad data —
page 141.
CUSTOM All Custom Voice
VOICE
data including wave
data saved using
the Wave save op-
tion — page 92.
Set the data type to ON or OFF.
Data types set to ON will be loaded.
Flash ROM data for which the data
type has been set to OFF will be
retained.
Select the destination.
Select the source data
in the disk.
ORGAN
FLUTES
All Organ Flutes
settings — page 62.
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
➀➀Execute the Load operation by following the on-screen instructions.
152 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disk/SCSI Operations
Saving Data from Flash ROM to a Disk
The data types described below can be saved to a floppy disk, an optional hard disk, or
an optional SCSI device.
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 150.
➀ Select the data type to be saved.
Select the
SETUP
All setup data — see list on
desired group of
data to be saved.
The data types
listed at right can
be set to ON or
OFF as desired.
page 214.
EFFECT
DATA
All User effect data — page
146.
REGISTRA-
TION BANK
All Registration Memory
data — page 214.
You can set the individual
banks to ON or OFF.
MULTI PAD
All Multi Pad data — page
141.
You can set the individual
banks to ON or OFF.
CUSTOM
VOICE
All Custom Voice data —
page 92.
Set the data type to ON or OFF.
Data types set to ON are saved.
You can set the individual
numbers to ON or OFF. If
necessary, use the Wave
save option.
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
ORGAN
FLUTES
All Organ Flutes voice set-
tings — page 62.
You can set the individual
numbers to ON or OFF.
➀ Select the destination file in the disk.
CAUTION
• When overwriting an exist-
ing file, all data is saved.This
means that previous data
corresponding to unchecked
(OFF) items will be over-writ-
ten with “empty” data.
For details on directory file
selection, see page 151.
• Saving style data can be exe-
cuted via the Style Manager
function (page 74).
If an optional hard disk has
been installed or an
optional SCSI device has
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
been connected, the
appropriate device must be
selected here.
➀ Execute the Save operation by following the on-screen instructions.
Reference 153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disk/SCSI Operations
Copying Files & Copying Floppy Disks
The Copy File function allows you to copy files to a different directory on the same
disk, or to another disk. The Copy Floppy Disk (COPY FD) function allows you to
make complete copies of floppy disks — a perfect way to make backup copies of your
important data.
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 150.
➀ Select the desired menu.
• The COPY FD function cannot
be used to copy hard disk data.
• Copies can only be made to
the same type of floppy disk as
the source disk (i.e. 2HD to
2HD or 2DD to 2DD).
• Some types of pre-recorded
music software disks are copy
protected.
Execute the COPY FD operation by
following the on-screen instructions.
➀ Select the source files.
➀ Select the destination device and directory.
Press this button to
change the type of
files (as indicated by
their extension) dis-
played in the FILE
column.
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
Execute the
Copy operation
by following the
on-screen
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
instructions.
See page 151.
Use these buttons.
Use these buttons.
“Another FD” is indicated at the bottom of the Device column.
For details about selecting
files, see page 151.
Backing Up/Restoring the Data in Flash ROM
Any data that was pre-recorded in Flash ROM will be erased and replaced by the new
settings. This means that preset setups (factory settings) will also be erased. It is there-
fore a good idea to save them to disk via the Backup function before recording or creat-
ing your own original data so that you can keep them indefinitely.
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 150.
➀ Select the desired menu.
➀ Select the data type to be backed up.
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
Execute the
Backup opera-
tion by following
the on-screen
instructions.
Set the data type to ON or OFF.
Data types set to ON are backed up.
Select a file to be restored to Flash ROM and
execute the Restore operation by following
the on-screen instructions.
154 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disk/SCSI Operations
Converting files
This function is useful for when you
want to use PSR-8000 data contained
on a floppy disk with the 9000Pro, or
for when you wish to install a hard disk
previously installed to a PSR-8000, to
the 9000Pro.
The following data created via the
PSR-8000 is available:
• Custom Style
CAUTION
• Please note that the HD/FD
cannot be used again in the
PSR-8000 after using PSR-
8000 HD/FD function.
• Song
• Chord Step
• Waveform
This function changes the sequence/track name of
the Meta Event of the Standard MIDI file to the
song name of the 9000Pro. Save the SMF files
before using this function as required.
Renaming/deleting Disk Files
These functions allow you to assign a name to the file, and to delete any unnecessary
files.
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 150.
➀ Select the desired menu.
➀ Select the file to be deleted.
➀ Select the file to be named.
Select this to
display the
properties of
the selected
file.
Press this but-
ton to change
the type of files
(as indicated by
their extension)
displayed in the
FILE column.
PAGE CONTROL
PAGE CONTROL
See page 151.
BACK
NEXT
BACK
NEXT
Execute the Delete operation by following
the on-screen instructions.
Enter a name for the selected file.
Refer to the Basic Operation on page 46.
Reference 155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disk/SCSI Operations
Renaming/deleting/creating Directories
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 150.
➀ Select the desired menu.
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
Execute each operation by
following the on-screen
instructions.
Formatting a Disk
Setting up commercially available blank floppy disks for use with 9000Pro is called
formatting. This function is also useful for quickly deleting unnecessary files from an
already formatted disk. Be careful when using this operation, since it automatically
deletes all data on the disk.
CAUTION
• Formatting a disk completely
erases all data on the disk,
so be sure that the disk
you’re formatting does not
contain important data!
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 150.
➀ Select the device to be formatted.
• Hard disk drives of a maximum
8 GB capacity can be format-
ted; however, the maximum
partition size is 2 GB. For
example, an 8 GB hard disk
drive would have to be format-
ted into four separate 2 GB
partitions.
• Hard disk drives of a capacity
greater than 8 GB can be
installed; however, the
9000Pro is capable of format-
ting only up to a maximum 8
GB on the drive.
Select this to display the properties of
the selected disk.
This allows you to assign a password for
future formatting operations on the
9000Pro. Once a password is assigned,
no device can be formatted without first
specifying the password. This ensures
that no one else, intentionally or inad-
vertently, will be able to format the
device.
Pressing this button calls up the Name
Entry display (page 46), from which you
can enter the password. A maximum of
8 characters can be entered for the
PAGE CONTROL
name, and both capital and lowercase
letters can be used.
BACK
NEXT
• Make sure to write down
your password and keep in a
separate, secure location, in
case you forget it.
Execute the Format operation by following
the on-screen instructions.
156 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disk/SCSI Operations
Checking a Disk
This function can be used to check an entire disk for damaged files and recover the files
so that they can be properly read. Keep in mind that, depending on the extent of the
damage, some files may not be recoverable.
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 150.
➀ Select the device to be checked.
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
Execute the Check operation by following
the on-screen instructions.
Reference 157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The 9000Pro “Functions”
The 9000Pro “Function” mode includes 8 groups of functions that access a number of parameters related
to overall 9000Pro operation.
Basic Procedure
F
G
H
I
A
B
C
D
E
MENU
DISK
/
SCSI
FUNCTION
MIDI
3
Set the parameters of
the selected function.
J
1
Press the [FUNCTION]
button.
2
Select the desired function.
The operations for each function corresponding to step #3 are covered in the following
explanations.
The Function mode has the following display pages:
• MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE
• SPLIT POINT/FINGERING
• CONTROLLER
Master Tuning/Scale Tuning ..................................158
Split Point/Fingering settings.................................159
Controller assignment (Foot controller/Keyboard/
Modulation Wheel function)...................................159
Registration/Freeze Group/Voice Set settings ......163
Harmony/Echo settings.........................................164
Video monitor settings...........................................165
Talk setting (Vocal Harmony and the microphone
sound settings)......................................................165
Utility settings........................................................166
• REGISTRATION/FREEZE/VOICE SET
• HARMONY/ECHO
• VIDEO OUT
• TALK SETTING
• UTILITY
Master Tuning/Scale Tuning
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure above.
➀ Master Tuning
➀ Scale Tuning
The current tuning of
each note is shown in the
corresponding key.
[NEXT]
[BACK]
This allows you to store
four different Scale Tuning
settings to Multi Pad bank
#60. This convenient fea-
ture lets you change Scale
Tuning settings while you
are playing, simply by
pressing the appropriate
Multi Pad.
Preset (factory set) data is
listed in the chart below.
Tune the overall pitch of the 9000Pro from
414.6 - 466.8 Hz (referenced to A3).
A3 = 440 Hz is standard “concert” pitch.
Fine-tune the selected note in 1-cent steps.
Coarse-tune the selected key in 10-cent steps.
When the ARABIC scale is selected, you can select
the note and tune it . The tuning range is from “-64”
through “0” to “+63”. Each increment equals one
cent (one “cent” is one hundredth of a semitone).
C
0
0
0
0
C#
0
0
0
0
D
0
0
0
0
D#
0
0
0
0
E
F
0
0
0
0
F#
0
0
0
0
G
0
0
0
0
G#
0
0
0
0
A
0
0
0
0
A#
0
0
0
0
B
-50
0
0
0
Pad1 RASD Up
Pad2 RASD Down
Pad3 BAYATI
Pad4 Equal Tem-
perament
-50
-50
-62
0
Select either the normal equal temperament
scale or an “arabic” scale in which each note
can be tuned over a 127-cent range.
158 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The 9000Pro “Functions”
Split Point/Chord Fingering
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 158.
You can set the Split
Point by pressing the
desired key while hold-
ing this button.
The way in which chords are played or
indicated with your left hand (in the auto
accompaniment section of the keyboard)
is referred to as “fingering.”
For details, refer to page 70.
The point on the keyboard that separates the auto accompaniment sec-
tion/the left-hand section (voice L) and the right-hand section (voice R1/
R2/R3) of the keyboard is called the “split point.”
For details, refer to page 57.
Split Point
Auto Accompaniment section
or Voice L
Controller Assignment
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 158.
➀ Foot Controller
Various functions can be assigned to the foot volume/switch connected to the FOOT
PEDAL jacks.
➀ Foot Volume Controller
Determines whether an optional YAMAHA FC7 Foot Controller plugged into the rear-panel
FOOT PEDAL VOLUME jack will control master volume, or only the volume of specified parts
and voices.
Select “MASTER” for
master volume control
or “INDIVIDUAL” for
individual part/voice
volume control.
When “INDIVIDUAL” is selected, you can set
the individual part/voice to on or off.
Reference 159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The 9000Pro “Functions”
➀ Footswitch1
➀ Footswitch2
This determines the functions of footswitches plugged into the rear-panel FOOT PEDAL
SWITCH 1 and FOOT PEDAL SWITCH 2 jacks, and to which of the 9000Pro voices the foot-
switches will apply.
When the Sustain, Soste-
Select one of
the footswitch
functions.
See below for
details each
function.
nuto, Soft, Glide, Porta-
mento, or DSP slow/fast
type is selected, you can
set the corresponding parts
on or off as required.
Functions controlled by the footswitch
SUSTAIN
Standard sustain footswitch operation. When the footswitch is pressed notes played have a long sustain.
Releasing the footswitch immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes.
SOSTENUTO
If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the footswitch while the note(s) are held, those notes
will be sustained as long as the footswitch is held (as if the damper pedal had been pressed) but all subse-
quently played notes will not be sustained. This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while
other notes are played “staccato.”
SOFT *
Pressing the footswitch subtly reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played. The
SOFT effect only applies to certain voices — PIANO, for example.
GLIDE **
When the pedal is pressed the pitch drops a semitone, and then glides smoothly back to normal pitch when
the pedal is released.
PORTAMENTO
The portamento effect (a smooth slide between notes) can be produced while the pedal is pressed. Porta-
mento is produced when notes are played legato style (i.e., a note is played while the preceding note is still
held). The portamento time can be set via the Mixing Console display (page 145).
DSP SLOW/FAST
HARMONY/ECHO
VOCAL HARMONY
REGIST. +
REGIST. –
Same as the DSP [SLOW/FAST] button.
Harmony occurs only while pedal is pressed.
Same as the [V.H.(9)] button.
Recall next highest (increment) registration. “1-1” is selected after “64-8”.
Recall next lowest (decrement) registration. “64-8” is selected after “1-1”.
Same as the [START/STOP] button.
START/STOP
TAP TEMPO
SYNCHRO STOP
INTRO 1
Same as the [TAP TEMPO] button.
Same as the [SYNC STOP] button.
Same as the [INTRO I] button.
INTRO 2
Same as the [INTRO II] button.
INTRO 3
Same as the [INTRO III] button.
MAIN A
Same as the [MAIN VARIATION A] button.
Same as the [MAIN VARIATION B] button.
Same as the [MAIN VARIATION C] button.
Same as the [MAIN VARIATION D] button.
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
FILL DOWN
FILL SELF
Same as the [FILL IN & BREAK
Same as the [FILL IN & BREAK
Same as the [FILL IN & BREAK
Same as the [FILL IN & BREAK
Same as the [ENDING/rit. I] button.
Same as the [ENDING/rit. II] button.
Same as the [ENDING/rit. III] button.
Same as the [FADE IN/OUT] button.
] button.
] button.
] button.
] button.
FILL BREAK
FILL UP
ENDING 1
ENDING 2
ENDING 3
FADE IN/OUT
FING/ON BASS
BASS HOLD
The footswitch alternately switches between the Fingered and On Bass modes (page 70).
While the pedal is pressed, the Auto Accompaniment bass note will be held even if the chord is changed.
This function does not work in the Full Keyboard mode.
PERCUSSION
Footswitch plays a percussion instrument selected by the ASSIGN LCD buttons (the latter appears when
the Percussion type is selected).
160 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The 9000Pro “Functions”
SYNCHRO START
R1 ON/OFF
R2 ON/OFF
R3 ON/OFF
LEFT ON/OFF
OTS +
Same as the [SYNCHRO START] button.
Same as the [R1] button.
Same as the [R2] button.
Same as the [R3] button.
Same as the [L] button.
Recalls next higher One Touch Setting.
Recalls next lower One Touch Setting.
OTS -
*
SOFT does not affect the voice using the PLG150/100-DX board.
** GLIDE does not affect the voice using the Plug-in Board.
➀ Sustain Mode
In the DEFAULT setting, when you press the footswitch for sustain, the notes you play and
release sustain and fade out normally.
In the HOLD setting, when you hold down the footswitch for sustain, the notes you play are
held (just as if you were actually holding them down with your hands) even if you release the
keys.
➀ Panel Controller
➀ MODULATION WHEEL
Determines to which of the 9000Pro voices the MODULATION wheel will apply.
Turn Modulation wheel control
for the corresponding parts
ON or OFF as required.
Reference 161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The 9000Pro “Functions”
➀ INITIAL TOUCH
With this function, the 9000Pro senses how strongly or softly you play the keys, and uses that
playing strength to affect the sound in various ways, depending on the selected voice. This
allows you to play with greater expressiveness and add effects with your playing technique.
HARD 2
HARD 1
Requires the keys to be played
very hard to produce maximum
loudness.
Indicates current sensitivity
setting.
Requires the keys to be played
quite hard to produce maximum
loudness.
NORMAL Produces a fairly standard key-
board response.
SOFT 1
Although this is not as sensitive
as the “SOFT 2” setting, this al-
lows you to produce loud volume
with relatively light playing
strength.
Set the level at which touch
response is turned off.
Turn initial touch response control for the
corresponding parts ON or OFF as required.
SOFT 2
Allows maximum loudness to be
produced with very light playing
strength.
Select the desired sensitivity curve
(listed at right).
➀ AFTER TOUCH
With this function, the 9000Pro senses how much pressure you apply to the keys while play-
ing, and uses that pressure to affect the sound in various ways, depending on the selected
voice. This allows you to play with greater expressiveness and add effects with your playing
technique.
Indicates current
HARD
Relatively strong after touch pres-
sure is needed to produce chang-
es.
sensitivity setting.
NORMAL Produces a fairly standard after
touch response.
SOFT
Allows you to produce relatively
large changes with very light after
touch pressure.
Turn aftertouch for the corresponding
parts ON or OFF as required.
Select the desired sensitivity curve
listed at the right side.
➀ TRANSPOSE ASSIGN
This determines the function of the [TRANSPOSE] buttons (page 61).
RESET
When set to “KEYBOARD” (default), the buttons transpose only the keyboard sound.
When set to “SONG,” the buttons transpose only the song playback.
When set to “MASTER,” the buttons transpose the overall pitch of the 9000Pro.
162 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The 9000Pro “Functions”
Registration/Freeze Group/Voice Set Settings
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 158.
➀ Registration
You can enter descriptive names for each registration bank/number via the Name func-
tion.
Quick Guide
on page 28
Press one of these buttons to change the
name of the Bank or Registration.
For information about how to enter the
name, refer to the Basic Operation (page
46).
Select a registration bank/
number you wish to name.
➀ Freeze Group
You can specify which settings are affected by the Freeze function (page 28) via this
function.
Quick Guide
on page 28
The parameters included in each
group are listed on page 214.
Selects a setting
you want to freeze
or “un-freeze.”
Set (mark) or remove (un-mark) the selected setting.
➀ Voice Set
This function determines whether or not the preset Voice, Effect, EQ, and Harmony
type settings assigned to each preset voice are recalled when a new voice is selected.
• The VOICE, DSP, EQ, and
HARMONY TYPE parameters
are listed on page 214.
Select a part.
These four sets can be individu-
ally turned ON or OFF for each
part (RIGHT1, 2, 3, LEFT).
Reference 163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The 9000Pro “Functions”
Quick Guide
on page 35
Harmony/Echo Settings
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 158.
Assign the Harmony effect to
the various parts as listed
below.
Determines the lowest velocity value at which
the harmony note will sound. The higher the
value, the harder the keyboard must be played
to apply the Harmony effect.
When set to ON, the Harmony effect is applied only to the note that
belongs to a chord played on the left side of the keyboard from the
split point.
This setting is not available when the Multi Assign, Echo, Tremolo, or
Trill type is selected.
Select a Harmony type.
See below for details.
Adjust the speed of the echo/tremolo/trill effect.
This parameter is active when any of the echo-based effects
are selected (15 through 17).
Set the volume of the
Harmony effect.
➀ About the Harmony types
• When a Harmony type (“STANDARD DUET” through “STRUM”) is selected
Split Point
This type automatically adds one or more
harmony notes to a single-note melody
played on the right side of the keyboard
from the split point.
A chord played on the left side
of the keyboard from the split
point controls the harmony.
• When “MULTI ASSIGN” is selected
Multi Assign automatically assigns notes played simultaneously on the right-hand section of
the keyboard to separate parts (voices). The number of parts which can be assigned
depends on the number of parts turned ON via the [PART ON/OFF] buttons. If three parts
are turned on, then up to three voices can be assigned. if two parts are turned on, then only
two voices can be assigned. For example, if the R1, R2, and R3 parts are turned on and you
play and hold three successive notes, the first note will be played with the R1 voice, the sec-
ond note with the R2 voice, and the third note with the R3 voice.
• For all voices except Organ
Flutes and Plug-in voices, if
you change the chord in your
left hand while holding down a
note with your right hand, the
pitch of the harmony note(s)
will bend (without attack) to
match the newly played chord.
When using Organ Flutes or
Plug-in voices with your right
hand, the harmony note(s) is
retriggered with a fresh attack
at a new pitch matching the
newly played chord.
• When “ECHO” is selected
An echo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard at the currently set tempo.
• When “TREMOLO” is selected
A tremolo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard at the currently set tempo.
• When “TRILL” is selected
Two notes held on the keyboard are played alternately at the currently set tempo.
• The echo, tremolo, and trill
effects set via the Harmony/
Echo function may not affect
the Organ Flutes sound and
the Plug-in voice as expected.
➀ About “ASSIGN”
• R1 ..................Harmony is only applied to the R1 part. If R1 is OFF there will be no Har-
mony effect.
• R2 ..................Harmony is only applied to the R2 part. If R2 is OFF there will be no Har-
mony effect.
• R3 ...................Harmony is only applied to the R3 part. If R3 is OFF there will be no Har-
mony effect.
• AUTO .............Harmony notes are automatically assigned to the R1, R2, and R3 parts,
in that order or priority.
• MULTI .............Multi Assign automatically assigns the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd added harmony
notes to separate parts (voices). For example, if the R1, and R2 parts
are turned on and the STANDARD DUET type is selected, then the note
you play on the keyboard will be played by the R1 voice, and the added
harmony note will be played by the R2 voice.
164 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The 9000Pro “Functions”
Video Monitor Settings
The functions on this page let you set the display characteristics for the lyrics and
chords (page 79) that are output to a television or video monitor connected to the
[VIDEO OUT] jack (page 13).
You can set the size and color of the displayed characters, as well as the color of the
display background.
• Occasionally some flashing
parallel lines may appear in the
television or video monitor.
This does not indicate that the
television or video monitor is
malfunctioning; you may be
able to remedy the situation by
adjusting the Character Color
or Background Color parame-
ters.
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 158.
For optimum results, also try
adjusting the color settings on
the TV monitor itself.
• Avoid looking at the television
or video monitor for prolonged
periods of time since doing so
could damage your eyesight.
Take frequent breaks and/or
focus your eyes on distant
objects to avoid eyestrain.
You can set the back-
ground to one of four
colors.
Television
The characters displayed on the video screen
can be set to any of a variety of colors.
• Keep in mind that even after
adjusting all settings as recom-
mended here, the TV monitor
you are using may not display
the LCD contents as expected
(e.g., the LCD contents may
not fit on the screen, the char-
acters may not be completely
clear, or the colors may be
wrong).
Set this to “SMALL” if the contents of the
LCD do not fit in the monitor screen.
Set this to correspond to the standard (NTSC or PAL) used by your video equipment.
The default setting is “PAL.” If the standard used by your television or video monitor is not
PAL (for example, NTSC is generally used in North America), change the setting to
“NTSC.” This setting is retained in memory as part of the System Backup parameters.
(See pages 55 and 214)
Talk Setting
This function page includes a number of parameters which affect the microphone
sound when the [TALK] button is on.
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 158.
This is the same parameter as
the Vocal Harmony type
described on page 81. When the
[TALK] button is turned on, the
current type setting is recalled.
This determines the amount of
attenuation to be applied to the
overall sound (not including the
microphone input).
This turns Vocal Harmony ON or OFF.
These set the reverb and chorus depth
of the microphone sound.
This selects the type of DSP effect to
be applied to the microphone sound.
This sets the stereo pan position of the
microphone sound.
This sets the depth of the DSP effect
applied to the microphone sound.
This determines the volume or level of
your voice from the microphone.
This turns the DSP effect applied to the
microphone sound ON or OFF.
Reference 165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The 9000Pro “Functions”
Utility Settings
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 158.
➀ Configuration
➀ 1, 2
This determines whether the MIDI
bank select and program change
numbers for each voice will be shown
along with the voice number and
name on the voice list display.
Select this to display the system
information of the 9000Pro.
This determines whether all wave data that was in
the wave RAM memory when the power was previ-
ously turned off will be automatically reloaded from
disk when the 9000Pro power is turned on.
➀ 3
This indicates the maximum number of
notes currently being played. This can be
useful in checking whether the maximum
polyphony has been exceeded in songs
or styles. The maximum value is 126 (the
9000Pro’s maximum polyphony).
Please note that the polyphony of the
Plug-in Voices is not counted.
Press this to reset the Poly Counter to “0”.
This sets the metronome on or
off during song playback.
This sets the metronome on or
off during song recording.
Setting this to ON enables the 9000Pro to read data much
faster from the floppy disk. This is done by use of built-in
cache memory. When a floppy disk is inserted and this is set
to ON, the 9000Pro automatically loads data to the cache
memory (even when you play the keyboard, accompaniment,
Multi Pads, etc.). All data is then read directly from the cache
memory rather than the disk, vastly speeding up the reading
of floppy disk data.
This sets the volume of
the 9000Pro metro-
nome sound for
recording.
➀ 4, 5
This allows you to set the drum
voice and the velocity which will
sound when the Tap function (page
72) is used.
This function can be used to “lock”
the specified parameters so that
they can only be changed via the
direct panel controls (i.e., not via the
Registration Memory, One Touch
Setting, Music Database, MIDI,
sequence data, etc.).
Select a parameter you
want to lock or unlock.
Lock (mark) or unlock (un-mark) the
selected parameter.
166 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The 9000Pro “Functions”
➀ Time
The displays from which voices and
styles are selected automatically
change back to the previously
When this is set to “NEVER,” the selected
menu displays remain indefinitely until
changed manually. When set to a value
other than “NEVER,” the displays change
according the interval selected.
selected display after a short time.
(when this is not set to “NEVER”).
The Auto Exit Time parameter
determines the time that the Voice
List or Style List displays remain
before returning to the previous dis-
play. When this is set to “NEVER,”
the Voice List or Style List displays
remain indefinitely. (You can manu-
ally return to the previous display by
pressing the [EXIT] button.)
Screen Saver Time determines how much
time elapses before the Screen Saver func-
tion is turned on. The Screen Saver can-
cels the current display and scrolls through
the 9000Pro’s specifications. To return to
the original display, press the [CLOSE]
LCD button (which appears in the Screen
Saver) or any other panel button.
➀ Language
• Keep in mind that some keys of
the computer keyboard are not
used for the 9000Pro and have
no effect or function.
Press this button to enter
the owner’s (your) name.
See page 45 for details.
Select the appropriate type for the computer key-
board that is to be connected to the 9000Pro.
See below for details.
➀ Computer Keyboard Types (for use with the 9000Pro)
• Type 1
• Type 2
Num Caps Scroll
Lock Lock Lock
Print
Scroll
Screen Lock Pause
ESC
F1 F2 F3 F4
F5 F6 F7 F8
F9 F10 F11 F12
SysRq
Break
Num Lock
Caps Lock
Scroll Lock
F1 F2
Num PrtSc Scroll Pause
Insert Delete
ESC
F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
Lock SysRq Lock Break
F11
F12
~
Backspace
!
@
2
#
3
$
4
%
5
^
&
7
8
(
9
)
–
+
=
Home
End
Num
Lock
(
9
)
0
Page
Up
1
6
7
8
9
0
-
¬
!
"
£
3
%
5
^
&
–
-
+
=
Insert Home
Delete End
–
`
/
1
2
4
6
7
8
{
[
}
]
Tab
4
5
6
Q
W
E
R
T
Y
U
I
O
P -
:
{
[
}
]
Page
Down
7
8
5
2
9
\
Tab
Q
W
E
R
T
Y
U
I
O
P
Enter
Ctrl
Home
PgUp
+
+
Caps Lock
Shift
1
2
3
"
´
Enter PgUp
PgDn
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
0
L
:
;
@
~
#
4
6
;
Caps Lock
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
.
<
,
>
?
/
'
Shift
Z
X
C
V
B
N
M
<
,
>
.
?
/
.
1
3
PgDn
.
|
\
/
Z
X
C
V
B
N
M
End
Enter
Fn
Ctrl
Alt
Alt
Ctrl
0
Alt Gr
Ctrl
Alt
Ins
Del
• Type 3
• Type 4
Impr
écran
Syst
Pause
Attn
Druck Rollen Pause
Arrêt
défil
Num
Défil
Num
Lock
Caps
Lock
Scroll
Lock
ESC
F1 F2 F3 F4
F5 F6 F7 F8
F9 F10 F11 F12
Echap
F1 F2 F3 F4
F5 F6 F7 F8
F9 F10 F11 F12
S-Abf
Untbr
Num
7
§
=
?
6
7
+
}
!
"
%
5
&
6
/
(
8
)
9
`
´
Bild
Bild
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
^
0
Verr
Einfg Pos
1
Inser
÷
8
–
/
–
2
Num
2
3
{
[
]
}
{
(
[
)
]
ß \
ç
1
2
3
4
7
0
&
é
~
"
#
'
–
è
`
– \
à @
=
^
..
^
Q
9
£
7
4
8
9
6
3
E
¤
W
E
R
T
Z
U
I
O
P
Ü
Entf Ende
A
Z
R
T
Y
U
I
O
P
Suppr Fin
Entrée
+~
Pos
1
Bild
$
@
+
µ
%
ù
'
4
5
2
6
5
2
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
Ö
Ä
Q
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
#
>
<
;
,
:
.
–
-
>
<
.
;
/
:
§
!
M
µ
1
3
Bild
,
?
,
1
Y
X
C
V
B
N
W
X
C
V
B
N
Ende
Fin
Enter
Entr
.
0
0
Alt Gr
Strg
Alt Gr
Ctrl
Strg
Alt
Ctrl
• Type 6
ESC
Alt
Einfg
Entf
Inser
Suppr
• Type 5
Print Scroll
Scrn Lock
SysRq
Print
Pause
Break
Pause
Break
Num
Lock
Caps
Lock
Scroll
Lock
Num
Lock
Caps
Lock
Scroll
Lock
Scrn
Scroll
Lock
ESC
F1 F2 F3 F4
F5 F6 F7 F8
F9 F10 F11 F12
F1 F2 F3 F4
F5 F6 F7 F8
F9 F10 F11 F12
SysRq
1
/2
!
)
9
=
0
?
`
§
(
8
)
9
=
0
?
`
(
8
Page
Up
Page
Up
"
#
%
5
&
6
/
Num
!
1
"
#
%
5
&
/
Num
Lock
Insert Home
Delete End
÷
8
–
Insert Home
Delete End
–
/
Lock
§
{
[
]
}
{
[
]
}
+ \
+
\
1
2 @ 3 £ 4 $
7
2 @ 3 £ 4 $
6
7
´
´
^
.. ~
^
~
Page
Down
7
9
Page
Down
7
8
9
Q
W
E
R
T
Y
U
I
O
P
Q
W
E
R
T
Y
U
I
O
P
Å
Å
..
Enter
Home
Pg Up
Home
Pg Up
+
4
5
2
6
4
5
2
6
Caps
Lock
*
'
Caps
Lock
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
Ö
Ä
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
Ø
Æ
'
>
;
,
:
.
>
<
;
,
:
.
–
-
1
End
3
–
-
1
3
Pg Dn
,
Z
X
C
V
B
N
M
Z
X
C
V
B
N
M
<
Pg Dn
End
Enter
Enter
0
0
´
Alt Gr
Ctrl
Alt Gr
Ctrl
Ctrl
Alt
Ctrl
Alt
Ins
Ins
Del
Del
Reference 167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Functions
Built into the rear panel of the 9000Pro are two standard sets to MIDI terminals (MIDI IN A/B, MIDI OUT
A/B), a TO HOST terminal, and a HOST SELECT switch. The MIDI Functions give you a comprehensive,
powerful set of tools for expanding your music recording and performance possibilities.
This section explains what MIDI is, and what it can do, as well as how you can use MIDI on your 9000Pro.
What’s MIDI?
No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instrument.” In the world
today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s consider an acoustic piano and a clas-
sical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They are easy to understand. With the piano, you
strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly
pluck a string and the note sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note?
➀ Acoustic guitar note production
➀ Digital instrument note production
Sampling Note
Sampling Note
Tone Generator
(Electric circuit)
Playing the keyboard
L
R
Based on playing information from the keyboard, a
sampling note stored in the tone generator is played
through the speakers.
Pluck a string and the body
resonates the sound.
As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampling note (previously
recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is played based on informa-
tion received from the keyboard. So then what is the information from the keyboard that becomes
the basis for note production?
For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the 9000Pro key-
board.
Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out
information from the keyboard such as “with what voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,”
“when was it pressed” and “when was it released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a
number value and sent to the tone generator.
Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the stored sampling note.
➀ Example of Keyboard Information
Voice number (with what voice)
Note number (with which key)
01 (grand piano)
60 (C3)
Note on (when was it pressed) and
note off (when was it released)
Timing expressed numerically (quarter note)
Velocity (about how strong)
120 (strong)
MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, which allows electronic
musical instruments to communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note,
Control Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages.
The 9000Pro can control a MIDI device by transmitting note related data and various types of con-
troller data. The 9000Pro can be controlled by the incoming MIDI messages which automatically
determine tone generator mode, select MIDI channels, voices and effects, change parameter values
and of course play the voices specified for the various parts.
MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System messages. Below is an
explanation of the various types of MIDI messages which the 9000Pro can receive/transmit.
168 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Functions
➀ Channel Messages
The 9000Pro is an electronic instrument that can handle 32 channels. This is usually
expressed as “it can play 32 instruments at the same time.” Channel messages transmit infor-
mation such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each of the 32 channels.
Message Name
9000Pro Operation/Panel Setting
Note ON/OFF
Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Each mes-
sage includes a specific note number which corresponds to the key which
is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played.
Program Change
Control Change
Voice selecting (control change bank select MSB/LSB setting)
Volume, panpot (Mixing Console), etc.
➀ System Messages
This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system. System messages include
messages like System Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique to each instrument
manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the MIDI device.
Message Name
9000Pro Operation/Panel Setting
System Exclusive
Message
Effect type settings (Mixing Console), etc.
• The performance data of all
songs, styles and Multi Pads is
MIDI data.
Realtime Messages
Clock setting, Start/stop operation
The messages transmitted/received by the 9000Pro are shown in the MIDI Data Format
and MIDI Implementation Chart on pages 228 and 244.
➀ MIDI and TO HOST Terminals
In order to exchange MIDI data between multiple devices, each device must be con-
nected by a cable.
There are two ways to connect: from the MIDI terminals of the 9000Pro to the MIDI
terminals of an external device using a MIDI cable, or from the TO HOST port of the
9000Pro to the serial port of a personal computer using a special cable.
If you connect from the 9000Pro TO HOST terminal to a personal computer, the
9000Pro will be used as a MIDI interface, meaning that a dedicated MIDI interface is
not necessary.
In the rear panel of the 9000Pro, there are two kinds of terminals, the MIDI terminals
and the TO HOST terminal.
• When using the TO HOST ter-
minal to connect to a personal
computer using Windows 95/
98, a Yamaha MIDI driver must
be installed in the personal
computer. The included disk
contains the Yamaha MIDI
driver.
• Special MIDI cables (sold sep-
arately) must be used for con-
necting to MIDI devices. They
can be bought at music stores,
etc.
• Never use MIDI cables longer
than about 15 meters. Cables
longer than this can pick up
noise which can cause data
errors.
MIDI IN
Receives MIDI data from another MIDI device.
MIDI OUT
Transmits the 9000Pro’s keyboard information as MIDI data to another
MIDI device.
TO HOST
Transmits and receives MIDI data to and from a personal computer.
The MIDI A terminals and the TO HOST terminal are mutually exclusive; they cannot
be used at the same time. Use the HOST SELECT switch to change between the MIDI
A terminals and the TO HOST terminal.
When the HOST SELECT switch is set to “MIDI,” the MIDI A terminals receive/trans-
mit MIDI data. When the HOST SELECT switch is set to “Mac,” “PC-1,” or “PC-2,”
the MIDI A terminals will not receive/transmit data.
• The MIDI B port ignores Sys-
tem Exclusive messages.
The MIDI B IN/OUT terminals function regardless of the setting of the HOST
SELECT switch.
Reference 169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Functions
On the 9000Pro, 16 channels of MIDI data can be transmitted/received over a single MIDI cable, or over a serial
cable (using the TO HOST terminal). Since the 9000Pro features two independent MIDI “ports” (A and B), a total
of 32 MIDI channels can be used simultaneously.
For example, several tracks can be transmitted simultaneously, including the auto accompaniment data (as shown below).
When recording performance data using the Auto
Accompaniment on an external sequencer
MIDI cable or
serial cable
9000Pro part
External sequencer
Voice R1
Voice R2
Voice R3
Voice L
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
Channel 9
Channel 10
Channel 11
Channel 12
Channel 13
Channel 14
Channel 15
Channel 16
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
Track 5
Track 6
Track 7
Track 8
Track 9
Track 10
Track 11
Track 12
Track 13
Track 14
Track 15
Track 16
• Although the 9000Pro can
receive MIDI data over 32
channels simultaneously, as a
multi-timbral sound source/
tone generator it actually
responds to only 28 channels
simultaneously. This is
because the MIDI Receive
Mode for the MIDI B port (page
176) cannot be set to “XG/GM.”
Multi Pad 1
Multi Pad 2
Multi Pad 3
Multi Pad 4
Auto Accompaniment Rhythm 1 (sub)
Auto Accompaniment Rhythm 2 (main)
Auto Accompaniment Bass
Auto Accompaniment Chord 1
Auto Accompaniment Chord 2
Auto Accompaniment Pad
Auto Accompaniment Phrase 1
Auto Accompaniment Phrase 2
As you can see, it is essential to determine which data is to be sent over which MIDI channel when transmitting
MIDI data (page 175).
What You Can Do With MIDI
➀ Record performance data (1-16 channels) using the 9000Pro Auto Accompaniment fea-
tures on a external sequencer (such as a personal computer). After recording, you can
then edit the data with the sequencer, then play it again on the 9000Pro (playback).
MIDI transmit
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI receive
(playback)
9000Pro
QY700
MIDI transmit
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI receive
(playback)
9000Pro
Personal computer
Sequencer software
Set: MIDI transmit settings (page 175)
Set: Receive mode for all channels to “XG/GM”
MIDI receive settings (page 176)
➀ Control the 9000Pro from an optional Yamaha MFC10 MIDI Foot Controller
MFC10
MIDI transmit
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI receive
(control)
9000Pro
Set: MFC10 settings (page 178).
170 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Functions
MIDI Data Compatibility
This section covers basic information on data compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices
can playback the data recorded by 9000Pro, and whether or not the 9000Pro can playback com-
mercially available song data or song data created for other instruments or on a computer.
Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics, you may be able to play back the data
without any problem, or you may have to perform some special operations before the data can be
played back. If you run into problems playing back data, please refer to the information below.
➀ Sequence format
“Sequence format” refers to the way in which MIDI data (for playback, such as songs and styles)
is stored to disk. A number of popular sequence formats described below are compatible with
the 9000Pro.
Playback is only possible when the sequence format of the disk matches that of the MIDI device.
SMF (Standard MIDI File)
This is the most common sequence format.
Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two types: Format 0 or Format 1. Many MIDI
devices are compatible with Format 0, and most commercially available software is recorded as
Format 0.
• The 9000Pro is compatible with both Format 0 and Format 1.
• Song data recorded on the 9000Pro is automatically recorded as SMF Format 0.
ESEQ
This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova
series instruments. This is a common format used with various Yamaha software.
• The 9000Pro is compatible with ESEQ.
XF
The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) strandard with greater functional-
ity and open-ended expandability for the future.
• The 9000 is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played.
Style File
The Style File Format — SFF — is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conver-
sion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord
types.
• The 9000Pro uses the SFF internally, reads optional SFF style disks, and creates SFF styles
using the Style recording feature.
➀ Voice allocation format
With MIDI, voices are assigned to specific numbers, called “program numbers.” The numbering
standard (order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice allocation format.”
Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice allocation format of the song data matches
that of the compatible MIDI device used for playback.
GM System Level 1
This is one of the most common voice allocation formats.
Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System Level 1, as is most commercially
available software.
• Even if the devices and data
used satisfy all the conditions
above, keep in mind that the
sounds may differ slightly,
depending on the particular
MIDI device used for playback
(this includes the 9000Pro).
• The 9000Pro is compatible with GM System Level 1.
XG
XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and has been developed
by Yamaha specifically to provide more voices and variations, as well as greater expres-
sive control over voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the
future.
• The 9000Pro is compatible with XG.
DOC
This voice allocation format is compaible with many ofYamaha’s MIDI devices, including
the Clavinova series instruments.
This is also a common format used with various Yamaha software.
• The 9000Pro is compatible with DOC.
Reference 171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Functions
Connecting to a Personal Computer
Connecting the 9000Pro to a computer (via the TO HOST terminal or the MIDI termi-
nals) lets you take advantage of the enormous processing power and editing flexibility
of computer-generated music.
Connection can be done in one of two ways:
• Using the 9000Pro MIDI terminals
• Using the TO HOST terminal
• In the explanation examples
here, the MIDI A terminals are
used.
➀ Using the 9000Pro MIDI terminals
Using a MIDI interface device installed in the personal computer, connect the MIDI
terminals of the personal computer and the 9000Pro.
For the connection cable, use a special MIDI cable.
• When using the 9000Pro as a
16-channel multi-timbral sound
source, make sure to connect
the other MIDI device to the
MIDI A IN terminal (not MIDI
B).
➀ When the computer has a MIDI interface installed, connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the per-
sonal computer to the MIDI IN terminal of the 9000Pro.
Set the HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.”
• You can connect a MIDI device
to the MIDI B IN terminal; how-
ever, in this case, the 9000Pro
cannot be used as a multi-tim-
bral sound source, since the
MIDI Receive Mode for the
MIDI B port (page 176) cannot
be set to “XG/GM.”
Computer
(sequencer software)
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
9000Pro
➀ When using a MIDI interface with a Macintosh series computer, connect the RS-422 terminal
of the computer (modem or printer terminal) to the MIDI interface, then connect the MIDI OUT
terminal on the MIDI interface to the MIDI IN terminal of the 9000Pro, as shown in the diagram
below. Set the HOST SELECT switch on the 9000Pro to “MIDI.”
Computer
(sequencer software)
MIDI
interface
MIDI IN
RS-422
MIDI OUT
9000Pro
• When the HOST SELECT switch is set in the “MIDI” position, input and output to the TO
HOST terminal is ignored.
• When using a Macintosh series computer, set the MIDI interface clock setting in the
application software to match the setting of the MIDI interface you are using. For details,
carefully read the owner’s manual for the software you are using.
➀ When the computer has a USB interface, use the Yamaha UX256.
Computer
(sequencer software)
UX256
MIDI IN
USB cable
MIDI OUT
9000Pro
172 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Functions
➀ Using the TO HOST terminal
Connect the serial port of the personal computer (RS-232C terminal or RS-422 terminal) to the TO
HOST terminal of the 9000Pro.
For the connection cable, use the appropriate cable below (sold separately) that matches the per-
sonal computer type.
➀ IBM-PC/AT Series
Connect the RS-232C terminal on the computer to the TO
HOST terminal on the 9000Pro using a serial cable (D-SUB
9P -> MINI DIN 8P cross cable). Set the 9000Pro HOST
SELECT switch to the “PC-2” position.
mini DIN 8-pin
D-SUB 9-pin
9000Pro
➀ Macintosh Series
Connect the RS-422 terminal (modem or printer terminal)
on the computer to the TO HOST terminal on the 9000Pro
using a serial cable (system peripheral cable, 8 bit). Set the
9000Pro HOST SELECT switch to the “Mac” position.
Set the MIDI interface clock in the sequencer software you
are using to 1 MHz.
For details, carefully read the owner’s manual for the soft-
ware you are using.
mini DIN 8-pin
mini DIN 8-pin
For details about the necessary MIDI settings for computer
and sequence software you are using, refer to the relevant
owner’s manuals.
9000Pro
About the Thru Port Function
This function can be used when a computer is connected to the TO HOST terminal of the 9000Pro. It gives you
exceptionally flexible and comprehensive control over the routing of incoming MIDI data.
For example, you could use this to selectively play back parts of song data from a computer — having the
9000Pro respond to certain parts of the song, while playing back other parts on a separate connected tone
generator (as shown in the illustration).
Select the desired THRU PORT settings from the MIDI SYSTEM display (page 174) on the 9000Pro as
described below, and make the appropriate port settings on your computer/sequencer software.
Tone Generator
MIDI data and its port
assignment(s) is trans-
mitted to the 9000Pro.
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT B
Set the THRU PORT set-
ting in the MIDI SYSTEM
display (page 175)
Computer and
software with
multiple-port
capability.
mini DIN 8-pin
9000Pro
THRU PORT
Comments
NO THRU
All incoming MIDI data from the computer is recognized by the 9000Pro, but is not transmitted through
the MIDI B OUT terminal.
THRU
All incoming MIDI data from the computer is recognized by the 9000Pro and is also transmitted unproc-
essed through the MIDI B OUT terminal. In this case, the MIDI B OUT terminal functions as MIDI THRU.
OFF
Only MIDI data assigned to Port 1 from the computer is recognized by the 9000Pro. The data is not
transmitted through the MIDI B OUT terminal. Any MIDI data that is assigned to ports other than Port 1
is not recognized or transmitted.
1-8
Only MIDI data assigned to Port 1 from the computer is recognized by the 9000Pro.
The data that is assigned to the port number set here is transmitted through the MIDI B OUT terminal.
Any MIDI data that is assigned to ports other than the one selected here and Port 1 is not recognized or
transmitted.
Reference 173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Functions
The 9000Pro offers a range of MIDI functions that allow it to be used effectively in even the most sophis-
ticated MIDI systems.
Basic Procedure
MENU
DISK
/
SCSI
FUNCTION
MIDI
Preset MIDI templates (Factory Set)
All Parts
Transmits all parts including R1, R2,
R3 and Left.
KBD & ACMP
Transmits Upper and Lower key-
board performance data, rather than
that of the individual parts (R1, R2,
R3, and Left).
2
Select the desired
template.
1
Press the [MIDI]
button.
Master KBD1
Master KBD2
Clock Ext.A
The 9000Pro functions as a master
keyboard for controlling external tone
generators or other devices.
The 9000Pro functions as a master
keyboard which does not transmit af-
tertouch data.
MIDI IN A port receives MIDI clock
data, allowing you to synchronize the
9000Pro with an external MIDI de-
vice.
MIDI Accord1
MIDI Accord2
An ideal setup for controlling the key-
board and accompaniment by a MIDI
accordion.
The chord and bass buttons on a
MIDI accordion are used to control
the accompaniment, as well as play
the chord and bass parts.
MIDI Pedal1
MIDI Pedal2
MIDI OFF
A MIDI pedal keyboard connected to
the MIDI IN B port controls the bass
note of the accompaniment.
3
Select this to call up
the SETUP display.
3
Select this to call up
the MFC10 display.
A MIDI pedal keyboard connected to
the MIDI IN B port plays the bass
part.
No MIDI signals are sent or received.
4
Select the desired menu to be set by
using the [NEXT] or [BACK] button.
4
Select the desired menu.
6
Use this menu to store
your settings.
Refer to page 177.
• Since all MIDI settings data is
stored to Flash ROM, any data
in the MIDI settings location
will be erased and replaced by
your new settings. This
includes the factory pro-
grammed preset MIDI set-
tings. If you’ve deleted the
factory-set data, you can use
the Restore function (page
154) to load a copy of it from
the included disks (page 6).
5
Set the parameter of the selected menu.
5
Set the parameter of the selected menu.
Refer to page 178.
The operations for each function corresponding to step #5 or #6 are covered in the fol-
lowing explanations.
174 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Functions
System Settings
The explanations here apply to step #5 of the Basic Procedure on page 174.
➀ Local Control
“Local Control” refers to the fact that, normally, the 9000Pro keyboard controls the internal tone generator,
allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard. This condition is referred to as “Local Con-
trol on” since the internal tone generator is controlled locally by its own keyboard. Local control can be turned
off, however, so that the keyboard does not play the internal voices, but the appropriate MIDI information is still
transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector when notes are played on the keyboard. At the same time, the internal
tone generator can respond to MIDI information received on channels set to the “XG/GM” mode via the MIDI
IN connector. This means that while an external MIDI sequencer, for example, plays the 9000Pro internal voices,
an external tone generator can be played from the 9000Pro keyboard.
➀ Clock, Receive Transpose and Thru Port
➀ Clock
Determines whether the 9000Pro is controlled by its own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received from an external
device. INTERNAL is the normal Clock setting when the 9000Pro is being used alone. If you are using the 9000Pro with
an external sequencer, MIDI computer, or other MIDI device, and you want the 9000Pro to be synchronized to the external
device, set this function to EXTERNAL. In the latter case, the external device must be connected to the 9000Pro MIDI IN
connector, and must be transmitting an appropriate MIDI clock signal.
➀ Transmit Clock
Turns MIDI clock transmission on or off.
When set to OFF, no MIDI clock or START/STOP data is transmitted.
➀ Receive Transpose
When the RECEIVE TRANSPOSE parameter is set to OFF, note data received by the 9000Pro is not transposed, and
when set to ON, the received note data is transposed according to the current 9000Pro song transpose setting.
➀ Thru
See page 173.
➀ Message Switch
The SYS/EX. TRANSMIT parameter turns MIDI transmission of MIDI system exclusive message data on or off.
The SYS/EX. RECEIVE parameter turns MIDI reception of MIDI exclusive data generated by external equip-
ment on or off. The CHORD SYS/EX. TRANSMIT parameter turns MIDI transmission of MIDI chord exclusive
data (chord detect — root and type) on or off. The CHORD SYS/EX. RECEIVE parameter turns MIDI reception
of MIDI chord exclusive data generated by external equipment on or off.
Transmit Settings
This display page allows you to specify which 9000Pro voices and parts will be transmitted via which MIDI
channels (there are 32 MIDI channels), and to specify which types of data will be transmitted for each channel.
The explanations here apply to step #5 of the Basic Procedure on page 174.
The Tx MONITOR (transmit
monitor) indicates when data is
being transmitted on any of the
32 MIDI channels: The dots cor-
responding to each channel (1-
• Channels 1 - 16 are handled
with the MIDI A terminals or
the TO HOST terminal; chan-
nels 1 - 16 of a second MIDI
32) flash briefly whenever any
port or device are handled as
data is transmitted on the chan-
channels 17 - 32 with the MIDI
B terminals.
nel(s).
Turn transmission of the specified
data type on or off.
See the next page for details on
the data types.
Select a
Channel.
Select a Part for the selected channel.
Reference 175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Functions
Receive Settings
This display page allows you to specify the MIDI receive mode for each 9000Pro MIDI
channels, and to specify which types of data will be received via each channel.
The explanations here apply to step #5 of the Basic Procedure on page 174.
• Channels 1 - 16 are handled
with the MIDI A terminals or
the TO HOST terminal; chan-
nels 1 - 16 of a second MIDI
port or device are handled as
channels 17 - 32 with the MIDI
B terminals.
The Rx MONITOR indicates
when data is being received on
any of the 32 MIDI channels:
The dots corresponding to each
channel (1 - 32) flash briefly
whenever any data is received
on the channel(s).
Turn reception of the specified data type on
or off.
See below for details on the data types.
Select a Mode for the selected channel.
See below for details about the receive modes.
Select a Channel.
MIDI Receive Mode
OFF
No MIDI data is received.
XG/GM
This is the “Multi-Timbre” mode in which the corresponding channel of the internal XG/GM tone
generator is directly controlled by the received MIDI data. XG/GM can only be used with chan-
nels 1 - 16. It cannot be used with channels 17 - 32.
RIGHT 1
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 3
LEFT
The RIGHT 1 part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel.
The RIGHT 2 part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel.
The RIGHT 3 part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel.
The LEFT part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel.
KEYBOARD
MIDI note data received by the 9000Pro plays the corresponding notes in the same way as if
they are played on the keyboard.
ACMP
The received notes are used as the accompaniment RHYTHM 1 and RHYTHM 2 notes.
RHYTHM1~2
ACMP BASS
The received notes are used as the accompaniment BASS notes.
ACMP
The received notes are used as the accompaniment CHORD 1 and CHORD 2 notes.
CHORD1~2
ACMP PAD
The received notes are used as the accompaniment PAD notes.
ACMP
The received notes are used as the accompaniment PHRASE 1 and PHRASE 2 notes.
PHRASE1~2
Data types in the MIDI TRANSMIT/RECEIVE display
Note.........................Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played.
Each message includes a specific note number which corresponds to the
key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is
played.
Cntcng.....................The abbreviation of “Control Change.”
Control change data includes modulation wheel, foot controller, and any
other controller data (except the pitch bend wheel, which has its own
switch, below).
Prgcng.....................The abbreviation of “Program Change.”
Program change data corresponds to voice or “patch” numbers.
Pitch Bend...............Refer to page 59
After Tch..................Refer to page 60
176 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Functions
Root Settings
The note on/off messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the
root notes in the accompaniment section. The root notes will be detected regardless of
the accompaniment on/off and split point settings on the 9000Pro panel.
• Channels 1 - 16 are handled
with the MIDI A terminals or
nels 1 - 16 of a second MIDI
port or device are handled as
channels 17 - 32 with the MIDI
B terminals.
The explanations here apply to step #5 of the Basic Procedure on page 174.
Select channel groups
1 through 8, 9 through
16, 17 through 24, and
25 through 32, respec-
tively.
Press this to set all
channels to OFF.
• When several channels are
simultaneously set to “ON,” the
root note is detected from
merged MIDI data received
over the channels.
Set the desired track
to ON or OFF.
Chord Detect Settings
The note on/off messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the
fingerings in the accompaniment section. The chords to be detected depend on the fin-
gering mode on the 9000Pro. The chords will be detected regardless of the accompani-
ment on/off and split point settings on the 9000Pro panel.
• Channels 1 - 16 are handled
with the MIDI A terminals or
nels 1 - 16 of a second MIDI
port or device are handled as
channels 17 - 32 with the MIDI
B terminals.
The explanations here apply to step #5 of the Basic Procedure on page 174.
Select channel groups
1 through 8, 9 through
16, 17 through 24, and
25 through 32, respec-
• When several channels are
simultaneously set to “ON,” the
chord is detected from merged
MIDI data received over the
channels.
tively.
Press this to set all
channels to OFF.
Set the desired
track to ON or OFF.
Storing the MIDI Settings
This allows you to store your custom MIDI settings to Flash ROM.
stored to Flash ROM, any data
in the MIDI settings location
will be erased and replaced by
your new settings. This
The explanations here apply to step #6 of the Basic Procedure on page 174.
This allows you to assign a
name to your group of
MIDI settings. (For details
on entering a name, refer
to “Basic Operation” on
page 46.)
includes the factory pro-
grammed preset MIDI set-
tings. If you’ve deleted the
factory-set data, you can use
the Restore function (page
154) to load a copy of it from
the included disks (page 6).
Press this to execute the
Store operation.
Select the destination.
Reference 177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Functions
MFC10 Settings
Various functions can be assigned to an optionalYamaha MFC10 MIDI Foot Controller
connected to the 9000Pro.
Connect the MFC10 to the MIDI B terminals and set the MIDI channel for the MFC10
messages by following the on-screen instructions.
The 9000Pro provides two ways to set: Easy Setup and Full Setup.
MFC10
• When the MIDI B terminals are
connected to the MFC10, the
functions of the MIDI B port are
limited. For details, refer to the
MIDI Data Format (page 228).
9000Pro
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MIDI IN
MIDI cable
MIDI OUT
The explanations here apply to step #5 of the Basic Procedure on page 174.
➀ Easy Setup
Follow the on-screen instructions to call up the template display as shown below.
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
Select a template.
• When setting up the MFC10
from the 9000Pro, a MIDI cable
must be connected from the
MIDI OUT of the 9000Pro to
the MIDI IN of the MFC10.
However, you should discon-
nect this cable when using the
MFC10, since extraneous MIDI
messages may be transmitted
from the 9000Pro.
Press the [NEXT] button to enable
the selected Easy Setup template.
Disconnect the MIDI cable from the
MIDI OUT B terminal and connect it
to the MFC10 Foot Controller.
• To exit from the MFC10 play
mode, select the MIDI Tem-
plate display (page 174) and
press the [CANCEL] LCD but-
ton.
• The MFC10 play mode on/off
status is retained in Flash
ROM and is maintained even
when the power is turned off.
178 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Functions
➀ Full Setup
You can create your original settings and store them as a template.
Follow the on-screen instructions to call up the template display as shown below.
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
➀ Assign various functions to the five
Foot Controllers.
➀ Assign various functions to the five
Footswitches.
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
Select the desired function to be
assigned to the selected Foot Con-
troller.
Select the desired function
to be assigned to the
selected Footswitch.
PAGE CONTROL
Select the desired Foot Controller.
Select the desired Footswitch number.
BACK
NEXT
➀ Select the destination template.
• Since all MFC10 settings data is stored to
Flash ROM, any data in the MFC10 settings
location will be erased and replaced by your
new settings. This includes the factory pro-
grammed preset MFC10 settings. If you’ve
deleted the factory-set data, you can use the
Restore function (page 154) to load a copy
of it from the included disks (page 6).
• When setting up the MFC10 from the
9000Pro, a MIDI cable must be connected
from the MIDI OUT of the 9000Pro to the
MIDI IN of the MFC10. However, you should
disconnect this cable when using the
MFC10, since extraneous MIDI messages
may be transmitted from the 9000Pro.
• To exit from the MFC10 play mode, select
the MIDI Template display (page 174) and
press the [CANCEL] LCD button.
PAGE CONTROL
BACK
NEXT
Store the MFC10 settings by following the
on-screen instructions.
• The MFC10 play mode on/off status is
retained in Flash ROM and is maintained
even when the power is turned off.
Press the [NEXT] button to enable the selected
Easy Setup template.
Disconnect the MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT B ter-
minal and connect it to the MFC10 Foot Controller.
Reference 179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing Optional Hardware
The following optional units can be installed to the 9000Pro.
➀ Plug-in Boards
➀ Hard disk unit
➀ SIMM
Before installing the optional hardware, make sure you have a Philips screwdriver.
SIMM cover
Plug-in board/Hard disk cover
Installation Precautions
WARNING
• Before beginning installation, switch off the power to the 9000Pro and connected peripherals, and unplug them from the
power outlet.Then remove all cables connecting the 9000Pro to other devices. (Leaving the power cord connected while
working can result in electric shock. Leaving other cables connected can interfere with work.)
• Be careful not to drop any screws inside the instrument during installation (this can be prevented by keeping the Plug-in
Board, hard disk unit and cover away from the instrument while attaching). If this does happen, be sure to remove the
screw(s) from inside the unit before turning the power on. Loose screws inside the instrument can cause improper opera-
tion or serious damage. If you are unable to retrieve a dropped screw, consult yourYamaha dealer for advice.
• Install the Plug-in boards, the hard disk unit, and the SIMM modules carefully as described in the procedure below.
Improper installation can cause shorts which may result in irreparable damage and pose a fire haz-ard.
• Do not disassemble, modify, or apply excessive force to board areas and connectors on Plug-in boards/hard disk/SIMMs.
Bending or tampering with boards and connectors may lead to electric shock, fire, or equipment failures.
CAUTION
• Before handling the Plug-in boards/hard disk unit /SIMMs, you should briefly touch the metal surface to which the Plug-in
board/hard disk or SIMM cover is attached (or other such metallic area — be careful of any sharp edges) with your bare
hand so as to drain off any static charge from your body. Note that even a slight amount of electrostatic discharge may
cause damage to these components.
• It is recommended that you wear gloves to protect your hands from metallic projections on the Plug-in boards, Hard disk
unit, SIMMs, and other components.Touching leads or connectors with bare hands may cause finger cuts, and may also
result in poor electrical contact or electrostatic damage.
• Handle the Plug-in boards/Hard disk unit/SIMM with care. Dropping or subjecting them to any kind of shock may cause
damage or result in a malfunction.
• Be careful of static electricity.There are times when static electricity affects the IC chips on the Plug-in board. Before you
lift the optional Plug-in board, to reduce the possibility of static electricity, touch the metal parts other than the painted area
or a ground wire on the devices that are grounded.
• Do not touch the exposed metal parts in the circuit board.Touching these parts may result in a faulty contact.
• When moving a cable, be careful not to let it catch on the circuit Plug-in board. Forcing the cable in anyway may cut the
cable, cause damage, or result in a malfunction.
• Be careful not to misplace any of the screws since all of them are used.
• Do not use any screws other than what are installed on the instrument.
180 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing Optional Hardware
Optional Plug-in Board Installation
A variety of optional Plug-in boards sold separately let you expand the voice library of
your instrument. The following types of Plug-in boards can be used with your instrument.
• PLG150-AN
• PLG100-VL
• PLG100-DX
• PLG100-XG
• PLG150-PF
• PLG150-VL
• PLG150-DX
CAUTION
• When inserting Plug-in boards and connecting cables, make sure that you check that they are inserted and
connected properly. Improperly inserted Plug-in boards and cables may cause faulty contacts and an electri-
cal short circuit which may cause damage or result in a malfunction.
• After mounting the Plug-in board, be sure to tighten the screws as directed so it is completely stable and
does not move in any way.
1
2
Turn the 9000Pro power off, and disconnect the AC power
cord. Also, if the keyboard is connected with other external
device(s), disconnect the device(s).
Turn the 9000Pro face down on a blanket or some soft sur-
face, giving you direct access to the bottom of the instru-
ment.
Plug-in board/Hard disk cover
3
4
Move to a position facing the front panel of the keyboard,
and remove the eight screws from the Plug-in board/Hard
disk cover with a Phillips screwdriver. Do not remove the
other screws.
• Keep the removed (8) screws
in a safe place. They will be
used when attaching the Plug-
in board/Hard disk cover to the
keyboard again.
Black screws
Plug-in board/Hard disk cover
Remove the Plug-in board/Hard disk cover.
WARNING
• In order not to drop any screws inside the 9000Pro, keep the Plug-in Board and cover away from the 9000Pro
in the following steps #5 - #7.
Reference 181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing Optional Hardware
5
Turn over the Plug-in board/Hard disk cover.
This is the location for the Hard disk
unit. See page 184.
Plug-in board stand
Plug-in board/Hard disk cover
First board
6
Attach the Plug-in Board to the Plug-in board stand. ...........................
6-[1] Remove the four screws from the Plug-in stand with a Phillips
screwdriver. Do not remove the other screws.
Gold color screws
6-[2] Attach the Plug-in board to the the Plug-in board stand using the
four screws removed in the previous step (6-[1]).
Gold color screws
Plug-in board
Plug-in board connector
If you are installing a second board, go on to step #7 below. If you are installing only
one board, go on to step #8.
Second board
7
As required, attach another Plug-in board to the Plug-in board stand. ....
7-[1] Remove the four screws from the Plug-in stand and remove the
Plug-in stand from the cover. Do not remove the other screws.
Gold color screws
7-[2] Attach another Plug-in board by turning over the Plug-in board stand
and using the same operations in steps 6-[1] and 6-[2].
When turning over the board, let it rest on a soft surface.
Gold color screws
Plug-in board stand
7-[3] Attach the Plug-in board stand to the Plug-in board/Hard disk cover with
the four screws removed in step 7-[1].
Gold color screws
Plug-in board/Hard disk cover
Plug-in Board (second board)
Plug-in Board (first board)
182 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing Optional Hardware
8
9
Unfasten the cable inside the 9000Pro as shown in the following illus-
tration.
There are three cables available for installation. The two smaller cables are used for the
Plug-in Boards; the larger cable is for the hard disk.
Cable clip
Carefully plug the cable connector into the Plug-in board connector
until the two notches on the cable connector lock into the sockets on
the board as shown in the illustration.
The two cables can be used interchangeably. The cable that is used determines the slot
number used by the 9000Pro. The cable with the single orange cord corresponds to Slot 1.
The cable with the yellow cord corresponds to Slot 2. Keep in mind that the slot number is
determined by the cable, not the actual installation position of the board.
First board
Second board
Orange or yellow
Yellow or orange
Colored side of cable faces inward.
10
Attach the Plug-in board/Hard disk cover to the 9000Pro.
Black screws
Bring the cover back
around as shown, so that
the board fits in properly.
11
Check that the installed Plug-in board is functioning properly.
Turn on the power.
•
A message appears indicating that the installed Plug-in Board is being initialized. The main display
then appears, indicating that the board has been successfully installed.
If an error message appears, the 9000Pro freezes after a while, indicating that the installation was
not successful. If this happens, turn off the power and carefully go through the installation proce-
dure again.
•
•
If you cannot select a Plug-in Voice even though no error message appears, the board has proba-
bly not been connected. If this happens, turn off the power and make sure that the Plug-in Board is
securely connected.
Reference 183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing Optional Hardware
Optional Hard Disk Installation
The hard disk used must be a 2.5-inch IDE-compatible; however, not all such drives may be installable.
CAUTION
• When inserting hard disk unit and connecting cables, make sure that you check that they are inserted and
connected properly. Improperly inserted hard disk unit and cables may cause faulty contacts and an electri-
cal short circuit which may cause damage or result in a malfunction.
• After mounting the hard disk unit, be sure to tighten the screws as directed so it is completely stable and
does not move in any way.
• Hard disk drives of a maximum 8 GB capacity can be formatted; however, the maximum partition size is 2 GB. For
example, an 8 GB hard disk drive would have to be formatted into four separate 2 GB partitions.
• Hard disk drives of a capacity greater than 8 GB can be installed; however, the 9000Pro is capable of formatting only
up to a maximum 8 GB on the drive.
• Hard disk drives wider than 12.7 mm cannot be installed to the 9000Pro.
For information on the hard disk recommendations, ask your nearest Yamaha representative or an
authorized distributor listed at the end of this owner’s manual. Install a hard disk at your own risk.
Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage or injury resulting from improper installation
or the use of a hard disk other than one of the types recommended by Yamaha.
1-4
Use the same operation as in "Optional Plug-in Board Installation"
(page 181).
WARNING
• In order not to drop any screws inside the 9000Pro, keep the Plug-in Board and cover away from the 9000Pro
in the following steps #5 - #8.
If the Plug-in Board has been installed, pull out the cable connector from the Plug-in Board connector.
Silver screws
5
6
Remove the four screws from the Plug-in board/Hard disk
cover.
Turn over the Plug-in board/Hard disk cover.
This is the location for
the Hard disk unit.
Plug-in board stand
Plug-in board/Hard disk cover
If a Plug-in Board (or boards) is installed, make sure to disconnect the Plug-in Board con-
nector(s) before continuing.
7
Hold the hard disk unit in place with your hand as shown below. Make
sure that the socket end of the unit faces toward you as shown.
Hard disk unit:
top side face up
Turn over
Align the holes in the cover with the
holes on the hard disk. The actual
placement of the holes may differ
depending on the particular hard disk.
184 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing Optional Hardware
8
Attach the hard disk unit to the Plug-in board/Hard disk
cover using the four screws removed in step 5.
Silver screws
• Depending on the type of hard
disk drive you plan to install,
select holes (A) or holes (B)
to attach the hard disk drive.
* Holes (A) are used in this illus-
tration.
You should tighten these
two screws first.
9
Turn the cover over again, and attach the cable connector as
shown.
Undo the cable clip (to the large cable), and plug it into the hard disk socket.
Make sure that the pins do not
bend.
In the middle of the hard disk con-
nector is a “missing” pin. Make sure
to align the cable connector (which
has a corresponding “missing” hole)
to the hard disk as shown.
The rightmost 4 pins are unused.
Re-attach the Plug-in Board cable(s) if necessary.
10 Attach the Plug-in board/Hard disk cover to the 9000Pro
(page 183).
11
Check that the installed hard disk is functioning properly.
Turn on the power, go to the DISK display, and execute the Format Hard Disk func-
Optional SIMM Installation
The SIMMs used must meet the following minimum specifications, but this does not guarantee that
they will work properly with the 9000Pro. Make sure to install the SIMMs in pairs only; also make
sure that both modules of the pair are of the same type and memory capacity, and are from the same
manufacturer. Consult with your nearestYamaha representative or an authorized distributor listed at
the end of this manual before purchasing SIMMs for the 9000Pro.
• 16-bit bus compatibility or compliance with JEDEC standards (SIMMs which are only compatible with 32-
bit buses can not be used)
• 70 nanoseconds or faster access time (note: 60 nanosecond SIMMs are faster than 70 nanosecond
SIMMs).
8mm
• No more than 18 memory chips on each SIMM module.
8mm
2.54m
• SIMM modules must be no more than 25.4 mm in height and the thickness of the SIMM should not
exceed 8mm on either side when measured from the center of the SIMM. See below.
• SIMMs with parity and EDO DRAM modules can also be used.
• Use only SIMMs of 4-, 8-, 16-, or 32-megabyte capacity.
• Install SIMM memory at your own risk.Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage or injury
resulting from improper installation.
Reference 185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing Optional Hardware
1-2
Use the same operation as in "Optional Plug-in Board
Installation" (page 181).
Black
screws
SIMM
cover
3
Move to a position facing the rear panel of the keyboard,
and remove the six screws from the SIMM cover with a
Phillips screwdriver. Do not remove the other screws.
4
5
Remove the SIMM cover.
Insert the SIMMs in the SIMM slots as described below.
....................................................................................................................
First SIMM
5-[1] Make sure the orientation is correct. Make sure that the cutout on
the SIMM module is aligned with the protruding “key” on the con-
nector slot.
CAUTION
• Do not install the SIMM back-
wards.
SIMM cutout
Slot key
5-[2] Install the first SIMM in the rear slot (the slot closest to the
9000Pro rear panel), inserting it at an angle as shown in the illus-
tration.
Make sure that the parts at locations A, B, and C are properly
aligned.
CAUTION
SIMM hole
• Make sure that the entire length of
the SIMM is evenly inserted.
Clamp
Clamp
C
A
B
SIMM hole
SIMM notch
Slot protrusion
186 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing Optional Hardware
5-[3] Holding both edges of the SIMM module, raise it to the vertical
CAUTION
position until it firmly locks in place with the left and right clamps.
• Make sure that the entire
length of the SIMM is evenly
inserted.
Clamp
Clamp
Second SIMM
....................................................................................................................
5-[4] After confirming the orientation, insert the second SIMM into
the front slot (the slot closest to the 9000Pro keyboard), and
raise it to the vertical position in the same way as the first
SIMM.
SIMM cover
Black screws
6
7
Replace the SIMM cover and attach it to the 9000Pro with
the six screws.
Check that the installed SIMMs are functioning properly.
Set the 9000Pro right-side up, and connect the power cord to the rear-panel
AC INLET jack and an AC outlet.
Turn on the power, go to the SAMPLING display (page 41), and check that
the REMAIN TIME value matches the amount of installed memory, as fol-
lows:
• 4MB x 2
• 8MB x 2
• 16MB x 2
• 32MB x 2
• No SIMMS
106.9s
202.1s
392.3s
772.7s
11.8s
• Although the wave memory of
the 9000Pro can be expanded
to 65 megabytes, the maxi-
mum size of a single sample
recording is 32 mega bytes
(380 sec.).
(These values apply when there is no data in the wave memory.)
➀ Removing SIMMs
SIMM modules can be removed after opening the clamps
at both ends of the connector slot.
Reference 187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
PROBLEM
POSSIBLE CAUSE/SOLUTION
• When using a mobile phone, noise is produced.
Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the 9000Pro may produce in-
terference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away
from the 9000Pro.
• No sound results.
• The R1/R2/R3/L voice volume (Main Mixer) settings could be set too low.
Make sure the voice volumes are set at appropriate levels (page 25).
• The Local Control function could be turned off. Make sure Local Control
is turned on (page 175).
• The [MASTER VOLUME] controls or foot volume are turned all the way
down.
Set the [MASTER VOLUME] controls and foot volume to a reasonable
listening level.
• Are the desired parts turned on? ([PART ON/OFF] button — page 57)
• A pair of headphones is plugged into the PHONES jack. Unplug the
headphones.
• A plug is inserted in the LOOP SEND jacks. Unplug the LOOP SEND
jacks.
• Is the Footswitch connected to the FOOT VOLUME connector?
• The [FADE IN/OUT] button is on and has reached the end of its duration,
muting the sound. Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button so that its indicator
goes out.
• Check whether the external speaker is connected properly.
• Not all simultaneously-played notes sound.
• Auto Accompaniment seems to “skip” when the keyboard is
played.
You are probably exceeding the maximum polyphony of the 9000Pro. The
9000Pro can play up to 126 notes at the same time — including voice R2,
voice R3, voice L, auto accompaniment, song, and multi pad notes. When
the maximum polyphony is exceeded, the earliest played notes will stop
sounding, letting the latest played notes sound. This is referred to as “last-
note priority.”
• The accompaniment or song does not play back even when
pressing the [START/STOP] button.
The MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure it is set to “INTER-
NAL” (page 175).
• The Multi Pads do not play back, even when one of the
MULTI PAD buttons is pressed.
• The auto accompaniment does not start, even when Synchro
You may be trying to start accompaniment by playing a key in the right-
hand range of the keyboard. To start the accompaniment with Synchro
Start, make sure to play a key in the left-hand (accompaniment) range of
the keyboard.
Start is in standby condition and a key is pressed.
• Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch.
Make sure that the scale tuning value for those notes is set to “0” (page
158).
• Auto accompaniment chords are recognized regardless of
Check whether the fingering mode is set to “Full Keyboard” or not. If the
Full Keyboard fingering mode is selected, chords are recognized over the
entire range of the keyboard, irrespective of the split point setting.
the split point or where chords are played on the keyboard.
• The Harmony function does not operate.
• Harmony cannot be turned on when the Full Keyboard fingering mode is
selected. Select an appropriate fingering mode.
188 Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
PROBLEM
POSSIBLE CAUSE/SOLUTION
• MIDI data is not transmitted or received via the MIDI A termi-
The MIDI terminals can only be used when the HOST SELECT switch is
set to “MIDI.” All other settings (“Mac,” “PC-1” and “PC-2”) are for direct
transmission/ reception with a computer.
nals, even when MIDI cables are connected properly.
• If you experience distorted or out-of-tune sound from the Vo-
cal Harmony feature, your vocal microphone may be picking
up extraneous sounds (other than your voice) — the Auto Ac-
companiment sound from the 9000Pro, for example. In par-
ticular, bass sounds can cause mistracking of the Vocal
Harmony feature.
The solution to this problem is to ensure that as little extraneous sound as
possible is picked up by your vocal microphone:
• Sing as closely to the microphone as possible.
• Use a directional microphone.
• Turn down the MASTER VOLUME, ACMP volume, or SONG volume
control.
• Separate the microphone from the external speakers as much as possi-
ble.
• Cut the Low band via the 3 Band EQ function in the MIC SETUP display
(page 82).
• When a voice is changed, the previously selected effect is
This is normal, each voice has its own suitable preset values which are au-
tomatically recalled when the corresponding Voice Set parameters are
turned on (page 163).
changed.
• There is a slight difference in sound quality between notes
played on the keyboard.
This is normal and is a result of the 9000Pro’s sampling system.
• Some voices have a looping sound.
• Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher pitches, de-
pending upon the voice.
• Some voices will jump an octave in pitch when played in the
Some voices have a pitch limit which, when reached, causes this type of
pitch shift. This is normal.
upper or lower registers.
• The auto-accompaniment chord does not change even when
• Are you sure you’re playing on the left-hand section of the keyboard?
• You may be using single-finger type fingering in the fingered mode, or
vice versa. Use the correct type of chord fingering for the selected auto-
accompaniment fingering mode.
a different chord is played or the chord is not recognized.
• The displayed disk free area value does not coincide with the
The displayed value is an approximate value.
actual value.
• Disk save operations — particularly when saving wave data
to floppy disk — take a long time.
This is normal. It takes approximately 8 minutes to save 1 megabyte of
data to a floppy disk.
• Appropriate harmony notes are not produced by the Vocal
Make sure you are using the appropriate method to specify the harmony
notes for the current Vocal Harmony mode. See page 83.
Harmony feature.
• The voice produces excessive noise.
• The sound is distorted or noisy.
Certain voices may produce noise, depending on the Harmonic Content
and/or Brightness settings of the Mixing Console Filter. This is unavoidable
due to the sound generation and processing system of the 9000Pro. To
avoid noise, change the above mentioned settings.
• The MASTER VOLUME control may be turned up too high.
• This may be caused by the effects. Try cancelling all unnecessary ef-
fects, especially distortion-type effects.
• Some filter resonance settings in the Custom Voice Creator display can
result in distorted sound.
• Is the gain of the Low band set too high in the Master Equalizer display
(Mixing Console – page 147) ?
• If this applies to the “Sampled” voice , you may have recorded the sam-
ple(s) at too high a level. (See page 84.)
• A strange “flanging” or “doubling” sound occurs.
• Are the R1 and R2 parts set to “ON” and both parts set to play the same
voice?
• The sound is slightly different each time the keys are played.
• If you are routing the MIDI OUT on the 9000Pro to a sequencer and back
to the MIDI IN, you may want to set Local Control (page 175) to “off” to
avoid MIDI “feedback.”
• When a disk is inserted into the disk drive, the [DISK IN USE]
lamp automatically lights and the data starts loading auto-
matically, even though no disk functions have been execut-
ed.
• This is normal and no cause for concern if “FD CACHE” (page 166) has
been set to “ON.” If you do not need the data loaded to cache memory,
you can eject the floppy disk. You can also operate other functions from
the panel without disturbing the automatic cache loading process.
Reference 189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Detune............................................... 81 Format ............................................. 156
Device ............................................. 150 Forward ............................................. 79
Dimmer ............................................. 15 Freeze........................................ 28, 163
Direct Access .................................... 48 Frequency.................... 82, 93, 145, 147
Directory ................................... 78, 151 Full keyboard .................................... 70
Disk........................................... 54, 150 Functions......................................... 158
A
Accompaniment, volume ...................25
After Touch ................................60, 162
Arabic tuning ...................................158
Assignable Control ..........................103
Auto accompaniment ...................20, 70
Auto Exit time..................................167
Auto Load ....................64, 69, 100, 166
Auto Trigger Level.............................84
DSP (3).................................... 146, 147
DSP (4).............................. 35, 146, 147
B
Backup .......................................55, 154 DSP (5).............................. 35, 146, 147
Bank...............................28, 34, 77, 141 DSP (6).............................. 35, 146, 147
Bank View....................................28, 77 DSP (7).............................. 35, 146, 147
Basic Operation..................................44 DSP (8).................................... 146, 147
Basic Procedure ..............62, 66, 74, 81, DSP (9)............................................ 147
Effect depth..................................... 145 Lamp ........................................... 12, 15
Effect parameter.............................. 222 Language........................................... 45
Effect type list ................................. 220 LCD display...................................... 44
EG ..................................................... 93 Left.............................................. 18, 57
Element ............................................. 94 Left hold............................................ 61
End Key............................................. 86 Line out ........................................... 148
100, 108
Brightness ........................................145
C
Category.................................26, 56, 74 End point........................................... 89 Load .............................. 54, 66, 74, 152
Check Disk.......................................157 Ending....................................... 22, 160 Local control ................................... 175
Chord Detect....................................177 EQ ................................................... 147 Loop .......................................... 89, 126
Chord Match ..............................77, 142 Equal Temperament ........................ 158 LOOP SEND jacks............................ 12
Chord note........................................142 Event Filter.............................. 122, 125 Lyrics................................................. 79
Chord Step .......................................122 Event List................................ 120, 125
Chordal.........................................81, 83 Exit.................................................... 44
Chorus..............................................146 Extract............................................... 89
Complete Save ...................................68
Fade in/out........................... 23, 72, 160 Master tune...................................... 158
Fast Forward...................................... 79 Master volume................................... 14
Compressor ................................82, 147
FD Cache ........................................ 166 Measure................................... 112, 113
Computer connections .....................172
Fill In................................................. 22 Message Switch............................... 175
Configuration ...................................166
Filter.......................................... 93, 145 Metronome.................... 21, 37, 39, 166
Fingered ............................................ 70 MFC10 ............................................ 178
Fingering........................................... 70 MIC/LINE IN jack............................ 13
Custom voice .....................................92
Fixed Pitch ........................................ 86 Microphone ..................... 13, 32, 80, 83
Custom voice creator .........................92
Flash ROM........................................ 54 MIDI................................................ 168
Flash style ......................................... 55 MIDI Data Format........................... 228
D
Decay .................................................93 Floppy Disk................................. 5, 150 MIDI Implementation Chart ........... 244
Defragment ........................................75 Foot controller........................... 13, 159 MIDI templates ............................... 174
Delay............................................81, 93 FOOT PEDAL SWITCH jacks......... 13 MIDI terminals.................................. 13
Delete...........................68, 75, 113, 155 FOOT PEDAL VOLUME jack ......... 13 Mixing console................................ 144
Demonstration playback ....................56 Footswitch................................. 13, 160 Mode ................................................. 83
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Modulation.................................59, 161 Pre effect ........................................... 87 Split point................ 18, 20, 57, 70, 159
MODULATION wheel ..............59, 161 Precautions.......................................... 4 Start Key............................................ 86
Multi.................................................151 Preset style ........................................ 55 Start point.......................................... 89
Multi Assign.....................................164 Property............................. 74, 150, 152 Step.................. 110, 116, 122, 140, 143
Multi Finger .......................................70 PSR-8000 .................................. 75, 155 Store ......................... 19, 41, 54, 62, 74,
Multi Pad..............................34, 77, 141 Punch-in .......................................... 112
Multi Pad Creator.............................141
141, 146, 147, 158
Style ...................................... 20, 25, 55
Style Manager ............................. 55, 74
Multi Part Plug-in Board....................65
Multi Track record .....................38, 110
Music Database............................26, 76
N
Native Part Parameter ......................104
Registration bank ................ 28, 29, 163
T
Resampling ....................................... 88
O
Octave ..................................18, 61, 145 Resonance ......................................... 93
Offset Volume ..................................105 Response ......................... 10, 35, 60, 63
On Bass..............................................70 Restore ...................................... 54, 154
Options.............................................180 Reverse.............................................. 79
Organ Flutes.................................19, 62 Revoice............................................ 130
Overdub............................................126 Right1.......................................... 16, 57
P
Packing list...........................................6
Ultra Quick Start ............................... 79
Parameter chart ................................214
Parameter lock .........................166, 214 Sampling ..................................... 40, 84
Parts....................................................57 Scale Tune....................................... 158 Velocity ........................... 168, 169, 176
Password ..........................................156 SCSI .................................... 13, 54, 150 Vibrato............................. 62, 63, 81, 93
Paste .................................................121 Search.......................................... 27, 79 Video out................................... 13, 165
PC keyboard.........................12, 46, 167 Setup ................................... 54, 79, 214 Vocal harmony ........................ 6, 32, 80
PHONES jack ....................................13 SIMM installation ........................... 185 Vocal harmony mode......................... 83
Pitch bend range...............................145 SIMM removal................................ 187 Vocal harmony type........................... 33
PITCH BEND wheel..........................59 Single ........................................ 56, 151 Vocoder ....................................... 81, 83
Play mode ..........................................56 Single Finger..................................... 70 Voice effects................................ 35, 60
Playback...............21, 30, 32, 33, 34, 78 Single Part Plug-in Board ................. 65 Voice list.......................................... 192
Plug-in Board.......................42, 64, 100 Slot 1 ........................................... 42, 69 Voice Set.......................................... 163
Plug-in Board installation ................181 Slot 2 ........................................... 42, 69 Volume ...... 14, 24, 63, 83, 93, 130, 145
Plug-in Manager...................64, 66, 100 Soft.................................................. 160
Plug-in Setting ...................................69 Song Creator ............................. 36, 110
Poly counter .....................................166 Song recording.......................... 36, 110
Poly Expansion ..................................69 Song setup......................................... 79
Poly/mono....................................35, 60 Sostenuto......................................... 160
Port...................................................173 Source Chord .......................... 127, 135
POWER switch ..................................14 Specifications .................................. 246
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Voice List
Voice List/Stimmenliste/Liste des voix
MIDI
Program
Change#
MIDI
Program
Change#
Category
Order
Category
Order
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
Piano
23
24
25
26
27
ChapelOrgn3
TheatreOrg1
TheatreOrg2
Pipe Organ
Reed Organ
0
0
0
0
0
115
114
114
112
112
19
16
17
19
20
1
2
Live! Grand
Grand Piano
BrightPiano
Harpsichord
GrandHarpsi
Honky Tonk
Rock Piano
Midi Grand
Oct Piano 1
Oct Piano 2
CP 80
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
113
112
112
112
113
112
114
112
113
114
113
0
0
1
6
6
3
2
2
3
3
2
3
4
5
Accordion
6
1
2
Musette
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
112
113
115
116
112
117
113
114
113
114
112
21
21
21
21
23
21
23
21
22
22
22
7
Tutti Accrd
Small Accrd
Accordion
Tango Accrd
Steirisch
8
3
9
4
10
11
5
6
E.Piano
7
Bandoneon
Soft Accrd
Modern Harp
Blues Harp
Harmonica
1
2
Galaxy EP
Stage EP
Polaris EP
Jazz Chorus
Hyper Tines
Cool! EP
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
114
117
115
118
113
119
120
116
112
112
116
115
113
117
112
118
114
113
4
4
4
5
5
4
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
7
4
5
7
8
9
3
10
11
4
5
Guitar
6
1
Live! Nylon
Cool! J.Gtr
Cool! E.Gtr
12StrGuitar
SolidGuitar
Vintage Amp
Aloha Gtr
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
116
115
114
113
118
115
118
113
119
117
115
116
123
112
121
115
115
114
125
124
120
113
113
114
115
114
113
114
114
116
122
112
117
112
119
113
24
26
28
25
27
29
26
30
26
27
24
26
27
25
27
28
27
29
27
27
27
24
26
27
25
24
27
26
30
27
27
24
26
30
27
29
7
Phase EP
New Tines
Funk EP
2
8
3
9
4
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
DX Modern
Vintage EP
Modern EP
Tremolo EP
Super DX
Clavi
5
6
7
8
Crunch Gtr
Carlos Gtr
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
60's Clean
Live! Class
Cool! JSolo
VintageOpen
Folk Guitar
Solid Chord
VintageMute
PedalSteel
Lead Guitar
SlideGuitar
Chorus Gtr
VintageTrem
Spanish Gtr
Octave Gtr
Deep Chorus
CampfireGtr
SmoothNylon
Tremolo Gtr
HawaiianGtr
Heavy Stack
BrightClean
Wah Guitar
Classic Gtr
DX JazzGtr
Distortion
Suitcase EP
Venus EP
Wah Clavi
Organ
1
2
Cool! Organ
Rotor Organ
Rock Organ1
Dance Organ
Gospel Org
Cool! Jazz
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
118
117
112
113
119
117
114
112
113
116
115
118
115
112
118
115
113
116
116
120
113
114
18
18
18
17
16
16
18
16
18
18
18
17
16
17
16
17
16
16
17
16
19
19
3
4
5
6
7
Purple Org
8
Jazz Organ1
Rock Organ2
RotaryDrive
Full Rocker
Elec.Organ
DrawbarOrg
Click Organ
Stadium Org
Mellow Draw
Jazz Organ2
Bright Draw
60's Organ
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Jazz Organ3
ChapelOrgn1
ChapelOrgn2
Elec.12Str
FeedbackGtr
192 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voice List/Stimmenliste/Liste des voix
MIDI
Program
Change#
MIDI
Program
Change#
Category
Order
Category
Order
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
Mandolin
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
114
112
112
113
112
112
112
113
112
113
112
112
113
116
115
113
112
112
112
114
113
114
113
112
114
115
25
27
28
28
26
29
33
32
34
35
36
39
37
39
39
38
37
32
35
32
36
38
39
38
39
38
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Fiddle
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
112
112
112
112
112
113
112
110
105
104
107
106
40
CleanGuitar
MutedGuitar
Funk Guitar
Jazz Guitar
Overdrive
Banjo
Sitar
Koto
Shamisen
Soft Violin
Orch.Hit
Finger Bass
UprightBass
Pick Bass
55
Trumpet
1
2
Sweet Trump
Sweet Tromb
SoftTrumpet
JazzTrumpet
SweetMuteTp
SoloTrumpet
Air Trumpet
SweetFlugel
Trombone
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
115
117
114
116
114
112
117
118
116
113
112
115
114
112
112
114
113
113
112
56
57
56
56
59
56
56
56
57
58
57
57
57
60
59
58
33
56
58
Jaco Bass
Slap Bass
3
Analog Bass
DX FunkBass
DrySynBass
Touch Bass
Hi Q Bass
4
5
6
7
8
Funk Bass
Aco.Bass
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
BaritonHorn
Solo Tromb
Soft Tromb
MellowTromb
French Horn
Muted Trump
Bariton Hit
Fretless
Bass&Cymbal
Fusion Bass
Rave Bass
Dance Bass
Synth Bass
Snap Bass
Click Bass
Alp Bass
Flugel Horn
Tuba
Strings
1
Live! Strs
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
117
122
116
114
113
112
118
119
120
121
112
113
114
115
112
112
116
113
112
115
112
112
112
112
112
112
113
49
49
49
48
51
40
49
49
49
49
48
48
49
48
51
49
48
49
44
49
50
45
41
42
43
46
46
Brass
2
Live! Arco
Live! Orch
Symphon.Str
OberStrings
Solo Violin
Orch. Brass
Orch. Flute
Orch. Fl.Br
Orch. Oboe
Strings
1
Live! Horns
Live! Brass
Live! OctBr
MellowBrass
Sforzando
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
118
117
116
116
125
115
119
120
113
121
112
120
123
114
115
118
115
113
122
119
113
118
126
124
112
113
62
62
62
61
61
71
66
66
62
61
61
61
61
61
66
57
61
63
61
61
61
61
61
61
63
59
3
2
4
3
5
4
6
5
7
6
MoonLight
MillerNight
Saxy Mood
Jump Brass
Big Brass
8
7
9
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
OrchStrings
Str.Quartet
ConcertoStr
Analog Strs
ChamberStrs
Bow Strings
SlowStrings
TremoloStrs
MarcatoStrs
Syn Strings
PizzStrings
Viola
BrasSection
BrightBrass
Soft Brass
Full Horns
Brass Combo
SmoothTromb
High Brass
Ober Brass
Trumpet Ens
MellowHorns
BigBandBrs
Pop Brass
Brass Hit
Cello
Contrabass
Harp
Step Brass
Analog Brs
BallroomBrs
Hackbrett
Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voice List/Stimmenliste/Liste des voix
MIDI
Program
Change#
MIDI
Program
Change#
Category
Order
Category
Order
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
27
28
29
30
31
32
Trb.Section
Small Brass
Soft Analog
FunkyAnalog
TechnoBrass
Synth Brass
0
0
0
0
0
0
113
117
114
115
114
112
57
61
63
62
62
62
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
Pan Heaven
DooBa Scats
Daa Choir
Doo Choir
Dooom Choir
Live! Dooom
Choir
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
120
115
120
122
120
116
112
112
113
113
113
112
113
115
112
115
112
112
112
112
114
112
114
112
112
113
114
112
113
115
115
114
116
117
113
114
122
123
88
53
53
53
52
53
52
54
52
94
99
53
54
52
95
89
99
91
101
97
95
94
93
88
92
88
88
89
89
94
88
94
88
88
95
89
88
88
Saxophone
1
2
Sweet Tenor
Sweet Alto
Sweet Sprno
Sweet Clari
Growl Sax
BreathTenor
BreathyAlto
Soprano Sax
MelClarinet
Sax Section
WoodwindEns
Alto Sax
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
117
114
113
114
118
114
113
112
113
116
113
112
112
112
113
112
112
112
112
66
65
64
71
66
66
65
64
71
66
66
65
66
67
67
68
69
70
71
Air Choir
Vocal Ensbl
Insomnia
3
4
Cyber Pad
Vox Humana
Voices
5
6
7
Uuh Choir
Wave 2001
Neo WarmPad
Atmosphere
Xenon Pad
Skydiver
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Tenor Sax
BaritoneSax
Rock Bari
Far East
Template
Equinox
Oboe
Glass Pad
Fantasia
EnglishHorn
Bassoon
DX Pad
Clarinet
Symbiont
Stargate
Flute
1
2
Sweet Flute
Sweet Pan
Class.Flute
Pan Flute
Flute
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
114
113
115
113
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
73
75
73
73
73
72
75
77
78
74
79
109
Area 51
Dark Moon
Ionosphere
Golden Age
Solaris
3
4
5
6
Piccolo
Time Travel
Millenium
Transform
Dunes
7
EthnicFlute
Shakuhachi
Whistle
8
9
10
11
12
Recorder
Ocarina
Pro Heaven
Sunbeam
Bagpipe
Synthesizer
Choir & Pad
1
2
Oxygen
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
122
123
120
113
117
112
112
116
115
121
114
124
119
112
114
81
81
81
80
80
80
81
81
81
81
84
81
81
84
81
1
2
Live!Gospel
Live! Humm
Hah Choir
SweetHeaven
DreamHeaven
Live! Vocal
Bah Choir
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
116
118
114
118
121
114
121
117
118
119
117
113
119
119
52
52
52
88
88
53
53
53
53
53
52
53
52
88
Matrix
3
Wire Lead
Hip Lead
Hop Lead
Square Lead
Saw.Lead
Fire Wire
Analogon
Funky Lead
Paraglide
Robolead
Fargo
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
Live! Doo
9
9
Live! Bah
10
11
12
13
14
15
10
11
12
13
14
Live! Dao
Live! Mmh
Gothic Vox
Huh Choir
Bell Heaven
Portatone
Blaster
194 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voice List/Stimmenliste/Liste des voix
MIDI
Program
Change#
MIDI
Program
Change#
Category
Order
Category
Order
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Big Lead
Warp
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
113
117
113
112
118
112
112
114
119
118
113
113
112
113
116
115
115
114
81
81
84
96
80
98
83
80
80
81
87
98
87
96
80
80
84
96
36
37
38
StyleLvFunk
StyLvStd+P
StyLvFunk+P
127
127
127
0
0
0
124
125
126
Adrenaline
Synchronize
Tiny Lead
Stardust
XG
1
GrandPno
GrndPnoK
MelloGrP
PianoStr
Dream
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
2
Aero Lead
Mini Lead
Synth Flute
Sub Aqua
Impact
3
18
40
41
0
0
4
0
5
0
6
BritePno
BritPnoK
E.Grand
ElGrPnoK
Det.CP80
ElGrPno1
ElGrPno2
HnkyTonk
HnkyTnkK
E.Piano1
El.Pno1K
MelloEP1
Chor.EP1
HardEl.P
VX El.P1
60sEl.P
1
7
1
1
Sun Bell
8
0
2
Under Heim
Rhythmatic
Hi Bias
9
1
2
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
32
40
41
0
2
2
Vinylead
Skyline
2
3
Clockwork
1
3
Percussion
0
4
1
Vibraphone
Jazz Vibes
Marimba
0
112
113
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
0
11
11
12
13
114
8
1
4
2
0
18
32
40
45
64
0
4
3
0
4
4
Xylophone
Steel Drums
Celesta
0
4
5
0
4
6
0
4
7
Glocken
0
9
E.Piano2
El.Pno2K
Chor.EP2
DX Hard
DXLegend
DX Phase
DX+Analg
DXKotoEP
VX El.P2
Harpsi.
5
8
Music Box
TubularBell
Kalimba
0
10
14
108
15
47
80
81
82
83
84
85
0
1
5
9
0
32
33
34
40
41
42
45
0
5
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
0
5
Dulcimer
0
5
Timpani
0
5
Live!StdKit
Live!FunkKt
Live!Brush
Live!Std+P
Live!Funk+P
Live!Brsh+P
Std.Kit1
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
126
126
126
126
126
127
5
0
5
0
5
0
6
0
Harpsi.K
Harpsi.2
Harpsi.3
Clavi.
1
6
0
25
35
0
6
0
6
Std.Kit2
0
1
7
Hit Kit
0
4
Clavi. K
1
7
Room Kit
Rock Kit
0
8
ClaviWah
PulseClv
PierceCl
Celesta
27
64
65
0
7
0
16
24
25
27
32
40
48
35
40
43
0
7
Electro Kit
Analog Kit
Dance Kit
Jazz Kit
0
7
0
8
0
Glocken
MusicBox
Orgel
0
9
0
0
10
10
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
Brush Kit
SymphonyKit
Arabic Kit
Live!Cuban
Live!PopLtn
SFX Kit1
0
64
0
0
Vibes
0
VibesK
1
0
HardVibe
Marimba
MarimbaK
SineMrmb
Balafon2
45
0
0
0
1
SFX Kit2
0
1
64
97
StyleLvStd
0
123
Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voice List/Stimmenliste/Liste des voix
MIDI
Program
Change#
MIDI
Program
Change#
Category
Order
Category
Order
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
Log Drum
Xylophon
TubulBel
ChrchBel
Carillon
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
98
0
12
13
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
24
24
24
25
25
25
25
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
Stl&Body
Mandolin
Jazz Gtr
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
41
96
0
25
25
26
26
26
27
27
28
28
28
28
28
29
29
30
30
30
31
31
31
32
32
32
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
34
34
35
35
35
35
35
35
36
36
36
37
37
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
39
0
96
97
0
MelloGtr
JazzAmp
CleanGtr
ChorusGt
Mute.Gtr
FunkGtr1
MuteStlG
FunkGtr2
Jazz Man
Ovrdrive
Gt.Pinch
Dist.Gtr
18
32
0
Dulcimer
Dulcimr2
Cimbalom
Santur
35
96
97
0
32
0
40
41
43
45
0
DrawOrgn
DetDrwOr
60sDrOr1
60sDrOr2
70sDrOr1
DrawOrg2
60sDrOr3
EvenBar
16+2'2/3
Organ Ba
70sDrOr2
CheezOrg
DrawOrg3
PercOrgn
70sPcOr1
DetPrcOr
LiteOrg
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
40
64
65
66
67
0
43
0
FeedbkGt
FeedbGt2
GtrHarmo
GtFeedbk
GtrHrmo2
Aco.Bass
JazzRthm
VXUprght
FngrBass
FingrDrk
FlangeBa
Ba&DstEG
FngrSlap
FngBass2
ModAlem
PickBass
MutePkBa
Fretless
40
41
0
65
66
0
40
45
0
24
32
33
37
0
18
27
40
43
45
65
0
PercOrg2
RockOrgn
RotaryOr
SloRotar
FstRotar
ChrchOrg
ChurOrg3
ChurOrg2
NotreDam
OrgFlute
TrmOrgFl
ReedOrgn
Puff Org
64
65
66
0
28
0
32
35
40
64
65
0
Fretles2
32
33
34
96
97
0
Fretles3
Fretles4
SynFretl
Smooth
40
0
SlapBas1
ResoSlap
PunchThm
SlapBas2
VeloSlap
SynBass1
SynBa1Dk
FastResB
AcidBass
Clv Bass
TeknoBa
Oscar
Acordion
AccordIt
27
32
0
32
0
Harmnica
Harmo 2
TangoAcd
TngoAcd2
NylonGtr
NylonGt2
NylonGt3
VelGtHrm
Ukulele
32
0
43
0
64
0
18
20
24
35
40
64
65
66
96
0
16
25
43
96
0
SteelGtr
SqrBass
RubberBa
Hammer
SynBass2
SteelGt2
12StrGtr
Nyln&Stl
16
35
40
196 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voice List/Stimmenliste/Liste des voix
MIDI
Program
Change#
MIDI
Program
Change#
Category
Order
Category
Order
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
MelloSB1
Seq Bass
ClkSynBa
SynBa2Dk
SmthBa 2
ModulrBa
DX Bass
X WireBa
Violin
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
12
18
19
32
40
41
64
0
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
40
40
41
42
43
44
44
44
45
46
46
47
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
50
50
50
50
51
52
52
52
52
52
53
54
54
54
54
55
55
55
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
Trumpet
Trumpet2
BriteTrp
WarmTrp
Trombone
Trmbone2
Tuba
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
16
17
32
0
56
56
56
56
57
57
58
58
59
60
60
60
60
61
61
61
61
61
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
63
63
63
63
63
63
64
65
65
65
66
66
66
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
18
0
Tuba 2
16
0
Mute.Trp
Fr.Horn
SlowVln
Viola
8
0
0
FrHrSolo
FrHorn2
HornOrch
BrasSect
Tp&TbSec
BrssSec2
HiBrass
6
Cello
0
32
37
0
Contrabs
Trem.Str
SlowTrStr
Susp Str
Pizz.Str
Harp
0
0
8
35
40
41
42
0
40
0
0
MelloBrs
SynBras1
QuackBr
RezSynBr
PolyBrss
SynBras3
JumpBrss
AnaVelBr
AnaBrss1
SynBras2
Soft Brs
SynBrss4
ChoirBrs
VelBrss2
AnaBrss2
SprnoSax
Alto Sax
Sax Sect
HyprAlto
TenorSax
BrthTnSx
SoftTenr
TnrSax 2
Bari.Sax
Oboe
YangChin
Timpani
Strings1
S.Strngs
SlowStr
ArcoStr
40
0
12
20
24
27
32
45
64
0
0
3
8
24
35
40
41
42
45
0
60sStrng
Orchestr
Orchstr2
TremOrch
VeloStr
18
40
41
45
64
0
Strings2
S.SlwStr
LegatoSt
Warm Str
Kingdom
70s Str
3
8
40
41
64
65
0
0
40
43
0
Str Ens3
Syn.Str1
ResoStr
Syn Str4
SS Str
27
64
65
0
40
41
64
0
Syn.Str2
ChoirAah
S.Choir
0
0
3
Eng.Horn
Bassoon
Clarinet
0
Ch.Aahs2
MelChoir
ChoirStr
VoiceOoh
SynVoice
SynVox2
Choral
16
32
40
0
0
0
Piccolo
0
Flute
0
0
Recorder
PanFlute
Bottle
0
40
41
64
0
0
0
AnaVoice
Orch.Hit
OrchHit2
Impact
Shakhchi
Whistle
0
0
35
64
Ocarina
0
SquareLd
0
Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voice List/Stimmenliste/Liste des voix
MIDI
Program
Change#
MIDI
Program
Change#
Category
Order
Category
Order
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
Square 2
LMSquare
Hollow
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
82
82
83
83
84
84
84
85
85
85
86
86
87
87
87
87
88
88
89
89
89
89
89
89
90
90
90
90
90
91
91
91
91
92
92
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
GlassPad
MetalPad
Tine Pad
Pan Pad
Halo Pad
SweepPad
Shwimmer
Converge
PolarPad
Celstial
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
65
0
92
93
8
18
19
64
65
66
0
64
65
0
93
Shmoog
Mellow
93
94
SoloSine
SineLead
Saw.Lead
Saw 2
0
95
20
27
64
66
0
95
95
6
95
ThickSaw
DynaSaw
DigiSaw
Big Lead
HeavySyn
WaspySyn
PulseSaw
Dr. Lead
VeloLead
Seq Ana
CaliopLd
Pure Pad
Chiff Ld
8
95
18
19
20
24
25
40
41
45
96
0
Rain
96
ClaviPad
HrmoRain
AfrcnWnd
Caribean
SoundTrk
Prologue
Ancestrl
Crystal
45
64
65
66
0
96
96
96
96
97
27
64
0
97
97
98
SynDrCmp
Popcorn
TinyBell
RndGlock
GlockChi
ClearBel
ChorBell
SynMalet
SftCryst
LoudGlok
XmasBell
VibeBell
DigiBell
12
14
18
35
40
41
42
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
0
98
65
0
98
98
Rubby
64
0
98
CharanLd
DistLead
WireLead
Voice Ld
SynthAah
VoxLead
Fifth Ld
98
64
65
0
98
98
98
24
64
0
98
98
98
Big Five
35
0
98
Bass &Ld
Big&Low
Fat&Prky
SoftWurl
NewAgePd
Fantasy2
Warm Pad
ThickPad
Soft Pad
SinePad
Horn Pad
RotarStr
PolySyPd
PolyPd80
ClickPad
Ana Pad
SquarPad
ChoirPad
Heaven2
Itopia
98
16
64
65
0
AirBells
98
BellHarp
Gamelmba
Atmosphr
WarmAtms
HollwRls
NylonEP
NylnHarp
Harp Vox
AtmosPad
Planet
98
98
99
64
0
18
19
40
64
65
66
67
0
99
99
16
17
18
64
65
0
99
99
99
99
99
Bright
100
100
100
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
64
65
66
67
0
FantaBel
Smokey
Goblins
64
96
0
GobSyn
50sSciFi
Ring Pad
Ritual
64
65
66
67
68
70
71
64
66
67
0
CC Pad
ToHeaven
Night
BowedPad
Glacier
64
Glisten
198 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voice List/Stimmenliste/Liste des voix
MIDI
Program
Change#
MIDI
Program
Change#
Category
Order
Category
Order
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
BelChoir
Echoes
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
96
0
101
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
103
103
104
104
104
104
104
105
105
105
105
105
106
107
107
107
108
109
110
111
111
111
111
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
113
114
114
114
115
115
116
116
117
117
117
117
118
118
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
ElecPerc
RevCymbl
FretNoiz
BrthNoiz
Seashore
Tweet
0
65
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
0
0
EchoPad2
Echo Pan
EchoBell
Big Pan
SynPiano
Creation
Stardust
Reso Pan
Sci-Fi
8
0
14
64
65
66
67
68
69
0
0
0
0
Telphone
Helicptr
Applause
Gunshot
CuttngNz
CttngNz2
Str Slap
Fl.KClik
Rain
0
0
0
0
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
Starz
64
0
1
Sitar
3
DetSitar
Sitar 2
32
35
96
97
0
16
32
Tambra
Tamboura
Banjo
Thunder
Wind
33
34
Stream
Bubble
35
MuteBnjo
Rabab
28
96
97
98
0
36
Feed
37
Gopichnt
Oud
Dog
48
Horse
49
Shamisen
Koto
Bird 2
50
0
Ghost
54
T. Koto
96
97
0
Maou
55
Kanoon
Kalimba
Bagpipe
Fiddle
Tel.Dial
DoorSqek
Door Slam
Scratch
Scratch 2
WindChm
Telphon2
CarEngin
Car Stop
Car Pass
CarCrash
Siren
64
65
0
66
0
67
Shanai
0
68
Shanai2
Pungi
64
96
97
0
69
70
Hichriki
80
TnklBell
Bonang
Gender
81
96
97
98
99
100
101
0
82
83
Gamelan
S.Gamlan
Rama Cym
AsianBel
Agogo
84
Train
85
Jetplane
Starship
Burst
86
87
88
SteelDrm
GlasPerc
ThaiBell
WoodBlok
Castanet
TaikoDrm
Gr.Cassa
MelodTom
Mel Tom2
Real Tom
Rock Tom
Syn.Drum
Ana Tom
0
Coaster
SbMarine
Laughing
Scream
Punch
89
97
98
0
90
96
97
96
0
98
Heart
99
96
0
FootStep
MchinGun
LaserGun
Xplosion
FireWork
100
112
113
114
115
64
65
66
0
64
Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keyboard Drum Assignments
Keyboard Drum Assignments/Tastatur-Drum-Belegung/
Bank Select MSB (0-127)
Bank Select LSB (0-127)
Program Change (1-128)
127
0
1
127
0
2
127
0
5
127
0
9
127
0
17
127
0
25
MIDI
Note
Keyboard
Note
Key Alternate
Standard Kit 1
Standard Kit 2
Hit Kit
Room Kit
Rock Kit
Electro Kit
Off
Group
Note#
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
C# -1 (C# 0)
-1 (D 0)
3
3
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch H
D
D# -1 (D# 0)
E
F
-1 (E
-1 (F
0)
0)
4
4
F# -1 (F# 0)
-1 (G 0)
G# -1 (G# 0)
-1 (A 0)
Scratch L
G
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl
Snare Roll
Castanet
Snare Soft
Sticks
Kick Soft
Open Rim Shot
Kick Tight
Kick
A
A# -1 (A# 0)
B
-1 (B
0)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
O
O
O
Reverse Cymbal
Hi Q 2
Snare Soft 2
Snare Electro
Kick Tight L
Snare Noisy
Snare Snappy Electro
Kick 3
Open Rim Shot H Short Snare Pitched
Kick Wet
Kick Short
Side Stick Light
Snare Short
Kick 2
Kick Gate
Kick Gate Heavy
Kick Tight H
Stick Ambient
Snare Ambient
Kick Gate
Side Stick
Snare
Snare Snappy
Snare Rock
Snare Noisy 2
Hand Clap
Snare Tight
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Snare Tight H
Snare Tight 2
Hybrid Tom 1
Hi-Hat Closed 2
Hybrid Tom 2
Hi-Hat Pedal 2
Hybrid Tom 3
Hi-Hat Open 2
Hybrid Tom 4
Hybrid Tom 5
Snare Tight Snappy
Tom Room 1
Snare Rock Tight
Tom Rock 1
Snare Noisy 3
Tom Electro 1
1
1
1
Tom Room 2
Tom Room 3
Tom Rock 2
Tom Rock 3
Tom Electro 2
Tom Electro 3
Tom Room 4
Tom Room 5
Tom Rock 4
Tom Rock 5
Tom Electro 4
Tom Electro 5
Hybrid Tom 6
Tom Room 6
Tom Rock 6
Tom Electro 6
Tambourine Light
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
Bongo H
Bongo L
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
Conga L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Shaker
O
O
O
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
2
2
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
(C# 6)
(D 6)
(D# 6)
(E
(F
6)
6)
(F# 6)
(G 6)
1. Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released.
2. Alternate Group: Playing any instrument within a numbered group will immediately stop the
sound of any other instrument in the same group of the same number.
1. Key Off: Mit ”O” bezeichnete Tasten hören sofort auf zu klingen, sobald sie losgelassen wer-
den.
2. Alternate Group: Wenn ein Instrument innerhalb einer numerierten Gruppe gespielt wird,
wird sofort der Klang jedes anderen Instruments mit derselben Nummer innerhalb dieser
Gruppe gestoppt.
3.
: Same as Standard Kit
4.
: No Sound
3.
: Entspricht dem Standard-Kit
5. StyleLvStd (MSB: 127, LSB: 0, PC: 124) is the same assignments as Live! Standard Kit.
6. StyleLvFunk (MSB: 127, LSB: 0, PC: 125) is the same assignments as Live! Funk Kit.
4.
: Kein Klang
5. StyleLvStd (MSB: 127, LSB: 0, PC: 124) ist die gleiche Zuordnung wie Live! Standard Kit.
6. StyleLvFunk (MSB: 127, LSB: 0, PC: 125) ist die gleiche Zuordnung wie Live! Funk Kit.
200 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Affectation des percussions de clavier
Bank Select MSB (0-127)
Bank Select LSB (0-127)
Program Change (1-128)
127
0
26
127
0
28
127
0
33
127
0
41
127
0
49
127
0
81 / 124
MIDI
Note
C# -1 (C# 0)
-1 (D 0)
Keyboard Key Alternate
Analog Kit
Dance Kit
Jazz Kit
Brush Kit
Symphony Kit
Live! Standard Kit
Note
Off
Group
Note#
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
3
3
D
D# -1 (D# 0)
E
F
-1 (E
-1 (F
0)
0)
4
4
F# -1 (F# 0)
-1 (G 0)
G# -1 (G# 0)
-1 (A 0)
G
A
A# -1 (A# 0)
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
-1 (B
0)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
Brush Tap Stereo
Brush Swirl Stereo
Brush Slap Stereo
Brush Tap Swirl Stereo
Snare Roll Stereo
O
O
O
Reverse Cymbal
Reverse Cymbal
Hi Q 2
Hi Q 2
Snare Noisy 4
Snare Techno
Snare Jazz H
Kick Jazz
Brush Slap 2
Snare L Stereo
Kick 3
Kick Techno Q
Rim Gate
Kick Techno L
Kick Techno
Side Stick Analog
Snare Clap
Kick Soft 2
Kick Soft Stereo
Open Rim Shot Stereo
Kick Light Stereo
Kick Std Stereo
Side Stick Stereo
Snare M Stereo
Open Rim Shot Light
Kick Jazz
Kick Analog Short
Kick Analog
Side Stick Analog
Snare Analog
Gran Cassa
Gran Cassa Mute
Side Stick Light Side Stick Light
Snare Jazz L
Brush Slap 3
Band Snare
Snare Analog 2
Tom Analog 1
Hi-Hat Closed Analog
Tom Analog 2
Snare Dry
Snare Jazz M
Brush Tap 2
Tom Brush 1
Band Snare 2
Snare H Stereo
Tom Analog 1
Hi-Hat Closed 3
Tom Analog 2
Floor Tom L Stereo
Hi-Hat Closed Stereo
Floor Tom H Stereo
Hi-Hat Pedal Stereo
Low Tom Stereo
Hi-Hat Open Stereo
Mid Tom L Stereo
Mid Tom H Stereo
Crash Cymbal 1 Stereo
High Tom Stereo
1
1
1
Tom Brush 2
Tom Brush 3
Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 3
Tom Analog 3
Hi-Hat Open Analog
Tom Analog 4
Tom Analog 5
Crash Analog
Tom Analog 6
Tom Analog 3
Hi-Hat Open 3
Tom Analog 4
Tom Analog 5
Crash Analog
Tom Analog 6
Tom Brush 4
Tom Brush 5
Hand Cymbal
Tom Brush 6
Hand Cymbal Short
Ride Cymbal 1 Stereo
Chinese Cymbal Stereo
Ride Cymbal Cup Stereo
Splash Cymbal Stereo
Crash Cymbal 2 Stereo
Cowbell Analog
Cowbell Analog
Hand Cymbal 2
Hand Cymbal 2 Short Ride Cymbal 2 Stereo
Conga Analog H
Conga Analog M
Conga Analog L
Conga Analog H
Conga Analog M
Conga Analog L
Maracas 2
Claves 2
Maracas 2
Claves 2
O
O
O
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
2
2
(C# 6)
(D 6)
(D# 6)
(E
(F
6)
6)
F#
G
(F# 6)
(G 6)
1. Note coupée : les notes marquées " O " sont inaudibles dès l'instant où elles sont relâchées.
2. Groupe alternatif : jouer d'un instrument dans un groupe numéroté provoque la coupure im-
médiate du son de tout autre instrument du même groupe de même numéro.
3.
: comme kit standard
4.
: aucun son
5. StyleLvStd (MSB : 127, LSB : 0, PC : 124) correspond au kit Live ! Standard.
6. StyleLvFunk (MSB : 127, LSB : 0, PC : 125) correspond au kit Live ! Funk.
Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keyboard Drum Assignments/Tastatur-Drum-Belegung/Affectation des percussions de clavier
Klaviatur-Drum-Belegung/A fectation des percu sions de clavier
Bank Select MSB (0-127)
Bank Select LSB (0-127)
Program Change (1-128)
127
0
1
127
0
82 / 125
127
0
83
127
0
84 / 126
127
0
85 / 127
MIDI
Note
C# -1 (C# 0)
-1 (D 0)
Keyboard Key Alternate
Live! Standard +
Percussion Kit
Live! Funk +
Standard Kit 1
Live! Funk Kit
Live! Brush Kit
Note
Off
Group
Percussion Kit
Note#
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
3
3
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch H
D
D# -1 (D# 0)
E
F
-1 (E
-1 (F
0)
0)
4
4
F# -1 (F# 0)
-1 (G 0)
G# -1 (G# 0)
-1 (A 0)
Scratch L
G
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl
Snare Roll
Castanet
Snare Soft
Sticks
Kick Soft
Open Rim Shot
Kick Tight
Kick
A
A# -1 (A# 0)
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
-1 (B
0)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
Brush Tap Stereo
Brush Swirl Stereo
Brush Slap Stereo
Brush Tap Swirl Stereo
Snare Roll Stereo
Brush Tap Stereo
Brush Tap Stereo
Brush Tap Stereo
Brush Swirl Stereo
Brush Slap Stereo
Brush Tap Swirl Stereo
Snare Roll Stereo
O
Brush Swirl Stereo
Brush Slap Stereo
Brush Tap Swirl Stereo
Snare Roll Stereo
Brush Swirl Stereo
Brush Slap Stereo
Brush Tap Swirl Stereo
Snare Roll Stereo
O
O
Snare Funk L Stereo
Brush Slap 2 Stereo
Snare L Stereo
Snare L Stereo
Kick Soft Stereo
Open Rim Shot Stereo
Kick Std Stereo
Kick Funk Stereo
Side Stick Stereo
Snare Funk M Stereo
Kick Soft Stereo
Open Rim Shot Stereo
Kick Std Stereo
Kick Funk Stereo
Side Stick Stereo
Snare Brush M Stereo
Kick Soft Stereo
Open Rim Shot Stereo
Kick Light Stereo
Kick Std Stereo
Side Stick Stereo
Snare M Stereo
Hand Clap Stereo
Snare H Stereo
Floor Tom L Stereo
Hi-Hat Closed Stereo
Floor Tom H Stereo
Hi-Hat Pedal Stereo
Low Tom Stereo
Hi-Hat Open Stereo
Mid Tom L Stereo
Mid Tom H Stereo
Crash Cymbal 1 Stereo
High Tom Stereo
Ride Cymbal 1 Stereo
Chinese Cymbal Stereo
Ride Cymbal Cup Stereo
Tambourine Stereo
Splash Cymbal Stereo
Cowbell Stereo
Kick Soft Stereo
Open Rim Shot Stereo
Kick Std Stereo
Kick Funk Stereo
Side Stick Stereo
Side Stick
Snare
Snare Funk M Stereo
Hand Clap Stereo
Hand Clap
Snare Tight
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Snare Funk H Stereo
Floor Tom L Stereo
Hi-Hat Closed Stereo
Floor Tom H Stereo
Hi-Hat Pedal Stereo
Low Tom Stereo
Hi-Hat Open Stereo
Mid Tom L Stereo
Mid Tom H Stereo
Crash Cymbal 1 Stereo
High Tom Stereo
Ride Cymbal 1 Stereo
Chinese Cymbal Stereo
Ride Cymbal Cup Stereo
Snare Brush H Stereo
Brush Floor Tom L Stereo
Hi-Hat Closed Stereo
Brush Floor Tom H Stereo
Hi-Hat Pedal Stereo
Brush Low Tom Stereo
Hi-Hat Open Stereo
Brush Mid Tom L Stereo
Brush Mid Tom H Stereo
Brush Crash Cymbal 1 Stereo
Brush High Tom Stereo
Brush Ride Cymbal 1 Stereo
Chinese Cymbal Stereo
Brush Ride Cymbal Cup Stereo
Snare Funk H Stereo
Floor Tom L Stereo
Hi-Hat Closed Stereo
Floor Tom H Stereo
Hi-Hat Pedal Stereo
Low Tom Stereo
Hi-Hat Open Stereo
Mid Tom L Stereo
Mid Tom H Stereo
Crash Cymbal 1 Stereo
High Tom Stereo
Ride Cymbal 1 Stereo
Chinese Cymbal Stereo
Ride Cymbal Cup Stereo
Tambourine Stereo
Splash Cymbal Stereo
Cowbell Stereo
1
1
1
Splash Cymbal Stereo
Crash Cymbal 2 Stereo
Ride Cymbal 2 Stereo
Splash Cymbal Stereo
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
Bongo H
Brush Crash Cymbal 2 Stereo
Brush Ride Cymbal 2 Stereo
Crash Cymbal 2 Stereo
Crash Cymbal 2 Stereo
Ride Cymbal 2 Stereo
Bongo H Stereo
Bongo L Srereo
Conga H Mute Stereo
Conga H Open Stereo
Conga L Stereo
Timbale H Stereo
Timbale L Stereo
Ride Cymbal 2 Stereo
Bongo H Stereo
Bongo L Srereo
Conga H Mute Stereo
Conga H Open Stereo
Conga L Stereo
Timbale H Stereo
Timbale L Stereo
Bongo L
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
Conga L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Shaker
Cabasa Stereo
Maracas Stereo
Cabasa Stereo
Maracas Stereo
O
O
Guiro Short Stereo
Guiro Long Stereo
Guiro Short Stereo
Guiro Long Stereo
O
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
Cuica Mute Stereo
Cuica Open Stereo
Triangle Mute Stereo
Triangle Open Stereo
Shaker Stereo
Cuica Mute Stereo
Cuica Open Stereo
Triangle Mute Stereo
Triangle Open Stereo
Shaker Stereo
2
2
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Wind Chime Stereo
Wind Chime Stereo
(C# 6)
(D 6)
(D# 6)
(E
(F
6)
6)
F#
G
(F# 6)
(G 6)
202 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keyboard Drum Assignments/Tastatur-Drum-Belegung/Affectation des percussions de clavier
Keyboard Drum Assignments/Klavi l i
l
i
i
Bank Select MSB (0-127)
Bank Select LSB (0-127)
Program Change (1-128)
127
0
86
126
0
36
126
0
1
126
0
2
126
0
41
126
0
44
MIDI
Note
C# -1 (C# 0)
-1 (D 0)
Keyboard Key Alternate
Live! Brush +
Percussion Kit
Arabic Kit
SFX Kit 1
SFX Kit 2
Live! AfroCuban Kit
Live! PopLatin Kit
Note
Off
Group
Note#
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
3
3
D
D# -1 (D# 0)
E
F
-1 (E
-1 (F
0)
0)
4
4
F# -1 (F# 0)
-1 (G 0)
G# -1 (G# 0)
-1 (A 0)
Hand Clap Stereo
G
A
A# -1 (A# 0)
Conga H Tip Stereo
Conga H Heel Stereo
Conga H Open Stereo
Conga H Mute Stereo
Conga H Slap Open Stereo Conga H Slap Open Stereo
Conga H Slap Stereo Conga H Slap Stereo
Conga H Slap Mute Stereo Conga H Slap Mute Stereo
Conga L Tip Stereo
Conga L Heel Stereo
Conga L Open Stereo
Conga L Mute Stereo
Conga L Slap Open Stereo Conga L Slap Open Stereo
Conga L Slap Stereo
Conga L Slide Stereo
Bongo H Open 1 Finger Stereo Bongo H Open 1 finger Stereo
Bongo H Open 3 Finger Stereo Bongo H Open 3 finger Stereo
Bongo H Rim Stereo
Bongo H Tip Stereo
Bongo H Heel Stereo
Bongo H Slap Stereo
Conga H Tip Stereo
Conga H Heel Stereo
Conga H Open Stereo
Conga H Mute Stereo
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
-1 (B
0)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
Nakarazan Dom
Cabasa
Nakarazan Edge
Hager Dom
Hager Edge
Bongo H
Brush Tap Stereo
O
Brush Swirl Stereo
Brush Slap Stereo
Brush Tap Swirl Stereo
Snare Roll Stereo
O
O
Conga L Tip Stereo
Conga L Heel Stereo
Conga L Open Stereo
Conga L Mute Stereo
Bongo L
Brush Slap 2 Stereo
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
Conga L
Zagrouda H
Zagrouda L
Kick Soft
Side Stick
Snare Soft
Arabic Hand Clap String Slap
Snare
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Kick Soft Stereo
Open Rim Shot Stereo
Kick Std Stereo
Kick Funk Stereo
Side Stick Stereo
Conga L Slap Stereo
Conga L Slide Stereo
Cutting Noise
Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak
Door Slam
Phone Call
Snare Brush M Stereo
Hand Clap Stereo
Bongo H Rim Stereo
Bongo H Tip Stereo
Bongo H Heel Stereo
Bongo H Slap Stereo
Scratch Cut
Scratch H 3
Wind Chime
Snare Brush H Stereo
Brush Floor Tom L Stereo
Hi-Hat Closed Stereo
Brush Floor Tom H Stereo
Hi-Hat Pedal Stereo
Brush Low Tom Stereo
Hi-Hat Open Stereo
Brush Mid Tom L Stereo
Brush Mid Tom H Stereo
Brush Crash Cymbal 1 Stereo Crash Cymbal 1
Brush High Tom Stereo High Tom
Brush Ride Cymbal 1 Stereo Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal Stereo Crash Cymbal 2
Brush Ride Cymbal Cup Stereo Duhulla Dom
Tambourine Stereo
Splash Cymbal Stereo
Cowbell Stereo
Brush Crash Cymbal 2 Stereo Duhulla Sak
Claves
Brush Ride Cymbal 2 Stereo Doff Dom
Bongo H Stereo
Bongo L Srereo
1
1
1
Telephone Ring 2 Bongo L Open 1 Finger Stereo Bongo L Open 1 finger Stereo
Bongo L Open 3 Finger Stereo Bongo L Open 3 finger Stereo
Bongo L Rim Stereo
Bongo L Tip Stereo
Bongo L Heel Stereo
Bongo L Slap Stereo
Timbale L Open Stereo
Bongo L Rim Stereo
Bongo L Tip Stereo
Bongo L Heel Stereo
Bongo L Slap Stereo
Timbale L Open Stereo
Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition
Car Tires Squeal
Car Passing
Car Crash
Siren
Train
Jet Plane
Starship
Burst
Roller Coaster
Submarine
Tambourine
Duhulla Tak
Cowbell
Timbale H Open Stereo
Cowbell Top Stereo
Timbale H Open Stereo
Cowbell Top Stereo
Katem Dom
Katem Tak
Katem Sak
Katem Tak
Doff Tak
Tabla Dom
Tabla Tak1
Tabla Tik
Tabla Tak2
Tabla Sak
Tabla Roll of Edge Wind
Tabla Flam
Sagat 1
Tabel Dom
Sagat 3
Tabel Tak
Sagat 2
Rik Dom
Rik Tak 2
Rik Finger 1
Rik Tak 1
Rik Finger 2
Rik Brass Tremolo
Rik Sak
Conga H Mute Stereo
Conga H Open Stereo
Conga L Stereo
Timbale H Stereo
Timbale L Stereo
Guiro Short Stereo
Guiro Long Stereo
Guiro Short Stereo
Guiro Long Stereo
Shower
Thunder
Laugh
Scream
Punch
Heart Beat
Foot Steps
Tambourine Stereo
Tambourine Stereo
Cabasa Stereo
Maracas Stereo
O
O
Stream
Bubble
Feed
Maracas Stereo
Shaker Stereo
Cabasa Stereo
Maracas Stereo
Shaker Stereo
Cabasa Stereo
Cuica Mute Stereo
Cuica Open Stereo
Guiro Short Stereo
Guiro Long Stereo
O
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
Cuica Mute Stereo
Cuica Open Stereo
Triangle Mute Stereo
Triangle Open Stereo
Shaker Stereo
2
2
Triangle Mute Stereo
Triangle Open Stereo
Wind Chime Stereo
Rik Tik
Dog
Horse
Bird Tweet 2
Machine Gun
Laser Gun
Explosion
Firework
Wind Chime Stereo
(C# 6)
(D 6)
(D# 6)
(E
(F
6)
6)
F#
G
(F# 6)
(G 6)
Ghost
Maou
Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Plug-in Voice List
Plug-in Voice List/Plug-In-Stimmenliste/Liste des voix plug-in
Plug-In-Stimmenliste/Liste des voix
The voices in the list below are created by loading the data from the included "Plug-in
Custom Voice Disk" to the 9000Pro via the Plug-in Manager function (page 66).
Die Stimmen in der untenstehenden Liste werden erzeugt, indem die Daten von der
beiliegenden Diskette „Plug-In-Benutzerstimme“ mit Hilfe der Plug-In-Managerfunk-
tion in das 9000Pro geladen werden (siehe Seite 66).
Les voix figurant dans la liste suivante sont créées en chargeant les données de la dis-
quette « Plug-in Custom Voice Disk » (Disquette des voix plug-in personnalisées) sur
le 9000Pro via la fonction Plug-in Manager (Gestionnaire plug-in) (page 66).
➀ PLG150-VL Plug in Voice List
MIDI
Program
Change#
MIDI
Program
Change#
Category
Order
Category
Order
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
I (Brass)
9
Recorder!
33
33
1
1
105
102
1
2
VL! Trumpet
VL!Trombone
VL! JzTrpt
MuteTrumpet
VL! Trumpy
VL! Brass
33
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
4
10
Island Pipe
33
7
V (Pipe 2)
3
33
20
24
86
26
27
16
17
31
1
2
VL!Clarinet
Piccolo
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
98
43
4
33
5
33
3
Clariphone
Clariophon
Alt Kwek
Whystler
Flurmod
91
6
33
4
100
117
12
7
VL! Horn
33
5
8
Trumpet 2
FlugelHorn!
Tuba!
33
6
9
33
7
61
10
33
8
Lite Pipe
Ocarina
99
II (Saxophone 1)
9
109
93
1
2
VL!Soprano
VL!AltoSax
Motion Sax!
BrightTenor
Jazz Sax
81
81
81
33
81
81
81
33
81
81
112
112
115
1
64
65
66
86
66
64
65
69
65
66
10
11
12
Resoflute
Bass Clari
Binaphon
122
109
3
4
VI (Reed)
5
114
113
114
1
1
2
VL! Oboe
VL!EnglHorn
VL!Bassoon
Triple Reed
Oboette
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
89
95
6
Soprano Sax
Alto Sax
7
3
97
8
Ana Sopran
Soft Alto
4
94
9
113
116
5
127
63
10
Tenor Sax
6
Baroquen
Bassoon
Ali Baba
III (Saxophone 2)
7
97
1
2
Old Tenor
Air Sax
81
119
1
66
9
8
111
91
33
9
Noboe
3
Glass Alto
Voxo Saxo
Bari Sax
33
1
75
67
67
113
114
64
1
10
Persinet
112
4
81
113
112
1
VII (Guitar)
5
81
1
2
VL!Span.Gtr
VL! JGuitar
GuitarChuck
Smooth Gtr
Jazz Guitar
FunkyGuitar
Guitar Hero
ChaosGuitar
Synpick
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
71
78
80
76
72
77
3
6
Mizu Horn
Funny Sax
SopranoPipe
Floboe
33
7
33
0
3
8
81
114
1
4
9
33
5
10
SylophonX
33
1
115
6
IV (Pipe 1)
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Jazz Flute
Pan Pipe
BambooFlute
Shakuha!
Pico Pipe
Snake Flute
Duality
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
48
55
8
11
96
9
9
57
10
VL! Slapper
126
113
12
VIII (Ethnnic&Str)
1
2
3
4
Stone Henge
Sitar!
33
33
33
33
0
0
1
1
4
58
116
46
Rock Harp
Akko Harp
121
59
Flauto
204 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Plug-in Voice List/Plug-In-Stimmenliste/Liste des voix plug-in
MIDI
Program
Change#
Category
Order
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
5
6
Plucked
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
74
54
VL! Shaku
ElectrumX
Violon
7
120
37
8
9
Yam Gam
Edgeophon
Akkophon
Squeeze
Parlophon
Softblow
NuViolin
60
10
11
12
13
14
15
121
59
117
88
118
32
IX (Synthesizer)
1
2
Chamlion
Choronic
Fat Mini
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
51
90
3
87
4
Wynth
14
5
SynTouch
Talk Box
Brassyn
89
6
84
7
105
112
94
8
Maysbe
9
Resogrowl
Obosyn
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
106
102
23
SilverSyn
AnaPercSyn
Babalog
25
Celloid
83
Klaqak
57
MWh Morph
BuzzWheel
Jason Mod
Square Lead
Phasepipe
70
15
69
19
12
X (Bass 1)
1
2
Finger Bass
Damp Bass
Acid Bass
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
26
31
42
53
18
52
43
55
49
50
3
4
Dirty Bass
Lead Bass
Parasynbass
Square Bass
SynkBass
5
6
7
8
9
Tek Bass
10
Tranz Bass
XI (Bass 2)
1
2
VL!BamBass
Dance Bass
Fruit Bass
Box Bass
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
54
51
41
39
29
6
3
4
5
Birdland
6
Talk Bass
7
Bamboo Bass
Buzz Bass
Clav Bass
Dragon Bass
54
37
7
8
9
10
7
Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Plug-in Voice List/Plug-In-Stimmenliste/Liste des voix plug-in
➀➀PLG150-AN Plug in Voice List
MIDI
Program
Change#
MIDI
Program
Change#
Category
Order
Category
Order
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
I
16
17
18
19
20
2001
36
36
36
36
36
0
0
2
2
2
2
1
2
Killer
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
2
0
2
2
2
1
2
0
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
0
2
0
41
1
Ruff
4
RealMini
5th Pad
Lights
Grumpy
Cosmic
VA Pig
31
32
33
3
4
2
5
Metallic
Hyperbolic
Cactus
3
IV
6
127
4
1
2
Dirty Saw
OldOkt
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
2
2
1
2
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
0
34
35
51
36
43
16
21
22
78
53
48
37
38
39
40
41
42
42
43
79
7
8
Mini Low
Omega
Brainmill
Power
52
5
3
Resonant
SepaWays
Maxx
9
4
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
6
5
7
6
DistOdsy
Violynx
Pro Sync
Susy
Lotus
124
8
7
Filterflow
Kraftworks
Hard Noize
TechPluck
Xalimba
Dist5th
8
9
9
10
11
12
121
71
13
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Mars
Dawn
Saphire
Ropey
Sliver
Pulsate
Faaaat
BPF Step
II
BlapMoth
MaMa
1
2
Wonder
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
0
2
2
2
1
2
0
2
0
0
1
1
2
2
2
0
2
2
0
2
47
14
Elec Groove
Seq Bass
Cool man
Uni Bass
Free Cut
Kick Line
Zebedee
Touch
Yellow
3
15
Stranger
Earth Lead
4
16
5
126
17
V
6
1
2
Rhubarb
Trabant
Billy
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
2
0
0
0
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
0
0
2
2
2
0
2
0
44
85
98
71
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
107
6
7
123
18
8
3
9
33
4
Nossi
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Chiff
92
5
CyberBag
Cream
Sync Eko
FreeRthm
Virtual
49
6
108
19
7
Astro Flute
Bella
8
JarreSQ
Hardcore
Kangaroo
Acid Seq
Acid Rain
Harmsync
Fat Run
20
9
MgWhistl
Mg Cat
Chamleon
Earthling
BiggMac
Maise
21
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
119
22
23
122
24
9
Silence
KnivesLd
ANSyncHd
Caliopsyn
Oizo
52
53
54
91
55
27
III
1
2
Bombastic
Sync Lead
Squeamer
Dre-full
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
0
2
0
0
0
2
0
0
2
2
2
2
0
0
0
10
25
12
13
37
26
75
84
27
28
29
30
16
95
25
3
4
Jack
5
SynGtr
VI
6
Xenarion
Caner
1
2
Fatty
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
0
0
0
2
2
1
2
0
1
0
105
107
17
7
Bronze
8
J.Hammer
On One
3
HardBrss
ToToHorn
CS80Bras
ProBrass
Smoovey
Chick
9
4
56
10
11
12
13
14
15
SupaSync
Prophetic
Slum
5
57
6
23
7
58
Lipstick
8
77
MegaDron
Unstable
9
Sharpsyn
SQR
50
10
46
206 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Plug-in Voice List/Plug-In-Stimmenliste/Liste des voix plug-in
MIDI
Program
Change#
MIDI
Program
Change#
Category
Order
Category
Order
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
SyncBrPd
Stevie
Willy
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
1
0
2
2
0
2
2
0
2
1
45
66
59
60
72
61
62
108
63
17
6
X-Bass
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
0
0
2
2
0
0
2
0
0
0
2
1
2
2
2
49
40
84
85
58
112
86
56
57
59
87
24
88
89
90
7
ANSynBas
Dog Bass
DuckBass
RubbaBas
Stringer
8
Pulser
Lucky
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Zoik
Rock It
ANSoftBr
Fire
Mg Fretless
BirdWorld
Woodbass
Smooth
ObDetune
VII
VIII
IX
Hardily
1
2
AnalogBrass
Soar
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
0
1
2
1
0
1
1
2
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
2
0
1
2
109
46
64
55
55
56
57
65
80
111
54
52
80
44
41
22
66
19
18
67
Loom
SeqWater
EthTeck
India
3
Major Brass
High Sweep
Waspad
4
5
X
6
Sync Sweep
Mountain
BPF Pad
Down Under
Choclate
Water Pad
Vangelizm
P-5 Saw
1
2
HiQ Reso
SynthTom
SynShake
TriblTom
AN Snare
MufflKik
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
0
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
29
91
92
85
93
91
92
93
104
116
94
95
86
96
36
87
89
90
106
89
7
8
3
9
4
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
5
6
7
Euro kik
8
AN HiHat
Mechanics
Seismic
Kelp
9
Magic
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
PWM Sweep
Multi Saw
So-Lina
X Bells
XmodBell
PitchMan
Metal Ld
EthnoTom
AN Toms
Rimshot
Hi Wedge
Bonn
1
2
PWM Strings
Funky
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
0
2
2
1
0
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
0
115
68
69
20
73
70
83
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
15
81
54
XstikSnr
3
Insomnia
Pro Attack
Popcorn
Snowball
Woob
Cyberclock
Fhomhair
4
5
XI
6
1
2
Lunar X41
Quarks
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
1
1
2
0
1
2
2
0
0
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
102
109
96
31
100
97
98
32
30
99
96
103
8
7
8
MiniTech
Cavesyn
Cracker
MgSoloLd
Behind
3
ULTSound
Invade
9
4
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
5
PlyChord
Poptart
6
7
Jah
Rydeen
Knives
8
FreeEdge
Fumble
9
Mg Wood
Monty
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
WelcomBk
RadioNz
FM Waves
MgVoice
ResoBell
Microdot
Syncrome
RhthmCty
SyncSitr
Dragnfly
Indosync
Q Lead
5th Ring
FootBase
10thTone
100
73
75
76
78
79
81
1
2
3
4
5
Mr.Hook
Hypertune
Pastel
36
36
36
36
36
2
2
0
0
0
82
83
93
Abacab
Laos
102
23
Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Plug-in Voice List/Plug-In-Stimmenliste/Liste des voix plug-in
➀➀PLG150-PF Plug in Voice List
MIDI
Program
Change#
MIDI
Program
Change#
Category
Order
Category
Order
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
I (Piano 1)
Hnkytnk3
3
10
80
65
GndPnoSt
Dbl Pno
Montuno
GrndDyno
David
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
VI (E.Piano 2)
1
2
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
0
Tea
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
82
83
84
85
86
88
89
90
91
1
2
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
0
Deodar
70's EP
80's EP
Crisp EP
Sweetnes
Freeway
Trem 70
Remark
Mid 70's
3
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
73
4
3
5
4
RhodyGnd
GrandDX
GrandDX2
Bob
6
5
7
6
8
7
9
8
PianoStr
10
9
II (Piano 2)
10
GndPnoMn
FlngGrnd
BrghtGnd
60'sGrnd
RchGndSt
60'sJazz
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
VII (E.Piano 3)
1
2
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
64
80
65
66
67
69
72
73
75
79
Celest80
At Once
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
2
80
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
82
83
84
3
80
TremDyno
TremWurl
Phase 70
DlydDyno
FlngDyno
Dyno 81
Tonight
4
3
80
5
4
80
6
5
80
PowerGnd
MildGrnd
ChorusMn
AmbiGrnd
7
6
80
8
7
80
9
8
80
10
9
80
80
III (Piano 3)
Dyno 83
10
PnoStPad
SynStrPf
PianoPad
OctPf+Pd
Pf+Choir
ModPd Pf
SitaryPf
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
VIII (E.Piano 4)
1
2
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
92
93
Choir EP
Paddy EP
VcePd EP
60's EP
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
80
87
88
89
91
92
93
94
95
3
94
80
4
95
80
5
96
80
Trump
6
97
80
DonnyWrl
WurliAmp
Dg Wurli
7
99
80
StGndPSt
StRichSt
StTghtSt
8
100
102
104
80
80
9
IX (E.Piano 5)
10
IV (Piano 4)
80
FullTine
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
1
2
80
0
BrghtPno
Digital
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DX EP2
1
2
0
80
64
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
DX 1990
Mllw DX
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
64
65
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
3
80
ChorDigi
DigiGrnd
Grnd/wDX
ChoDigiP
GlassPno
DigiTine
SawDigi1
SawDigi2
3
4
80
ChrsTine
Chrs EP2
Chrs1980
Chrs1990
DarkDXEP
FTBallad
4
5
80
5
6
80
6
7
80
7
8
80
8
9
80
80
9
10
X (E.Piano 6)
10
V (E.Piano 1)
Sym EP2
Chrs1982
90Ballad
816
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
1
2
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
84
CP
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
0
CP-Symph
Trem CP
BrightCP
Digi CP1
Jino
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
64
3
4
DXEP+Pad
DXSynStr
DXEP+Cho
Balmy DX
GlassyEP
Chrs FMP
5
6
7
Digi CP2
Petit CP
Hnkytnk2
8
9
10
208 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Plug-in Voice List/Plug-In-Stimmenliste/Liste des voix plug-in
MIDI
Program
Change#
Category
Order
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
XI (Harpsi&Clavi)
Harpsi 1
Harpsi 2
RichHpsi
Clav 1
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
1
2
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
0
64
67
0
3
4
Clav 2
5
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
MuteClav
Phs Clav
PhsClav2
Wah Clav
DigiClav
Ch DgClv
PhsDgClv
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Plug-in Voice List/Plug-In-Stimmenliste/Liste des voix plug-in
➀➀PLG150-DX Plug in Voice List
MIDI
Program
Change#
MIDI
Program
Change#
Category
Order
Category
Order
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
I
PIANO 4
PowerPno
IronEch2
MiniBell
32
15
71
27
25
16
17
18
19
20
35
35
67
35
35
0
1
0
1
1
E.Pno1
1
12
10
11
8
1
2
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
83
83
83
83
83
35
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
1
1
DX-Road2
E.PIANO1
WurliEP1
RatioDob
CosaRosa
E.PIANO2
Knock EP
Hard EP1
Vics EP
3
0
Carillon
4
1
IV
5
1
13
34
4
Gtr Box
25
25
40
26
24
25
25
26
27
27
42
43
56
12
22
24
27
30
11
25
6
1
1
2
83
83
35
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
35
35
35
35
35
83
83
83
35
83
71
74
1
Folknik
7
0
Tite Gtr
8
70
97
68
72
96
1
3
4
DX-JzGt1
DX-AcGt4
DX-PkGt3
DX-PkGt7
DX-JzGt2
DX-ClGt6
DX-ClGt9
DX-ClGt1
DX-ClGt5
GUITAR 5
GUITAR 2
KOTO
9
4
0
5
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
5
66
65
69
64
68
96
1
Duke EP
DynoRoad
E.Pno 2
5
6
5
7
3
8
Bell Pno
BigWurlt
DX-Road3
EP 1970
Urban
3
69
64
68
71
66
69
70
9
4
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
4
4
1
5
0
E.Pno 4
5
0
Mark III
2
0
II
Mrmb Gtr
DX-ClGt4
DX-DsGt5
GUITAR 1
RytmPluk
69
66
68
0
MM-Clav1
CLAV 1
19
19
7
1
2
35
35
83
83
35
35
35
83
83
83
83
35
35
35
83
83
35
35
35
83
1
0
Clavecn1
MM-Clav2
CLAV 2
3
68
64
0
7
4
75
42
20
21
7
V
5
SkltnClv
ClavStf1
MuteClav
BritClv1
BASS 1
14
30
33
34
34
34
34
35
36
37
39
32
63
35
62
35
38
88
119
118
6
1
1
2
35
35
83
35
83
83
83
83
35
35
83
83
35
35
35
83
83
67
35
83
0
1
BogiBass
FustBass
DX-SyBa3
PickPluk
ChifBass
Owl Bass
FrtlsBa3
7
1
8
99
75
67
70
0
3
67
1
7
9
4
Revinett
DX-Clv 1
HARPSIC1
HyperSqr
Xanu
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
5
64
65
67
65
1
7
6
18
89
113
88
93
58
61
94
46
7
1
8
DX-SyBa5
DX-SyBa6
DX-Bass3
After 88
1
9
MM-Prety
Gior Pad
LUTE
66
66
0
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
66
67
0
HARP 2
DX-Harp1
OrchHarp
BASS 4
0
Cutmandu
BASS 3
1
1
65
0
III
FrtlsBa5
67
96
0
PIANO 2
DXCP-70
Digi Pno
8
DX-SyBa9
MM-Fall
1
2
35
35
83
83
35
83
35
35
83
35
83
67
83
83
83
0
1
16
0
MM-SDr 1
DX-MtSnr
3
66
66
0
1
5th Pno1
TOY PIAN
Glocken1
DX-Vibe1
MARIMBA
DX-Xylo2
TUB BELL
DX-Bel 1
DX-BigBn
MelwMrmb
Vibetron
1
4
96
39
9
VI
5
DX-Str 8
SolinePf
75
83
100
49
50
51
51
85
90
6
6
0
1
2
35
35
83
83
83
83
83
35
83
35
1
1
23
21
13
25
14
69
12
11
9
7
1
BellStr2
8
0
3
97
0
WarmStr1
Soft Bow
DX-AnSt3
Aftrnoon
Str&Brs
9
64
0
4
10
11
12
13
14
15
5
74
65
73
1
64
0
6
7
103
70
66
8
SyBr Pd6
ORCHESTR
9
69
0
Glocken4
10
210 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Plug-in Voice List/Plug-In-Stimmenliste/Liste des voix plug-in
MIDI
Program
Change#
MIDI
Program
Change#
Category
Order
Category
Order
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
Voice Name
MSB#
LSB#
GrngePad
WarmStr4
DX-AnSt1
DX-Str10
SyBr Pd3
SyBr Pd2
DX-Str 5
DX-Str 3
Mid Str1
94
51
50
49
90
90
48
48
48
86
VbrtClar
71
71
68
84
70
61
73
76
78
79
82
46
20
17
58
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
35
0
6
83
83
83
83
83
35
83
83
83
83
83
35
83
35
35
0
65
0
DX-Clar1
Oboe 1
68
70
66
66
65
70
68
0
7
8
Au Campo
Bassoon
DX-Acrd4
DX-Flt 3
9
0
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
0
1
65
64
0
DX-Botle
Whistle1
DX-Ocrn1
CaliopL2
DrwOrg11
PufOrgn2
PIPES 1
DXChrch2
DX-SySt7
1
0
VII
VIII
IX
64
1
DX-Trpt2
DX-Trpt3
DX-Trpt4
SlvTrmpt
DX-Trb 2
BRASS 1
BRASS 2
BRASS 3
DX-BrSc2
CS80-Br1
DX-Tuba2
AlpsHorn
DX-Horn
MelwHrn1
MletHorn
BlnchHrn
BrsLead1
BrsLead2
BrsLead3
ChorsBrs
56
56
56
56
57
0
1
2
83
83
83
83
83
35
35
35
35
35
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
64
65
66
67
64
0
65
0
3
4
1
X
5
E.ORGAN1
E.ORGAN4
JazOrg 1
DrwOrg 5
DrwOrg15
PrcOrg 4
RckOrg 4
RckOrg14
Whisper1
ArrowxMS
Janpany
16
46
6
1
2
35
35
83
83
35
35
83
83
83
35
35
35
35
67
83
83
83
83
83
83
0
0
1
7
0
2
16
8
0
3
67
70
1
65
66
58
60
60
60
60
60
83
83
83
63
16
9
1
4
48
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
5
51
64
68
0
6
1
18
7
66
97
65
1
18
8
91
64
66
67
0
9
102
118
124
125
64
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
Flxatone
1
Laser 2
65
66
0
1
DX-Ring1
DX-Echo1
DX-Aggo1
Block
0
102
113
115
115
116
116
102
0
Court
62
61
68
62
62
62
63
63
61
61
61
62
69
70
62
63
74
61
61
61
1
2
83
83
35
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
35
35
83
83
35
83
83
83
79
0
0
DX-BrSc1
DX-SBr 2
DX-SBr 3
DX-SBr 5
DX-SBr 6
DX-SBr 7
Ensemble
Fanfare
Log Drum
SoftHead
CongaDrm
96
64
96
3
1
4
67
69
70
65
71
72
96
71
80
1
XI
5
Ana Poly
AnalogBr
SYN-LEA1
Super DX
DXSyLd 5
DXSyLd 9
LeadLine
SoftLd 1
62
62
13
81
81
81
87
103
80
105
99
71
62
80
81
84
90
99
92
116
6
1
2
83
83
35
83
83
83
83
35
83
35
35
35
83
83
83
83
83
83
35
35
78
97
0
7
8
3
9
4
66
68
99
0
HardBrss
Horn Ens
Juice
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
5
6
7
MM-Brss1
MM-Brss2
MM-Brss3
SinglBrs
SynHorns
TightBr1
TightBr2
WarmBrss
8
1
DX-SLd 2
SnglLine
1
9
65
1
73
67
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
DX-SLd 7
Funkrhyt
1
1
PowerDrv
DX-SLd 3
DXSyLd 3
LeadPhon
WhaserPd
DX-Atms2
DX-MtPd1
TrcrBell
66
67
70
75
67
65
64
75
67
1
FLUTE 1
Quena
23
76
96
82
79
1
2
3
4
5
35
83
35
83
83
0
65
1
Harvest
CaliopL3
DX-Ocrn2
66
64
1
Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Style List
Style List/Style-Liste/Liste des styles
➀ Preset Style/Stil Voreinstellung/Style présélectionné
➀ Flash Style/Stil Blitz/Style Flash
Category
Order
Category
Order
Category
Order
Category
Order
Style Name
Style Name
Style Name
Style Name
8 BEAT
Heart Beat
8 Beat 1
8 Beat 2
8 Beat 3
4
5
6
7
8
Rock & Roll
Croco Twist
Gospel Brothers
Gospel Sisters
Gospel Shuffle
6/8 Blues
Boogie Woogie 1
Amazing Gospel
Blueberry Blues
60’s Rock & Roll
Funky Fusion
Rock Shuffle
COUNTRY
I (8 BEAT)
60’s Rock 1
60’s Rock 2
8 Beat 5
8 Beat Rock 2
8 Beat Rock 3
8 Beat Ballad 2
Barock
Root Rock 2
Root Rock 3
Slow Rock
II (16 BEAT)
Uptown Shuffle
LA Groove
5
6
7
8
9
Country 8 Beat 1
Country Pop
Country Swing 2
Cowboy Boogie
Cowboy Rock
Singer Song Writer
VII (LATIN)
Espagnole
Rumba Flamenca
Salsa
Rumba Island
Piano Rumba
Beguine
Guitar Bossa
Bossa Band
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8 Beat 4
9
10
6/8 Slow Rock
Spicy Beat
8 Beat Adria
Off Beat
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
8 Beat Rock 1
Piano Ballad
Guitar Ballad
Organ Ballad
Love Song
8 Beat Ballad 1
Acoustic Ballad
Modern 6/8
Root Rock 1
Soft Rock
Hard Rock
16 BEAT
16 Beat 1
16 Beat 2
16 Beat 3
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Country Rock
Country 2/4
Funk
Country Swing 1
Country Shuffle 1
Country Ballad
Country Waltz
Bluegrass 1
Hoedown
Country Brothers
Guitar Pop
LATIN
Samba City
Samba Rio
Bossa Nova
Fast Bossa
Mambo 1
Analog Ballad
Hip Hop Pop
16Beat Ballad 1
16Beat Ballad 2
EP Ballad
Happy Reggae
Jumbo Reggae
VIII (MARCH&WALTZ)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Showtune
Polka Pop 2
German March 2
Jig
Reel
Musette
Swing Waltz
Pop Waltz
Christmas 3/4
Christmas 4/4
Pop Ballad
10
16Beat Rock Ballad
III (DANCE)
6/8 Trance
16Beat Dance Shuf-
fle
70’s Disco 2
Dance Funk
Dance Soul
Disco
Disco Fusion
Disco Hands
Eurobeat
Groundbeat
Handbag
Party Pop
Soul Dance
Techno1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
16 Beat 4
3
4
5
6
7
Slow & Easy
Smooth Jazz
Uptown Beat
Jazz Rock
Kool Shuffle
West End Shuffle
DANCE
House Musik
DJ Berlin
Trance 1
9
10
Caribbean
Carnival
Gypsy Rumba
Pop Rumba
Sheriff Reggae
8
9
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
10
MARCH&WALTZ
US March
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Hip Hop
Trip Hop
German March 1
6/8 March
Polka Oberkrainer
Waltz Oberkrainer
Guitar Serenade
Tarantella 1
Polka Pop 1
Jazz Waltz
Slow Waltz
BALLROOM
Viennese Waltz
English Waltz
Slowfox 1
Quickstep
Tango
Trance 2
IV (SWING&JAZZ)
Bebop
Disco Chocolate
70’s Disco 1
Saturday Night
Disco Fox
Techno-Polis
Euro Shop
Entrance
Clubdance
Flip Hop
Disco Samba
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Big Band Shuffle
Cat Groove
Foxtrot 1
Foxtrot 2
10
Jazz Ballad 2
Lounge Piano
Midnight Swing
Miller Ballad
Organ Quickstep
Vocal Swing
Jazz Singer
V (R&B)
1
2
3
4
5
SWING&JAZZ
Big Band 1
Big Band 2
Big Band 3
Swing 1
10
11
12
1
2
3
6
7
Samba
Rumba
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
16 Beat Funk
60’s Rock 3
Blues Shuffle
Boogie Woogie 2
Lovely Shuffle
Motown
Motown Soul
Soul Beat
Pop Shuffle
Twist
Swing 2
8
9
Cha Cha Cha
Pasodoble 1
Jive
Acoustic Jazz
Electric Jazz
Jazz Ballad 1
Gypsy Swing
Swingfox
Dixieland
Ragtime
Big Band Ballad
Shuffle
Piano Swing
R&B
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Metronome 1/4
Metronome 2/4
Metronome 3/4
Metronome 4/4
Metronome 6/8
Bass Chord Hold 1
Bass Chord Hold 2
Bass Chord Hold 3
Bass Chord Hold 4
Bass Chord Hold 5
10
VI (COUNTRY)
Bluegrass 2
Carpenter
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
Soul Shuffle
Soul
Modern R&B
Country Two Step
Country 8 Beat 2
212 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multi Pad Bank List
Multi Pad Bank List/Multi-Pad-Bankliste/Liste des
banques multi-pads
Bank Number
Bank Name
Live! Tom
Live! Crash
Live! Kit 1
Live! Kit 2
Live! Kit 3
ArabicPerc 1
ArabicPerc 2
Live! Perc 1
Live! Perc 2
Dance Kit
Bank Number
Bank Name
DJ Set 2
1
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
2
OrchestraHit
Water SE
Horror SE
Night SE
3
4
5
6
Day SE
7
Car SE
8
Big Bells
9
Whistle
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
MagicBell SE
MIDI Control
Scale Tune
Scat 1
Scat 2
Scat 3
Scat 4
Swingy
Live! Brass 1
Live! Brass 2
SynBrass
Mallet Fills
Piano Man
Heaven Arp
Piano Arp
Harpeggio 1
Harpeggio 2
Arpeggio
Crystal Arp
Twinkle Arp
Piano Gliss
Xmas 1
Xmas 2
Attention 1
Attention 2
Fanfare 1
Fanfare 2
Classical
Flamenco Gtr
Salsa Piano
Samba Show 1
Samba Show 2
TimbalesRoll
Guitar Cut 1
Guitar Cut 2
GuitarRiff 1
GuitarRiff 2
Guitar Strum
LiveDrumFill
Limbo Dancer
DJ Set 1
Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameter Chart
Parameter Chart/Parameter-Tabelle/
o : Memorized
o : Wird gespeichert
o : mémorisé
x : Not memorized
x : Wird nicht gespeichert
x : non mémorisé
ON : Always ON when the corresponding function is called up.
ON Ist immer eingeschaltet, wenn die zugehörige Funktion
aufgerufen wird.
ON : toujours activé lorsque la fonction correspondante est
appelée
Acmp. Pad Part Panpot
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Auto Accompaniment
Acmp. Phrase 1 Part Panpot
Style #
x
ON
x
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
Acmp.
Acmp.
x
x
Acmp. Phrase 2 Part Panpot
Auto Acmpaniment ON/OFF
Fingering
Acmp. Rhythm 1 Part Reverb Depth
Acmp. Rhythm 2 Part Reverb Depth
Acmp. Bass Part Reverb Depth
Acmp. Chord 1 Part Reverb Depth
Acmp. Chord 2 Part Reverb Depth
Acmp. Pad Part Reverb Depth
Acmp. Fingering
Split
Acmp.
Split Point
x
x
o
o
o
x
Point
Main Variation [MainA/B/C/D]
FADE IN/OUT
x
x
x
x
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
x
x
x
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Acmp.
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
FILL In & Break Mode
x
x
Tap Tempo
x
x
Acmp. Phrase 1 Part Reverb Depth
Acmp. Phrase 2 Part Reverb Depth
Acmp. Rhythm 1 Part Chorus Depth
Acmp. Rhythm 2 Part Chorus Depth
Acmp. Bass Part Chorus Depth
Acmp. Chord 1 Part Chorus Depth
Acmp. Chord 2 Part Chorus Depth
Acmp. Pad Part Chorus Depth
Tap Count Note
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Tap Count Velocity
Acmp. Main Volume
Acmp. Main EQ Low
Acmp. Main EQ High
Acmp. Main Panpot
Acmp. Main Reverb Depth
Acmp. Main Chorus Depth
Acmp. Main DSP Depth
Acmp. Phrase 1 Part Chorus Depth
Acmp. Phrase 2 Part Chorus Depth
Acmp. Rhythm 1 Part Track On/Off
Acmp. Rhythm 2 Part Track On/Off
Acmp. Bass Part Track On/Off
Acmp. Chord 1 Part Track On/Off
Acmp. Chord 2 Part Track On/Off
Acmp. Pad Part Track On/Off
Acmp. Phrase 1 Part Track On/Off
Acmp. Phrase 2 Part Track On/Off
Acmp. Rhythm 1 Part Volume
Acmp. Rhythm 2 Part Volume
Acmp. Bass Part Volume
Acmp. Chord 1 Part Volume
Acmp. Chord 2 Part Volume
Acmp. Pad Part Volume
Acmp. Phrase 1 Part Volume
Acmp. Phrase 2 Part Volume
Acmp. Rhythm 1 Part Panpot
Acmp. Rhythm 2 Part Panpot
Acmp. Bass Part Panpot
Acmp. Chord 1 Part Panpot
Acmp. Chord 2 Part Panpot
Acmp. Rhythm 1 Part Variation (DSP3)
Depth
x
o
o
x
x
x
Acmp.
x
Acmp. Rhythm 2 Part Variation (DSP3)
Depth
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
x
x
x
Acmp. Bass Part Variation (DSP3) Depth
Acmp. Chord 1 Part Variation (DSP3)
Depth
Acmp. Chord 2 Part Variation (DSP3)
Depth
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
x
x
x
Acmp. Pad Part Variation (DSP3) Depth
Acmp. Phrase 1 Part Variation (DSP3)
Depth
Acmp. Phrase 2 Part Variation (DSP3)
Depth
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
x
x
x
Acmp. Rhythm 1 Part Voice Change
Voice #
Acmp. Rhythm 2 Part Voice Change
Voice #
Acmp. Bass Part Voice Change Voice #
Acmp. Chord 1 Part Voice Change Voice #
Acmp. Chord 2 Part Voice Change Voice #
Acmp. Pad Part Voice Change Voice #
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
x
x
x
x
Acmp. Phrase 1 Part Voice Change
Voice #
x
o
o
x
x
x
Acmp.
x
Acmp. Phrase 2 Part Voice Change
Voice #
x
x
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
Acmp.
Acmp.
x
x
Acmp. Rhythm 1 Part Harmonic Content
214 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tableau des paramétres
Acmp. Rhythm 2 Part Harmonic Content
Acmp. Bass Part Harmonic Content
Acmp. Chord 1 Part Harmonic Content
Acmp. Chord 2 Part Harmonic Content
Acmp. Pad Part Harmonic Content
Acmp. Phrase 1 Part Harmonic Content
Acmp. Phrase 2 Part Harmonic Content
Acmp. Rhythm 1 Part Brightness
Acmp. Rhythm 2 Part Brightness
Acmp. Bass Part Brightness
Acmp. Chord 1 Part Brightness
Acmp. Chord 2 Part Brightness
Acmp. Pad Part Brightness
Acmp. Phrase 1 Part Brightness
Acmp. Phrase 2 Part Brightness
Acmp. Rhythm 1 Part EQ Low
Acmp. Rhythm 2 Part EQ Low
Acmp. Bass Part EQ Low
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
ON
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Song Name
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Song Pause/Rew/FF
Song Volume
Song EQ Low
Song EQ High
Song Panpot
Song Reverb Depth
Song Chorus Depth
Song Variation (DSP3) Depth
Song Track Solo/Mute/Play (Track1~16)
Song Track Volume (Track1~16)
Song Track Panpot (Track1 ~16)
Song Track EQ Low (Track1~16)
Song Track EQ High (Track1~16)
Song Track Reverb Depth (Track1~16)
Song Track Chorus Depth (Track1~16)
Song Track Variation (DSP3) Depth
(Track1~16)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Song Track Program Change #
Acmp. Chord 1 Part EQ Low
Acmp. Chord 2 Part EQ Low
Acmp. Pad Part EQ Low
Song Part Harmonic Content
(Track1~16)
Song Part Brightness (Track1~16)
Voice
Acmp. Phrase 1 Part EQ Low
Acmp. Phrase 2 Part EQ Low
Acmp. Rhythm 1 Part EQ High
Acmp. Rhythm 2 Part EQ High
Acmp. Bass Part EQ High
Part Select (Left/Right1/Right2/Right3)
Upper Octave
x
o
x
x
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
x
x
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Voice
Voice
voice
Voice
Voice
x
Sustain SW (R1/R2/R3) ON/OFF
Touch SW ON/OFF
x
x
Right 1 Part On/Off
x
Acmp. Chord 1 Part EQ High
Acmp. Chord 2 Part EQ High
Acmp. Pad Part EQ High
Right 1 Voice #
x
Right 1 Release Time (Bn 48h)
Right 1 Voice Octave
Right 1 Part Volume
Voice
Voice
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Acmp. Phrase 1 Part EQ High
Acmp. Phrase 2 Part EQ High
Synchro Stop
Right 1 Part Panpot
x
Right 1 Reverb Depth
Right 1 Chorus Depth
Right 1 Poly/Mono ON/OFF
Right1 Portamento (Poly/Mono)
Right1 Tuning
Effects
Effects
Voice
x
Synchro Start
o
x
x
x
Start/Stop
x
x
Song
Song On/Off
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
x
x
x
Song
Song
Song
x
x
x
x
Lyrics Search On/Off
Ultra Quick Start On/Off
Right1 Pitch Bend Range
Right1 Portamento Time
Right1 Harmonic Content
Right1 Brightness
x
Voice
Voice
Voice
EQ
Song Full Path (Including the file name
for the Registration Memory)
x
x
o
x
x
x
Song
x
Song Full Path (Not including the file
name for the Backup)
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
x
o
x
x
x
Song
x
x
x
Song Select (Song #)
Right1 EQ Low
Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameter Chart/Parameter-Tabelle/Tableau des paramétres
Parameter Chart/Parameter-Tabelle/Tableau des paramétres
Right1 EQ High
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
EQ
Voice
Voice
Voice
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Left Chorus Depth
Left Poly/Mono ON/OFF
Left Portamento (Poly/Mono)
Left Tuning
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Effects
Voice
x
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Right 2 Part On/Off
Right 2 Voice #
x
x
Right 2 Release Time (Bn 48h)
Right 2 Voice Octave
Right 2 Part Volume
Right 2 Part Panpot
Right 2 Reverb Depth
Right 2 Chorus Depth
Right 2 Poly/Mono ON/OFF
Right 2 Portamento (Poly/Mono)
Right 2 Tuning
Voice
Voice
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
x
Left Pitch Bend Range
Left Portamento Time
Left Harmonic Content
Left Brightness
x
Voice
Voice
Voice
EQ
x
Effects
Effects
Voice
x
Left EQ Low
Left EQ High
EQ
Left Hold
x
x
Organ Flutes
Right 2 Pitch Bend Range
Right 2 Portamento Time
Right 2 Harmonic Content
Right 2 Brightness
x
R1 OrganFlute Panel Organ No.
R2 OrganFlute Panel Organ No.
R3 OrganFlute Panel Organ No.
LEFT OrganFlute Panel Organ No.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Voice
Voice
Voice
Acmp.
x
x
x
x
Voice
Voice
Voice
EQ
Right 2 EQ Low
Plug-in Voice
Right 2 EQ High
EQ
R1 OrganFlute Panel Organ No.
R2 OrganFlute Panel Organ No.
R3 OrganFlute Panel Organ No.
LEFT OrganFlute Panel Organ No.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Voice
Voice
Voice
Acmp.
x
x
x
x
Right 3 (LEAD) Part On/Off
Right 3 Voice #
x
x
Right 3 Release Time (Bn 48h)
Right 3 Voice Octave
Right 3 Part Volume
Right 3 Part Panpot
Right 3 Reverb Depth
Right 3 Chorus Depth
Right 3 Poly/Mono ON/OFF
Right 3 Portamento (Poly/Mono)
Right 3 Tuning
Voice
Voice
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Acmp.
Effect
Reverb
Type
Reverb Effect Type
x
x
o
x
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Acmp.
x
x
Reverb Effect Parameter
x
Effects
Effects
Voice
x
Reverb
Return
Level
Reverb Return Level
x
x
o
x
x
x
Acmp.
Chorus Effect Type
x
x
o
x
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Acmp.
x
x
x
Chorus Effect Parameter
x
Chorus
Return
Level
Chorus Return Level
x
x
o
x
x
x
Acmp.
Right 3 Pitch Bend Range
Right 3 Portamento Time
Right 3 Harmonic Content
Right 3 Brightness
x
Voice
Voice
Voice
EQ
Variation (DSP3) Type
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Variation (DSP3) Effect parameter
Variation (DSP3) Connection
Variation (DSP3) Part
Right 3 EQ Low
Right 3 EQ High
EQ
DSP3
Return
Level
Variation (DSP3) Return Level
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Left Part On/Off
x
Left Voice #
x
Ins1. (DSP4) On/Off
o
o
x
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
x
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Effects
Effects
x
Voice
Voice
x
x
x
x
x
Left Voice Octave
Voice
x
Ins1. (DSP4) Insertion Type
Ins1. (DSP4). Effect parameter
Ins1. (DSP4) Fast/Slow Sw
Left Part Volume
Left Part Panpot
x
Effects
Voice
Left Reverb Depth
Effects
216 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameter Chart/Parameter-Tabelle/Tableau des paramétres
Ins1. (DSP4) Dry/Wet
o
x
o
x
o
x
x
x
x
x
Effects
x
Voice
x
x
x
Sampling DSP3 Dry/Wet
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Ins1. (DSP4) Fast/Slow Effect Parameter
Value
Microphone
Mic
Mic Volume
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Ins2. (DSP5) On/Off
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Effects
Effects
x
Voice
Voice
x
x
x
x
x
x
Setting
Ins2. (DSP5) Insertion Type
Ins2. (DSP5) Effect Parameter
Ins2. (DSP5) Fast/Slow
Ins2. (DSP5) Dry/Wet
Mic
Setting
Mic Panpot
Mic
Mic
Mic
Mic
Setting
Mic Reverb Depth
Mic Chorus Depth
Effects
Effects
Voice
Voice
Mic
Setting
Ins2. (DSP5) Fast/Slow Variation Effect
Parameter Value
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Mic EQ LOW Freq
Mic EQ LOW Gain
Mic EQ MID Freq
Mic EQ MID Gain
Mic EQ HIGH Freq
Mic EQ HIGH Gain
Noise Gate SW
Noise Gate TH
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Ins3. (DSP6) On/Off
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Effects
Effects
x
Voice
Voice
x
x
x
x
x
x
Ins3. (DSP6) Insertion Type
Ins3. (DSP6) Effect Parameter
Ins3. (DSP6) Fast/Slow
Ins3. (DSP6) Dry/Wet
Effects
Effects
Voice
Voice
Ins3. (DSP6) Fast/Slow Variation Effect
Parameter Value
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Ins4. (DSP7) On/Off
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Effects
Effects
x
Acmp.
Acmp.
x
–
x
x
x
x
Compressor SW
Compressor TH
Compressor RAT
Compressor OUT
Mic Mute
Ins4. (DSP7) Insertion Type
Ins4. (DSP7) Effect Parameter
Ins4. (DSP7) Fast/Slow
Ins4. (DSP7) Dry/Wet
Effects
Effects
Acmp.
Acmp.
Ins4. (DSP7) Fast/Slow Variation Effect
Parameter Value
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
x
o
x
x
o
x
o
x
x
o
x
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Mic
Vocal Harmony Mute (Song Track)
Vocal Harmony Track
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Mic
Mic
Mic
Mic
Mic
Mic
Setting
Mic
Setting
Ins5. (DSP8) On/Off
Mic
Mic
x
Mic
Setting
Mic
Setting
Ins5. (DSP8) Insertion Type
Ins5. (DSP8) Effect Parameter
Ins5. (DSP8) Dry/Wet (Mic Depth)
Mic
Setting
Vocal Harmony BAL.
Mic
Setting
Mic
Setting
Vocal Harmony Part
Mic
Setting
Mic
Mic
Setting
Vocal Harmony MODE
Vocal Harmony Chord Detect
Sampling DSP1 On/Off
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
o
x
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Mic
Setting
Sampling DSP1 Insertion Type
Sampling DSP1 Effect Parameter
Sampling DSP1 Fast/Slow
Sampling DSP1 Dry/Wet
Mic
Setting
Vocal Harmony On/Off
Talk On/Off
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
x
o
x
x
o
x
x
o
x
x
x
Mic
x
x
Mic
Setting
Vocal Harmony Type
Mic
Sampling DSP2 On/Off
Vocal Harmony Effect Parameter
(Harmony Volume1/2)
Mic
Setting
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Sampling DSP2 Insertion Type
Sampling DSP2 Effect parameter
Sampling DSP2 Fast/Slow
Sampling DSP2 Dry/Wet
Vocal Harmony Effect Parameter
(Harmony Panpot1/2)
Mic
Setting
Vocal Harmony Effect Parameter
(Harmony Detune 1/2)
Mic
Setting
Vocal Harmony Effect Parameter
(Harmony Pitch To Note)
Mic
Setting
Sampling DSP3 On/Off
Sampling DSP3 Insertion Type
Sampling DSP3 Effect Parameter
Sampling DSP3 Fast/Slow
Vocal Harmony Effect Parameter
(Harmony Pitch To Note Part)
Mic
Setting
Mic
Setting
Vocal Harmony Gender Type
Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameter Chart/Parameter-Tabelle/Tableau des paramétres
Mic
Master
EQ
Vocal Harmony Pitch Correction
Vocal Harmony Harmony Part
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
EQ Mid High (EQ4) Q
EQ High (EQ5) Q
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Setting
Mic
Setting
Master
EQ
Master
EQ
F7 Talk Setting
EQ Edit Q (EQ1~EQ5)
EQ Edit Freq. (EQ1~EQ5)
EQ Edit Q Gain (EQ1~EQ5)
Talk Volume
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Master
EQ
Talk Total Volume Attenutop
Talk Vocal Harmony Type
Talk Vocal Harmony On/Off
Talk Panpot
Master
EQ
Scale Tune
Scale Tuning (C)
Scale Tuning (C#)
Scale Tuning (D)
Scale Tuning (D#)
Scale Tuning (E)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Scale
Scale
Scale
Scale
Scale
Scale
Scale
Scale
Scale
Scale
Scale
Scale
Scale
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Talk Reverb Depth
Talk Chorus Depth
Talk DSP Depth
Talk DSP ON/OFF
Harmony/Echo
Scale Tuning (F)
Harmony/Echo On/Off
Harmony/Echo Type
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Harmony
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Scale Tuning (F#)
Scale Tuning (G)
Scale Tuning (G#)
Scale Tuning (A)
Harmony Harmony
Harmony Harmony
Harmony Harmony
Harmony Harmony
Harmony Harmony
Harmony Harmony
Harmony/Echo Volume
Harmony/Echo Assign
Harmony/Echo Chord Note Only
Harmony/Echo Touch Limit
Harmony/Echo Speed
Scale Tuning (A#)
Scale Tuning (B)
Scale Tuning Arabic/Equal Temp.
Scale Tuning User Data
(Multi Pad Bank #60)
Master EQ
x
x
x
o
o
x
Scale
x
Master
EQ
EQ No.
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Voice
Transpose
Master
EQ
Tune
EQ Low (EQ1) Gain
EQ Low Mid (EQ2) Gain
EQ Mid (EQ3) Gain
EQ Mid High (EQ4) Gain
EQ High (EQ5) Gain
EQ Low (EQ1) Freq.
EQ Low Mid (EQ2) Freq.
EQ Mid (EQ3) Freq.
EQ Mid High (EQ4) Freq.
EQ High (EQ5) Freq.
EQ Low (EQ1) Q
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Master Transpose
Song Transpose
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
o
x
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Trans
Master
EQ
Tune
Trans
Master
EQ
Tune
Trans
Keyboard Transpose
Transpose Assign
Master
EQ
Tune
Trans
Master
EQ
Tempo
Tempo
x
o
o
x
x
x
Tempo
x
Master
EQ
Controller
Master
EQ
Foot Volume Master/Individual
Foot Volume Assign
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Master
EQ
Foot Sw1 Type
Master
EQ
Foot Sw1 Part Assign
Foot Sw1 Percussion Kit #
Foot Sw1 Percussion Note #
Foot Sw1 Percussion Velocity
Foot Sw2 Type
Master
EQ
Master
EQ
Master
EQ
EQ Low Mid (EQ2) Q
EQ Mid (EQ3) Q
Master
EQ
Foot Sw2 Part Assign
218 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameter Chart/Parameter-Tabelle/Tableau des paramétres
Foot Sw2 Percussion Kit #
Foot Sw2 Percussion Note #
Foot Sw2 Percussion Velocity
Modulation Wheel Assign
Initial Touch Sw
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
MIDI Transmit Clock
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
MIDI Receive transpose
MIDI Sys Ex Transmit
MIDI Sys Ex Receive
MIDI Chord Sys Ex Transmit
MIDI Chord Sys Ex Receive
MIDI Root
Initial Touch Sensitivity
Initial Touch Fixed Velocity
Initial Touch Assign
MIDI Chord Detect
After Touch Sensitivity
After Touch Assign
MIDI MFC10 User Ch
MIDI MFC10 Template No.
MIDI MFC10 Foot Control
MIDI MFC10 SW Control
MIDI Template UserData
MIDI MFC10 On/Off
Multi Pad
MultiPad Bank
o
x
o
x
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
MultiPad
x
x
x
MultiPad Bank Name
MultiPad Chord Match On/Off (Curent
Bank Pad 1~4)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
MIDI MFC10 Template User Data
MultiPad Stop
x
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
UTILITY
MultiPad 1/2/3/4
x
AutoLoad On/Off
Speaker On/Off
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
MultiPad Repeat ON/OFF (Track1~60)
MultiPad Volume
x
MultiPad
MultiPad
MultiPad
MultiPad
MultiPad
MultiPad
Display MIDI Bank Select & Program
Change #
x
x
x
o
o
x
x
x
MultiPad EQ Low
MultiPad EQ High
Metronome Volume For Rec
Poly Count
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
MultiPad Panpot
MultiPad Reverb Depth
MultiPad Chorus Depth
FD Cache
Parameter Lock
Auto Exit Time
Screen Saver Time
Language
Registration Memory
Registration Bank #
Registration Bank Name
Registration Name
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
x
o
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
x
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
PC Keyboard
VIDEO OUT
Voice Set Assign Right1
Voice Set Assign Right2
Voice Set Assign Right3
Voice Set Assign Left
Freeze On/Off
NTSC/PAL
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Background Color
Foreground Color
Size Large/Small
Freeze Group Setting
Other Settings
MIDI
Master Tune
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
x
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
MIDI Local Control
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Metronome On/Off (Play)
Metronome On/Off (Rec)
Metronome Volume
Password
x
MIDI Clock Internal/External (A/B)
MIDI Transmit Ch. 1~32 settings
MIDI Receive Ch. 1~32 settings
MIDI Thru Port
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Line Out
x
Line Out Part
MIDI Template No
Owner Name
Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effect Type List
Effect Type List/Effektartliste/Liste des types d'effet
➀ Reverb Type/Typ Widerhall/Type Reverb
➀ DSP Type/Typ DSP/Type DSP
Reverb
Panel
Order
Effect Name
Type
MSB
Type
LSB
DSP3 DSP4-7 DSP8
Panel Panel Panel
Order Order Order
Effect Name
Type Type
MSB LSB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Hall1
Hall2
Hall3
Hall4
Hall5
Hall M
Hall L
Room1
Room2
Room3
Room4
Room5
Room6
Room7
Room S
Room M
Room L
Stage1
Stage2
Stage3
Stage4
Plate1
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
03
03
03
03
04
04
04
04
16
17
18
19
00
00
16
17
18
01
06
07
16
17
18
19
00
01
02
05
06
07
16
17
00
01
16
17
00
07
00
00
00
00
00
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
-
Hall1
Hall2
01
01
02
02
03
03
66
66
68
21
21
22
05
06
07
08
67
67
72
72
72
00
16
16
17
16
17
17
08
16
00
08
00
16
00
00
00
08
16
17
18
16
00
01
19
18
21
20
21
00
Room1
Room2
Stage1
Stage2
Chorus1
Chorus2
Symphonic1
TempoDelay
TempoEcho
TempoCross
DelayLCR1
DelayLR
9
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Echo
CrossDelay
Flanger1
Flanger2
EP Phaser1
EP Phaser2
EP Phaser3
DualRotSP1 (Dual Rotor Speaker1) 99
DualRotSP2 (Dual Rotor Speaker2) 99
GtTremolo1 (Guitar Tremolo1)
EP Tremolo
EP AutoPan
Plate2
Plate3
-
22
23
24
-
-
-
70
70
71
75
75
GM Plate
WhiteRoom
Tunnel
Canyon
Basement
No Effect
StAmp1 (Stereo Amp Simulator1)
StAmp2 (Stereo Amp Simulator2)
VDstH+TDly
103
(V Distortion Hard + Tempo Delay)
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
VDstS+TDly
(V Distortion Soft + Tempo Delay)
V_DstH+Dly
(V Distortion Hard + Delay)
V_DstS+Dly
(V Distortion Soft + Delay)
Dst+TDly
(Distortion + Tempo Delay)
Dst+2RotSP
(Distortion + 2way Rotary Speaker)
OD+2RotSP
(Overdrive + 2way Rotary Speaker)
Amp+2RotSP
(Amp Simulator + 2way Rotary
Speaker)
HmEnhance1
(Harmonic Enhancer1)
PitchChg1 (Pitch Change1)
ClaviTcWah (Clavi Touch Wah)
EP TcWah (EP Touch Wah)
AutoWah1
TcWah+Dst1
(Touch Wah + Distortion1)
AtWah+Dst1
(Auto Wah + Distortion1)
WhDst+TDly
(Wah + Distortion + Tempo Delay)
WhDst+Dly1
(Wah + Distortion + Delay1)
Hall3
Hall4
Hall5
Hall M
Hall L
103
98
01
01
03
00
01
02
03
➀ Chorus Type/Typ Chor/Type Chorus
Chorus
Panel
Order
Effect Name
Type
MSB
Type
LSB
98
100
86
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Chorus1
Chorus2
Chorus3
Chorus4
Chorus5
Chorus6
Chorus7
Chorus8
GM Chorus1
GM Chorus2
GM Chorus3
GM Chorus4
FB Chorus
Celeste1
Celeste2
Flanger1
Flanger2
Flanger3
66
66
66
66
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
66
66
67
67
67
67
67
67
68
68
72
87
17
08
16
01
02
00
01
08
03
04
05
06
07
00
02
08
16
17
01
00
07
16
00
00
00
86
86
37
37
25
81
16
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
38
39
40
41
42
38
39
40
41
42
-
-
-
26
-
80
82
82
78
82
16
18
19
16
16
43
44
45
43
44
45
-
-
-
78
102
97
17
00
16
Flanger4
Flanger5
GM Flanger
Symphonic1
Synphonic2
Phaser1
EnsDetune
(Ensemble
Detune)
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
27
28
29
-
01
01
01
01
01
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
03
03
17
18
01
06
07
18
19
00
01
02
05
06
07
00
01
-
30
31
32
33
34
-
-
-
35
36
Room3
Room4
Room5
Room6
Room7
Room S
Room M
Room L
Stage3
Stage4
26
No Effect
00
00
220 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effect Type List/Effektartliste/Liste des types d'effet
DSP3 DSP4-7 DSP8
Panel Panel Panel
Order Order Order
Effect Name
Type Type
MSB LSB
DSP3 DSP4-7 DSP8
Panel Panel Panel
Order Order Order
Effect Name
Type Type
MSB LSB
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
37
38
39
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Plate1
Plate2
Plate3
GM Plate
ER1
04
04
04
04
09
09
10
11
16
17
18
19
20
20
20
66
66
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
66
66
68
87
05
67
67
67
67
72
72
86
16
17
00
07
00
01
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
01
02
16
01
02
00
01
08
07
03
04
05
06
00
02
00
00
00
17
01
00
07
00
08
00
127
128
129
130
131
127
128
129
130
131
-
-
-
-
-
OD+TDly
(Overdrive + Tempo Delay)
CmpDstDly1
(Compressor + Distortion + Delay1)
CmpDstDly2
(Compressor + Distortion + Delay2)
CmpODDly1
(Compressor + Overdrive + Delay1)
CmpODDly2
(Compressor + Overdrive + Delay2)
Dst+Delay1 (Distortion + Delay1)
Dst+Delay2 (Distortion + Delay2)
OD+Delay1 (Overdrive + Delay1)
OD+Delay2 (Overdrive + Delay2)
Dst+RotSP
(Distortion + Rotary Speaker)
OD+RotSP
(Overdrive + Rotary Speaker)
100
96
96
96
96
01
16
00
17
01
ER2
GateReverb
ReversGate
WhiteRoom
Tunnel
132
133
134
135
136
132
133
134
135
136
-
-
-
-
-
95
95
95
95
69
16
00
17
01
01
-
-
Canyon
Basement
Karaoke1
Karaoke2
Karaoke3
Chorus3
Chorus4
Chorus5
Chorus6
Chorus7
Chorus8
FB Chorus
GM Chorus1
GM Chorus2
GM Chorus3
GM Chorus4
Celeste1
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
-
-
-
-
-
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
-
137
138
137
138
-
-
69
69
02
03
Amp+RotSP
(Amp Simulator + Rotary Speaker)
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
Compressor
NoiseGate
EQDisco
EQTel
3BandEQ
2BandEQ
HmEnhance2
(Harmonic Enhancer2)
VoicCancel (Voice Cancel)
Ambience
Lo-Fi
PitchChg2 (Pitch Change2)
PitchChg3 (Pitch Change3)
AutoWah2
AtWah+Dst2
(Auto Wah + Distortion2)
AtWah+OD1
(Auto Wah + Overdrive1)
AtWah+OD2
(Auto Wah + Overdrive2)
TouchWah1
TouchWah2
TcWah+Dst2
(Touch Wah + Distortion2)
TcWah+OD1
(Touch Wah + Overdrive1)
TcWah+OD2
(Touch Wah + Overdrive2)
WhDst+Dly2
(Wah + Distortion + Delay2)
Wh+OD+TDly
(Wah + Overdrive + Tempo Delay)
Wh+OD+Dly1
(Wah + Overdrive + Delay1)
Wh+OD+Dly2
(Wah + Overdrive + Delay2)
TalkingMod (Talking Modulation)
83
84
76
76
76
77
81
00
00
16
17
00
00
00
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
-
-
-
-
-
85
88
94
80
80
78
78
00
00
00
00
01
00
01
Celeste2
Synphonic2
EnsDetune (Ensemble Detune)
DelayLCR2
Flanger3
Flanger4
Flanger5
GM Flanger
Phaser1
Phaser2
2wayRotSp
(2way Rotary Speaker)
82
-
153
154
153
154
-
-
78
78
18
02
57
-
-
155
156
157
155
156
157
83
84
-
82
82
82
00
08
01
99
99
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
-
RotarySp1
69
71
71
70
66
69
70
71
70
71
71
71
98
98
75
16
17
18
17
18
00
16
19
00
16
00
20
00
02
18
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
RotarySp2 (Rotary Speaker2)
RotarySp3 (Rotary Speaker3)
RotarySp4
RotarySp5
RotarySp6
Tremolo1
Tremolo2
Tremolo3
AutoPan1
158
159
160
161
162
163
158
159
160
161
162
163
-
-
-
-
-
-
82
82
17
02
00
01
17
01
97
102
97
AutoPan2
GtTremolo2 (Guitar Tremolo2)
V_DistHard (V Distortion Hard)
V_DistSoft (V Distortion Soft)
StDistHard
(Stereo Distortion Hard)
StDistSoft (Stereo Distortion Soft)
StDist (Stereo Distortion)
StOD (Stereo Overdrive)
StAmp3 (Stereo Amp Simulator3)
Comp+Dist1
97
-
-
164
165
166
164
-
165
-
-
85
93
00
64
00
00
00
No Effect
Thru
114
115
116
117
118
114
115
116
117
118
-
-
-
-
-
75
73
74
75
73
19
08
08
08
16
(Compressor + Distortion1)
119
119
-
Comp+Dist2
(Compressor + Distortion2)
73
01
120
121
122
123
124
125
120
121
122
123
124
125
70
71
72
73
74
-
DistHard (Distortion Hard)
DistSoft (Distortion Soft)
DistHvy (Distortion Heavy)
OverDrive
AmpSim (Amp Simulator)
CmpDstTDly
75
75
73
74
75
16
17
00
00
00
00
101
(Compressor + Distortion + Tempo
Delay)
126
126
-
CmpOD+TDly
(Compressor + Overdrive + Tempo
Delay)
101
01
Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effect Parameter List
Effect Parameter List/Effektparameterliste/
EARLY REF1,EARLY REF2(variation, Insertion1-4 block)
MSB = 09
Value
0-5
0-44
0-10
0-127
1-127
0-52
XG Effect Name
TypeMSB (Type LSB)
No.
1
Parameter
Type
Room Size
Diffusion
Initial Delay
Feedback Level
HPF Cutoff
LPF Cutoff
Display
S-H, L-H, Rdm, Rvs, Plt, Spr
0.1~7.0
0~10
0.1mS~200.0mS
-63~+63
See Table
table#6
Control
HALL1,HALL2
ROOM1,ROOM2,ROOM3
STAGE1,STAGE2
MSB = 01
MSB = 02
MSB = 03
MSB = 04
Value
0-69
0-10
0-63
0-52
34-60
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PLATE (reverb, variation, insertion block)
table#5
No.
1
Parameter
Reverb Time
Diffusion
Initial Delay
HPF Cutoff
LPF Cutoff
Display
0.3~30.0s
0~10
0.1mS~99.3mS
Thru~8.0kHz
1.0k~Thru
See Table
table#4
Control
Thru~8.0kHz
1.0k~Thru
table#3
table#3
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
34-60
table#5
table#3
table#3
10 Dry/Wet
11 Liveness
12 Density
13 High Damp
14
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
0~10
0~3
1-127
0-10
0-3
➀
0.1~1.0
1-10
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
0.1mS~99.3mS
1-127
0-63
➀
15
16
11 Rev Delay
12 Density
table#5
0~4 (reverb, variation, insertion 1~4 block) 0-4
GATE REVERB
REVERSE GATE (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
MSB = 10
MSB = 11
Value
0-1
0-44
0-10
0-127
1-127
0-52
0~2 (insertion 5 block)
E63>R ~ E=R ~ E<R63
0.1~1.0
0-2
13 Er/Rev Balance
14 High Damp
15 Feedback Level
16
1-127
1-10
1-127
Parameter
Type
Display
TypeA,TypeB
0.1~7.0
0~10
0.1mS~200.0mS
-63~+63
See Table
table#6
Control
-63~+63
Room Size
Diffusion
Initial Delay
Feedback Level
HPF Cutoff
LPF Cutoff
table#5
DELAY L,C,R (variation, insertion block)
MSB = 05
Value
No.
Parameter
Display
See Table
Control
Thru~8.0kHz
1.0k~Thru
table#3
table#3
1
Lch Delay
0.1~1.4860s (variation block)
0.1~1.4860s (Insertion block)
0.1~1.4860s (variation block)
0.1~1.4860s (Insertion block)
0.1~1.4860s (variation block)
0.1~1.4860s (Insertion block)
0.1~1.4860s (variation block)
0.1~1.4860s (Insertion block)
-63~+63
1-14860
1-14860
1-14860
1-14860
1-14860
1-14860
1-14860
1-14860
1-127
34-60
2
3
4
Rch Delay
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
1-127
➀
Cch Delay
11 Liveness
12 Density
13 High Damp
14
15
16
0~10
0~3
0.1~1.0
0-10
0-3
1-10
Feedback Delay
5
6
7
8
9
Feedback Level
Cch Level
High Damp
0~127
0.1~1.0
0-127
1-10
WHITE ROOM
TUNNEL
MSB = 16
MSB = 17
MSB = 18
MSB = 19
Value
0-69
0-10
0-63
0-52
34-60
0-37
0-73
0-104
0-30
1-127
0-63
0-4
1-127
1-10
1-127
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
1-127
➀
CANYON
11
BASEMENT (reverb, variation, Insertion1-4 block)
12
No.
1
Parameter
Reverb Time
Diffusion
Initial Delay
HPF Cutoff
LPF Cutoff
Width
Heigt
Depth
Wall Vary
Display
0.3~30.0s
0~10
0.1mS~99.3mS
Thru~8.0kHz
1.0k~Thru
0.5~10.2m
0.5~20.2m
0.5~30.2m
0~30
See Table
table#4
Control
13 EQ Low Frequency
14 EQ Low Gain
15 EQ High Frequency
16 EQ High Gain
32Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
4-40
table#3
table#3
52-76
28-58
52-76
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
table#5
table#3
table#3
table#11
table#11
table#11
DELAY L,R (variation, insertion block)
No.
1
MSB = 06
Value
Parameter
Lch Delay
Display
See Table
Control
0.1~1.4860s (variation block)
0.1~1.4860s (Insertion block)
0.1~1.4860s (variation block)
0.1~1.4860s (Insertion block)
0.1~1.4860s (variation block)
0.1~1.4860s (Insertion block)
0.1~1.4860s (variation block)
0.1~1.4860s (Insertion block)
-63~+63
1-14860
1-14860
1-14860
1-14860
1-14860
1-14860
1-14860
1-14860
1-127
2
3
4
Rch Delay
10 Dry/Wet
11 Rev Delay
12 Density
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
0.1mS~99.3mS
0~4
➀
table#5
Feedback Delay 1
Feedback Delay 2
13 Er/Rev Balance
14 High Damp
15 Feedback Level
16
E63>R ~ E=R ~ E<R63
0.1~1.0
-63~+63
5
6
7
8
9
Feedback Level
High Damp
0.1~1.0
1-10
KARAOKE1,2,3 (variation, insertion block)
MSB = 20
Value
0-127
1-127
0-52
No.
Parameter
Display
See Table
table#7
Control
1
Delay Time
Feedback Level
HPF Cutoff
LPF Cutoff
0.1mS~400.0mS
-63~+63
Thru~8.0kHz
1.0k~Thru
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
1-127
➀
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
table#3
table#3
11
12
34-60
13 EQ Low Frequency
14 EQ Low Gain
15 EQ High Frequency
16 EQ High Gain
32Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
4-40
table#3
table#3
52-76
28-58
52-76
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
1-127
➀
ECHO (variation, insertion block)
MSB = 07
Value
No.
Parameter
Display
See Table
Control
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
Lch Delay1
0.1~743.0ms (variation block)
0.1~743.0ms (insertion block)
-63~+63
0.1~743.0ms (variation block)
0.1~743.0ms (insertion block)
-63~+63
1-7430
1-7430
1-127
1-7430
1-7430
1-127
2
3
Lch Feedback Level
Rch Delay1
4
5
6
Rch Feedback Level
High Damp
Lch Delay2
0.1~1.0
1-10
TEMPO DELAY (variation, Insertion block)
TEMPO ECHO (variation, Insertion block)
No.
0.1~743.0ms (variation block)
0.1~743.0ms (insertion block)
0.1~743.0ms (variation block)
0.1~743.0ms (insertion block)
0~127
1-7430
1-7430
1-7430
1-7430
0-127
MSB = 21
Value
0-19
Parameter
Delay Time
Feedback Level
Feedback High Dump
L/R Diffusion
Lag
Display
64th/3 ~ 4thx6
-63 ~ +63
0 ~ 1.0
1(-63ms)~64(0ms)~127(63ms)
1(-63ms)~64(0ms)~127(63ms)
See Table
table#14
Control
7
Rch Delay2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1-127
0-10
1-127
1-127
8
9
Delay2 Level
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
1-127
➀
11
12
13 EQ Low Frequency
14 EQ Low Gain
15 EQ High Frequency
16 EQ High Gain
32Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
4-40
table#3
table#3
52-76
28-58
52-76
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W=63
1-127
➀
11
12
CROSS DELAY (variation, insertion block)
MSB = 08
Value
13 EQ Low Frequency
14 EQ Low Gain
15 EQ High Frequency
16 EQ High Gain
32~2.0kH
4-40
No.
Parameter
Display
See Table
Control
-12 ~ +12dB
500 ~ 16.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
52-76
28-58
52-76
1
L->R Delay
0.1~743.0ms (variation block)
0.1~743.0ms (insertion block)
0.1~743.0ms (variation block)
0.1~743.0ms (insertion block)
-63~+63
1-7430
1-7430
1-7430
1-7430
1-127
2
R->L Delay
TEMPO CROSS (variation, Insertion block)
MSB = 22
Value
0-19
0-19
1-127
0-2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Feedback Level
Input Select
High Damp
No.
Parameter
Display
See Table
table#14
table#14
Control
L,R,L&R
0.1~1.0
0-2
1-10
1
Delay Time L>R
Delay Time R>L
Feedback Level
Input Select
Feedback High Dump
Lag
64th/3 ~ 4thx6
64th/3 ~ 4thx6
-63 ~ +63
L, R, L&R
0 ~ 1.0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0-10
1-127
1(-63ms)~64(0ms)~127(63ms)
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
1-127
➀
11
12
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W=63
1-127
➀
13 EQ Low Frequency
14 EQ Low Gain
15 EQ High Frequency
16 EQ High Gain
32Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
4-40
table#3
table#3
52-76
28-58
52-76
11
12
13 EQ Low Frequency
14 EQ Low Gain
15 EQ High Frequency
16 EQ High Gain
32~2.0kH
4-40
-12 ~ +12dB
500 ~ 16.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
52-76
28-58
52-76
222 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Liste des paramètres d'effet de voix
CHORUS1,2,3,4
MSB = 65
MSB = 66
Value
TREMOLO (variation, insertion block)
MSB = 70
Value
0-127
0-127
0-127
CELESTE1,2,3,4 (chorus, variation, insertion block)
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Parameter
LFO Frequency
AM Depth
Display
0.00Hz~39.7Hz
0~127
See Table
table#1
Control
➀
No.
Parameter
Display
See Table
table#1
Control
1
LFO Frequency
LFO Depth
Feedback Level
Delay Offset
0.00Hz~39.7Hz
0~127
-63~+63
0-127
0-127
1-127
0-127
PM Depth
0~127
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0.0mS~50mS
table#2
table#3
table#3
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
32Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
4-40
table#3
table#3
52-76
28-58
52-76
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
32Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
4-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127
9
10
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
➀
11 EQ Mid Frequency
12 EQ Mid Gain
13 EQ Mid Width
14 LFO Phase Difference
15 Input Mode
16
100Hz~10.0kHz (var/ins1-4 block)
-12~+12dB (var/ins1-4 block)
1.0~12.0 (var/ins1-4 block)
-180~+180deg(resolution=3deg.)
mono/stereo
14-54
52-76
10-120
4-124
0-1
table#3
11 EQ Mid Frequency
12 EQ Mid Gain
13 EQ Mid Width
14
15 Input Mode
16
100Hz~10.0kHz (var/ins1-4 block)
-12~+12dB (var/ins1-4 block)
1.0~12.0 (var/ins1-4 block)
14-54
52-76
10-120
table#3
mono/stereo
0-1
AUTO PAN (variation, insertion block)
MSB = 71
Value
0-127
0-127
0-127
0-5
FLANGER1,2,3 (chorus, variation, insertion block)
MSB = 67
Value
0-127
0-127
1-127
No.
Parameter
Display
See Table
table#1
Control
➀
1
2
3
LFO Frequency
L/R Depth
F/R Depth
0.00Hz~39.7Hz
0~127
0~127
No.
Parameter
Display
See Table
table#1
Control
1
LFO Frequency
LFO Depth
Feedback Level
Delay Offset
0.00Hz~39.7Hz
0~127
-63~+63
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4
PAN Direction
L<->R,L->R,L<-R,Lturn,Rturn,L/R
5
6
7
8
9
10
0.0mS~50mS
0-127
table#2
table#3
table#3
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
32Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
4-40
table#3
table#3
52-76
28-58
52-76
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
32Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
4-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
➀
11 EQ Mid Frequency
12 EQ Mid Gain
13 EQ Mid Width
100Hz~10.0kHz (var/ins1-4 block)
-12~+12dB (var/ins1-4 block)
1.0~12.0 (var/ins1-4 block)
14-54
52-76
10-120
table#3
11 EQ Mid Frequency
12 EQ Mid Gain
13 EQ Mid Width
14 LFO Phase Difference
15
100Hz~10.0kHz (var/ins1-4 block)
-12~+12dB (var/ins1-4 block)
1.0~12.0 (var/ins1-4 block)
14-54
52-76
10-120
4-124
table#3
14
15
16
-180~+180deg(resolution=3deg.)
16
PHASER 1 (chorus, variation, insertion block)
MSB = 72, LSB = 0, 16, 17,18
SYMPHONIC (chorus, variation, insertion block)
MSB = 68
Value
0-127
0-127
0-127
No.
1
Parameter
LFO Frequency
LFO Depth
Phase Shift Offset
Feedback Level
Display
0.00Hz~39.7Hz
0~127
0~127
-63~+63
Value
0-127
0-127
0-127
1-127
See Table
table#1
Control
No.
Parameter
Display
See Table
table#1
Control
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
LFO Frequency
LFO Depth
Delay Offset
0.00Hz~39.7Hz
0~127
0.0mS~50mS
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
table#2
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
32Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
4-40
table#3
table#3
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
32Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
4-40
table#3
table#3
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127
10 Dry/Wet
➀
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
➀
11 Stage
4,5,6 (chorus, insertion5 block)
4~12 (var/ins1-4 block)
mono/stereo
4-6
4-12
0-1
11 EQ Mid Frequency
12 EQ Mid Gain
13 EQ Mid Width
100Hz~10.0kHz (var/ins1-4 block)
-12~+12dB (var/ins1-4 block)
1.0~12.0 (var/ins1-4 block)
14-54
52-76
10-120
table#3
12 Diffusion
13
14
15
16
14
15
16
PHASER 2 (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
MSB = 72, LSB = 8
ROTARY SPEAKER (variation, insertion block)
MSB = 69, LSB = 0, 16
No.
1
Parameter
LFO Frequency
LFO Depth
Phase Shift Offset
Feedback Level
Display
0.00Hz~39.7Hz
0~127
0~127
-63~+63
Value
0-127
0-127
0-127
1-127
See Table
table#1
Control
No.
1
Parameter
LFO Frequency
LFO Depth
Display
0.00Hz~39.7Hz
0~127
Value
0-127
0-127
See Table
table#1
Control
➀
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
32Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
4-40
table#3
table#3
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
32Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
100Hz~10.0kHz (var/ins1-4 block)
4-40
table#3
table#3
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127
14-54
10 Dry/Wet
➀
10 Dry/Wet
11 EQ Mid Frequency
table#3
11 Stage
3,4,5,6
4-6
12
12 EQ Mid Gain
13 EQ Mid Width
-12~+12dB (var/ins1-4 block)
1.0~12.0 (var/ins1-4 block)
52-76
10-120
13 LFO Phase Difference
-180deg~+180deg(resolution=3deg.)
4-124
14
15
16
14
15
16
DISTORTION
OVERDRIVE (variation, insertion block)
MSB = 73, LSB = 0
MSB = 74
DISTORTION+ROTARY SPEAKER (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
OVERDRIVE+ROTARY SPEAKER (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
MSB = 69, LSB = 1
MSB = 69, LSB = 2
No.
1
Parameter
Drive
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
LPF Cutoff
Display
0~127
32Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
1.0k~Thru
0~127
Value
0-127
4-40
52-76
34-60
0-127
See Table
Control
➀
No.
1
Parameter
LFO Frequenct
LFO Depth
Display
0.0~39.7Hz
0~127
Value
0-127
0-127
See Table
Control
➀
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
table#3
table#3
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Output Level
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
32~2.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
500 ~ 16.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W=63
4-40
EQ Mid Frequency
EQ Mid Gain
EQ Mid Width
100Hz~10.0kHz
-12~+12dB
1.0~12.0
14-54
52-76
10-120
1-127
table#3
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
10 Dry/Wet
11 Edge(Clip Curve)
0~127
0-127
mild~sharp
11
12
13
14
15
16
12
13
14 Drive
15 LPF Cuttoff
16 Output Level
0~127
1kHz~Thru
0~127
0-127
34-60
0-127
COMP+DIST (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
MSB = 73, LSB = 1, 16
AMP SIM.+ROTARY SPEAKER (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
MSB = 69, LSB = 3
No.
1
Parameter
Drive
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
LPF Cutoff
Display
0~127
32Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
1.0k~Thru
0~127
Value
0-127
4-40
52-76
34-60
0-127
See Table
Control
➀
No.
1
Parameter
Display
0.0~39.7Hz
0~127
Value
0-127
0-127
0-3
See Table
Control
➀
LFO Frequenct
LFO Depth
AMP Type
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
table#3
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Off,Stack,Combo,Tube
table#3
Output Level
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
32~2.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
500 ~ 16.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W=63
4-40
EQ Mid Frequency
EQ Mid Gain
EQ Mid Width
100Hz~10.0kHz
-12~+12dB
1.0~12.0
14-54
52-76
10-120
1-127
table#3
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
10 Dry/Wet
11 Edge(Clip Curve)
12 Attack
13 Release
14 Threshold
15 Ratio
0~127
0-127
0-19
0-15
79-121
0-7
mild~sharp
table#8
table#9
11
12
13
1ms~40ms
10ms~680ms
-48dB~-6dB
1.0~20.0
14 Drive
15 LPF Cuttoff
16 Output Level
0~127
1kHz~Thru
0~127
0-127
34-60
0-127
table#10
16
Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effect Parameter List/Effektparameterliste/Liste des paramètres d'effet de voix
Effect Parameter List/Effektparameterliste/Liste des paramètres d'effet de voix
STEREO DISTORTION (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
STEREO OVER DRIVE (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
MSB = 73, LSB = 8
MSB = 74, LSB = 8
AUTO WAH+DIST
AUTO WHA+ODRV (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
MSB = 78, LSB = 1, 17
MSB = 78, LSB = 2, 18
No.
1
Parameter
Drive
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
LPF Cuttoff
Output Level
Display
0~127
32~2.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
1kHz~Thru
Value
0-127
4-40
52-76
34-60
0-127
See Table
Control
➀
No.
1
Parameter
LFO Frequency
LFO Depth
Cutoff Frequency Offset
Resonance
Display
0.00Hz~39.7Hz
0~127
0~127
1.0~12.0
Value
0-127
0-127
0-127
10-120
See Table
table#1
Control
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
table#3
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
➀
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
32Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
4-40
table#3
table#3
EQ Mid Frequency
EQ Mid Gain
EQ Mid Width
100 ~ 10.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
1 ~ 12
14-54
52-76
10-120
1-127
table#3
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
10 Dry/Wet
11 Edge
0~127
0-127
11 Drive
0~127
0-127
52-76
52-76
34-60
0-127
12
13
14
15
16
12 EQ Low Gain(distortion)
13 EQ Mid Gain(distortion)
14 LPF Cutoff
15 Output Level
16
-12~+12dB
-12~+12dB
1.0kHz~thru
0~127
table#3
AMP SIMULATOR (variation, insertion block)
MSB = 75, LSB = 0, 16, 17
PITCH CHANGE 1 (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
MSB = 80, LSB = 0, 16
No.
1
Parameter
Drive
AMP Type
LPF Cutoff
Output Level
Display
0~127
Off,Stack,Combo,Tube
1.0k~Thru
0~127
Value
0-127
0-3
34-60
0-127
See Table
Control
➀
No.
1
Parameter
Pitch
Initial Delay
Fine 1
Fine 2
Display
-24~+24
0.1mS~400.0mS
-50~+50
-50~+50
Value
40-88
0-127
14-114
14-114
1-127
See Table
Control
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
table#7
table#3
Feedback Level
-63~+63
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
0~127
1-127
0-127
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
1-127
➀
11 Edge(Clip Curve)
mild~sharp
11 Pan 1
12 Output Level 1
13 Pan 2
14 Output Level 2
15
L63~R63
0~127
L63~R63
0~127
1-127
0-127
1-127
0-127
12
13
14
15
16
16
STEREO AMP SIMULATOR (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
MSB = 75, LSB = 8, 18, 19, 20, 21
PITCH CHANGE 2 (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
MSB = 80, LSB = 1
No.
1
Parameter
Drive
AMP Type
LPF Cuttoff
Output Level
Display
0~127
Off,Stack,Combo,Tube
1kHz~Thru
0~127
Value
0-127
0-3
34-60
0-127
See Table
Control
➀
No.
1
Parameter
Pitch
Initial Delay
Fine 1
Fine 2
Display
-24~+24
0.1mS~400.0mS
-50~+50cent
-50~+50cent
-63~+63
Value
40-88
0-127
14-114
14-114
1-127
See Table
Control
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
table#7
Feedback Level
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
0~127
1-127
0-127
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
1-127
➀
11 Edge
11 Pan 1
12 Output Level 1
13 Pan 2
14 Output Level 2
15
L63~R63
0~127
L63~R63
0~127
1-127
0-127
1-127
0-127
12
13
14
15
16
16
3BAND EQ(MONO) (variation, insertion block)
MSB = 76
Value
52-76
14-54
52-76
10-120
52-76
8-40
HARMONIC ENHANCER (variation, Insertion block)
MSB = 81
Value
28-58
0-127
0-127
No.
Parameter
Display
See Table
table#3
Control
No.
1
2
3
Parameter
HPF Cutoff
Drive
Display
500Hz~16.0kHz
0~127
See Table
Control
1
2
3
EQ Low Gain
EQ Mid Frequency
EQ Mid Gain
-12~+12dB
100Hz~10.0kHz
-12~+12dB
1.0~12.0
Mix Level
0~127
4
EQ Mid Width
4
5
6
7
5
6
7
EQ High Gain
EQ Low Frequency
EQ High Frequency
-12~+12dB
50Hz~2.0kHz
500Hz~16.0kHz
table#3
table#3
28-58
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
12
13
14
11
12
13
14
15
16
15 Input Mode
16
mono/stereo
0-1
2BAND EQ(STEREO) (variation, insertion block)
MSB = 77
Value
4-40
52-76
28-58
TOUCH WAH 1 (variation, insertion block)
TOUCH WAH+DIST (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
MSB = 82, LSB = 0
MSB = 82, LSB = 1, 16
No.
Parameter
Display
See Table
table#3
Control
1
2
3
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
32Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
No.
Parameter
Display
Value
0-127
0-127
10-120
See Table
Control
1
Sensitive
0~127
table#3
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Cutoff Frequency Offset
Resonance
0~127
1.0~12.0
➀
4
52-76
5
6
7
8
9
10
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
32Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
4-40
table#3
table#3
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
11
12
13
14
15
16
11 Drive
0~127 (var/ins1-4 block)
0-127
12
13
14
15
16
AUTO WAH (variation, insertion block)
MSB = 78, LSB = 0, 16
No.
1
Parameter
LFO Frequency
LFO Depth
Cutoff Frequency Offset
Resonance
Display
0.00Hz~39.7Hz
0~127
0~127
1.0~12.0
Value
0-127
0-127
0-127
10-120
See Table
table#1
Control
TOUCH WAH 2 (variation, insertion block)
TOUCH WAH+ODRV (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
MSB = 82, LSB = 8
MSB = 82, LSB = 2, 17, 18, 19
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
No.
Parameter
Display
Value
0-127
0-127
10-120
See Table
Control
➀
1
Sensitive
0~127
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Cutoff Frequency Offset
Resonance
0~127
1.0~12.0
➀
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
32Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
4-40
table#3
table#3
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
32Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
4-40
table#3
table#3
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127
10 Dry/Wet
11 Drive
0~127 (var/ins1-4 block)
0-127
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
12
13
14
15
16
11 Drive
0~127 (var/ins1-4 block)
0-127
52-76
52-76
34-60
0-127
52-67
12 EQ Low Gain(distortion)
13 EQ Mid Gain(distortion)
14 LPF Cutoff
15 Output Level
16 Release
-12~+12dB (var/ins1-4 block)
-12~+12dB(var/ins1-4 block)
1.0kHz~thru(var/ins1-4 block)
0~127(var/ins1-4 block)
table#3
10~680mS(var/ins1-4 block)
table#12
224 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effect Parameter List/Effektparameterliste/Liste des paramètres d'effet de voix
COMPRESSOR (variation, insertion block)
MSB = 83
Value
0-19
0-15
79-121
0-7
ENSEMBLE DETUNE (chorus, variation, insertion block)
MSB = 87
Value
14-114
0-127
No.
Parameter
Display
See Table
table#8
table#9
Control
Control
Control
No.
Parameter
Display
See Table
Control
1
2
3
4
5
Attack
1~40ms
10~680ms
-48~-6dB
1.0~20.0
0~127
1
Detune
Lch Init Delay
Rch Init Delay
-50~+50cent
0.0mS~50mS
0.0mS~50mS
Release
Threshold
Ratio
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
table#2
table#2
0-127
table#10
Output Level
0-127
6
7
8
9
10
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
1-127
➀
11
12
13
14
15
16
11 EQ Low Frequency
12 EQ Low Gain
13 EQ High Frequency
14 EQ High Gain
15
32Hz~2.0kHz (variation, insertion block)
-12~+12dB (variation, insertion block)
500Hz~16.0kHz (variation, insertion block) 28-58
4-40
52-76
table#3
table#3
-12~+12dB (variation, insertion block)
52-76
16
NOISE GATE (variation, insertion block)
MSB = 84
Value
0-19
0-15
55-97
0-127
AMBIENCE (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
MSB = 88
Value
0-127
No.
Parameter
Display
See Table
table#8
table#9
No. Parameter
Display
See Table
table#2
Control
1
2
3
Attack
Release
Threshold
Output Level
1~40ms
10~680ms
-72~-30dB
0~127
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Delay Time
Output Phase
0.0mS~50mS
normal/invers
0-1
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
32Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
4-40
table#3
table#3
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
➀
11
12
13
14
15
16
11
12
13
14
15
16
VOICE CANCEL (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
MSB = 85
Value
TALKING MODULATION (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
MSB = 93
Value
0-4
1-62
0-127
0-127
No.
Parameter
Display
See Table
No.
1
2
3
4
Parameter
Vowel
Move speed
Drive
Output Level
Display
a,i,u,e,o
1~62
0~127
0~127
See Table
Control
1
2
3
➀
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11 Low Adjust
12 High Adjust
13
14
15
16
0~26
0~26
0-26
0-26
11
12
13
14
15
16
2WAY ROTARY SPEAKER (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
MSB = 86, LSB = 0
LO-FI (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
MSB = 94
Value
0-127
1-127
0-18
10-60
0-5
10-120
0-6
No.
1
2
3
4
Parameter
Rotor Speed
Drive Low
Drive High
Low/High
Display
0.0Hz~39.7Hz
0~127
0~127
L63>H ~ L=H ~ L<H63
Value
0-127
0-127
0-127
1-127
See Table
table#1
Control
➀
No.
Parameter
Display
See Table
table#13
Control
1
Sampling Freq Control
Word Length
Output Gain
LPF Cutoff
Filter Type
LPF Resonance
Bit Assign
44.1kHz-345Hz
1~127
-6~+12dB
63Hz~Thru
Thru,PowerBass,Radio,Tel,Clean,Low
1.0~12.0
0~6
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
table#3
5
6
7
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
32Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
4-40
table#3
table#3
52-76
28-58
52-76
8
9
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
Emphasis
Off/On
0-1
10
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
1-127
➀
11 Crossover Frequency
12 Mic L-R Angle
100Hz~10.0kHz
0deg~180deg(resolution=3deg.)
14-54
0-60
table#3
11
12
13
14
15
16
13
14
15 Input Mode
16
mono/stereo
DIST+2WAY ROTARY SPEAKER (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
OD+2WAY ROTARY SPEAKER (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
MSB = 86, LSB = 1
MSB = 86, LSB = 2
DIST+DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
OVERDRIVE+DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
MSB = 95
Value
1-14860
1-14860
1-14860
1-127
0-127
0-127
0-127
52-76
No.
Parameter
Display
Value
0-127
0-127
0-127
1-127
See Table
Control
➀
No.
Parameter
Display
See Table
Control
1
2
3
Rotor Speed
Drive Low
Drive High
0.0~39.7Hz
0~127
0-127
1
Lch Delay Time
Rch Delay Time
Delay Feedback Time
Delay Feedback Level
Delay Mix
0.1~1.4860s
0.1~1.4860s
0.1~1.4860s
-63~+63
0~127
0~127
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4
Low/High Balance
L63>H ~ L=H ~ L<H=63
5
6
7
8
9
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
32~2.0kHz
4-40
Dist Drive
-12 ~ +12dB
500 ~ 16.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
52-76
28-58
52-76
Dist Output Level
Dist EQ Low Gain
Dist EQ Mid Gain
0~127
-12~+12dB
-12~+12dB
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
52-76
1-127
10
10 Dry/Wet
➀
11 Crossover Frequency
12 Mic L-R Angle
13
14 Drive
15 LPF Cuttoff
16 Output Level
100 ~ 10.0kHz
0 ~ 180deg
14-54
0-60
11
12
13
14
15
16
0-127
34-60
0-127
1kHz~Thru
AMP SIM.+2WAY ROTARY SP (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
MSB = 86, LSB = 3
COMP+DIST+DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Parameter
Rotor Speed
Drive Low
Drive High
Low/High Balance
Display
0.0~39.7Hz
0~127
0~127
L63>H ~ L=H ~ L<H=63
Value
0-127
0-127
0-127
1-127
See Table
Control
➀
COMP+OVERDRIVE+DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
MSB = 96
Value
1-14860
1-127
0-127
0-127
0-127
52-76
52-76
No.
Parameter
Display
See Table
Control
1
Delay Time
Delay Feedback Level
Delay Mix
0.1~1.4860s
-63~+63
0~127
0~127
0~127
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Dist Drive
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
32~2.0kHz
4-40
Dist Output Level
Dist EQ Low Gain
Dist EQ Mid Gain
-12 ~ +12dB
500 ~ 16.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
52-76
28-58
52-76
-12~+12dB
-12~+12dB
9
10
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
1-127
➀
11 Crossover Frequency
12 Mic L-R Angle
13 AMP Type
14 Drive
15 LPF Cuttoff
16 Output Level
100 ~ 10.0kHz
0 ~ 180deg
Off,Stack,Combo,Tube(AMPSIM only)
14-54
0-60
0-3
0-127
34-60
0-127
11 Comp. Attack
12 Comp. Release
13 Comp. Threshold
14 Comp. Ratio
15
1ms~40ms
10ms~680ms
-48dB~-6dB
1.0~20.0
0-19
0-15
79-121
0-7
table#8
table#9
1kHz~Thru
table#10
16
Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effect Parameter List/Effektparameterliste/Liste des paramètres d'effet de voix
WAH+DIST+DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
WAH+OVERDRIVE+DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
COMP+DIST+TEMPO DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
COMP+OD+TEMPO DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
MSB = 97
Value
MSB = 101
Value
0-19
No.
Parameter
Display
See Table
Control
No.
Parameter
Display
See Table
table#14
Control
1
Delay Time
Delay Feedback Level
Delay Mix
0.1~1.4860s
-63~+63
0~127
0~127
0~127
1-14860
1-127
0-127
0-127
0-127
1
Delay Time
Delay Feedback Level
Delay Mix
64th/3 ~ 4thx6
-63 ~ +63
0 ~ 127
0 ~ 127
0 ~ 127
-12 ~ +12dB
-12 ~ +12dB
1(-63ms)~64(0ms)~127(63ms)
1(-63ms)~64(0ms)~127(63ms)
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W=63
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1-127
0-127
0-127
0-127
52-76
52-76
1-127
1-127
1-127
Dist Drive
Dist Drive
Dist Output Level
Dist EQ Low Gain
Dist EQ Mid Gain
Dist Output Level
Dist EQ Low Gain
Dist EQ High Gain
L/R Diffusion
Lag
-12~+12dB
-12~+12dB
52-76
52-76
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
1-127
➀
10 Dry/Wet
➀
11 Wah Sensitive
12 Wah Cutoff Freq Offset
13 Wah Resonance
14 Wah Release
15
0~127
0~127
1.0~12.0
10~680ms
0-127
0-127
10-120
52-67
11 Comp. Attack
12 Comp. Release
13 Comp. Threshold
14 Comp. Ratio
15
1ms ~ 40ms
10ms ~ 680ms
-48dB ~ -6dB
1.0 ~ 20.0
0-19
0-15
79-121
0-7
table#12
16
16
V DISTORTION HARD (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
V DISTORTION SOFT (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
MSB = 98, LSB = 0
MSB = 98, LSB = 2
WAH+DIST+TEMPO DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
WAH+OD+TEMPO DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
MSB = 102
Value
0-19
No.
1
2
3
Parameter
Overdrive
Device
Display
0~100%
Value
0-100
0-4
See Table
Control
No.
Parameter
Display
See Table
table#14
Control
1
Delay Time
Delay Feedback Level
Delay Mix
64th/3 ~ 4thx6
-63 ~ +63
0 ~ 127
0 ~ 127
0 ~ 127
-12 ~ +12dB
-12 ~ +12dB
1(-63ms)~64(0ms)~127(63ms)
1(-63ms)~64(0ms)~127(63ms)
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W=63
Transister/Vintage Tube/
Dist1/Dist2/Fuzz
Flat/Stack/Combo/Twin/
Radio/Megaphone
0~20
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1-127
0-127
0-127
0-127
52-76
52-76
1-127
1-127
1-127
Speaker
0-5
Dist Drive
Dist Output Level
Dist EQ Low Gain
Dist EQ High Gain
L/R Diffusion
Lag
4
5
6
7
8
9
Presence
0-20
0-100
Output Level
0~100%
10 Dry/Wet
➀
10 Dry/Wet Balance
D63>W~D=W~D<W63
1-127
➀
11 Wah Sensitive
12 Wah Cutoff Freq Offset
13 Wah Resonance
14 Wah Release
15
0 ~ 127
0 ~ 127
1.0 ~ 12.0
10 ~ 680mS
0-127
0-127
10-120
52-67
11
12
13
14
15
16
16
V DIST HARD+TEMPO DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
V DIST SOFT+TEMPO DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
MSB = 103
Value
0-100
V DISTORTION HARD+DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
V DISTORTION SOFT+DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
MSB = 98, LSB = 1
MSB = 98, LSB = 3
Value
0-100
0-4
No.
1
2
3
Parameter
Overdrive
Device
Display
0~100%
See Table
Control
No.
1
2
3
Parameter
Overdrive
Device
Display
0~100%
See Table
Control
Transister/Vintage Tube/
Dist1/Dist2/Fuzz
Flat/Stack/Combo/Twin/
Radio/Megaphone
0~20
0~100%
64th/3 ~ 4thx6
-63 ~ +63
0-4
Transister/Vintage Tube/
Dist1/Dist2/Fuzz
Flat/Stack/Combo/Twin/
Radio/Megaphone
0~20
Speaker
0-5
Speaker
0-5
4
5
6
7
8
9
Presence
0-20
0-100
0-19
1-127
1-127
1-127
1-127
Output Level
Delay Time
Delay Feedback Level
L/R Diffusion
Lag
4
5
6
7
8
9
Presence
Output Level
Delay Time L
Delay Time R
Delay Feedback Time
Delay Feedback Level
0-20
0-100
1-14860
1-14860
1-14860
1-127
table#14
0~100%
0.1ms~1.4860s
0.1ms~1.4860s
0.1ms~1.4860s
-63~+63
1(-63ms)~64(0ms)~127(63ms)
1(-63ms)~64(0ms)~127(63ms)
D63>W~D=W~D<W63
10 Dry/Wet Balance
➀
10 Dry/Wet Balance
D63>W~D=W~D<W63
1-127
➀
11 Delay Mix
0~127
0-127
12
13
14
15
16
11 Delay Mix
0~127
0-127
12
13
14
15
16
NO EFFECT (reverb, chorus, variation block)
No. Parameter Display
MSB = 0
Value
See Table
Control
DUAL ROTOR SPEAKER1,2 (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
MSB = 99
Value
0-63
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
No.
Parameter
Display
See Table
table#1
table#1
table#1
table#1
Control
1
2
3
4
5
Rotor Speed Slow
Horn Speed Slow
Rotor Speed Fast
Horn Speed Fast
Slow-Fast Time of R
Slow-Fast Time of H
Drive Low
0.0~2.65Hz
0.0~2.65Hz
2.69~39.7Hz
2.69~39.7Hz
0~127
0-63
64-127
64-127
0-127
0-127
0-127
0-127
1-127
6
7
0~127
0~127
8
Drive High
0~127
10
9
Low/High Balance
L63>H ~ L=H ~ L<H=63
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
11 EQ Low Frequency
12 EQ Low Gain
13 EQ High Frequency
14 EQ High Gain
15 Mic L-R Angle
16 Speed Control
32~2.0kH
4-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
0-60
0/1
table#3
table#3
-12 ~ +12dB
500 ~ 16.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
0 ~ 180deg
Slow/Fast
➀
THRU (variation, insertion block)
No. Parameter Display
MSB = 64
Value
See Table
Control
DIST+TEMPO DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
1
OVERDRIVE+TEMPO DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block)
MSB = 100
Value
0-19
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
No.
Parameter
Display
See Table
table#14
Control
1
Delay Time
Delay Feedback Level
Delay Mix
64th/3 ~ 4thx6
-63 ~ +63
0 ~ 127
0 ~ 127
0 ~ 127
-12 ~ +12dB
-12 ~ +12dB
1(-63ms)~64(0ms)~127(63ms)
1(-63ms)~64(0ms)~127(63ms)
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W=63
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1-127
0-127
0-127
0-127
52-76
52-76
1-127
1-127
1-127
Dist Drive
Dist Output Level
Dist EQ Low Gain
Dist EQ High Gain
L/R Diffusion
Lag
11
12
13
14
15
16
10 Dry/Wet
➀
11
12
13
14
15
16
* Parameter 10 Dry/Wet only affects insertion type effects.
226 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effect Data Value Assign Table
Effect Data Value Assign Table/Effektdatenwert-
Zuord-
Zuordnungstabelle/Table d'affectation des valeurs
pour les données d'effets
Table #4
Table #12
Wah Release Time
Data Value
Table #7
Delay Time(400.0ms)
Table #1
Reverb time
LFO Frequency
Data Value Data Value Data Value
Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value
Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
9.5
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
16.0
64
65
66
67
68
69
17.0
18.0
19.0
20.0
25.0
30.0
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
10.0
15.0
25.0
35.0
45.0
55.0
65.0
75.0
85.0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0.1
3.2
6.4
32 100.9
33 104.0
34 107.2
35 110.3
36 113.5
37 116.6
38 119.8
39 122.9
40 126.1
41 129.2
42 132.4
43 135.5
44 138.6
45 141.8
46 144.9
47 148.1
48 151.2
49 154.4
50 157.5
51 160.7
52 163.8
53 167.0
54 170.1
55 173.3
56 176.4
57 179.6
58 182.7
59 185.9
60 189.0
61 192.2
62 195.3
63 198.5
64 201.6
65 204.8
66 207.9
67 211.1
96 302.4
97 305.5
98 308.7
99 311.8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0.00
0.04
0.08
0.13
0.17
0.21
0.25
0.29
0.34
0.38
0.42
0.46
0.51
0.55
0.59
0.63
0.67
0.72
0.76
0.80
0.84
0.88
0.93
0.97
1.01
1.05
1.09
1.14
1.18
1.22
1.26
1.30
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
1.35
1.39
1.43
1.47
1.51
1.56
1.60
1.64
1.68
1.72
1.77
1.81
1.85
1.89
1.94
1.98
2.02
2.06
2.10
2.15
2.19
2.23
2.27
2.31
2.36
2.40
2.44
2.48
2.52
2.57
2.61
2.65
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
2.69
2.78
2.86
2.94
96
97
98
99
8.41
8.75
9.08
9.42
9.76
10.1
10.8
11.4
12.1
12.8
13.5
14.1
14.8
15.5
16.2
16.8
17.5
18.2
19.5
20.9
22.2
23.6
24.9
26.2
27.6
28.9
30.3
31.6
33.0
34.3
37.0
39.7
9.5
12.7
15.8
19.0
22.1
25.3
28.4
31.6
34.7
37.9
41.0
44.2
47.3
50.5
53.6
56.8
59.9
63.1
66.2
69.4
72.5
75.7
78.8
82.0
85.1
88.3
91.4
94.6
97.7
68 214.2 100 315.0
69 217.4 101 318.1
70 220.5 102 321.3
71 223.7 103 324.4
72 226.8 104 327.6
73 230.0 105 330.7
74 233.1 106 333.9
75 236.3 107 337.0
76 239.4 108 340.2
77 242.6 109 343.3
78 245.7 110 346.5
79 248.9 111 349.6
80 252.0 112 352.8
81 255.2 113 355.9
82 258.3 114 359.1
83 261.5 115 362.2
84 264.6 116 365.4
85 267.7 117 368.5
86 270.9 118 371.7
87 274.0 119 374.8
88 277.2 120 378.0
89 280.3 121 381.1
90 283.5 122 384.3
91 286.6 123 387.4
92 289.8 124 390.6
93 292.9 125 393.7
94 296.1 126 396.9
95 299.2 127 400.0
3.03 100
3.11 101
3.20 102
3.28 103
3.37 104
3.45 105
3.53 106
3.62 107
3.70 108
3.87 109
4.04 110
4.21 111
4.37 112
4.54 113
4.71 114
4.88 115
5.05 116
5.22 117
5.38 118
5.55 119
5.72 120
6.06 121
6.39 122
6.73 123
7.07 124
7.40 125
7.74 126
8.08 127
9
61 100.0
62 115.0
63 140.0
64 170.0
65 230.0
66 340.0
67 680.0
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Table #13
Table #5
Delay Time(200.0ms)
Table #8
Table #9
Table #2
Modulation Delay Offset
Sampling Freq Control
Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value
Compressor
Attack Time
Data Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Compressor
Release Time
Data Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value
Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
44.1K
22.1K
14.7K
11.0K
8.8K
7.4K
6.3K
5.5K
4.9K
4.5K
4.0K
3.7K
3.4K
3.2K
2.9K
2.8K
2.6K
2.5K
2.3K
2.2K
2.1K
2.0K
32 1.34K
33 1.30K
34 1.26K
35 1.23K
36 1.19K
37 1.16K
38 1.13K
39 1.10K
40 1.08K
41 1.05K
42 1.03K
43 1.00K
44 980.0
45 959.0
46 938.0
47 919.0
48 900.0
49 882.0
50 865.0
51 848.0
52 832.0
53 817.0
54 802.0
55 788.0
56 774.0
57 760.0
58 747.0
59 735.0
60 723.0
61 711.0
62 700.0
63 689.0
64 678.0
65 668.0
66 658.0
67 649.0
96 455.0
97 450.0
98 445.0
99 441.0
0
1
0.1
1.7
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
50.5
52.0
53.6
55.2
56.8
58.3
59.9
61.5
63.1
64.6
66.2
67.8
69.4
70.9
72.5
74.1
75.7
77.2
78.8
80.4
81.9
83.5
85.1
86.7
88.2
89.8
91.4
93.0
94.5
96.1
97.7
99.3
64 100.8
65 102.4
66 104.0
67 105.6
96 151.2
97 152.8
98 154.4
99 155.9
0
1
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
3.0
3.1
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
6.0
6.1
6.2
6.3
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
96
97
98
99
9.6
9.7
9.8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
23
26
30
35
40
10
15
25
35
45
55
65
75
85
2
3.2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3
4.8
9.9
68 639.0 100 437.0
69 630.0 101 432.0
70 621.0 102 428.0
71 613.0 103 424.0
72 604.0 104 420.0
73 596.0 105 416.0
74 588.0 106 412.0
75 580.0 107 408.0
76 573.0 108 405.0
77 565.0 109 401.0
78 558.0 110 397.0
79 551.0 111 394.0
80 544.0 112 390.0
81 538.0 113 387.0
82 531.0 114 383.0
83 525.0 115 380.0
84 519.0 116 377.0
85 513.0 117 374.0
86 507.0 118 371.0
87 501.0 119 368.0
88 496.0 120 364.0
89 490.0 121 361.0
90 485.0 122 359.0
91 479.0 123 356.0
92 474.0 124 353.0
93 469.0 125 350.0
94 464.0 126 347.0
95 459.0 127 345.0
4
6.4
68 107.1 100 157.5
69 108.7 101 159.1
70 110.3 102 160.6
71 111.9 103 162.2
72 113.4 104 163.8
73 115.0 105 165.4
74 116.6 106 166.9
75 118.2 107 168.5
76 119.7 108 170.1
77 121.3 109 171.7
78 122.9 110 173.2
79 124.4 111 174.8
80 126.0 112 176.4
81 127.6 113 178.0
82 129.2 114 179.5
83 130.7 115 181.1
84 132.3 116 182.7
85 133.9 117 184.3
86 135.5 118 185.8
87 137.0 119 187.4
88 138.6 120 189.0
89 140.2 121 190.6
90 141.8 122 192.1
91 143.3 123 193.7
92 144.9 124 195.3
93 146.5 125 196.9
94 148.1 126 198.4
95 149.6 127 200.0
6.8 100
6.9 101
7.0 102
7.1 103
7.2 104
7.3 105
7.4 106
7.5 107
7.6 108
7.7 109
7.8 110
7.9 111
8.0 112
8.1 113
8.2 114
8.3 115
8.4 116
8.5 117
8.6 118
8.7 119
8.8 120
8.9 121
9.0 122
9.1 123
9.2 124
9.3 125
9.4 126
9.5 127
10.0
11.1
12.2
13.3
14.4
15.5
17.1
18.6
20.2
21.8
23.3
24.9
26.5
28.0
29.6
31.2
32.8
34.3
35.9
37.5
39.0
40.6
42.2
43.7
45.3
46.9
48.4
50.0
5
8.0
6
9.5
7
8
9
11.1
12.7
14.3
15.8
17.4
19.0
20.6
22.1
23.7
25.3
26.9
28.4
30.0
31.6
33.2
34.7
36.3
37.9
39.5
41.0
42.6
44.2
45.7
47.3
48.9
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
9
100
115
140
170
230
340
680
10
11
12
13
14
15
Table #10
Compressor Ratio
Data Value
22 1.92K
23 1.84K
24 1.76K
25 1.70K
26 1.63K
27 1.58K
28 1.52K
29 1.47K
30 1.42K
31 1.38K
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
5.0
7.0
10.0
20.0
Table #11
Table #14
Tempo Delay
Data Value
Table #6
Room Size
Table #3
EQ Frequency
Reverb Width;Depth;Height
Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value
Data Value
32 4thX19
33 4thX20
34 4thX21
35 4thX22
36 4thX23
37 4thX24
38 4thX25
39 4thX26
40 4thX27
41 4thX28
42 4thX29
43 4thX30
44 4thX31
45 4thX32
46 4thX33
47 4thX34
48 4thX35
49 4thX36
50 4thX37
51 4thX38
52 4thX39
53 4thX40
54 4thX41
55 4thX42
56 4thX43
57 4thX44
58 4thX45
59 4thX46
60 4thX47
61 4thX48
62 4thX49
63 4thX50
Data Value
64 4thX51
65 4thX52
66 4thX53
67 4thX54
68 4thX55
69 4thX56
70 4thX57
71 4thX58
72 4thX59
73 4thX60
74 4thX61
75 4thX62
76 4thX63
77 4thX64
Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value
Data Value
Data Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0.5
0.8
1.0
1.3
1.5
1.8
2.0
2.3
2.6
2.8
3.1
3.3
3.6
3.9
4.1
4.4
4.6
4.9
5.2
5.4
5.7
5.9
6.2
6.5
6.7
7.0
7.2
7.5
7.8
8.0
8.3
8.6
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
8.8
9.1
9.4
9.6
9.9
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
17.6
17.9
18.2
18.5
18.8 100
19.1 101
19.4 102
19.7 103
20.0 104
20.2
20.5
20.8
21.1
21.4
21.7
22.0
22.4
22.7
23.0
23.3
23.6
23.9
24.2
24.5
24.9
25.2
25.5
25.8
26.1
26.5
26.8
27.1
96
97
98
99
27.5
27.8
28.1
28.5
28.8
29.2
29.5
29.9
30.2
0
1
2
64th/3
64th.
32th
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0.1
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.5
1.7
1.8
2.0
2.1
2.3
2.5
2.6
2.8
2.9
3.1
3.2
3.4
3.5
3.7
3.9
4.0
4.2
4.3
4.5
4.6
4.8
5.0
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
5.1
5.3
5.4
5.6
5.7
5.9
6.1
6.2
6.4
6.5
6.7
6.8
7.0
7.2
7.3
7.5
7.6
7.8
7.9
8.1
8.2
8.4
8.6
8.7
8.9
9.0
9.2
9.3
9.5
9.7
9.8
10.0
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
10.1
10.3
10.4
10.6
96
97
98
99
15.1
15.3
15.5
15.6
15.8
15.9
16.1
16.2
16.4
16.6
16.7
16.9
17.0
17.2
17.3
17.5
17.6
17.8
18.0
18.1
18.3
18.4
18.6
18.7
18.9
19.1
19.2
19.4
19.5
19.7
19.8
20.0
0
1
2
THRU(0)
32
33
800
900
22
25
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
1.0k
1.1k
1.2k
1.4k
1.6k
1.8k
2.0k
2.2k
2.5k
2.8k
3.2k
3.6k
4.0k
4.5k
5.0k
5.6k
6.3k
7.0k
8.0k
9.0k
10.0k
11.0k
12.0k
14.0k
16.0k
18.0k
3
4
5
32th/3
32th.
16th
3
28
10.8 100
10.9 101
11.1 102
11.2 103
11.4 104
11.5 105
11.7 106
11.9 107
12.0 108
12.2 109
12.3 110
12.5 111
12.6 112
12.8 113
12.9 114
13.1 115
13.3 116
13.4 117
13.6 118
13.7 119
13.9 120
14.0 121
14.2 122
14.4 123
14.5 124
14.7 125
14.8 126
15.0 127
4
32
10.2
10.4
10.7
11.0
11.2
11.5
11.8
12.1
12.3
12.6
12.9
13.1
13.4
13.7
14.0
14.2
14.5
14.8
15.1
15.4
15.6
15.9
16.2
16.5
16.8
17.1
17.3
5
36
6
7
8
16th/3
16th.
8th
6
40
7
45
8
50
9
9
8th/3
8th.
9
9
56
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
63
70
80
90
4th
4th/3
4th.
2nd
2nd/3
2nd.
4thX4
4thX5
4thX6
4thX7
4thX8
4thX9
100
110
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
630
700
23 4thX10
24 4thX11
25 4thX12
26 4thX13
27 4thX14
28 4thX15
29 4thX16
30 4thX17
31 4thX18
60 THRU(20.0k)
Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Data Format
MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de données
Many MIDI messages listed in the MIDI Data Format are expressed in
decimal numbers, binary numbers and hexadecimal numbers. Hexa-
decimal numbers may include the letter “H” as a suffix. Also, “n” can
freely be defined as any whole number.
To enter data/values, refer to the table below.
Decimal
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Hexadecimal
00
Binary
Decimal
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
Hexadecimal
20
Binary
Decimal
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
Hexadecimal
40
Binary
Decimal
96
97
98
99
Hexadecimal
60
Binary
0000 0000
0000 0001
0000 0010
0000 0011
0000 0100
0000 0101
0000 0110
0000 0111
0000 1000
0000 1001
0000 1010
0000 1011
0000 1100
0000 1101
0000 1110
0000 1111
0001 0000
0001 0001
0001 0010
0001 0011
0001 0100
0001 0101
0001 0110
0001 0111
0001 1000
0001 1001
0001 1010
0001 1011
0001 1100
0001 1101
0001 1110
0001 1111
0010 0000
0010 0001
0010 0010
0010 0011
0010 0100
0010 0101
0010 0110
0010 0111
0010 1000
0010 1001
0010 1010
0010 1011
0010 1100
0010 1101
0010 1110
0010 1111
0011 0000
0011 0001
0011 0010
0011 0011
0011 0100
0011 0101
0011 0110
0011 0111
0011 1000
0011 1001
0011 1010
0011 1011
0011 1100
0011 1101
0011 1110
0011 1111
0100 0000
0100 0001
0100 0010
0100 0011
0100 0100
0100 0101
0100 0110
0100 0111
0100 1000
0100 1001
0100 1010
0100 1011
0100 1100
0100 1101
0100 1110
0100 1111
0101 0000
0101 0001
0101 0010
0101 0011
0101 0100
0101 0101
0101 0110
0101 0111
0101 1000
0101 1001
0101 1010
0101 1011
0101 1100
0101 1101
0101 1110
0101 1111
0110 0000
0110 0001
0110 0010
0110 0011
0110 0100
0110 0101
0110 0110
0110 0111
0110 1000
0110 1001
0110 1010
0110 1011
0110 1100
0110 1101
0110 1110
0110 1111
0111 0000
0111 0001
0111 0010
0111 0011
0111 0100
0111 0101
0111 0110
0111 0111
0111 1000
0111 1001
0111 1010
0111 1011
0111 1100
0111 1101
0111 1110
0111 1111
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
• Except the table above, for example 144-159(decimal)/9nH/1001
0000-1001 1111(binary) denotes the Note On Message for each
channel (1-16). 176-191/BnH/1011 0000-1011 1111 denotes the
Control Change Message for each channel (1-16). 192-207/CnH/
1100 0000-1100 1111 denotes the Program Change Message for
each channel (1-16). 240/FOH/1111 0000 denotes the start of a Sys-
tem Exclusive Message. 247/F7H/1111 0111 denotes the end of a
System Exclusive Message.
• aaH (hexidecimal)/0aaaaaaa (binary) denotes the data address.The
address contains High, Mid, and Low.
• bbH/0bbbbbbb denotes the byte count.
• ccH/0ccccccc denotes the check sum.
• ddH/0ddddddd denotes the data/value.
228 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI
Channel/Mode/Realtime Messages/
Kanal / Modus / Realtime-Meldungen/
Messages canal/de mode/temps réel
o : available
Left Acmp
Status byte
1st Data byte
2nd Data byte
Recognized
MIDI Events
Status
Data (HEX) Parameter
Data
(HEX)
Parameter
XG/
GM
Key-
board
R1
R2
R3
Key Off
Key On
8nH
9nH
(n:channel no.) kk
kk
Key no. (0~127)
Key no. (0~127)
vv
vv
Velocity(0~127)
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Key On :vv=1~127
Key Off :vv=0
o
o
Control
Change
BnH
0
(00H) Bank Select MSB
0
(00H)
(40H)
(7EH)
(7FH)
Normal
SFX voice
SFX kit
Drum
64
126
127
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
32
(20H) Bank Select LSB
0~
112~
(0...)
XG voice
(70H...) Panel voice
1
(01H) Modulation
0~127 (...7FH)
0~127 (...7FH)
0~127 (...7FH)
0~127 (...7FH)
0~127 (...7FH)
0~127 (...7FH)
0~127 (...7FH)
0~127 (...7FH)
0~127 (...7FH)
0~127 (...7FH)
0~127 (...7FH)
0~127 (...7FH)
0~127 (...7FH)
0~127 (...7FH)
0~127 (...7FH)
0~127 (...7FH)
0~127 (...7FH)
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
5
(05H) Portament Time
(06H) Data Entry MSB
(26H) Data Entry LSB
(07H) Main Volume
(0AH) Panpot
6
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
38
7
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
10
11
64
65
66
67
(0BH) Expression
(40H) Sustain(Damper)
(41H) Portament
(42H) Sostenuto
(43H) Soft Pedal
71
(47H) Harmonic Content
(48H) Release Time
(49H) Attack Time
(4AH) Brightness
The NRPN
72
73
74
84
91
also contains
these parame-
ters.
(54H) Portamento Control
(5BH) Effect1 Depth
(Reverb Send Level)
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
93
94
(5DH) Effect3 Depth
(Chorus Send Level)
0~127 (...7FH)
0~127 (...7FH)
(5EH) Effect4 Depth
(Variation Send Level)
96
97
98
99
(60H) Increment
(61H) Decrement
(62H) NRPN LSB
(63H) NRPN MSB
0~127 (...7FH)
0~127 (...7FH)
0~127 (...7FH)
0~127 (...7FH)
0~127 (...7FH)
0~127 (...7FH)
0
o
o
o
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
100 (64H) RPN LSB
101 (65H) RPN MSB
120 (78H) All sound off
121 (79H) Reset all controller
122 (7AH) Local control
Mode
Message
BnH
o
o
o
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
0
dd
dd=00H: Off
7FH: On
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
123 (7BH) All note off
124 (7CH) OMNI OFF
125 (7DH) OMNI ON
126 (7EH) MONO
127 (7FH) POLY
0
0
0
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
o
o
o
x
x
o
o
o
x
x
o
o
o
x
x
o
o
o
x
x
o
o
o
x
x
0~16
(...10H)
0
-
Program
Change
CnH
DnH
AnH
EnH
pp
vv
kk
cc
Voice number(0~127)
-
o
o
x
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
x
o
o
x
x
o
Channel
After Touch
-
Polyphonic
After Tch
vv
dd
Pich Bend
Change
LS Byte
MS Byte
RealTime
Message
F8H
FAH
FBH
FCH
FEH
FFH
MIDI Clock
Start
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
o
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
x
Continue
Stop
Active Sens
System Reset
Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de données MIDI
MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de données MIDI
<Table 1-1-1> NRPN
o : available
Left Acmp
NRPN
MSB
DATA ENTRY
Recognized
Parameter
Vibrato Rate
LSB
08H
09H
0AH
20H
21H
24H
30H
31H
34H
35H
63H
64H
66H
rrH
MSB
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
LSB
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
XG/GM Keyboard R1 R2 R3
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
14H
15H
16H
17H
18H
19H
1AH
1CH
1DH
1EH
1FH
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
x
Vibrato Depth
Vibrato Delay
Filter Cutoff Frequency
Filter Resonance
HPF Cutoff Frequency
EQ BASS
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
EQ TREBLE
EQ BASS Frequency
EQ TREBLE Frequency
EG Attack Time
EG Decay Time
EG Release
Drum Filter Cutoff Frequency
Drum Filter Resonance
Drum EG Attack Rate
Drum EG Decay Rate
Drum Pitch Coarse
Drum Pitch Fine
rrH
rrH
rrH
rrH
rrH
rrH
Drum Level
rrH
Drum Pan
rrH
Drum Reverb Send Level
Drum Chorus Send Level
Drum Variation Send Level
rrH
rrH
NRPN MSB : 14H-1FH(for drums) message is accepted as long as the channel is set with a drum voice.
Data Entry LSB : Ignored.
<Table 1-1-2> NRPN (VocalHarmony)
NRPN
DATA ENTRY
Recognized
XG/GM Keyboard R1 R2 R3
Parameter
MSB
LSB
00H
01H
02H
03H
04H
05H
1AH
00H
01H
02H
03H
04H
10H
11H
12H
20H
21H
22H
30H
31H
32H
00H
01H
MSB
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
mmH
LSB
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Left Acmp
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
01H
02H
02H
02H
02H
02H
02H
02H
02H
02H
02H
02H
02H
02H
02H
03H
03H
Harmony Mute
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Harmony Mode
Vocoder Mode Parameter
Chromatic Mode Parameter
Detune Mode Parameter
Chordal Mode Parameter
Detune Modulation
Harmony Gender Type
Auto Upper Gender Threshold
Auto Lower Gender Threshold
Upper Gender Amound
Lower Gender Amound
Harmony1 Volume
Harmony2 Volume
Harmony3 Volume
Harmony1 Pan
Harmony2 Pan
Harmony3 Pan
Harmony1 Detune
Harmony2 Detune
Harmony3 Detune
Lead Gender Type
Lead Gender Amount
<Table 1-2> RPN
RPN
DATA ENTRY
Recognized
XG/GM Keyboard R1 R2 R3
Parameter
MSB
LSB
00H
01H
02H
7FH
MSB
mmH
mmH
mmH
--
LSB
--
llH
--
Left Acmp
00H
00H
00H
7FH
Pitch Bend Sensitivity
Fine Tune
Coarse Tune
Null
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
--
230 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de données MIDI
System Exclusive Messages/
Systemexklusive Meldungen/
Messages exclusifs au système
System Exclusive Messages
Accompaniment Control
Data Format
Recognized
Section Control
F0H 43H 7EH 00H ss dd F7H
o
11110000
01000011
01111110
00000000
0sssssss
F0 = Exclusive status
43 = YAMAHA ID
7E = Style
00
ss
=
= Switch No.
00H-01H:
02H-03H:
04H-07H:
08H:
INTRO II
INTRO III
INTRO I
MAIN A
09H:
0AH:
MAIN B
MAIN C
0BH-0FH:
10H:
11H:
12H:
13H-17H:
18H:
MAIN D
FILL IN A
FILL IN B
FILL IN C
FILL IN D
BREAK FILL A
BREAK FILL B
BREAK FILL C
BREAK FILL D
ENDING II
ENDING III
ENDING I
19H:
1AH
1BH-1FH:
20H-21H:
22H-23H:
24H-27H:
= Swith On/Off
00H
0ddddddd
11111110
dd
Off
On
7FH
F7 = End of Exclusive
Tempo Control
F0H 43H 7EH 01H t4 t3 t2 t1 F7H
o
11110000
01000011
01111110
00000001
0ttttttt
0ttttttt
0ttttttt
0ttttttt
11111110
F0 = Exclusive status
43 = YAMAHA ID
7E = Style
01
t4
t3
t2
t1
=
= tempo4
= tempo3
= tempo2
= tempo1
F7 = End of Exclusive
Chord Control
F0H 43H 7EH tt dd … F7H
o
Type1 (tt=02)
11110000
01000011
01111110
00000010
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
F0 = Exclusive status
43 = YAMAHA ID
7E = Style
02
dd
dd
dd
dd
= type 1(tt)
= chord root(cr)
= chord type(ct)
= bass note(bn)
= bass type(bt)
cr : Chord Root 0fffnnnn
fff: b or #, nnnn: note(root)
0000nnnn 0n
0001nnnn 1n
0010nnnn 2n
0011nnnn 3n
0100nnnn 4n
0101nnnn 5n
0110nnnn 6n
bbb
bb
b
natural
#
##
0fff0000x0 reserved
0fff0001x1 C
0fff0010x2 D
0fff0011x3 E
0fff0100x4 F
0fff0101x5 G
0fff0110x6 A
0fff0111x7 B
###
ct : Chord Type 0 - 34,127
00000000 00
00000001 01
00000010 02
00000011 03
00000100 04
00000101 05
00000110 06
00000111 07
00001000 08
00001001 09
00001010 0A
00001011 0B
00001100 0C
00001101 0D
00001110 0E
00001111 0F
00010000 10
00010001 11
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Maj
Maj6
Maj7
Maj7(#11)
Maj(9)
Maj7(9)
Maj6(9)
aug
min
min6
00010010 12
00010011 13
00010100 14
00010101 15
00010110 16
00010111 17
00011000 18
00011001 19
00011010 1A
00011011 1B
00011100 1C
00011101 1D
00011110 1E
00011111 1F
00100000 20
00100001 21
00100010 22
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
dim7
7th
7sus4
7b5
7(9)
7(#11)
7(13)
7(b9)
7(b13)
7(#9)
Maj7aug
7aug
1+8
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
min7
min7b5
min(9)
min7(9)
min7(11)
minMaj7
minMaj7(9)
dim
1+5
sus4
1+2+5
cc
bn : On Bass Chord
bt : Bass Chord
Same as Chord root,
127:No bass chord
Same as Chord type
127:No bass chord
11111110
F7 = End of Exclusive
Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de données MIDI
Type2 (tt=03) (Receive only)
o
11110000
01000011
01111110
00000011
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
:
F0 = Exclusive status
43
7E
03
dd
dd
dd
:
= YAMAHA ID
=
= type 2(tt)
= note1
= note2
= note3
:
0ddddddd
11111110
dd
= ...note10
F7 = End of Exclusive
System Exclusive Messages (Universal System Exclusive)
MIDI Event
Data Format
Recognized
MIDI Master Volume
F0H 7FH 7FH 04H 01H l l mm F7H
o
11110000
01111111
01111111
00000100
00000001
0lllllll
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0 = Exclusive status
7F = Universal Real Time
7F = ID of target device
04
01
ll
= Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message
= Sub-ID #2=Master Volume
= Volume LSB
mm = Volume MSB
F7 = End of Exclusive
or
F0H 7FH XN 04H 01H l l mm F7H
11110000
01111111
0xxxnnnn
F0 = Exclusive status
7F = Universal Real Time
XN = When N is received N=0-F,whichever is received.
X=ignored
00000100
00000001
0lllllll
0mmmmmmm
11110111
04
01
ll
= Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message
= Sub-ID #2=Master Volume
= Volume LSB
mm = Volume MSB
F7 = End of Exclusive
GM System On
F0H 7EH 7FH 09H 01H F7H
o
11110000
01111110
01111111
00001001
00000001
11110111
F0 = Exclusive status
7E = Universal Non-Real Time
7F = ID of target device
09
01
= Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message
= Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On
F7 = End of Exclusive
or
F0H 7EH XN 09H 01H F7H
11110000
01111110
0xxxnnnn
F0 = Exclusive status
7E = Universal Non-Real Time
XN = When N is received N=0-F,whichever is received.
X=ignored
00001001
00000001
11110111
09
01
= Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message
= Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On
F7 = End of Exclusive
System Exclusive Messages (XG standard)
MIDI Event
Data Format
Recognized
XG Parameter Change
F0H 43H 1nH 4CH hh mm l l dd … F7H
o
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
01001100
0hhhhhhh
0mmmmmmm
0lllllll
0ddddddd
:
F0 = Exclusive status
43
1n
= YAMAHA ID
= Device Number n=always 0(when transmit), n=0-F(when recieve)
4C = Model ID
hh
= Address High
mm = Address Mid
ll
dd
:
= Address Low
= Data
11110111
F7 = End of Exclusive
Bulk Dump
F0H 43H 0nH 4CH aa bb hh mm l l dd … dd cc F7H
o
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01001100
0aaaaaaa
0bbbbbbb
0hhhhhhh
0mmmmmmm
0lllllll
0ddddddd
:
F0 = Exclusive status
43
0n
= YAMAHA ID
= Device Number n=always 0(when transmit), n=0-F(when recieve)
4C = Model ID
aa
bb
hh
= Byte Count MSB
= Byte Count LSB
= Address High
mm = Address Mid
ll
dd
:
= Address Low
= Data
0ddddddd
0ccccccc
11110111
dd
cc
= Data
= Checksum
F7 = End of Exclusive
232 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de données MIDI
Parameter Request
F0H 43H 3nH 4CH hh mm l l F7H
o
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
01001100
0hhhhhhh
0mmmmmmm
0lllllll
11110111
F0 = Exclusive status
43
3n
= YAMAHA ID
= Device Number n=always 0(when transmit), n=0-F(when recieve)
4C = Model ID
hh
= Address High
mm = Address Mid
ll
= Address Low
F7 = End of Exclusive
Dump Request
F0H 43H 2nH 4CH hh mm l l F7H
o
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01001100
0hhhhhhh
0mmmmmmm
0lllllll
11110111
F0 = Exclusive status
43
2n
= YAMAHA ID
= Device Number n=always 0(when transmit), n=0-F(when recieve)
4C = Model ID
hh
= Address High
mm = Address Mid
ll
= Address Low
F7 = End of Exclusive
System Exclusive Messages (Clavinova compliance)
MIDI Event
Data Format
Recognized
Internal Clock
F0H 43H 73H 01H 02H F7H
o
00000010
F0H 43H 73H 01H 03H F7H
00000011 03 = External Clock Substatus
F0H 43H 73H 01H 06H 0BH 00H 00H 01H 06H 0nH [BULK DATA] sum F7H
02
= Internal Clock Substatus
External Clock
o
o
Organ Flutes data
Bulk Dump
01H
Model ID (Clavinova common ID)
Bulk ID
06H
0BH
Bulk No. (Organ Flutes data Bulk Dump)
Data Length :16bytes
00H,00H,01H,06H
1st 0nH
n: channel No.
Organ Flutes data
[BULK DATA]
Footage
2nd
3rd
[1']
[1 1/3']
[1 3/5']
[2']
[2 2/3']
[4']
[5 1/3']
[8']
00 - 07H
00 - 07H
00 - 09H
00 - 07H
00 - 07H
00 - 07H
00 - 07H
00 - 07H
00 - 07H
00 - 07H
00 - 07H
00 - 07H
00 - 07H
00 - 07H
00 - 01H
00 - 01H
00 - 07H
00H
data: 0: -∞, 1: -12, 2: -9, 3: -6, 4: -4.5,
5: -3, 6: -1.5: 7: 0[dB]
4th
5th
6th
7th
8th
9th
10th
11th
12th
13th
14th
15th
16th
17th
18th
19th
20th
21th
22th
[16']
[Attack 2']
[Attack 2 2/3']
[Attack 4']
[Attack Length]
[Response]
[Attack Mode]
[Wave Variation]
[Volume]
[aux 4]
Settings
00H: Each, 01H: First
00H: Sine, 01H: Tone Wheel
[aux 5]
[aux 6]
[aux 7]
00H
00H
00H
sum
Check Sum = 0-sum(BULK DATA)
DOC Multi Timbre OFF
DOC Multi Timbre ON
F0H 43H 73H 01H 13H F7H
F0H 43H 73H 01H 14H F7H
o
00010011
00010100
13
14
= DOC Multi Timbre OFF Substatus
= DOC Multi Timbre ON Substatus
When the DOC Multi Timbre ON is accepted, the MIDI receive mode is set as listed below :
Channel No Part
1~10
15
16
Manual Part (Melody Part)
Rhythm
Control
(Including the System Exclusive messages,)
MIDI FA Cancel
F0H 43H 73H 01H 61H F7H
x
x
01100001
F0H 43H 73H 01H 62H F7H
01100010 62 = MIDI FA Cancel Off Substatus
61
= MIDI FA Cancel Substatus
MIDI FA Cancel Off
System Exclusive Messages Special Operators
MIDI Event
Data Format
Recognized
Volume & Expression & Pan
Realtime control off
(Voice Reserve)
F0H 43H 73H 01H 11H 0nH 45H dd F7H
o
0000nnnn
01000101
0ddddddd
0n
45
dd
= Channel No.(00H~0FH)
= Volume & Expression Control No.
= Value (Available only for the specified channel)
00H : Realtime On
7FH : Realtime Off
Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de données MIDI
System Exclusive Messages Special Operators (Vocal Harmony Additional Parameters)
MIDI Event
Data Format
Recognized
Vocal Harmony
F0H 43H 73H 01H 11H 00H 50H 00H ss F7H
o
Pitch to Note ON/OFF
00000000
01010000
00000000
0sssssss
00
50
00
ss
= Channel No.(always 00)
= Vocal Harmony Additional Parameter Control No.
= Pitch to Note Parameter No.
= Pitch To Note Switch
00H: Off
01H: On
Vocal Harmony
F0H 43H 73H 01H 11H 00H 50H 01H ss F7H
o
Pitch to Note Part
00000000
01010000
00000001
0sssssss
00
50
01
ss
= Channel No.(always 00)
= Vocal Harmony Additional Parameter Control No.
= Pitch to Note Part Parameter No.
= Pitch To Note Part No.
00H: RIGHT1
01H: RIGHT2
02H: LEFT
03H: LEAD
04H: UPPER
Vocal Harmony
F0H 43H 73H 01H 11H 00H 50H 10H ss F7H
o
Vocoder Part
(Harmony Part(Panel))
00000000
01010000
00010000
0sssssss
00
50
10
ss
= Channel No.(always 00)
= Vocal Harmony Additional Parameter Control No.
= Vocoder Part Parameter No.
= Harmony Part No.
00H: Off
01H: Upper
02H: Lower
Vocal Harmony
Additional Reverb Depth
F0H 43H 73H 01H 11H 00H 50H 11H ss F7H
x
x
x
00000000
01010000
00010001
0sssssss
00
50
11
ss
= Channel No.(always 00)
= Vocal Harmony Additional Parameter Control No.
= Voval Harmony Additional Reverb Depth Parameter No.
= Value(0...7FH)
Vocal Harmony
Additional Chorus Depth
F0H 43H 73H 01H 11H 00H 50H 12H ss F7H
00000000
01010000
00010010
0sssssss
00
50
12
ss
= Channel No.(always 00)
= Vocal Harmony Additional Parameter Control No.
= Voval Harmony Additional Chorus Depth Parameter No.
= Value(0...7FH)
Vocal Harmony
F0H 43H 73H 01H 11H 00H 50H 13H ss F7H
Panel Variation LED On/Off
00000000
01010000
00010011
0sssssss
00
50
13
ss
= Channel No.(always 00)
= Vocal Harmony Additional Parameter Control No.
= Voval Harmony Panel Variation LED On/Off Parameter No.
= Switch On/Off
00H: Variation LED Off
7FH: Variotion LED On
System Exclusive Messages (the other)
MIDI Event
Data Format
Recognized
MIDI Master Tuning
F0H 43H 1nH 27H 30H 00H 00H mm l l cc F7H
o
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00100111
00110000
00000000
00000000
0mmmmmmm
0lllllll
0ccccccc
11110111
F0 = Exclusive status
43
1n
27
30
00
00
= YAMAHA
n= always 0(when transmit), n=0-F(when receive)
= sub ID
mm = Master Tune MSB
ll
cc
= Master Tune LSB
ignored
F7 = End of Exclusive
MWCAT parameter flag
F0H 43H 73H 01H 11H 0nH 54H dd F7H
o
0000nnnn
01010100
0ddddddd
0n
54
dd
= Sequencer Track No.
= MWCAT parameter flag
= Value (ignored)
234 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de données MIDI
MIDI Parameter Change Table/
Änderungstabelle der MIDI-Parameter/
Tableau des changements de paramètres MIDI
<Table 3-1> MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE (SYSTEM)
Address
Size
Data
Parameter
Recognized
Description
Default
value(H)
(H)
(H)
(H)
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
0000 - MASTER TUNE
07FF
o
-102.4 - +102.3[cent]
1st bit3-0→bit15-12
2nd bit3-0→bit11-8
3rd bit3-0→bit7-4
4th bit3-0→bit3-0
0 - 127
00 04 00 00
4
5
6
1
1
1
00 - 7F MASTER VOLUME
o
x
o
o
o
o
7F
40
(MASTER ATTENUATOR)
28 - 58 TRANSPOSE
—
-24 - +24[semitones]
7D
7E
7F
n
0
0
DRUM SETUP RESET
n=Drum setup number
00=XG sytem ON
00=ON
XG SYSTEM ON
ALL PARAMETER RESET
TOTAL SIZE
7
<Table 3-2> MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE (System information)
Address
Size
Data
Parameter
Recognized
Description
Default
(H)
(H)
(H)
1
0
0
:
E
20 - 7F Model Name
x
32-127(ASCII)
0D
0E
0F
20 - 7F
1
1
0
0
0
0
TOTAL SIZE
10
Transmitted by Dump Request. Not Received.
<Table 3-3> MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE (EFFECT 1)
Address
Size
Data
Parameter
Recognized
Description
Default
(H)
(H)
(H)
2
1
0
2
00-7F REVERB TYPE MSB
00-7F REVERB TYPE LSB
o
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT MAP
00 : basic type
01(=HALL1)
00
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
1
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 1
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 2
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 3
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 4
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 5
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 6
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 7
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 8
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 9
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 10
00-7F REVERB RETURN
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type
1
1
1
1
1
1
0A
0B
0C
0D
1
1
1
-∞dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127)
40
40
1
01-7F REVERB PAN
L63...C...R63(1...64...127)
TOTAL SIZE
0E
2
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 11
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 12
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 13
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 14
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 15
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 16
o
o
o
o
o
o
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type
TOTAL SIZE
2
1
20
2
00-7F CHORUS TYPE MSB
o
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT MAP
00 : basic type
41(=CHORUS1)
00
00-7F CHORUS TYPE LSB
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
1
1
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 1
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 2
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 3
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 4
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 5
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 6
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 7
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 8
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 9
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 10
00-7F CHORUS RETURN
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-∞dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127)
L63...C...R63(1...64...127)
40
40
00
1
01-7F CHORUS PAN
1
00-7F SEND CHORUS TO REVERB
-∞dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127)
TOTAL SIZE
0F
2
1
30
31
32
33
34
35
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 11
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 12
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 13
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 14
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 15
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 16
o
o
o
o
o
o
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type
TOTAL SIZE
Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de données MIDI
2
1
40
42
44
46
48
4A
4C
4E
50
52
54
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
00-7F VARIATION TYPE MSB
00-7F VARIATION TYPE LSB
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT MAP
00 : basic type
05(=DELAY L,C,R)
00
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 1 MSB
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 1 LSB
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 2 MSB
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 2 LSB
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 3 MSB
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 3 LSB
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 4 MSB
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 4 LSB
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 5 MSB
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 5 LSB
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 6 MSB
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 6 LSB
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 7 MSB
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 7 LSB
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 8 MSB
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 8 LSB
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 9 MSB
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 9 LSB
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 10 MSB
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 10 LSB
00-7F VARIATION RETURN
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
1
1
1
1
1
1
o
o
o
o
o
o
-∞dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127)
L63...C...R63(1...64...127)
-∞dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127)
-∞dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127)
0:INSERTION,1:SYSTEM
Part1...16(0...15)
AD1(64)
40
40
00
00
00
7F
01-7F VARIATION PAN
00-7F SEND VARIATION TO REVERB
00-7F SEND VARIATION TO CHORUS
00-01 VARIATION CONNECTION
00-7F VARIATION PART
OFF(16...63, 65...127)
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
5C
5D
5E
5F
60
1
1
1
1
1
MW VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH
BEND VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH
CAT VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH
AC1 VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH
AC2 VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH
o
o
o
x
x
40
40
40
40
40
-64 - +63
TOTAL SIZE
21
2
1
70
71
72
73
74
75
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 11
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 12
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 13
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 14
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 15
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 16
o
o
o
o
o
o
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type
TOTAL SIZE
<Table 3-4> MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE (MASTER EQ)
Address
Size
Data
Parameter
Recognized
Description
Default
value(H)
(H)
(H)
(H)
2
40
0
1
00 - 04 EQ type
o
0:FLAT
0
1:JAZZ
2:POPS
3:ROCK
4:CLASSIC
-12 - +12[dB]
32-2000[Hz]
0.1-12.0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
15
34 -4C EQ gain1
04-28 EQ frequency1
01-78 EQ Q1
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
40
0C
7
00-01 EQ shape1
34 -4C EQ gain2
0E-36 EQ frequency2
01-78 EQ Q2
00:shelving, 01:peaking
-12 - +12[dB]
100-10.0[kHz]
0.1-12.0
0
40
1C
7
not used
34 -4C EQ gain3
0E-36 EQ frequency3
01-78 EQ Q3
-12 - +12[dB]
100-10.0[kHz]
0.1-12.0
40
22
7
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
not used
34 -4C EQ gain4
0E-36 EQ frequency4
01-78 EQ Q4
-12 - +12[dB]
100-10.0[kHz]
0.1-12.0
40
2E
7
not used
34 -4C EQ gain5
1C-3A EQ frequency5
01-78 EQ Q5
-12 - +12[dB]
40
34
7
0.5-16.0[kHz]
0.1-12.0
00-01 EQ shape5
00:shelving, 01:peaking
0
TOTAL SIZE
<Table 3-5> MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE (EFFECT 2)
Address
Size
Data
Parameter
Recognized
Description
Default
(H)
(H)
(H)
3
0n
0
2
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n TYPE MSB
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n TYPE LSB
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER1
o
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT MAP
00 : basic type
49(=DISTORTION)
00
2
3
4
5
1
1
1
1
o
o
o
o
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1
type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1
type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1
type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1
type
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER2
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER3
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER4
236 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de données MIDI
6
7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER5
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER6
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER7
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER8
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER9
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER10
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PART
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1
type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1
type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1
type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1
type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1
type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1
type
8
9
0A
0B
0C
Part1...16(0...15)
AD1(64)
7F
OFF(16...63, 65...127)
-64 - 63
0D
1
1
00-7F MW INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH
00-7F BEND INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH
00-7F CAT INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH
00-7F AC1 INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH
00-7F AC2 INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH
o
o
o
x
x
40
40
40
40
40
0E
-64 - 63
0F
1
-64 - 63
10
11
1
-64 - 63
1
-64 - 63
TOTAL SIZE
12
20
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER11
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER12
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER13
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER14
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER15
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER16
o
o
o
o
o
o
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1
type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1
type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1
type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1
type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1
type
Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1
type
21
22
23
24
25
TOTAL SIZE
30
2
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER1
MSB
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER1
LSB
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER2
MSB
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER2
LSB
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER3
MSB
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER3
LSB
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER4
MSB
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER4
LSB
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER5
MSB
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER5
LSB
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER6
MSB
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER6
LSB
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER7
MSB
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER7
LSB
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER8
MSB
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER8
LSB
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
32
2
34
2
36
2
38
2
3A
2
3C
2
3E
2
40
42
2
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER9
MSB
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER9
LSB
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER10
MSB
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER10
LSB
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
2
TOTAL SIZE
14
0n: insertion effect number
Note :
For effect types that do not require MSB, the Parameters for Address 02-0B will be received and the Parameters for Address 30-42 will not be received.
For effect types that require MSB, the Parameters for Address 30-42 will be received and the Parameters for Address 02-0B will not be received.
When Bulk Dumps that include Effect Type data are transmitted, the Parameters for Address 02 - 0B will always be transmitted. But, effects that require MSB, when the bulk dump is
received the Parameters for Address 02 - 0B will not be received.
The following four effect types require MSB:
DelayLCR, DelayLR, Echo, CrossDelay, Dist+Delay, Comp+Dist+Delay, Wah+Dist+Delay, VDistortion
*Data Range is different according to the Effect type value.
Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de données MIDI
<Table 3-6> MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE (SPECIAL EFFECT)
Address
Size
Data
Parameter
Recognized
Description
Default
(H)
(H)
(H)
04 00 00
2
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT TYPE MSB
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT TYPE LSB
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER1
o
o
o
Refer to the XG EFFECT MAP
00 : basic type
49(=DISTORTION)
00
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER2
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER3
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER4
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER5
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER6
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER7
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER8
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER9
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER10
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PART
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
Part1...16(0...15)
7F
AD1(64)
OFF(16...63, 65...127)
0D
1
1
00 - 7F MW INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH
00 - 7F BEND INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH
00 - 7F CAT INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH
00 - 7F AC1 INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH
00 - 7F AC2 INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH
o
o
o
x
x
—
—
—
—
—
40
40
40
40
40
0E
0F
1
10
11
1
1
TOTAL SIZE
12
04 00 14
1
1
2
00 - 7F UNIQUE INSERTION EFFECT EXTER-
NAL
o
o
1...16(0...15), off(127)
1...16(0...15), off(127)
7F
7F
CONTROL CH1(HARMONY CHANNEL*)
15
00 - 7F UNIQUE INSERTION EFFECT EXTER-
NAL
CONTROL CH2 (MELODY CHANNEL*)
TOTAL SIZE
04 00 20
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER11
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER12
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER13
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER14
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER15
00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER16
o
o
o
o
o
o
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
depends on insertion 1
type
21
22
23
24
25
TOTAL SIZE
*HARMONY CHANNEL and MELODY CHANNEL
About these settings, the last message is effective.
When the Melody channel is 3 and a message that set the Harmony Channel to 3 is received,
the Melody channel is set to OFF and the Harmony channel is set to 3.
<Table 3-7> MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE (DISPLAY DATA)
Address
Size
Data
Parameter
Recognized
Description
Default
(H)
(H)
6
0
0
:
20
(DISPLAY LETTER)
x
—
—
1F
TOTAL SIZE
20
30
7
vh
0
:
(DISPLAY BITMAP Data0)
x
:
2F
(Data47)
TOTAL SIZE
30
<Table 3-8> MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE (MULTI PART)
Address
Size
Data
Parameter
Recognized
Description
Default
value(H)
(H)
(H)
(H)
8
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
0
1
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
1
00 - 20 ELEMENT RESERVE
00 - 7F BANK SELECT MSB
00 - 7F BANK SELECT LSB
00 - 7F PROGRAM NUMBER
o
o
0 - 32
part10=0, other =2
x
x
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
o
0 - 127
0 - 127
1 - 128
1 - 16,OFF
part10=7F, other=0
0
o
o
0
x
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
00 -
Rcv CHANNEL
Part No.
0F, 7F
nn
5
1
00 - 01 MONO/POLY MODE
o
0:MONO
1:POLY
1
x
o
o
o
o
x
238 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de données MIDI
nn
nn
6
7
1
1
00 - 02 SAME NOTE NUMBER
KEY ON ASSIGN
o
0:SINGLE
1
x
o
o
o
o
o
1:MULTI
2:INST (for DRUM)
0:NORMAL
00 - 05 PART MODE
o
00 (Except Part10)
02 (Part10)
x
x
x
x
x
x
1:DRUM(ROM)
2 - 3:DRUMS1~ (RAM)
4-5:DRUM(ROM)
-24 - +24[semitones]
-12.8 - +12.7[Hz]
1st bit3-0→bit7-4
2nd bit3-0→bit3-0
0 - 127
04,05 = [L3-80]
nn
nn
8
9
1
2
28 - 58 NOTE SHIFT
00 - FF DETUNE
o
o
40
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
08 00
(80)
nn 0A
nn 0B
nn 0C
nn 0D
nn 0E
1
1
1
1
00 - 7F VOLUME
o
o
o
o
64
40
40
40
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
00 - 7F VELOCITY SENSE DEPTH
00 - 7F VELOCITY SENSE OFFSET
00 - 7F PAN
0 - 127
0 - 127
0:random
L63...C...R63(1...64...127)
C-2 - G8
nn 0F
nn 10
nn 11
nn 12
nn 13
nn 14
1
1
1
1
1
1
00 - 7F NOTE LIMIT LOW
00 - 7F NOTE LIMIT HIGH
00 - 7F DRY LEVEL
o
o
o
o
o
o
0
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
C-2 - G8
7F
7F
0
0 - 127
00 - 7F CHORUS SEND
00 - 7F REVERB SEND
00 - 7F VARIATION SEND
0 - 127
0 - 127
28
0
0 - 127
nn 15
nn 16
nn 17
nn 18
nn 19
nn 1A
nn 1B
nn 1C
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
00 - 7F VIBRATO RATE
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
00 - 7F VIBRATO DEPTH
00 - 7F VIBRATO DELAY
00 - 7F FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY
00 - 7F FILTER RESONANCE
00 - 7F EG ATTACK TIME
00 - 7F EG DECAY TIME
00 - 7F EG RELEASE TIME
nn 1D
nn 1E
nn 1F
nn 20
nn 21
nn 22
1
1
1
1
1
1
28 - 58 MW PITCH CONTROL
00 - 7F MW FILTER CONTROL
00 - 7F MW AMPLITUDE CONTROL
00 - 7F MW LFO PMOD DEPTH
00 - 7F MW LFO FMOD DEPTH
00 - 7F MW LFO AMOD DEPTH
o
o
o
o
o
o
-24 - +24[semitones]
-9600 - +9450[cent]
-100 - +100[%]
0 - 127
40
40
40
0A
0
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
0 - 127
0 - 127
0
nn 23
nn 24
1
1
28 - 58 BEND PITCH CONTROL
00 - 7F BEND FILTER CONTROL
00 - 7F BEND AMPLITUDE CONTROL
00 - 7F BEND LFO PMOD DEPTH
00 - 7F BEND LFO FMOD DEPTH
00 - 7F BEND LFO AMOD DEPTH
o
o
o
o
o
o
-24 - +24[semitones]
-9600 - +9450[cent]
-100 - +100[%]
0 - 127
42
40
40
0
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
nn 25
1
nn 26
1
nn 27
1
0 - 127
0
nn 28
1
0 - 127
0
TOTAL SIZE
29
Address
(H)
Size
(H)
Data
(H)
Parameter
Recognized
Description
Default
value(H)
nn 30
nn 31
nn 32
nn 33
nn 34
nn 35
nn 36
nn 37
nn 38
nn 39
nn 3A
nn 3B
nn 3C
nn 3D
nn 3E
nn 3F
nn 40
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
(Rcv PITCH BEND)
(Rcv CH AFTER TOUCH(CAT))
(Rcv PROGRAM CHANGE)
(Rcv CONTROL CHANGE)
(Rcv POLY AFTER TOUCH(PAT))
Rcv NOTE MESSAGE
(Rcv RPN)
x
x
x
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
—
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
—
—
—
—
OFF, ON
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
(Rcv NRPN)
(Rcv MODULATION)
(Rcv VOLUME)
(Rcv PAN)
(Rcv EXPRESSION)
(Rcv HOLD1)
(Rcv PORTAMENTO)
(Rcv SOSTENUTO)
(Rcv SOFT PEDAL)
(Rcv BANK SELECT)
nn 41
nn 42
nn 43
nn 44
nn 45
nn 46
nn 47
nn 48
nn 49
nn 4A
nn 4B
nn 4C
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
00 - 7F SCALE TUNING C
00 - 7F SCALE TUNING C#
00 - 7F SCALE TUNING D
00 - 7F SCALE TUNING D#
00 - 7F SCALE TUNING E
00 - 7F SCALE TUNING F
00 - 7F SCALE TUNING F#
00 - 7F SCALE TUNING G
00 - 7F SCALE TUNING G#
00 - 7F SCALE TUNING A
00 - 7F SCALE TUNING A#
00 - 7F SCALE TUNING B
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
-64 - +63[cent]
-64 - +63[cent]
-64 - +63[cent]
-64 - +63[cent]
-64 - +63[cent]
-64 - +63[cent]
-64 - +63[cent]
-64 - +63[cent]
-64 - +63[cent]
-64 - +63[cent]
-64 - +63[cent]
-64 - +63[cent]
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de données MIDI
nn 4D
nn 4E
nn 4F
nn 50
nn 51
nn 52
1
1
1
1
1
1
CAT PITCH CONTROL
CAT FILTER CONTROL
CAT AMPLITUDE CONTROL
CAT LFO PMOD DEPTH
CAT LFO FMOD DEPTH
CAT LFO AMOD DEPTH
o
o
o
o
o
o
-24 - +24[semitones]
-9600 - +9450[cent]
-100 - +100[%]
0 - 127
40
40
40
0
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
0 - 127
0
0 - 127
0
nn 53
nn 54
nn 55
nn 56
nn 57
nn 58
1
1
1
1
1
1
PAT PITCH CONTROL
PAT FILTER CONTROL
PAT AMPLITUDE CONTROL
PAT LFO PMOD DEPTH
PAT LFO FMOD DEPTH
PAT LFO AMOD DEPTH
x
x
x
x
x
x
—
—
—
—
—
—
40
40
40
0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
0
0
nn 59
nn 5A
nn 5B
nn 5C
nn 5D
nn 5E
nn 5F
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
AC1 CONTROLLER NUMBER
AC1 PITCH CONTROL
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
10
40
40
40
0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
AC1 FILTER CONTROL
AC1 AMPLITUDE CONTROL
AC1 LFO PMOD DEPTH
AC1 LFO FMOD DEPTH
AC1 LFO AMOD DEPTH
0
0
nn 60
nn 61
nn 62
nn 63
nn 64
nn 65
nn 66
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
AC2 CONTROLLER NUMBER
AC2 PITCH CONTROL
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
11
40
40
40
0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
AC2 FILTER CONTROL
AC2 AMPLITUDE CONTROL
AC2 LFO PMOD DEPTH
AC2 LFO FMOD DEPTH
AC2 LFO AMOD DEPTH
0
0
nn 67
nn 68
1
1
PORTAMENTO SWITCH
PORTAMENTO TIME
o
o
OFF/ON
0 - 127
0
0
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
nn 69
nn 6A
1
1
PITCH EG INITIAL LEVEL
PITCH EG ATTACK TIME
PITCH EG RELEASE LEVEL
PITCH EG RELEASE TIME
VELOCITY LIMIT LOW
x
x
x
x
x
x
—
—
—
—
—
—
40
40
40
40
1
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
nn 6B
1
nn 6C
1
nn 6D
1
nn 6E
1
VELOCITY LIMIT HIGH
7F
TOTALSIZE
3F
<Table 3-8-2>
Address
Size
Data
(H)
Parameter
Recognized
Description
Default
value(H)
(H)
(H)
08 nn 70
nn 71
1
1
NOT USED
NOT USED
x
x
o
o
—
—
3E
40
40
40
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
x
x
o
o
x
x
o
o
x
x
o
o
x
x
o
o
nn 72
1
00 - 7F EQ BASS
-64 - +63(-12 - +12[dB])
-64 - +63(-12 - +12[dB])
nn 73
1
00 - 7F EQ TREBLE
TOTAL SIZE
04
<Table 3-8-3> XG ADDITIONAL PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE (MULTI PART)
Address
Size
Data
Parameter
Recognized
Description
Default
value(H)
(H)
(H)
(H)
08 nn 74
1
1
NOT USED
NOT USED
x
x
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
—
—
40
40
0C
36
22
2E
7
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
75
76
1
04 - 28 EQ BASS frequency
1C - 3A EQ TREBLE frequency
NOT USED
32-2.0k[Hz]
77
1
500-16.0k[Hz]
78
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
79
1
NOT USED
7A
1
NOT USED
7B
1
NOT USED
7
7C
1
NOT USED
7
7D
1
NOT USED
7
7E
7F
1
NOT USED
0
1
NOT USED
0
TOTAL SIZE
0C
0A nn 10
TOTAL SIZE
nn: PartNumber
1
1
00,08, OUTPUT SELECT
28-2D
x
0:stereo out,8:indiv1+2
40:indiv1,41:indiv2,
0
x
x
x
x
x
x
If there is a Drum Voice assigned to the Part, the following parameters are ineffective.
• BANK SELECT LSB
• PORTAMENTO
• SOFT PEDAL
• MONO/POLY
• SCALE TUNING
• POLY AFTER TOUCH
• PITCH EG
240 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de données MIDI
<Table 3-9> MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE (A/D PART)
Address
Size
Data
Parameter
Recognized
Description
Default
value(H)
(H)
(H)
(H)
10 nn
0
1
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
1
00 - 01 INPUT GAIN
x
x
x
x
o
0:MIC,1:LINE
0 - 127
0
00 - 7F BANK SELECT MSB
00 - 7F BANK SELECT LSB
00 - 7F PROGRAM NUMBER
0
0 - 127
0
1 - 128
0
00 -
1F, 7F
Rcv CHANNEL
A1 - A16,B1 - B16,OFF
7F
5
6
7
8
9
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
15
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
00 - 7F VOLUME
NOT USED
o
o
0 - 127
0
NOT USED
01 - 7F PAN
L63...C...R63(1...64...127)
40
NOT USED
NOT USED
00 - 7F DRY LEVEL
00 - 7F CHORUS SEND
00 - 7F REVERB SEND
00 - 7F VARIATION SEND
o
o
o
o
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
7F
0
0
0
TOTALSIZE
Address
(H)
Size
(H)
Data
(H)
Parameter
Recognized
Description
Default
value(H)
10 nn 30
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
NOT USED
NOT USED
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
40
00 - 01 Rcv PROGRAM CHANGE
00 - 01 Rcv CONTROL CHANGE
NOT USED
x
x
—
—
1
1
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
00 - 01 Rcv VOLUME
00 - 01 Rcv PAN
00 - 01 Rcv EXPRESSION
NOT USED
x
x
x
—
—
—
1
1
1
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
00 - 01 Rcv BANK SELECT
x
—
1
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
1
1
1
1
1
1
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
53
54
55
56
57
58
1
1
1
1
1
1
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
00 - 5F AC1 CONTROLLER NUMBER
x
—
10
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
60
1
00 - 5F AC2 CONTROLLER NUMBER
x
—
11
TOTALSIZE
31
Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de données MIDI
11 00 nn
TOTAL SIZE
64
64
00-01 A/D SETUP
x
—
12 nn 10
1
00,08, OUTPUT SELECT
28-2D
x
0:stereo out,8:indiv1+2
0
40:indiv1,41:indiv2,
TOTAL SIZE
1
nn: A/D Part number( 0 - 63 )
<Table 3-10> MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE (DRUM SETUP)
Address
Size
Data
Parameter
Recognized
Description
Default
(H)
(H)
(H)
3n rr
0
1
2
3
1
1
1
1
00 - 7F PITCH COARSE
00 - 7F PITCH FINE
00 - 7F LEVEL
o
o
o
o
-64 - +63
-64 - +63[cent]
0 - 127
40
3n rr
3n rr
3n rr
40
depend on the note
depend on the note
00 - 7F ALTERNATE GROUP
0:OFF
1 - 127
3n rr
4
1
00 - 7F PAN
o
0:random
1:L63
depend on the note
:
64:C(center)
:
127:R63
0 - 127
3n rr
3n rr
3n rr
3n rr
5
6
7
8
1
1
1
1
00 - 7F REVERB SEND
00 - 7F CHORUS SEND
00 - 7F VARIATION SEND
00 - 01 KEY ASSIGN
o
o
o
o
depend on the note
0 - 127
depend on the note
0 - 127
7F
0
0:SINGLE
1:MULTI
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
3n rr
9
1
1
00 - 01 Rcv NOTE OFF
00 - 01 Rcv NOTE ON
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
depend on the note
3n rr 0A
3n rr 0B
3n rr 0C
3n rr 0D
3n rr 0E
3n rr 0F
TOTAL SIZE
1
1
00 - 7F FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY
00 - 7F FILTER RESONANCE
00 - 7F EG ATTACK
40
40
40
40
40
1
1
1
00 - 7F EG DECAY1
1
00 - 7F EG DECAY2
10
<Table 3-10-2> XG ADDITIONAL PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE (DRUM SETUP)
Address
Size
Data
Parameter
Recognized
Description
Default
(H)
(H)
(H)
3n rr 20
1
1
00 - 7F EQ BASS
00 - 7F EQ TREBLE
NOT USED
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
40
40
40
40
0C
36
22
2E
7
21
22
1
—
—
23
1
NOT USED
24
1
04 - 28 EQ BASS frequency
1C - 3A EQ TREBLE frequency
NOT USED
25
1
26
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
27
1
NOT USED
28
1
NOT USED
29
1
NOT USED
7
2A
1
NOT USED
7
2B
2C
1
NOT USED
7
1
NOT USED
0
2D
1
NOT USED
0
TOTAL SIZE
0E
3n rr 40
TOTAL SIZE
1
1
00,08, OUTPUT SELECT
28-2D
x
0:stereo out,8:indiv1+2
40:indiv1,41:indiv2,
0
n: Drum Setup Number(0 - 1)
rr: note number(0DH - 5BH)
If XG SYSTEM ON and/or GM On message is received, all Drum Setup Parameter will be reset to default values.
According to the Drum Setup Reset message, individual Drum Setup Parameters can be reset to default values.
According to the Program Change for Drum Kit, Drum Setup Parameters can be reset to default values.
<Table 3-11> MIDI Parameter Change table (PLUGIN BOARD ) [XG]
Address
Size
Data
Parameter
Recognized
Description
Default
(H)
(H)
(H)
70
tt
nn
1
1
00 -
0F, 7F
Part Assign
Part1 ...16,OFF
00
TOTAL SIZE
71
tt
mm
1
1
00 - 0F Note Filter
Part1 ...16
- -
TOTAL SIZE
tt: Board type (00:PLG100-VL, 02:PLG100-DX ...)
nn: Serial Number
mm: part number (00 - 0F )
These are recognized when the corresponding board is installed.
242 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
617
Functions of the MIDI B Port when Connected to the MFC10/
Funktionen des MIDI B Ports bei Verbindung mit dem MFC10/
Fonctions du port MIDI B lors de la connexion au MFC10
The MIDI B port can also be used for operation with the MFC10 MIDI Foot Controller.
<Table 1> MIDI B IN
MIDI Events
Status byte
1st Data byte
2nd Data byte
MFC10 channel number
Remarks
Status
8nH
Data
kk
(HEX) Parameter
Data
vv
(HEX) Parameter
When n matches the MFC10’s channel
number.
When n does not match the MFC10’s
channel number.
Key Off
(n:channel no.)
Key no. (0~127)
Velocity(0~127)
Handled as a message for control by the Handled as a normal Channel/Mode/Re-
MFC10. altime message.
Key On :vv=1~127 Handled as a message for control by the Handled as a normal Channel/Mode/Re-
Key On
9nH
kk
Key no. (0~127)
Bank Select MSB
vv
Key Off :vv=0
Normal
SFX kit
MFC10.
Handled as a message for control by the Handled as a normal Channel/Mode/Re-
MFC10. altime message.
altime message.
Control Change
BnH
0
(00H)
0
126
(00H)
(7EH)
127
(7FH)
Drum
1
(01H)
(02H)
(03H)
(04H)
(07H)
Modulation
No Assign
No Assign
Foot Control
Main Volume
-
0~127
(...7FH)
Handled as a message for control by the Handled as a normal Channel/Mode/Re-
MFC10. altime message.
Handled as a message for control by the Handled as a normal Channel/Mode/Re-
MFC10. altime message.
Handled as a message for control by the Handled as a normal Channel/Mode/Re-
MFC10. altime message.
Handled as a message for control by the Handled as a normal Channel/Mode/Re-
MFC10. altime message.
2
0~127
(...7FH)
(...7FH)
(...7FH)
(...7FH)
3
0~127
4
0~127
7
0~127
Handled as a message for control by the Handled as a normal Channel/Mode/Re-
MFC10.
-
altime message.
Handled as a normal Channel/Mode/Re-
altime message.
Other
-
-
-
-
RealTime Message
Other
F8H
FEH
MIDI Clock
Active Sens
-
-
-
Handled as a normal Channel/Mode/Re- Handled as a normal Channel/Mode/Re-
altime message. altime message.
Handled as a normal Channel/Mode/Re- Handled as a normal Channel/Mode/Re-
altime message.
-
altime message.
Handled as a normal Channel/Mode/Re-
altime message.
Other
-
<Table 2> MIDI B OUT
MIDI Events
Status byte
1st Data byte
2nd Data byte
Transmit
Remarks
Status
FEH
MFC10 Bulk Dump
Data
-
(HEX) Parameter
Data
-
(HEX) Parameter
RealTime Message
SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE
MESSAGE
Active Sens
o
o
Transmits every 200msec.
Transmits after checking the
connection with the MFC10
and changing the MFC10’s
channel number.
Other
-
-
-
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Implementation Chart
MIDI Implementation Chart/MIDI-Implementierungstabelle/
Chart/MIDI-Implementierungstabelle/
YAMAHA
[ Professional Workstation ]
Model 9000Pro MIDI Implementation Chart
Date:9-SEP-1999
Version : 1.0
Transmitted
Recognized
Remarks
Function...
Default
Basic
1 - 16
1 - 16
*1 1 - 16
*1 1 - 16
*2
*2
Channel Changed
Default
Messages x
Altered
3
3
x
x
Mode
Note
**************
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
Number : True voice **************
Velocity Note ON o 9nH,v=1-127
o 9nH,v=1-127
Note OFF x 9nH,v=0
x
After
Touch
Key's
Ch's
x
o
x
o
Pitch Bend
o
o 0-24 semi
0,32 o
1,5,7,10,11 o
6,38 o
o
o
o
o
o
*1 Bank Select
*1
*1 Data Entry
*1
*1 Sound Controller
*1 Sound Controller
*1 Portamento Cntrl
*1 Effect Depth
*1 Data Inc,Dec
*1 NRPN LSB,MSB
*1 RPN LSB,MSB
64-67 o
71,74 o
72,73 x
84 x
Control
Change
*3 o
*3 o
91,93,94 o
96,97 x
98,99 o
100,101 o
o
o
o
o
Prog
o 0 - 127
o 0 - 127
Change : True #
**************
System Exclusive
o
o
: Song Pos. x
Common : Song Sel. x
x
x
x
: Tune
x
System :Clock
Real Time:Commands o
o
o
o
Aux :All Sound OFF x
:Reset All Cntrls x
o(120,126,127)
o(121)
:Local ON/OFF x
x
:All Notes OFF x
o(123-125)
Mes- :Active Sense o
o
x
sages:Reset
Notes:
x
*1,*2,*3 see next page.
Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO
o : Yes
x : No
244 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Feuille d’implémentation MIDI
*1 The tracks for each channel can be selected on the panel.
See page 175 for more information.
*1 Les pistes de chaque canal peuvent être sélectionnées sur le panneau.
Pour plus d'informations, voir page 175.
*2 The tone generator normally functions as a 16-channel multi-timbre tone
generator in response to MIDI input. MIDI messages therefore do not nor-
mally affect the panel voices or other panel settings.
*2 Le générateur de son fonctionne normalement comme un générateur de
son multi-timbre à 16 canaux en réponse à une entrée MIDI. Par consé-
quent, les messages MIDI n'affectent généralement pas les voix de pan-
neau ou les autres réglages de panneau.
The MIDI messages listed below, however, do affect the panel voice, style,
Multi Pad, and song settings.
Toutefois, les messages MIDI listés ci-dessous affectent les réglages de la
voix du tableau, du style, des multitouches, des morceaux.
• MIDI MASTER TUNE, XG System parameter MASTER TUNE
• XG System parameter TRANSPOSE
• System exclusive messages which change the REVERB, CHORUS or
DSP EFFECT settings.
• MIDI MASTER TUNE, paramètres du système XG MASTER TUNE
• Paramètres du système XG TRANSPOSE
• Messages exclusifs au système qui modifient les réglages REVERB,
CHORUS ou EFFET DSP.
• XG MULTI EQ parameters
• Paramètres XG MULTI EQ
Also, the MIDI messages affect the panel settings when one of the following
MIDI reception modes is selected.
These modes can be selected on the panel (see page 176).
De plus, les messages MIDI affectent les réglages du panneau lorsque l'un
des modes de réception MIDI suivants est sélectionné.
Ces modes peuvent être sélectionnés sur le tableau (voir page 176).
• RIGHT1, RIGHT2, RIGHT3, LEFT, KEYBOARD, ACMP RHYTHM1,
ACMP RHYTHM2, ACMP BASS, ACMP CHORD1, ACMP CHORD2,
• RIGHT1, RIGHT2, RIGHT3, LEFT, KEYBOARD, ACMP RHYTHM1,
ACMP PAD, ACMP PHRASE1, ACMP PHRASE2
ACMP RHYTHM2, ACMP BASS, ACMP CHORD1, ACMP CHORD2,
• CHORD
• ROOT
• OFF
ACMP PAD, ACMP PHRASE1, ACMP PHRASE2
• CHORD
• ROOT
• OFF
*3 These Control Change Messages are not transmitted by 9000Pro panel
operation, but may be transmitted by the ACCOMPANIMENT or SONG
playing.
*3 Ces messages de modification de commandes ne sont pas transmis par
l'opération du panneau du 9000Pro, mais peuvent être transmis par la
reproduction ACCOMPANIMENT (Accompagnement) ou SONG (Morceau).
*1 Die Tracks können für jeden Channel auf dem Panel eingestellt werden.
Weitere Informationen finden Sie auf Seite 175.
*2 Der Ton-Generator funktioniert normalerweise in Antwort auf MIDI-Input als
Multi-Timbre-Ton-Generator mit 16 Channels. MIDI-Nachrichten haben
demnach keinen Einfluß auf die Panel-Voices oder andere Panel-Einstel-
lungen.
Die unten aufgeführten MID-Meldungen wirken sich jedoch auf Frontplat-
ten-Voices, Style-, Multi Pad-und Songeinstellungen aus.
• MIDI MASTER TUNE, XG System-Parameter MASTER TUNE
• XG System-Parameter TRANSPOSE
• System Exclusive-Nachrichten, welche die Einstellungen REVERB,
CHORUS oder DSP EFFECT ändern.
• XG MULTI EQ-Parameter
MIDI-Nachrichten haben auch Einfluß auf die Panel-Einstellungen, wenn
einer der folgenden MIDI-Empfangsmodi gewählt ist.
Diese Modi können auf der Frontplatte ausgewählt werden (siehe Seite
176).
• RIGHT1, RIGHT2, RIGHT3, LEFT, KEYBOARD, ACMP RHYTHM1,
ACMP RHYTHM2, ACMP BASS, ACMP CHORD1, ACMP CHORD2,
ACMP PAD, ACMP PHRASE1, ACMP PHRASE2
• CHORD
• ROOT
• OFF
*3 Diese Control Change-Nachrichten werden nicht durch die Panel-Bedie-
nung des 9000Pro übermittelt, sondern können durch die ACCOMPANI-
MENT (Begleitung) oder die SONG-Wiedergabe übermittelt werden.
Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Specifications/Technische Daten/Spécifications
Keyboard:
76 Keys (E0 ~ G6) Weighted
with Touch Response (Initial/After)
Polyphony:
126 Notes max
Voices:
Preset
848
32
342 Voices + 480 XG Voices + 24 Drum Kits + 2 SFX Kits
User programmable
Custom
Organ Flute
20
10 Preset + 10 User, 9 Footages; with Modeling Technology
Orchestration:
Right
Left
3 PART
1 PART
RIGHT1, RIGHT2, RIGHT3
Plug-In System:
Slots
2
Supported Boards
Edit
PLG100-DX, PLG100-VL, PLG150-AN, PLG150-PF, PLG150-DX, PLG150-VL, PLG100-XG
Plug-in Custom Voice Creator
Sampling:
Quality
16bit 44.1KHz
File Import
AIFF, WAV
Edit
Resampling/Loop Point/Normalize/Volume/Tune
RAM Capacity
Expanded Capacity
Consecutive Record Time
1MByte
9M/17M/33M/65MByte
380sec max
11.8sec
106.9/202.1/392.3/772.7sec
When 2 SIMM modules (16MB or 32MB) are installed..
Effects:
Reverb
Chorus
29 Preset + 3 User
25 Preset + 3 User
164 Preset
(164 Preset + 10 User) x 4 Blocks
Max. 3
84 Preset + 10 User
Slow/Fast
Yes
59 Preset + 10 User
17 Preset
2 Preset + 2 User
29 Part
DSP Effect
DSP Effect
Number of Effects in DSP
DSP Effect
DSP Variation
POLY/MONO
Vocal Harmony
Harmony/Echo
Master EQ
Part EQ
for Style and Song
for R1, R2, R3, LEFT
for Mic/Line In
for R1, R2, R3, LEFT
3 notes polyphony
5 Band
2 Band, 29 Part (R1, R2, R3, LEFT, ACMPx8, SONGx16, M.PAD)
Touch Response
Tempo
5 Preset
32 ~ 280
Transpose
Tuning
Octave
-24 ~ 0 ~ 24
414.6 ~ 440 ~ 466.8Hz
-1, 0, +1
only for Upper
Pitch Bend
Modulation
Left Hold
Wheel
Wheel
Yes
Auto Accompaniment:
Preset
125
Flash
87
Up to 1.8MByte, 120 style max.
Disk
66 (included in the accessory disk)
1
Style File Format
INTRO x 3
DISK DIRECT function is available.
Pattern Assembly, Realtime/Step Rec, Event Edit, Full Parameter Edit
Custom Style
Format
Control
FILL IN x 4
BREAK FILL x 1
MAIN x 4
ENDING x 3
FADE IN/OUT
TAP TEMPO
Fingering
Single Finger, Multi Finger, Fingered, Fingered Pro, On Bass, On Bass Pro, Full Keyboard
One Touch Setting:
4/Style
Fully programmable
Fully programmable
Music Database:
Multi Pad:
616
4Pads x 60 Banks
58 Multi Pad Bank, 1 MIDI Control Bank, 1 Scale Tune Bank
Realtime/Step Rec, Event Edit
Song:
Playback
Track
Disk Direct Playback
16
with Ultra Quick Start function
Recording
RAM Capacity
RAM Recording
300kbyte
Quick/Multitrack/Step/Chord Step Rec, Event Edit
Approximately 38,000 notes max.
246 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications/Technische Daten/Spécifications
Registration Memeory:
Language:
512
8 Switches x 64 Banks, Freeze function
English, German, French, Spanish, Italian
240 x 320 Dots, video out capability
5 languages
Back Lit Graphic LCD
Display:
Disk:
Floppy Disk Drive
Built-in Hard Disk
3.5" 2HD/2DD
Optional
Demonstations:
18 songs
Connectors:
MIDI
MIDI A/B (IN/OUT)
TO HOST
MIDI A can switch to TO HOST.
HOST SELECT SW (Mac/PC1/PC2/MIDI)
Foot Pedal
FOOT SWITCH1
FOOT SWITCH2
FOOT VOLUME
SCSI
D-sub Half Pitch 50pins
Pin Type
Mini DIN Type
VIDEO OUT
PC KEYBOARD
Console Lamp Socket
Analog
NTSC/PAL Composite Signal
PC/AT Standard
for gooseneck lamp
2
PHONES
LOOP SEND(L/L+R,R)
LINE OUT MAIN (L/L+R,R), SUB (1/2/3/4)
AUX IN/LOOP RETURN(L/L+R,R), TRIM VOL
MIC/LINE IN (XLR/PHONE Plug Compatible)
LEVEL (MIC1/MIC2/LINE), INPUT VOLUME, Indicator
Power Consumption:
Weight:
47W (120V), 47W (220 ~ 240V)
20.5Kg (45lbs. 3oz)
Dimensions:
W x H x D
1269 x 407.5 x 140mm
without Music Stand
(49-15/16" x 16-1/16" x 5-1/2")
Supplied Accessories:
Music Stand
1
1
1
4
1
AC Power Cord
AC Plug Adaptor
Floppy Disk
in applicable areas only
Disk Styles, Factory Data Backup Disk, Plug-in Custom Voice Disk
Owner's Manual
Optional Accessories:
Foot Switch
FC5
Foot Volume
Headphones
Mic
Keyboard Stand
Hard Disk
FC7
HPE-150,160
MZ106s
Dynamic Microphone IMP.250Ω
LG-100
2.5inch IDE
4M/8M/16M/32MByte
SCSI-2
PC/AT Standard
NTSC or PAL
4 Pin XLR Connector
Height 12.5mm max, 8GByte max
72pin SIMM, 16bit BUS, JEDEC
Hard Disk, CD-ROM*, ZIP, MO, Jaz (Iomega), 8GByte max per device
SIMM
SCSI Device
PC Keyboard
CRT Display
Gooseneck Lamp
DC 12V / 5 W max.
* Supports ISO9660 Level1 except Multi Session Disk Format.
Audio-CD Format is not supported.
• Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only.Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or mod-
ify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every
locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.
• Die technischen Daten und Beschreibungen in dieser Bedienungsanleitung dienen nur der Information.Yamaha Corp. behält sich das
Recht vor, Produkte oder deren technische Daten jederzeit ohne vorherige Ankündigung zu verändern oder zu modifizieren. Da die techni-
schen Daten, das Gerät selbst oder Sonderzubehör nicht in jedem Land gleich sind, setzen Sie sich im Zweifel bitte mit Ihrem Yamaha-
Händler in Verbindung.
• Les caractéristiques techniques et les descriptions du mode d’emploi ne sont données que pour information.Yamaha Corp. se réserve le
droit de changer ou modifier les produits et leurs caractéristiques techniques à tout moment sans aucun avis. Du fait que les caractéristi-
ques techniques, les équipements et les options peuvent différer d’un pays à l’autre, adressez-vous au distributeur Yamaha le plus proche.
Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con-
tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not
expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by
the FCC, to use the product.
product is found to be the source of interference, which can be
determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to elimi-
nate the problem by using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by
the interference.
2. IMPORTANT:When connecting this product to accessories and/or
another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s sup-
plied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instruc-
tions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization
to use this product in the USA.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or
fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna.
If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to
co-axial type cable.
3. NOTE:This product has been tested and found to comply with the
requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital
devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable
level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential envi-
ronment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic
devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if
not installed and used according to the instructions found in the
users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of
other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,
please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of
product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact
Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600
Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by
Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
(class B)
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
The serial number of this product may be found on the rear of the unit.
You should note this serial number in the space provided below and
retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid
identification in the event of theft.
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM
Connecting the Plug and Cord
WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED
IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accor-
dance with the following code:
Model No.
Serial No.
GREEN-AND-YELLOW:EARTH
BLUE
BROWN
:
:
NEUTRAL
LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may
not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals
in your plug proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured GREEN-and-YELLOW must be con-
nected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or
by the safety earth symbol or colored GREEN or GREEN-and-YEL-
LOW.
(rear)
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal
which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the ter-
minal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
(3 wires)
• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the
authorized distributor listed below.
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten
Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou
au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tiendaYamaha más cercana
o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
ITALY
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.,
Home Keyboard Division
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
NORTH AMERICA
ASIA
CANADA
HONG KONG
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 2737-7688
Tel: 416-298-1311
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A.
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230
Las Rozas (Madrid) Spain
U.S.A.
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: 91-201-0700
Tel: 714-522-9011
GREECE
Philippe Nakas S.A.
Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece
Tel: 01-364-7111
KOREA
Cosmos Corporation
1461-9, Seocho Dong, Seocho Gu, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 02-3486-0011
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
MEXICO
Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V.,
Departamento de ventas
Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del
Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.
Tel: 686-00-33
SWEDEN
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1
Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 3-703-0900
BRAZIL
DENMARK
YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Generatorvej 8B
DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA.
Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil
Tel: 011-853-1377
PHILIPPINES
Yupangco Music Corporation
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,
Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Tel: 819-7551
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Argentina S.A.
Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 1-371-7021
FINLAND
F-Musiikki Oy
Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,
SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: 09 618511
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building,
Singapore
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
NORWAY
Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB
Grini Næringspark 1
N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70
Tel: 65-747-4374
TAIWAN
Yamaha de Panama S.A.
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad,
Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
ICELAND
Skifan HF
Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120
IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: 525 5000
Tel: 02-2713-8999
Tel: 507-269-5311
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor,
Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng,
Bangkok 10320, Thailand
Tel: 02-641-2951
EUROPE
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
F.R. of Germany
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
International Marketing Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2317
Tel: 01908-366700
Tel: 04101-3030
IRELAND
Danfay Ltd.
61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin
Tel: 01-2859177
AFRICA
Yamaha Corporation,
International Marketing Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2312
GERMANY/SWITZERLAND
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
F.R. of Germany
OCEANIA
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
17-33 Market Street, South Melbourne, Vic. 3205,
Australia
Tel: 04101-3030
MIDDLE EAST
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
F.R. of Germany
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
Tel: 3-699-2388
NEW ZEALAND
Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.
146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,
Auckland, New Zealand
THE NETHERLANDS
Yamaha Music Nederland
Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands
Tel: 030-2828411
Tel: 04101-3030
OTHER COUNTRIES
Tel: 9-634-0099
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone
P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.
Tel: 971-4-81-5868
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
International Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2312
BELGIUM
Yamaha Music Belgium
Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium
Tel: 02-7258220
FRANCE
Yamaha Musique France,
Division Claviers
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-3273
[PK] 19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|